Docstoc

Specs

Document Sample
Specs Powered By Docstoc
					NEW ENGLAND PATRIOTS
GILLETTE STADIUM
CLUB RENOVATION
FOXBOROUGH, MASSACHUSETTS




                                     SPECIFICATIONS
                           CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS

                                             DECEMBER 19, 2012
ARCHITECT                    MEP ENGINEER                 STRUCTURAL ENGINEER
POPULOUS                     RDK ENGINEERS                McNAMARA / SALVIA, INC.
                                                                               th
300 WYANDOTTE, SUITE 200     SEAPORT CENTER               160 FEDERAL STREET, 5 FLOOR
KANSAS CITY, MO 64105        70 FARGO STREET, SUITE 800   BOSTON, MA 02110
(816) 221-1500               BOSONT, MA 02210             (617) 737-0040
                             (617) 345-9885
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                                         DECEMBER 19, 2012

                                                  TABLE OF CONTENTS
  Section                                           Title                                                 Dated     Latest Date

PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS GROUP BY OWNER


FACILITY CONSTRUCTION SUBGROUP

            DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS
 02 41 19   SELECTIVE DEMOLITION ....................................................                    12/19/12

            DIVISION 04 – MASONRY
 04 20 00   UNIT MASONRY ...................................................................             12/19/12

            DIVISION 05 – METALS
 05 40 00   COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING .....................................                              12/19/12

            DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
 06 40 00   ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK .........................................                             12/19/12

            DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
 07 21 00   THERMAL INSULATION .......................................................                   12/19/12
 07 81 00   SPRAYED FIRE RESISTIVE MATERIALS ...........................                                 12/19/12
 07 84 00   FIRESTOPPING ....................................................................            12/19/12
 07 92 00   JOINT SEALANTS .................................................................             12/19/12

            DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS
 08 11 13   HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES ...........................                                    12/19/12
 08 14 16   FLUSHWOOD DOORS .........................................................                    12/19/12
 08 31 13   ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES .........................................                            12/19/12
 08 41 13   ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS                                                    12/19/12
 08 71 00   DOOR HARDWARE ..............................................................                 12/19/12
 08 81 00   GLAZING ...............................................................................      12/19/12

            DIVISION 09 – FINISHES
 09 21 16   GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES ..........................................                           12/19/12
 09 30 00   TILING....................................................................................   12/19/12
 09 51 13   ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS .........................................                          12/19/12
 09 68 16   SHEET CARPETING .............................................................                12/19/12
 09 91 00   PAINTING ..............................................................................      12/19/12

            DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
 10 22 26   OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS ........................................                           12/19/12

            DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS
 12 22 00   CURTAINS AND DRAPES ....................................................                     12/19/12




                                            TABLE OF CONTENTS
                                                 PAGE - 1
                                  GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                                   DECEMBER 19, 2012

                                                TABLE OF CONTENTS
  Section                                         Title                                             Dated      Latest Date


FACILITY SERVICES SUBGROUP

            DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION
 21 00 00   FIRE SUPPRESSION ............................................................           12/19/12

            DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING
 22 00 00   PLUMBING ............................................................................   12/19/12

            DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR
            CONDITIONING
 23 00 00   HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING ..........                                    12/19/12

            DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
 26 00 00   ELECTRICAL .........................................................................    12/19/12

            DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS
 27 00 00   TELECOMMUNICATIONS ....................................................                 12/19/12

SITE AND INFRASTRUCTURE SUBGROUP



END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS




                                          TABLE OF CONTENTS
                                               PAGE - 2
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                     DECEMBER 19, 2012

SECTION 02 41 19 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1           SUMMARY

      A.      This Section includes the following:
              1.    Demolition and removal of selected portions of a building or structure.
              2.    Repair procedures for selective demolition operations.

      B.      Related Sections include the following:
              1.    Facility Services Subgroup Sections for demolishing, cutting, patching, or relocating
                    mechanical, electrical and plumbing items.


1.2           DEFINITIONS

      A.      Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless
              indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

      B.      Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner
              ready for reuse.

      C.      Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and
              reinstall them where indicated.

      D.      Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not
              otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.


1.3           MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

      A.      Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise
              indicated to remain Owner's property, demolished materials shall become Contractor's property
              and shall be removed from Project site.

      B.      Historic items, relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their
              contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, antiques, and other items of interest or value to
              Owner that may be encountered during selective demolition remain Owner's property. Carefully
              remove and salvage each item or object in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to
              Owner.
              1.     Coordinate with Owner to establish special procedures for removal and salvage.


1.4           SUBMITTALS

      A.      Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
              demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
              names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
              specified.




© Populous Group, LLC 2012                 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
                                                02 41 19 - 1
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                     DECEMBER 19, 2012

      B.      Proposed Dust-Control and Noise-Control Measures: Submit statement or drawing that
              indicates the measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their
              operation. Identify options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate.

      C.      Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:
              1.   Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending
                   dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's and tenants' on-site operations are
                   uninterrupted.
              2.   Interruption of utility services.
              3.   Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
              4.   Use of elevator and stairs.
              5.   Locations of temporary partitions and means of egress.
              6.   Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of
                   Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.

      D.      Inventory: After selective demolition is complete, submit a list of items that have been removed
              and salvaged.

      E.      Predemolition Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction
              and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage
              caused by selective demolition operations. Submit before Work begins.

      F.      Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility
              licensed to accept hazardous wastes.


1.5           QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.      Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work
              similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project.

      B.      Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to prac-
              tice in the jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering
              services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for removal
              of building systems and analysis of buildings structures that are similar to those indicated for
              this Project in material and extent.

      C.      Regulatory Requirements:      Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before
              beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities
              having jurisdiction.

      D.      Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.

      E.      Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
              Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures
              related to selective demolition including, but not limited to, the following:
              1.     Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.
              2.     Review structural load limitations of existing structure.
              3.     Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,
                     demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid
                     delays.
              4.     Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed
                     by selective demolition operations.




© Populous Group, LLC 2012                 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
                                                02 41 19 - 2
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

1.6           PROJECT CONDITIONS

      A.      Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.
              Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less than
              72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations.

      B.      Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.
              1.    Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without
                    written permission from authorities having jurisdiction.

      C.      Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be selectively demolished.
              1.   Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner
                   as far as practical.
              2.   Owner will salvage desired items from areas to be demolished before start of the Work.
                   Items unable to be salvaged by Owner will be identified and coordinated by Owner with
                   Contractor before start of Work.

      D.      Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the
              Work.
              1.    Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work.
              2.    If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb;
                    immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner
                    under a separate contract.

      E.      Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted.

      F.      Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against
              damage during selective demolition operations.
              1.      Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1           REPAIR MATERIALS

      A.      Use repair materials identical to existing materials.
              1.    If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use
                    materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
              2.    Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing
                    materials.

      B.      Comply with material and installation requirements specified in individual Specification Sections.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1           EXAMINATION

      A.      Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.

      B.      Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
              selective demolition required.



© Populous Group, LLC 2012                  SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
                                                 02 41 19 - 3
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

      C.      Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be
              removed and salvaged.

      D.      When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
              function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.
              Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

      E.      Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether removing
              any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of
              structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition operations.

      F.      Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition
              activities.


3.2           UTILITY SERVICES

      A.      Existing Utilities: Maintain services indicated to remain and protect them against damage
              during selective demolition operations.

      B.      Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in
              writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during
              interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and to authorities having jurisdiction.
              1.     Provide at least 72 hours' notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required during
                     changeover.

      C.      Utility Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving
              areas to be selectively demolished.
              1.      Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor.
              2.      Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
              3.      If utility services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding
                      with selective demolition provide temporary utilities that bypass area of selective
                      demolition and that maintain continuity of service to other parts of building.
              4.      Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal
                      remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.

      D.      Utility Requirements:        Refer to Facility Services Subgroup Sections for shutting off,
              disconnecting, removing, and sealing or capping utilities. Do not start selective demolition work
              until utility disconnecting and sealing have been completed and verified in writing.


3.3           PREPARATION

      A.      Dangerous Materials: Drain, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of chemicals,
              gases, explosives, acids, flammables, or other dangerous materials before proceeding with
              selective demolition operations.

      B.      Pest Control: Employ a certified, licensed exterminator to treat building and to control rodents
              and vermin before and during selective demolition operations.


3.4           POLLUTION CONTROLS

      A.      Dust Control: Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit spread
              of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental-protection regulations.


© Populous Group, LLC 2012                  SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
                                                 02 41 19 - 4
                                     GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                      DECEMBER 19, 2012

              1.       Do not use water when it may damage existing construction or create hazardous or
                       objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution.
              2.       Wet mop floors to eliminate trackable dirt and wipe down walls and doors of demolition
                       enclosure. Vacuum carpeted areas.

      B.      Disposal: Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent
              surfaces and areas.
              1.    Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will
                    convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.

      C.      Cleaning: Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by
              selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective
              demolition operations began.


3.5           SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

      A.      General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
              construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of
              governing regulations and as follows:
              1.    Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete
                    selective demolition operations above each level before disturbing supporting members
                    on the next lower level.
              2.    Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
                    cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
                    Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and
                    chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to
                    remain.
              3.    Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
                    existing finished surfaces.
              4.    Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
                    concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of
                    hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression
                    devices during flame-cutting operations.
              5.    Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
              6.    Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and
                    promptly dispose of off-site.
              7.    Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid
                    free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.
              8.    Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
                    impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
              9.    Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
              10.   Return elements of construction and surfaces that are to remain to condition existing
                    before selective demolition operations began.

      B.      Existing Facilities: Comply with Owner’s requirements for using and protecting elevators, stairs,
              walkways, loading docks, entries, and other facilities during selective demolition operations.

      C.      Removed and Salvaged Items: Comply with the following:
              1.  Clean salvaged items.
              2.  Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
              3.  Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
              4.  Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.
              5.  Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

      D.      Removed and Reinstalled Items: Comply with the following:

© Populous Group, LLC 2012                   SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
                                                  02 41 19 - 5
                                       GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                         DECEMBER 19, 2012

              1.       Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint
                       equipment to match new equipment.
              2.       Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
              3.       Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
              4.       Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new
                       materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials
                       necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

      E.      Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
              during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,
              protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their
              original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

      F.      Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) at
              junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw. Dislodge concrete from
              reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove
              remainder of concrete indicated for selective demolition. Neatly trim openings to dimensions
              indicated.

      G.      Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain,
              using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.


3.6           PATCHING AND REPAIRS

      A.      General: Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by selective demolition
              operations.


3.7           DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

      A.      General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to
              accumulate on-site.

      B.      Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

      C.      Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.


3.8           SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SCOPE

      A.      Scope:         Refer to the drawings for the scope of selective demolition.


END OF SECTION




© Populous Group, LLC 2012                      SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
                                                     02 41 19 - 6
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                     DECEMBER 19, 2012

SECTION 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1           SUMMARY

      A.      This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following:
              1.    Concrete masonry units.
              2.    Mortar and grout.
              3.    Reinforcing steel.
              4.    Masonry joint reinforcement.
              5.    Ties and anchors.
              6.    Miscellaneous masonry accessories.
              7.    Masonry-cell insulation.

      B.      Description of Reinforced Masonry:
              1.    Extent of each type of reinforced unit masonry work is indicated on the Drawings.
              2.    Reinforced unit masonry construction includes reinforced concrete masonry including
                    concrete filled masonry beams, and lintels.
              3.    Accessories include, but are not necessarily limited to ties, horizontal and vertical rein-
                    forcement, anchors to the structure, and control joints.

      C.      Related Sections include the following:
              1.    Division 07 Section "Firestopping" for firestopping at tops of masonry walls and at open-
                    ings in masonry walls.

      D.      Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:
              1.   Anchor sections of adjustable masonry anchors for connecting to structural frame, in-
                   stalled under Division 05 Section "Structural Steel."

      E.      Products installed, but not furnished, under this Section include the following:
              1.   Hollow-metal frames in unit masonry openings, furnished under Division 08 Section "Hol-
                   low Metal Doors and Frames."


1.2           CODES AND STANDARDS

      A.      All concrete masonry construction shall conform to the requirements of the local building code
              and the Specification for Concrete Masonry Structures, ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.


1.3           DEFINITIONS

      A.      Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.


1.4           PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

      A.      As specified in the General Notes in the Structural Drawings.




© Populous Group, LLC 2012                      UNIT MASONRY
                                                  04 20 00 - 1
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

1.5           SUBMITTALS

      A.      Product Data: For each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product
              specified.

      B.      Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:
              1.   Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Com-
                   ply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Show elevations of
                   reinforced walls.
              2.   Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications.

      C.      Mix Designs:
              1.    Grout mix proportions for the types of grout required for the work.

      D.      Samples for Initial Selection: For the following:
              1.   Unit masonry Samples in small-scale form showing the full range of colors and textures
                   available for each different exposed masonry unit required.
              2.   Colored mortar Samples showing the full range of colors available.

      E.      Samples for Verification: For the following:
              1.   Full-size units for each different exposed masonry unit required, showing the full range of
                   exposed colors, textures, and dimensions to be expected in the completed construction.
              2.   Colored mortar Samples for each color required, showing the full range of colors ex-
                   pected in the finished construction. Make samples using the same sand and mortar in-
                   gredients to be used on Project. Label Samples to indicate types and amounts of pig-
                   ments used.
              3.   Weep holes/vents in color to match mortar color.
              4.   Accessories embedded in the masonry.

      F.      Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results of
              the following for compliance with requirements indicated:
              1.      Each type of masonry unit required.
              2.      Grout mixes complying with compressive strength requirements of ASTM C 476. Include
                      description of type and proportions of grout ingredients.

      G.      Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items com-
              plies with requirements:
              1.     Each type of masonry unit required.
              2.     Each cement product required for mortar and grout, including name of manufacturer,
                     brand, type, and weight slips at time of delivery.
              3.     Each material and grade indicated for reinforcing bars.
              4.     Each type and size of joint reinforcement.
              5.     Each type and size of anchor, tie, and metal accessory.

      H.      Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and
              equipment to be used to comply with requirements.


1.6           QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.      Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and
              color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one
              source from a single manufacturer for each product required.




© Populous Group, LLC 2012                       UNIT MASONRY
                                                   04 20 00 - 2
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

      B.      Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, includ-
              ing color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and
              from one source or producer for each aggregate.

      C.      Match Existing: Where materials are noted to match existing:
              1.    Approval is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and
                    sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities of work-
                    manship, including a comparison to existing construction.


1.7           DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

      A.      Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an en-
              closed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units
              become wet, do not install until they are dry.
              1.    Protect concrete masonry units from moisture absorption so that, at the time of installa-
                    tion, the moisture content is not more than the maximum allowed at the time of delivery.

      B.      Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not
              use cementitious materials that have become damp.

      C.      Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and con-
              tamination avoided.

      D.      Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and emp-
              tying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated
              platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with weatherproof
              cover.

      E.      Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt
              and oil.


1.8           PROJECT CONDITIONS

      A.      Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with wa-
              terproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construc-
              tion is not in progress. Maintain such protection until final capping of the wall.
              1.      Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides and hold cover securely
                      in place.
                      a.     Completely cover masonry surfaces when excessive wind conditions may cause
                             rapid drying of the mortar.
              2.      Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes,
                      secure cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down face next to unconstructed wythe
                      and hold cover in place.

      B.      Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least
              3 days after building masonry walls or columns.

      C.      Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left
              exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such
              masonry.
              1.    Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by coverings
                    spread on ground and over wall surface.
              2.    Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.


© Populous Group, LLC 2012                       UNIT MASONRY
                                                   04 20 00 - 3
                                     GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                      DECEMBER 19, 2012

              3.       Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and
                       integral finishes, from mortar droppings.
              4.       Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from
                       splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.

      D.      Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice
              or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by
              frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained
              in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
              1.     Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40
                     deg F (4 deg C) and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7
                     days after completing cleaning.

      E.      Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity condi-
              tions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial shade
              and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required.
              1.     When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F or 90 deg F with a wind velocity greater
                     than 8 mph, do not spread mortar beds more than 48 inches ahead of masonry. Set ma-
                     sonry units within one minute of spreading mortar.
              2.     Comply with hot-weather preparation and construction provisions of ACI 530.1/ASCE
                     6/TMS 602


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1           MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL

      A.      Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to
              exceed tolerances and to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the
              standard. Do not use units where such defects, including dimensions that vary from specified
              dimensions by more than stated tolerances, will be exposed in the completed Work or will im-
              pair the quality of completed masonry.


2.2           CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

      A.      General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows:
              1.   Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding,
                   and other special conditions.
              2.   Provide bullnose units for outside corners and jamb units, unless otherwise indicated.

      B.      Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with integral water repellent for exposed units.
              1.     Integral Water Repellent: Liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture that does
                     not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water repellent, when tested
                     as a wall assembly made with mortar containing integral water-repellent manufacturer's
                     mortar additive according to ASTM E 514, with test period extended to 24 hours, show no
                     visible water or leaks on the back of test specimen.
                     a.     Available Products:
                            1)     ACM Chemistries, Inc.; RainBloc.
                            2)     BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Rheopel Plus.
                            3)     Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-
                                   Block.

      C.      Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90 and as follows:


© Populous Group, LLC 2012                        UNIT MASONRY
                                                    04 20 00 - 4
                                      GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                        DECEMBER 19, 2012

              1.       Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive
                       strength of 1900 psi (13.1 MPa).
              2.       Weight Classifications
                       a.      Exterior Walls: Normal weight; 125 lb/cu. ft. (2002 kg/cu. m), except as otherwise
                               indicated.
              3.       Initial Rate of Absorption: 13 pounds per cubic foot for all exterior concrete unit masonry
                       and 15 pounds per cubic foot for all interior concrete masonry.
              4.       Provide concrete masonry units with the following characteristics:
                       a.      Maximum linear shrinkage: 0.035 percent
                       b.      Maximum moisture content: 35 percent
              5.       Size: (Actual Dimensions): 7-5/8 inches (194 mm) wide by 7-5/8 inches (194 mm) high
                       by 15-5/8 inches (397 mm) long.
              6.       Exposed Faces: Where units are to be left exposed, provide color and texture matching
                       the range represented by Architect's sample.

      D.      Decorative Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90, ASTM C 744 and as follows:
              1.   Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive
                   strength of 1900 psi (13.1 MPa).
              2.   Weight Classification: Medium weight; 105 to 125 lb/cu. ft. (1682 to 2002 kg/cu. m).
              3.   Initial Rate of Absorption: 13 pounds per cubic foot for all exterior concrete unit masonry
                   and 15 pounds per cubic foot for all interior concrete masonry.
              4.   Provide concrete masonry units with the following characteristics:
                   a.      Maximum linear shrinkage: 0.035 percent
                   b.      Maximum moisture content: 35 percent
              5.   Size: (Actual Dimensions): 7-5/8 inches (194 mm) wide by 7-5/8 inches (194 mm) high
                   by 15-5/8 inches (397 mm) long.
              6.   Pattern and Texture: The design is based on the product named matching color range,
                   texture, and size of existing adjacent masonry. Subject to compliance with requirements,
                   provide either the named product or a comparable product by another manufacturer.
                   Comparable products are subject to review and approval through the submittal process
                   specified.
                   a.      Standard pattern, ground finish.
                           1)     Trenwyth Industries, Illinois Plant; 1-800-358-3003 Trenwyth, “Trendstone
                                  Plus Filled and Polished Masonry Units,” with manufacturer’s standard fac-
                                  tory-applied water repellent, and extra water repellent for field finish final
                                  coat.
              7.   Colors: Trendstone, Colonial Red-M.


2.3           CONCRETE AND MASONRY LINTELS

      A.      General: Provide masonry lintels complying with requirements below.

      B.      Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam concrete
              masonry units with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure pre-
              cast lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured.


2.4           MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

      A.      Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather con-
              struction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.

      B.      Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.



© Populous Group, LLC 2012                         UNIT MASONRY
                                                     04 20 00 - 5
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                      DECEMBER 19, 2012

      C.      Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150,
              Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207 Type S.

      D.      Colored Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend made from portland cement and lime and
              mortar pigments, all complying with specified requirements, and containing no other ingredients.
              1.    Formulate blend as required to produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected
                    from manufacturer's standard colors.
              2.    Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight for metallic oxides
                    nor 2 percent for carbon black.
              3.    Available Products:
                    a.     Colored Portland Cement-Lime Mix:
                           1)    True Tone Mortar Colors; Davis Colors.
                           2)    Centurion Pigments; Lafarge Corporation.

      E.      SGS Mortar Colors; Solomon Grind-Chem Services, Inc.Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.
              1.   For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or
                   crushed stone.
              2.   For joints less than 1/4 inch (6.5 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent pass-
                   ing the No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve.

      F.      Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

      G.      Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with
              ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by the manufacturer for use in masonry mor-
              tar of composition indicated.
              1.      Available Products:
                      a.    Euclid Chemical Company (The); Accelguard 80.
                      b.    Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Morset.
                      c.    Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex; Trimix-NCA.

      H.      Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with con-
              crete masonry units, containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer. Comply with
              ASTM E 514 when tested as a wall assembly obtaining a Class E rating.
              1.    Available Products:
                    a.    ACM Chemistries, Inc.; RainBloc for Mortar.
                    b.    BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Rheopel Mortar Admixture.
                    c.    Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block Mortar Admix-
                          ture.

      I.      Water: Potable.


2.5           REINFORCING

      A.      Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Deformed Grade 60 (Grade 420).

      B.      Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951.
              1.   Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel.
              2.   Wire Size for Side Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch (3.8-mm) diameter.
              3.   Wire Size for Cross Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch (3.8-mm) diameter.
              4.   Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c.
              5.   Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), with prefabricated corner and tee units.

      C.      Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Vertically Reinforced Single-Wythe Masonry: Ladder type with
              single pair of side rods and cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c.


© Populous Group, LLC 2012                       UNIT MASONRY
                                                   04 20 00 - 6
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                      DECEMBER 19, 2012

      D.      Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Unreinforced Single-Wythe Masonry: Truss type with single
              pair of side rods and diagonal cross rods.


2.6           TIES AND ANCHORS

      A.      Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent paragraphs that are made from
              materials that comply with eight subparagraphs below, unless otherwise indicated.
              1.    Hot-Dip Galvanized Carbon-Steel Wire:          ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153/ A 153M,
                    Class B-2 coating.
              2.    Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel,
                    hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
              3.    Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

      B.      Individual Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4 inches (100 mm)
              wide.
              1.     Z-shaped ties with ends bent 90 degrees to provide hooks not less than 2 inches (50
                     mm) long may be used for masonry constructed from solid units or hollow units laid with
                     cells horizontal.
              2.     Where wythes do not align or are of different materials, use adjustable ties with pintle-
                     and-eye connections having a maximum adjustment of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).
              3.     Wire: Fabricate from 3/16-inch- (4.8-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.

      C.      Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structure: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizon-
              tal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.
              1.     Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) diameter, hot-
                     dip galvanized steel wire.
              2.     Tie Section for Steel Frame or Concrete Backup: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to ex-
                     tend within 1 inch (25 mm) of masonry face, made from 0.188-inch- (4.8-mm-) diameter,
                     hot-dip galvanized steel wire.
              3.     Connector Section for Concrete: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete
                     and attached to tie section; formed from 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick, steel sheet, galva-
                     nized after fabrication.

      D.      Partition Top anchors: 0.097-inch- (2.5-mm-) thick metal plate with 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) diameter
              metal rod 6 inches (150 mm) long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over
              rod that allows rod to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip galvanized after
              fabrication.

      E.      Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick
              by 24 inches (600 mm) long, with ends turned up 2 inches (50 mm) or with cross pins, unless
              otherwise indicated.
              1.    Corrosion Protection: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M .


2.7           MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS

      A.      Unit Type Inserts in Concrete: Cast-iron or malleable-iron inserts of type and size indicated.

      B.      Anchor Bolts: Headed or L-shaped steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A
              (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where
              indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of di-
              mensions indicated.




© Populous Group, LLC 2012                       UNIT MASONRY
                                                   04 20 00 - 7
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

      C.      Postinstalled Anchors: Provide chemical or torque-controlled expansion anchors, with capability
              to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in solid or
              grouted unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as
              determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
              1.     Corrosion Protection: Stainless-steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and
                     ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Alloy Group 1 or 4)
                     for bolts and nuts; ASTM A 666 or ASTM A 276, Type 304 or 316, for anchors.


2.8           EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

      A.      Single-Wythe CMU Flashing System: System of CMU cell flashing pans and interlocking CMU
              web covers made from high-density polyethylene incorporating chemical stabilizers that prevent
              UV degradation. Cell flashing pans have integral weep spouts that are designed to be built into
              mortar bed joints and weep collected moisture to the exterior of CMU walls and that extend into
              the cell to prevent clogging with mortar.
              1.     Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Blok-Flash" by Advanced
                     Building Products Inc.

      B.      Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings:
              1.    Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, chemically curing silicone sealant; of type, grade,
                    class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and
                    remain watertight.


2.9           MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

      A.      Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; com-
              pressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene urethane
              or PVC.

      B.      Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying
              with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard sash block and to
              maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.
              1.    Available Products:
                    a.     D/A 2003, Rubber Control Joint; Dur-O-Wal, Inc.
                    b.     No. 352 Control Joints; Heckman Building Products, Inc.
                    c.     #RS Series – Rubber Control Joint; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.

      C.      Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226,
              Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).

      D.      Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry
              unit cells with loops for holding reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.142-
              inch (3.6-mm) steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units with either two loops
              or four loops as needed for number of bars indicated.
              1.     Available Products:
                     a.      Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; D/A 810, D/A 812 or D/A 817.
                     b.      Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 376 Rebar Positioner.
                     c.      Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; #RB or #RB-Twin Rebar Positioner.
                     d.      Wire-Bond; O-Ring or Double O-Ring Rebar Positioner.




© Populous Group, LLC 2012                       UNIT MASONRY
                                                   04 20 00 - 8
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                        DECEMBER 19, 2012

2.10          MASONRY-CELL INSULATION

    A.        Molded-Polystyrene Insulation Units: Rigid, cellular thermal insulation formed by the expansion
              of polystyrene-resin beads or granules in a closed mold to comply with ASTM C 578, Type I.
              Provide specially shaped units designed for installing in cores of masonry units.
              1.     Available Products:
                     a.    Concrete Block Insulating Systems; Korfil.
                     b.    Shelter Enterprises Inc.; Omni Core.


2.11          MASONRY CLEANERS

    A.        Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of 1/2-cup (0.14-L) dry measure tetrasodium polyphos-
              phate and 1/2-cup (0.14-L) dry measure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gal. (4 L) of water.

    B.        Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing
              mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without
              discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use
              by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.
              1.     Available Manufacturers:
                     a.    Diedrich Technologies, Inc.
                     b.    EaCo Chem, Inc.
                     c.    ProSoCo, Inc.


2.12          MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

    A.        General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, re-
              tarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise
              indicated.
              1.     Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
              2.     Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement and lime.
              3.     Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at the same rate for all mortar, regardless of weath-
                     er conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.

    B.        Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in the form of a preblended mix.
              Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients
              before delivering to Project site.

    C.        Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the fol-
              lowing types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated.
              1.    For reinforced masonry, use Type S.
              2.    For pointing mortar, use Type N mortar.
              3.    For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for
                    interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applica-
                    tions where another type is not indicated, use Type N.

    D.        Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product.

    E.        Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.
              1.    Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will
                    comply with Table 4.3.3.4 of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces
                    and pour height.
              2.    Compressive Strength: Provide grout with minimum compressive strength of 2,000 psi
                    (14 MPa).


© Populous Group, LLC 2012                        UNIT MASONRY
                                                    04 20 00 - 9
                                     GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                        DECEMBER 19, 2012

              3.       Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (200 to 280 mm) as measured according to
                       ASTM C 143.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1           EXAMINATION

      A.      Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tol-
              erances and other conditions affecting performance.
              1.    For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental
                    to performance.
              2.    Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.
              3.    Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.

      B.      Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping
              connections.

      C.      Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2           INSTALLATION, GENERAL

      A.      Thickness: Build single-wythe walls to the actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths
              indicated.

      B.      Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and in other Sections.

      C.      Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing
              equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to the opening.

      D.      Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pat-
              tern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, un-
              chipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut
              units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

      E.      Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and tex-
              tures.
              1.     Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.

      F.      Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry.


3.3           CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES

      A.      Comply with construction tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and the following:
              1.   For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expan-
                   sion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in
                   3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
              2.   For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4
                   inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
              3.   For vertical walls, do not vary from true vertical plane more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm
                   in 3 m).



© Populous Group, LLC 2012                        UNIT MASONRY
                                                   04 20 00 - 10
                                      GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                         DECEMBER 19, 2012

              4.       For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary
                       from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6
                       m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
              5.       For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus
                       1/8 inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm). Do not vary from
                       bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm).
              6.       For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus
                       1/8 inch (3 mm). Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more
                       than 1/8 inch (3 mm).
              7.       For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more
                       than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances speci-
                       fied for warpage of units.
              8.       For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line
                       by more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) from one masonry unit to the next.


3.4           LAYING MASONRY WALLS

      A.      Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thick-
              nesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid
              using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other loca-
              tions.

      B.      Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern; do not
              use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or
              jambs.
              1.    One-half running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses
                    above and below.

      C.      Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in
              course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive
              mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar before laying fresh masonry.

      D.      Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified under this and other Sec-
              tions. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

      E.      Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated.

      F.      Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of met-
              al lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.

      G.      Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates,
              beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.


3.5           MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

      A.      Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows:
              1.    With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints.
              2.    With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.
              3.    With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on foot-
                    ings.
              4.    With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on
                    footings where cells are not grouted.



© Populous Group, LLC 2012                         UNIT MASONRY
                                                    04 20 00 - 11
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

      B.      Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than the joint
              thickness, unless otherwise indicated.


3.6           MASONRY-CELL INSULATION

      A.      Install molded-polystyrene insulation units into masonry unit cells before laying units.


3.7           MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT

      A.      General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8
              inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a mini-
              mum of 6 inches (150 mm).
              1.     Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., except as otherwise speci-
                     fied.
              2.     Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) o.c. in foundation walls and para-
                     pet walls.
              3.     Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) above and below wall openings
                     and extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond openings.
                     a.    Reinforcement above is in addition to continuous reinforcement.

      B.      Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated.

      C.      Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated "L" shaped units.

      D.      Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, col-
              umn fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.


3.8           ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS

      A.      Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to
              comply with the following:
              1.   Provide an open space not less than 1 inch (25 mm) in width between masonry and
                   structural member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar or other
                   rigid materials.
              2.   Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors embedded in masonry joints
                   and attached to structure.
              3.   Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically and 36
                   inches (915 mm) o.c. horizontally.


3.9           CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

      A.      General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses
              and where indicated on the Drawings. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion
              joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.
              1.     If not indicated, locate control joints at the lesser of the following:
                     a.      A distance of 25 feet on center.
                     b.      A distance equal to 1-1/2 times the height of the wall.
              2.     Do not form a continuous span through movement joints unless provisions are made to
                     prevent in-plane restraint of wall or partition movement.
              3.     In addition to the above requirements and unless otherwise indicated on the drawings,
                     provide vertical control joints in masonry walls as follows:


© Populous Group, LLC 2012                       UNIT MASONRY
                                                  04 20 00 - 12
                                     GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                        DECEMBER 19, 2012

                       a.    Within 10 feet of wall corners and intersections,
                       b.    Adjacent to and over openings:
                             1)     On one side of openings less than 6’-0”.
                             2)     On both sides of openings 6’-0” wide and greater.
                       c.    Changes in wall height or wall thickness, such as at pipe and duct chases and pi-
                             lasters.
                       d.    At movement construction joints in foundations, in roofs, and in floors.

    B.        Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows :
              1.    Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block.
              2.    Provide fully grouted cells with one #4 vertical bar on both sides of the control joint.

    C.        Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a com-
              pressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Division 07
              Section "Joint Sealants," but not less than 3/8 inch (10 mm).
              1.    Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry.


3.10          LINTELS

    A.        Install steel lintels where indicated.

    B.        Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 24 inches (610 mm) for
              block-size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels.

    C.        Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches (200 mm) at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.


3.11          FLASHING AND WEEP HOLES

    A.        General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges,
              other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.

    B.        Install flashing as follows, unless otherwise indicated:
              1.      At single wythe masonry walls, construct bottom course of two half width units. Extend
                      flashing from exterior face of outer wythe of masonry, through outer wythe, turned up a
                      minimum of 8 inches (200 mm), and through inner wythe to within 1/2 inch (13 mm) of the
                      interior face of the wall in exposed masonry. Where interior surface of inner wythe is
                      concealed by furring, carry flashing completely through inner wythe and turn flashing up
                      approximately 2 inches (50 mm), unless otherwise indicated.


3.12          REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION

    A.        Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores to support reinforced ma-
              sonry elements during construction.
              1.    Construct formwork to conform to shape, line, and dimensions shown. Make it sufficient-
                    ly tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain
                    position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.
              2.    Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened suffi-
                    ciently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them
                    during construction.

    B.        Placing Reinforcement:



© Populous Group, LLC 2012                         UNIT MASONRY
                                                    04 20 00 - 13
                                      GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                          DECEMBER 19, 2012

              1.       Clean reinforcement of loose rust, mill scale, earth, ice or other materials which will re-
                       duce bond to mortar or grout. Do not use reinforcement bars with kinks or bends not
                       shown on drawings or final shop drawings, or bars with reduced cross-section due to ex-
                       cessive rusting or other causes.
              2.       Position reinforcement accurately at the spacing indicated. Prior to grouting, support and
                       secure vertical bars against displacement. Vertical bars shall be held in position at the
                       top and bottom and at intervals not exceeding 8'-0" with a minimum clearance of 1/4" if fi-
                       ne grout is used or 1/2” if coarse grout is used from the face of the masonry and not less
                       than one bar diameter or 1" (whichever is greater) between adjacent bars.
              3.       All dowels shall be grouted into a cell even if the dowel is in an adjacent cell to the verti-
                       cal steel. Unless detailed otherwise on the drawings, dowels shall be the same size and
                       number as the vertical steel. Unless noted otherwise provide a lap length of dowels to
                       vertical reinforcement equal to 50 times the nominal dowel diameter.
              4.       All horizontal reinforcing steel shall be placed in continuous bond beam or lintel block
                       units and shall be solidly grouted in place. Maintain a minimum of one bar diameter or 1"
                       (whichever is greater) clearance between adjacent bars and a minimum of 1/4" clearance
                       if fine grout is used or 1/2” if coarse grout is used from the face of the masonry. Horizon-
                       tal reinforcement may be placed as the masonry work progresses.
              5.       Splice reinforcement bars where shown; do not splice at other points unless acceptable
                       to the Engineer. Where splices occur, adjacent splices shall be staggered so that no
                       more than 25% of the total number of bars are spliced at any one point with a minimum
                       stagger between splices in adjacent bars of at least the lap length. Provide lapped splic-
                       es, unless otherwise indicated. In splicing vertical bars or attaching to dowels, lap ends,
                       place in contact and wire tie. Minimum lap splice length shall be 50 bar diameters unless
                       indicated otherwise.

    C.        Grouting:
              1.    Where detailed, grout in reinforced masonry walls, columns, and pilasters. Fully grout
                    vertical cells of concrete masonry containing steel reinforcement.
              2.    Comply with the requirements of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts, grout space
                    preparation, and grout placement, including minimum grout space, maximum pour height,
                    maximum lift height and consolidation.
                    a.     Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained suffi-
                           cient strength to resist grout pressure.
                    b.     Place grout in lintels or beams over openings in one continuous pour.
                    c.     Where bond beam occurs more than one course below top of pour and vertically
                           reinforced cells are present above the bond beam, fill bond beam course to within
                           1-1/2" of the top of the bond beam.
                    d.     When more than one pour is required to complete a given section of masonry, ex-
                           tend reinforcement beyond masonry as required for splicing. Pour grout to within
                           1-1/2" of top course of first pour. After grouted masonry is cured, lay masonry
                           units and place reinforcement for second pour section before grouting. Repeat
                           sequence if more pours are required.


3.13          REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

    A.        Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise dam-
              aged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in
              fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

    B.        Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and com-
              pletely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction,
              to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application.



© Populous Group, LLC 2012                          UNIT MASONRY
                                                     04 20 00 - 14
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                      DECEMBER 19, 2012

    C.        In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mor-
              tar fins and smears before tooling joints.

    D.        Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:
              1.     Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape
                     hoes or chisels.
              2.     Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for com-
                     parison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with
                     cleaning of masonry.
              3.     Protect adjacent nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with
                     liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape.
              4.     Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rins-
                     ing the surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
              5.     Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2 applicable to
                     type of stain on exposed surfaces.


3.14          DECORATIVE CONCRETE MASONRY WATER REPELLENT APPLICATION

    A.        Apply a final coat of manufacturer’s water repellent to decorative concrete masonry unit walls
              that are completed, cleaned, and fully cured and dry. Apply evenly to cover the entire surface
              without forming drips or runs and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.


3.15          MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

    A.        Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's
              property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.

    B.        Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-
              contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill
              material as fill is placed.
              1.    Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches (100 mm) in each dimension.
              2.    Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of mason-
                    ry waste. Fill material is specified in Division 31 Section "Earthwork."
              3.    Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches (450 mm) of finished grade.

    C.        Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as
              described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.


END OF SECTION




© Populous Group, LLC 2012                       UNIT MASONRY
                                                  04 20 00 - 15
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                      DECEMBER 19, 2012

SECTION 05 40 00 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1           SUMMARY

      A.      This Section includes the following:
              1.    Exterior nonload-bearing curtain wall framing.
              2.    Exterior soffit and ceiling joist framing.
              3.    Exterior sheathing and air infiltration barrier.

      B.      Nomenclature: Framing products provided under this Section are indicated on the Drawings as
              “metal framing.” Framing for interior partitions specified in Division 09 Section “Gypsum Board
              Assemblies” are indicated on the Drawings as “steel studs.”

      C.      Related Sections include the following:
              1.    Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for masonry shelf angles and connections.
              2.    Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for interior non-load-bearing metal-stud
                    framing and ceiling-suspension assemblies.
              3.    Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies" for interior non-load-bearing,
                    metal-stud-framed, shaft-wall assemblies.


1.2           DEFINITIONS

      A.      Minimum Uncoated Steel Thickness: Minimum uncoated thickness of cold-formed framing
              delivered to the Project site shall be not less than 95 percent of the thickness used in the cold-
              formed framing design. Lesser thicknesses shall be permitted at bends due to cold forming.

      B.      Producer: Entity that produces steel sheet coil fabricated into cold-formed members.


1.3           PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

      A.      Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed metal framing capable of withstanding design
              loads within limits and under conditions indicated.
              1.     Exterior Design Loads: As indicated in the General Notes on the Structural Drawings.
              2.    Interior Design Loads: Provide a minimum of 5 psf over the entire surface of the wall in
                    spaces not exposed to exterior wind loads.
              3.    Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections
                    greater than the following:
                    a.      Exterior Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall height.
                    b.      Soffit and Ceiling Joist Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the span.
              4.    Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members without damage or
                    overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and
                    anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature
                    change of 120 deg F (67 deg C).
              5.    Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction
                    tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as
                    follows:
                    a.      Upward and downward movement of 3/4 inch (19 mm).



© Populous Group, LLC 2012              COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
                                                05 40 00 - 1
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

      B.      Design exterior non-load-bearing curtain-wall framing to accommodate horizontal deflection
              without regard for contribution of sheathing materials.


1.4           SUBMITTALS

      A.      Product Data: For each type of cold-formed metal framing product and accessory indicated.

      B.      Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal
              framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.
              Show reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging,
              splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining Work.
              1.     For cold-formed metal framing indicated to comply with design loads, include structural
                     analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for
                     their preparation.

      C.      Mill certificates signed by steel sheet producer or test reports from a qualified independent
              testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements.

      D.      Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.

      E.      Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
              demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
              names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
              specified.

      F.      Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency, indicating that each of the following
              complies with requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests for current products:
              1.    Steel sheet.
              2.    Expansion anchors.
              3.    Power-actuated anchors.
              4.    Mechanical fasteners.
              5.    Vertical deflection clips.
              6.    Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories.


1.5           QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.      Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed cold-formed metal framing
              similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has
              resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

      B.      Engineering Responsibility: Engage a qualified professional engineer to prepare design
              calculations, Shop Drawings, and other structural data.

      C.      Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
              practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering
              services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for
              installations of cold-formed metal framing that are similar to those indicated for this Project in
              material, design, and extent.

      D.      Mill certificates signed by steel sheet producer or test reports from a qualified independent
              testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including uncoated steel
              thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, ductility, and
              galvanized-coating thickness.
© Populous Group, LLC 2012              COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
                                                05 40 00 - 2
                                     GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                     DECEMBER 19, 2012

      E.      Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having
              jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated.

      F.      Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency, or in-house
              testing with calibrated test equipment indicating steel sheet complies with requirements,
              including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical
              requirements, ductility, and metallic-coating thickness.

      G.      Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code-
              -Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."

      H.      AISI Specifications: Comply with AISI's "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel
              Structural Members” for calculating structural characteristics of cold-formed metal framing.


1.6           DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

      A.      Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during
              delivery, storage, and handling.

      B.      Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid
              condensation.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1           MANUFACTURERS

      A.      Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
              cold-formed metal framing that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
              the following:

              1.       Allied Studco.
              2.       AllSteel Products, Inc.
              3.       California Expanded Metal Products Company.
              4.       ClarkWestern Building Systems.
              5.       Consolidated Fabricators Corp.; Building Products Division.
              6.       Dale/Incor.
              7.       Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries Company.
              8.       MarinoWare; a division of Ware Industries.
              9.       SCAFCO Corporation.
              10.      Steeler, Inc.
              11.      The Steel Network, Inc


2.2           MATERIALS

      A.      Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and
              coating weight as follows:
              1.    Grade: As required by structural performance.
              2.    Coating: G90 (Z275).




© Populous Group, LLC 2012               COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
                                                 05 40 00 - 3
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                    DECEMBER 19, 2012

2.3           NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING

      A.      Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched,
              with stiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows:
              1.     Minimum Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.84 mm).
              2.     Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm).

      B.      Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated,
              unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows:
              1.    Minimum Uncoated-Steel Thickness: Matching steel studs.
              2.    Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).

      C.      Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched,
              with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement,
              with flanges designed to support horizontal and lateral loads, and as follows:.
              1.      Minimum Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm).
              2.      Flange Width: 2-1/2 inches (64 mm)

      D.      Double Deflection Tracks: Manufacturer's double, deep-leg, U-shaped steel tracks, consisting
              of nested inner and outer tracks; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges.
              1.     Outer Track: Of web depth to allow free vertical movement of inner track, with flanges
                     designed to support horizontal and lateral loads, and as follows:
                     a.     Minimum Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm).
                     b.     Flange Width: 2-1/2 inches (64 mm)
              2.     Inner Track: Of web depth indicated, and as follows:
                     a.     Minimum Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm).
                     b.     Flange Width: 4 inches (101 mm)

      E.      Vertical Deflection Clips:       Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of
              accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through
              positive mechanical attachment to stud web.
              1.     Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
                     offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
                     the following:
                     a.      Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries Company.
                     b.      MarinoWare, a division of Ware Industries.
                     c.      SCAFCO Corporation
                     d.      The Steel Network, Inc.


2.4           SOFFIT AND CEILING JOIST FRAMING

      A.      Steel Soffit and Ceiling Joists: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths
              indicated, unpunched, with stiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows:
              1.     Minimum Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm).
              2.     Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm), minimum.


2.5           FRAMING ACCESSORIES

      A.      Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade,
              Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members.

      B.      Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise
              indicated, as follows:
© Populous Group, LLC 2012             COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
                                               05 40 00 - 4
                                      GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

              1.       Supplementary framing.
              2.       Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking.
              3.       Web stiffeners.
              4.       End clips.
              5.       Gusset plates.
              6.       Stud kickers, knee braces, and girts.
              7.       Joist hangers and end closures.
              8.       Hole reinforcing plates.
              9.       Backer plates.


2.6           ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS

      A.      Steel Shapes and Clips:        ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to
              ASTM A 123/A 123M.

      B.      Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts and carbon-
              steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to
              ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.

      C.      Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain,
              without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488
              conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

      D.      Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated
              from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10
              times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified
              independent testing agency.

      E.      Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-threading steel drill screws.
              1.   Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.

      F.      Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.


2.7           MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

      A.      Cold Galvanizing Repair Compound: Premixed liquid organic zinc compound, complying with
              the following:
              1.      Primer: Organic zinc rich primer utilizing either an epoxy or urethane binder with a mini-
                      mum volume solids of 52 percent and a minimum zinc content of 95 percent by weight in
                      the dry film and complying with the requirements for ASTM A780 for galvanizing repair.
                      Apply two coats of primer at a rate to achieve a dry film thickness of 1.5 mils per coat.
                      Finish shall replicate the appearance of the original galvanizing to the greatest extent
                      possible.
                      a.    Available Product: "ZRC" Galvilite Galvanizing Repair Compound.

      B.      Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404.
              Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for
              placement and hydration.

      C.      Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout:     Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout
              containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and
              plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, with fluid consistency
              and 30-minute working time.
© Populous Group, LLC 2012                COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
                                                  05 40 00 - 5
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                    DECEMBER 19, 2012

      D.      Thermal Insulation:     ASTM C 665, Type I, unfaced mineral-fiber blankets produced by
              combining glass or slag fibers with thermosetting resins.


2.8           GYPSUM SHEATHING

      A.      Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M.
              1.    Type and Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) thick.
              2.    Size Options: 48 by 96 inches (1219 by 2438 mm), 48 by 108 inches (1219 by 2743
                    mm), or 48 by 120 inches (1219 by 3048 mm).
              3.    Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
                    incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
                    a.    "DensGlass Gold Fireguard Sheathing" by Georgia-Pacific Corp.
                             2
                    b.    “e XP Fire-Shield Type X” by National Gypsum Company.
                    c.    “Securock Glass-Mat Sheathing” by United States Gypsum Company.
                    d.    “GreenGlass FRX” by Temple-Inland.
                    e.    “Weather Defense Platinum Type X” by La Farge.


2.9           AIR AND MOISTURE BARRIER SYSTEM

      A.      General: Provide a cold fluid applied air and moisture barrier system that stops air and water
              leakage through exterior sheathing. Protect seams, cracks, fasteners, roof, window and door
              openings as part of the continuous system. The system shall consist of the following:
              1.    Self-adhering glass fiber tape: 4-1/4 inch (11 cm) and 9-1/2 inch (24cm) wide self-
                    adhesive, flexible, glass fiber fabric, with alkaline resistant coating.
              2.    Filler: Acrylic compound.
              3.    Spray applied fluid acrylic coating.
              4.    Available Systems:
                    a.      PROSOCO "R-GUARD."
                    b.      Sto Corporation, "Sto Guard Sto Gold Coat."


2.10          SHEATHING ACCESSORIES

      A.      Screws for Fastening Gypsum Sheathing to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Steel drill screws, in
              length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing board to be
              attached, with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray
              resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117.
              1.     For steel framing less than 0.0329 inch (0.835 mm) thick, attach sheathing to comply with
                     ASTM C 1002.
              2.     For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick, attach sheathing to
                     comply with ASTM C 954.


2.11          FABRICATION

      A.      Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with
              connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's written recommendations and
              requirements in this Section.
              1.     Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates.
              2.     Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
              3.     Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding. Wire tying of framing members
                     is not permitted. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding,
                     appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
© Populous Group, LLC 2012             COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
                                               05 40 00 - 6
                                     GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                     DECEMBER 19, 2012

              4.       Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as standard
                       with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.
                       a.     Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and
                              quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
                       b.     Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw
                              penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads.
              5.       Fasten other materials to cold-formed metal framing by welding, bolting, or screw
                       fastening, according to Shop Drawings.

      B.      Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection
              stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.

      C.      Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum
              allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:
              1.    Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm)
                    from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of
                    sheathing or other finishing materials.
              2.    Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out-of-
                    square tolerance of 1/8 inch (3 mm).


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1           EXAMINATION

      A.      Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements
              for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation
              only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2           PREPARATION

      A.      Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach continuous angles, supplementary
              framing, or tracks to structural members indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.

      B.      After applying sprayed fire-resistive materials, remove only as much of these materials as
              needed to complete installation of cold-formed framing without reducing thickness of fire-
              resistive materials below that are required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect
              remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.

      C.      Grout bearing surfaces uniform and level to ensure full contact of bearing flanges or track webs
              on supporting concrete or masonry construction.


3.3           INSTALLATION, GENERAL

      A.      Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field
              assembled.

      B.      Install cold-formed metal framing according to ASTM C 1007, unless more stringent
              requirements are indicated.

      C.      Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting
              structure.
© Populous Group, LLC 2012              COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
                                                05 40 00 - 7
                                      GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                        DECEMBER 19, 2012

              1.       Bolt or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-
                       to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels
                       not exceeding 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

      D.      Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with
              connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's written recommendations and
              requirements in this Section.
              1.      Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
              2.      Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as standard
                      with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.
                      a.     Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and
                             quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
                      b.     Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw
                             penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads.

      E.      Install framing members in one-piece lengths, unless splice connections are indicated for track
              or tension members.

      F.      Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in
              intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place,
              undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent
              connections to framing are secured.

      G.      Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing.
              Independently frame both sides of joints.

      H.      Install insulation in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and
              multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.

      I.      Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard
              punched openings.

      J.      Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a
              maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:
              1.     Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan
                     location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of
                     sheathing or other finishing materials.


3.4           LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION

      A.      Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and
              securely anchor at corners and ends, and at spacings as follows:
              1.      Anchor Spacing: As shown on Shop Drawings.

      B.      Squarely seat studs against webs of top and bottom tracks. Fasten both flanges of studs to top
              and bottom tracks. Space studs as follows:
              1.    Stud Spacing: 16 inches (406 mm) .

      C.      Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or
              warped surfaces and similar configurations.

      D.      Align studs vertically where wall-framing continuity is interrupted by floor framing. Where studs
              cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads.


© Populous Group, LLC 2012               COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
                                                 05 40 00 - 8
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

      E.      Align floor and roof framing over studs.      Where framing cannot be aligned, continuously
              reinforce track to transfer loads.

      F.      Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting
              structure as indicated.

      G.      Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above openings as
              indicated. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to transfer load to
              supporting studs, complete with clip-angle connectors, web stiffeners, or gusset plates.
              1.      Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame as indicated
                      on Shop Drawings.
              2.      Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to
                      jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height wall
                      studs.

      H.      Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in stud framing indicated to support
              fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar work requiring
              attachment to framing.
              1.     If type of supplementary support is not indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's written
                     recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or load
                     resulting from item supported.

      I.      Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced the dimension indicated on Shop Drawings
              apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.
              1.      Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched
                      studs with a minimum of two screws into each flange of the clip angle.
              2.      Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated
                      and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to
                      stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.

      J.      Install steel sheet diagonal bracing straps to both stud flanges, terminate at and fasten to
              reinforced top and bottom tracks. Fasten clip-angle connectors to multiple studs at ends of
              bracing and anchor to structure.

      K.      Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, web stiffeners,
              clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-
              framing system.


3.5           GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION

      A.      General: Install gypsum sheathing to comply with GA-253 and manufacturer's written
              instructions.

      B.      Cut boards at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of the work; fit tightly against abutting
              construction, except provide a 3/8-inch (9-mm) setback where non-load-bearing construction
              abuts structural elements.

      C.      Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint sealant installation so these materials
              are installed in the sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through
              completed exterior wall assembly.

      D.      Apply fasteners so screw heads bear tightly against face of sheathing boards but do not cut into
              facing.


© Populous Group, LLC 2012             COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
                                               05 40 00 - 9
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

      E.      Do not bridge building expansion joints with sheathing; cut and space edges to match spacing
              of structural support elements.

      F.      Vertical Installation: Install 48-inch- (1219-mm-) wide gypsum sheathing boards vertically with
              vertical edges centered over flanges of steel studs. Abut ends and edges of each board with
              those of adjacent boards. Screw-attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each
              steel stud at approximately 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch (9 mm)
              from edges and ends of boards.

      G.      Fill joints or openings that exceed 1/8 inch (3 mm) in size with expanding urethane foam shaved
              flush with the sheathing surface.


3.6           GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION FOR EXTERIOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS

      A.      Examination: Verify permanent protection from the elements has been provided above the soffit
              prior to installing sheathing to prevent moisture from ponding or settling on top of the sheathing
              panel or within the finished soffit.

      B.      Apply panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered and located over supports.
              1.    Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) open space where panels abut other construction or
                    structural penetrations.
              2.    Fasten with corrosion-resistant screws.


3.7           AIR AND WATER BARRIER SYSTEM INSTALLATION

      A.      General: Do not apply when surface or air temperatures are below 40°F (4°C) or above 100°F
              (38°C).

      B.      Over exterior gypsum sheathing board: Apply barrier coating system in accordance with the
              manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
              1.    Firmly adhere mesh tape over sheathing joints and seams, to rough openings and inside
                    and outside corners. Use a seam roller or other blunt tool to firmly adhere mesh tape to
                    sheathing.
              2.    Cover tape and 4 inches of adjacent sheathing and fastener and defects with acrylic filler
                    material. Trowel smooth.
              3.    Apply fluid acrylic barrier coating to the entire surface to a uniform wet mil thickness of 10
                    mils.


3.8           FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

      A.      Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality-
              control testing.

      B.      Field and shop welds will be subject to inspection and testing.

      C.      Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

      D.      Remove and replace Work that does not comply with specified requirements.

      E.      Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
              compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements.

© Populous Group, LLC 2012              COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
                                                05 40 00 - 10
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

3.9           REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

      A.      Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and
              installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780,
              Annex A2.

      B.      Protect paper-surfaced gypsum sheathing that will be exposed to weather for more than 30
              days by covering exposed exterior surface of sheathing with a securely fastened air-infiltration
              barrier. Apply covering immediately after sheathing is installed.

      C.      Protect cutouts, corners, and joints in sheathing by filling with a flexible sealant or by applying
              tape recommended by sheathing manufacturer at time sheathing is applied.

      D.      Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
              Installer, that ensure cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time of
              Substantial Completion.


END OF SECTION




© Populous Group, LLC 2012             COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
                                               05 40 00 - 11
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

SECTION 06 40 00 - ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1           SUMMARY

      A.      This Section includes the following:
              1.    Interior standing and running trim.
              2.    Wood Casework.
              3.    Stone countertops.
              4.    Interior frames and jambs.
              5.    Flush wood paneling.
              6.    Shop finishing interior woodwork.

      B.      Related Sections include the following:
              1.    Division 09 Section "Painting" for field finishing of architectural woodwork.


1.2           DEFINITIONS

      A.      Architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing
              woodwork items, that are not concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.


1.3           SUBMITTALS

      A.      Product Data: For hardboard, medium-density fiberboard, plywood, fire-retardant-treated
              materials, and finishing materials and processes.
              1.    Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
                    certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
              2.    Certification of compliance with the environmental performance requirements specified in
                    this Section.

      B.      Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
              details, attachment devices, and other components.
              1.     Show details full size.
              2.     Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including required
                     concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.
              3.     Show locations of countertop joints and splices.

      C.      Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units
              showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of material
              indicated.
              1.     Shop-applied transparent finishes.
              2.     Stone materials.

      D.      Samples for Verification: For the following:
              1.   Lumber with or for transparent finish, 5 inches(125 mm) wide by 24 inches(600 mm) long,
                   for each species and cut, finished on 1 side and 1 edge.
              2.   Wood-veneer-faced panel products with or for transparent finish, 8 by 10 inches(200 by
                   250 mm), for each species and cut. Include at least one face-veneer seam and finish as
                   specified.
              3.   Stone materials, 6 inches (150 mm) square.


© Populous Group, LLC 2012               ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
                                                 06 40 00 - 1
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

      E.      Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of woodwork certifying that products furnished
              comply with requirements.

      F.      Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
              demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
              names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
              specified.


1.4           QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.      Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed architectural woodwork
              similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has
              resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

      B.      Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to that
              indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as
              sufficient production capacity to produce required units. .Shop is a certified participant in AWS's
              Quality Certification Program.

      C.      Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for
              production of architectural woodwork with sequence-matched wood veneers.

      D.      Quality Standard: These specifications are based on the Architectural Woodwork Standards
              (AWS), jointly endorse by the Architectural Woodwork Institute, the Architectural Woodwork
              Manufacturers Association of Canada, and the Woodwork Institute. Unless otherwise indicated,
              comply with AWS for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and other
              requirements.

      E.      Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-retardant materials or products are required by
              local code, provide materials and products with specified fire-test-response characteristics as
              determined by testing identical products according to test methods indicated by UL, ITS, or
              another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify with
              appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency in the form of separable paper
              label or, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, imprint on surfaces of materials that
              will be concealed from view after installation.


1.5           DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

      A.      Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soilage,
              and deterioration.

      B.      Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork
              have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation
              areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in
              "Project Conditions" Article.


1.6           PROJECT CONDITIONS

      A.      Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet
              work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative
              humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.



© Populous Group, LLC 2012              ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
                                                06 40 00 - 2
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

      B.      Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify
              dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
              measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress
              to avoid delaying the Work.
              1.     Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field
                     measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.


1.7           COORDINATION

      A.      Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related
              units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be
              supported and installed as indicated.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1           MATERIALS

      A.      General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWS quality standard for each
              type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.

      B.      Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish:       Match species and cut of existing
              construction for adjacent or similar conditions.

      C.      Wood Products: Comply with the following:
              1.   Hardboard: AHA A135.4.
              2.   Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD-Exterior Glue.
                   a.    Interior Dry Areas: Sierra Pine Composite Solutions, "Medite II." SCS certified,
                         no-added formaldehyde MDF panel engineered for interior non-structural
                         applications.
              3.   Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay.
              4.   Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: HPVA HP-1.

      D.      Granite Surfacing Material: Granite building stone complying with performance requirements of
              ASTM C615.


2.2           FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

      A.      General: Where indicated, use materials impregnated with fire-retardant chemical formulations
              indicated by a pressure process or other means acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction to
              produce products with fire-test-response characteristics specified.
              1.     Do not use treated material that does not comply with requirements of referenced
                     woodworking standard or that is warped, discolored, or otherwise defective.
              2.     Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise
                     adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants in solution to distinguish treated material
                     from untreated material.

      B.      Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Comply with AWPA C20
              (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood), for woodwork items indicated as fire-retardant treated. Use
              organic-resin-based formulation thermally set in wood by kiln-drying.




© Populous Group, LLC 2012               ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
                                                 06 40 00 - 3
                                      GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                          DECEMBER 19, 2012

              1.       Mill lumber after treatment, within limits set for wood removal that does not affect listed
                       fire-test-response characteristics, using a woodworking plant certified by testing and
                       inspecting agency.
              2.       Kiln-dry material before and after treatment to levels required for untreated material.

      C.      Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Nonpressure Process: Apply nontoxic, water-
              soluble, fire-retardant treatment by dip, spray, roller, curtain coating, vacuum chamber, or
              soaking to achieve flame-spread rating of 25 or less and smoke-developed rating of 450 or less
              per ASTM E 84.

      D.      Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: Medium-density fiberboard panels complying with ANSI A208.2,
              made from softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time
              of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread rating of 25 or less and smoke-developed rating
              of 200 or less per ASTM E 84.
              1.    Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Medite FR" by SierraPine
                    Ltd; Medite Div.


2.3           CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

      A.      General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural
              cabinets, as follows:
              1.    Drink Shelf Brackets: Match existing stainless steel brackets.


2.4           INSTALLATION MATERIALS

      A.      Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln-dried
              to less than 15 percent moisture content.

      B.      Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure
              anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face
              of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or
              lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.


2.5           FABRICATION, GENERAL

      A.      Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood
              moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation
              areas.

      B.      Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before
              fabrication.

      C.      Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to match
              existing woodwork.

      D.      Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum
              extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary
              for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for
              scribing, trimming, and fitting.
              1.     Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled.
                     Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be
                     removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check


© Populous Group, LLC 2012                 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
                                                   06 40 00 - 4
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

                       measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings
                       before disassembling for shipment.

      E.      Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing
              fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or
              roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts
              to remove splinters and burrs.
              1.     Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.
              2.     Seal with varnish or edge-band all raw wood cabinet components, including but not
                     limited to blocking and shims.


2.6           INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

      A.      Quality Standard: Comply with AWS Section 6.

      B.      Grade: Premium .

      C.      For trim items wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width.

      D.      For rails wider or thicker than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for
              width or thickness.

      E.      Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members,
              except for members with ends exposed in finished work.

      F.      Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field
              assembly.

      G.      Assemble moldings in plant to maximum extent possible. Miter corners in plant and prepare for
              field assembly with bolted fittings designed to pull connections together.


2.7           WOOD CASEWORK FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

      A.      Quality Standard: Comply with AWS Section 10 requirements for wood cabinets.

      B.      Grade: Premium.

      C.      AWS Type of Cabinet Construction: Match existing.

      A.      Wood Species and Cut for Exposed Surfaces:      Match species and cut of existing construction
              for adjacent or similar conditions.
              1.     Grain Matching: Run and match grain vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed
                     panels.
              2.     Matching of Veneer Leaves: Slip match.
              3.     Vertical Matching of Veneer Leaves: End match.
              4.     Veneer Matching within Panel Face: Balance match.

      B.      Semiexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below:
              1.   Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset Decorative Overlay or High-Pressure
                   Laminate as required to match or balance the thickness of exposed veneer.




© Populous Group, LLC 2012               ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
                                                 06 40 00 - 5
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                      DECEMBER 19, 2012

2.8           STONE COUNTERTOPS

      A.      Quality Standard: Comply with National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (NBGQA)
              specifications for granite.

      B.      Stone Countertops: Granite shall be of standard grading free of cracks seams or starts which
              may impair its structural integrity or function. Inherent color variations characteristic of the
              quarry will be acceptable. Backs of pieces shall be sawn or dressed approximately true planes.

      C.      Stone Dimensional Tolerances:
              1.    Thickness- Within 1/8 inch of nominal thickness specified.
              2.    Face dimensions: Maximum variation in the dimension of any piece shall be 1/16 inch.
              3.    Flatness variation from true-plane or flat surface: No more than 1/16 inch in 4’-0” in any
                    direction on the surface.

      D.      Fabrication: Fabricate tops to minimize the number of joints. Provide backsplashes and edges,
              as indicated. Comply with stone material fabricator's recommendations for adhesives, sealers,
              fabrication, and finishing.

      E.      Stone Thickness: Match existing.

      F.      Edge Treatment: Match existing.

      G.      Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Match existing.


2.9           INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

      A.      Quality Standard: Comply with AWS Section 6.

      B.      Grade: Premium.

      C.      For frames or jambs wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for
              width.

      D.      Wood Species and Cut: Match species and cut indicated for other types of transparent-finished
              architectural woodwork located in same area of building, unless otherwise indicated.
              1.     Match veneer grain on adjacent doors.


2.10          FLUSH WOOD PANELING AND WAINSCOTS

      A.      Quality Standard: Comply with AWS Section 8 requirements for flush wood paneling.

      B.      Grade: Premium.

      C.      Wood Species and Cut: As indicated.
              1.   Lumber Trim and Edges: At fabricator's option, trim and edges indicated as solid wood
                   (except moldings) may be either lumber or veneered construction compatible with grain
                   and color of veneered panels.

      D.      Matching of Adjacent Veneer Leaves: Slip match.

      E.      Vertical Matching of Adjacent Veneer Leaves: End match.



© Populous Group, LLC 2012              ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
                                                06 40 00 - 6
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                     DECEMBER 19, 2012

      F.      Veneer Matching within Panel Face: Balance match.

      G.      Panel-Matching Method: Match panels within each separate area by the following method:
              1.    Premanufactured sets used full width.
              2.    Premanufactured sets selectively reduced in width.
              3.    Sequence-matched, uniform-size sets.

      H.      Vertical Panel-Matching Method: End match.

      I.      Fire-Retardant-Treated Paneling: Provide panels consisting of wood veneer and fire-retardant
              medium-density fiberboard. Panels shall have flame-spread rating of 25 or less and smoke-
              developed rating of 450 or less per ASTM E 84.


2.11          SHOP FINISHING

      A.      Quality Standard: Comply with AWS Section 5, unless otherwise indicated.
              1.     Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished.

      B.      General: Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer
              only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.

      C.      Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling
              countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing
              architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.
              1.     Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to
                     concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end-grain
                     surfaces.

      D.      Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system,
              staining, and sheen, with sheen measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523:
              1.     Grade: Premium .
              2.     AWS Finish System: Catalyzed polyurethane.
              3.     Staining: Match existing..
              4.     Wash Coat for Stained Finish: Apply a vinyl wash coat to woodwork made from close-
                     grain wood before staining and finishing.
              5.     Open Finish for Open-Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open-grain woods.
              6.     Sheen: Match existing.
              7.     At Contractor’s option, field finish woodwork as necessary to match stain and sheen.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1           PREPARATION

      A.      Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before
              installation.

      B.      Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and
              complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.




© Populous Group, LLC 2012              ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
                                                06 40 00 - 7
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                         DECEMBER 19, 2012

3.2           INSTALLATION

      A.      Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWS requirements for the same grade
              specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved.

      B.      Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims.
              Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400
              mm).

      C.      Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged
              finish at cuts.

      D.      Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire-retardant-treated wood to comply
              with recommendations of chemical treatment manufacturer, including those for adhesives used
              to install woodwork.

      E.      Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with
              countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use
              fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with
              woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.

      F.      Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length
              pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use
              pieces less than 60 inches (1500 mm) long, except where shorter single-length pieces are
              necessary. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members.
              1.    Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and
                    finish same as wood base, if finished.
              2.    Install wall railings on indicated metal brackets securely fastened to wall framing.
              3.    Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch
                    in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm).

      G.      Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are
              accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide
              unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
              1.    Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or
                    other variation from a straight line.
              2.    Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish.
              3.    Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16
                    inches (400 mm) o.c. as follows:
                    a.      Wood Framing, Blocking, or Hanging Strips: Provide No. 10 wafer-head screws
                            sized for 1-inch (25-mm) penetration.
                    b.      Metal Backing or Framing: Provide No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws.

      H.      Install paneling level, plumb, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with
              concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400
              mm). Install with no more than 1/16 inch in 96-inch (1.6 mm in 2400-mm) vertical cup or bow
              and 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) horizontal variation from a true plane.
              1.      For flush paneling with revealed joints, install with variations in reveal width, alignment of
                      top and bottom edges, and flushness between adjacent panels not exceeding 1/32 inch
                      (0.8 mm).
              2.      Scribe and cut paneling to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged
                      finish at cuts.
              3.      Anchor paneling to supporting substrate with concealed panel-hanger clips. Do not use
                      face fastening unless otherwise indicated.



© Populous Group, LLC 2012               ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
                                                 06 40 00 - 8
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                     DECEMBER 19, 2012

      I.      Complete the finishing work specified in this Section to extent not completed at shop or before
              installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. Apply specified
              finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only
              sealer/prime coats were applied in shop.


3.3           PROTECTION

      A.      Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to fabricator and
              Installer that ensure stone countertops are without damage or deterioration at the time of
              Substantial Completion.


3.4           ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

      A.      Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual
              defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

      B.      Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.

      C.      Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to
              restore damaged or soiled areas.

      D.      Clean stone surfaces that have become dirty or stained by removing soil, stains, and foreign
              materials before setting. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then
              drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh
              materials or abrasives.


END OF SECTION




© Populous Group, LLC 2012              ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
                                                06 40 00 - 9
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

SECTION 07 21 00 - THERMAL INSULATION


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1           SUMMARY

      A.      This Section includes the following:
              1.    Concealed building insulation.
              2.    Metal faced insulation

      B.      Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this section:
              1.    Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for insulation installed in cavity walls and masonry
                    cells.
              2.    Division 05 Section “Cold-Formed Metal Framing” for insulation installed in inaccessible
                    spaces.
              3.    Division 07 Section “Firestopping” for fire-safing insulation.
              4.    Division 09 Section indicated below for insulation installed as part of metal-framed wall
                    and partition assemblies:
                    a.     "Gypsum Board Assemblies."
                    b.     "Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies."


1.2           SUBMITTALS

      A.      Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including attachment details for metal faced
              insulation.

      B.      Samples for Verification: Full-size units for each type of exposed insulation indicated.

      C.      Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
              testing agency, for insulation products.

      D.      Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation.

      E.      Product Certificates: Manufacturer’s certification listing the type of insulation, manufacturer, and
              R-value for each element of the building thermal envelope.
              1.    For blown or sprayed products, certification to include:
                    a.      Initial installed thickness.
                    b.      Settled thickness.
                    c.      Settled R-value.
                    d.      Installed density.
                    e.      Coverage and number of bags.
              2.    Certification shall be signed and dated by the insulation installer and posted at the
                    jobsite.


1.3           QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.      Single-Source Responsibility for Insulation Products: Obtain each type of building insulation
              from a single source with resources to provide products complying with requirements indicated
              without delaying the Work.




© Populous Group, LLC 2012                   THERMAL INSULATION
                                                 07 21 00 - 1
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                        DECEMBER 19, 2012

      B.      Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-
              response characteristics indicated on Drawings or specified elsewhere in this Section as
              determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another
              testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials
              with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
              1.     Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.
              2.     Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.
              3.     Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.

      C.      Identification: For materials not otherwise addressed with certifications, provide R-value identi-
              fication mark to each piece of building thermal envelope insulation 12 inches (305 mm) or
              greater in width.


1.4           DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

      A.      Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling,
              and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written
              instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

      B.      Protect plastic insulation as follows:
              1.    Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and
                    concealment.
              2.    Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project
                    site before installation time.
              3.    Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each
                    area of construction.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1           MANUFACTURERS

      A.      Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide insulation products by one of
              the following:
              1.      Glass-Fiber Insulation:
                      a.    CertainTeed Corporation.
                      b.    Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH.
                      c.    Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation.
                      d.    Schuller International, Inc.
              2.      Metal Faced Thermal Insulation: Metal faced insulation board.
                      a.    Dow Polyisocyanurate/Finish Board; Heavy Duty
                            1)     Exposed facing: 4 mil embossed aluminum with white acrylic coating
                            2)     Backing facing: 1.0 mil embossed aluminum
                            3)     Attachment Method: Ship-lapped with mechanical fasteners.


2.2           BUILDING INSULATING MATERIALS

      A.      General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced
              standards.
              1.    Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's
                    standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths.



© Populous Group, LLC 2012                    THERMAL INSULATION
                                                  07 21 00 - 2
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

      B.      Unfaced, Flexible Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 612, Type IA; ASTM C 553, Types I,
              II, and III; or ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of
              25 and 50, respectively; and of the following properties:
              1.     Nominal density of 1.0 lb/cu. ft.(16 kg/cu. m), thermal resistivity of 3.7 deg F x h x sq.
                     ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F(25.7 K x m/W at 24 deg C).
              2.     Nominal density of not less than 1.5 lb/cu. ft.(24 kg/cu. m) nor more than 1.7 lb/cu. ft.(26
                     kg/cu. m), thermal resistivity of 4 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F(27.7 K x m/W at
                     24 deg C).
              3.     Combustion Characteristics: Passes ASTM E 136.

      C.      Unfaced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane
              facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from glass; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-
              developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteris-
              tics.

      D.      Glass-Fiber Loose-Fill Insulation: ASTM C 764, Type I for pneumatic application or Type II for
              poured application; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 5, per
              ASTM E 84.

      E.      Spray Foam Insulation:
              1.    Available Products:
                    a.    Hilti CE812.
                    b.    Dow Great Stuff.


2.3           METAL FACED INSULATION

      A.      General: Provide square edged polyisocyanurate rigid boards with aluminum sheets laminated
              to both faces.
              1.     Dimensions: Minimum 4 feet by 8 feet; 3-inches thick.

      B.      Joint Closure Systems: Manufacturer’s standard white PVC interlocking joint closure system for
              mechanical fastening to substrate.

      C.      Flexible Fluted Deck Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber


2.4           INSULATION FASTENERS

      A.      Metal Faced Insulation Fasteners: The design is based on the product named. Subject to
              compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by
              another manufacturer. Comparable products are subject to review and approval through the
              submittal process specified.
              1.    Hilti, Insulation / Soft Material Attachment Fasteners, X-IE.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1           EXAMINATION

      A.      Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of
              Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and to determine if other conditions
              affecting performance of insulation are satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation until
              unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


© Populous Group, LLC 2012                   THERMAL INSULATION
                                                 07 21 00 - 3
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

3.2           PREPARATION

      A.      Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation materials, including removing projections
              that interfere with insulation attachment.


3.3           INSTALLATION, GENERAL

      A.      Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application
              indicated.

      B.      Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, unsoiled, and has not been exposed at any time to ice
              and snow.

      C.      Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly
              around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with
              placement.

      D.      Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated.

      E.      Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are
              otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.


3.4           INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION

      A.      Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written
              instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use
              mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

      B.      Seal joints between closed-cell (nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or
              sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in
              completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation
              manufacturer.

      C.      Stuff glass-fiber loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown.
              Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of
              approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m).


3.5           INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION

      A.      Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written
              instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use
              mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

      B.      Glass-Fiber or Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members
              according to the following requirements:
              1.    Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If
                    more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a
                    snug fit between ends.
              2.    Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between
                    edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
              3.    Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rat-
                    ed for or protected from contact with insulation.


© Populous Group, LLC 2012                   THERMAL INSULATION
                                                 07 21 00 - 4
                                     GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                          DECEMBER 19, 2012

              4.       For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm), sup-
                       port unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insu-
                       lation to flanges of metal studs.

      C.      Loose-Fill Insulation: Apply according to ASTM C 1015 and manufacturer's written instructions.
              Level horizontal applications to uniform thickness as indicated, lightly settle to uniform density,
              but do not compact excessively.

      D.      Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where re-
              quired to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:
              1.    Loose-Fill Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume
                    equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m).


3.6           INSTALLATION OF METAL FACED INSULATION

      A.      Install accordance with manufacturer’s specifications using tape and accessories designed for a
              finished appearance. Apply sealant to surfaces of insulation board under closure system.
              1.      Provide PVC closure to conceal exposed edges.
              2.      Install flexible closure strips over partitions, walls, at perimeter of metal faced insulation,
                      and where indicated. Install with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instruc-
                      tions to ensure complete closure.


3.7           PROTECTION

      A.      General: Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical
              abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is
              subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction
              immediately after installation.


END OF SECTION




© Populous Group, LLC 2012                    THERMAL INSULATION
                                                  07 21 00 - 5
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                        DECEMBER 19, 2012



SECTION 07 81 00 - SPRAYED FIRE RESISTIVE MATERIALS


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1           SUMMARY

      A.      This Section includes sprayed fire-resistive materials for the following applications:
              1.    Dry interior surfaces concealed from view.

      B.      Scope of Work: Spray applied fire resistive materials shall be applied to structural steel col-
              umns, and possibly beams at floor assemblies as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
              Exposure conditions indicated are defined as part of the completed construction. In the event
              that SFRM are applied before building enclosure is complete, precautions as specified in article
              “Project Conditions” and “Coordination” shall be followed.

      C.      Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
              1.    Division 07 Section “Firestopping” for through-penetration firestopping systems and fire-
                    safing insulation.
              2.    Division 09 Sections “Gypsum Board Assemblies” and “Gypsum Board Shaft Wall As-
                    semblies” for fire protection based on gypsum board products.


1.2           DEFINITIONS

      A.      SFRM: Sprayed fire-resistive material.

      B.      Concealed: Fire-resistive materials applied to interior surfaces that are concealed from view
              behind other construction when the Work is completed.


1.3           SUBMITTALS

      A.      Product data for each sprayed fire-resistive product indicated.
              1.   Certification by manufacturers that products supplied comply with local regulations con-
                   trolling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).

      B.      Shop Drawings: Structural framing plans indicating the following:
              1.   Locations and types of surface preparations required before applying SFRM.
              2.   Extent of SFRM for each construction and fire-resistance rating, including the following:
                   a.    Applicable fire-resistive design designations of a qualified testing and inspecting
                         agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
                   b.    Minimum thicknesses needed to achieve required fire-resistance ratings of struc-
                         tural components and assemblies.
              3.   Treatment of SFRM after application.

      C.      Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified re-
              quirements.

      D.      Product certificates: Signed by fire-resistive materials manufacturers that each sprayed fire-
              resistive product indicated for Project complies with specified requirements including those for



© Populous Group, LLC 2012          SPRAYED FIRE RESISTIVE MATERIALS
                                               07 81 00 - 1
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                        DECEMBER 19, 2012



              fire-test-response characteristics and compatibility with adhesives, primers, and other surface
              coatings on substrates indicated to receive fire-resistive materials.

      E.      Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demon-
              strate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names
              and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information speci-
              fied.

      F.      Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: For primers and other coatings applied to structural
              steel and metal decking from a qualified independent testing agency employed and paid by
              Contractor. Confirm that primers and coatings proposed for application in shop or field are
              compatible with SFRMs. Instruct laboratory to determine compatibility according to require-
              ments specified in “Quality Assurance” Article.”

      G.      Product Test Reports: Indicate that physical properties of proposed SFRM comply with speci-
              fied requirements based on comprehensive testing of current product formulations by a qualified
              testing and inspecting agency according to requirements specified in "Quality Assurance" Arti-
              cle.

      H.      Research/Evaluation Reports: Evidence of sprayed fire-resistive material's compliance with
              building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities hav-
              ing jurisdiction.

      I.      Field quality-control test and special inspection reports.

      J.      Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


1.4           QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.      Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide SFRM and assemblies identical to those tested for
              the following fire test response characteristics, in accordance with test method indicated below
              by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
              Identify packages (bags) containing fire-resistive materials with appropriate classification mark-
              ings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
              1.      Fire-Resistance Ratings: As indicated by reference to fire-resistive designs listed in UL
                      "Fire Resistance Directory," or in the comparable publication of another testing and in-
                      specting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for spray fire-resistive mate-
                      rials serving as direct-applied protection, tested per ASTM E 119.
              2.      Surface-Burning Characteristics: As indicated for each sprayed fire-resistive product re-
                      quired, tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.

      B.      Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer certified, licensed, or otherwise quali-
              fied by the SFRM manufacturer as having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install
              manufacturer's products in accordance with the specified requirements. A manufacturer's will-
              ingness to sell its SFRM to Contractor or to an Installer engaged by the Contractor does not in
              itself confer qualification on the buyer.

      C.      Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain SFRM from a single manufacturer for each different prod-
              uct required.




© Populous Group, LLC 2012           SPRAYED FIRE RESISTIVE MATERIALS
                                                07 81 00 - 2
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012



      D.      SFRM Testing: By a qualified testing and inspecting agency engaged by Contractor or
              manufacturer to test for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test
              methods.
              1.   Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent testing agency which has the experience and
                   capability to conduct satisfactorily the testing indicated without delaying the Work, as
                   documented according to ASTM E 699.
              2.   SFRMs are randomly selected for testing from bags bearing the applicable classification
                   marking of UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
                   jurisdiction.
              3.   Testing is performed on specimens of SFRMs that comply with laboratory testing
                   requirements specified in Part 2 and are otherwise identical to installed fire-resistive
                   materials, including application of accelerant, sealers, topcoats, tamping, troweling,
                   rolling, and water overspray, if any of these are used in final application.
              4.   Testing is performed on specimens whose application the independent testing and
                   inspecting agency witnessed during preparation and conditioning. Include in test reports
                   a full description of preparation and conditioning of laboratory test specimens.

      E.      Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to test
              for compliance with requirements for specified performance and test methods.
              1.    Test for bond per ASTM E 736 and requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" for
                    coating materials. Provide bond strength indicated in referenced fire-resistance design,
                    but not less than minimum specified in Part 2.
              2.    Verify that manufacturer, through its own laboratory testing or field experience, has not
                    found primers or coatings to be incompatible with SFRM.

      F.      Provide fire-resistive products containing no detectable asbestos as determined according to
              the method specified in 40 CFR Part 763, Subpart E, Appendix E, Section 1, Polarized Light Mi-
              croscopy.

      G.      Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to review methods and
              procedures related to SFRM including, but not limited to, the following:
              1.    Review products, design ratings, calculations, densities, thicknesses, bond strengths,
                    and other performance requirements.
              2.    Review and finalize construction schedule and verify sequencing and coordination
                    requirements.
              3.    Review surface conditions and preparations.
              4.    Review field quality-control testing procedures.


1.5           DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

      A.      Deliver products to Project site in original, unopened packages with intact and legible manufac-
              turers' labels identifying product and manufacturer; date of manufacture; shelf life, if applicable;
              and fire-resistance ratings applicable to Project.

      B.      Use materials with limited shelf life within period indicated. Remove from Project site and dis-
              card materials whose shelf life has expired.

      C.      Store materials inside, under cover, aboveground, so they are kept dry until ready for use. Re-
              move from Project site and discard materials that have deteriorated.




© Populous Group, LLC 2012          SPRAYED FIRE RESISTIVE MATERIALS
                                               07 81 00 - 3
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                        DECEMBER 19, 2012



1.6           PERFORMANCE

      A.      Apply SFRM to surfaces and assemblies indicated herein and on the Drawings. Each desig-
              nated surface and assembly shall comply with the following designs listed in UL’s “Fire Re-
              sistance Directory.” Where proprietary designs are indicated, equivalent designs based on test-
              ing of other manufacturers’ products may be installed provided materials comply with basic per-
              formance requirements.
              1.     Type A - Dry interior surfaces concealed from view:
                     a.     Wide flange columns: X772
                     b.     Floor beams and ceilings: N708


1.7           PROJECT CONDITIONS

      A.      Environmental Conditions: Do not install SFRM when ambient or substrate temperatures are 40
              degrees F and falling, unless temporary protection and heat can be provided to maintain tem-
              peratures of both at or above this temperature level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24
              hours after application of SFRM.

      B.      Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of spray fire-resistive materi-
              als. Use natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced air circulation until fire-resistive ma-
              terials dry thoroughly.


1.8           COORDINATION

      A.      Sequence and coordinate application of SFRM with other related work specified in other sec-
              tions to comply with the following requirements:
              1.     Provide temporary enclosure as required to confine spraying operations and protect the
                     environment.
              2.     Provide temporary enclosures to prevent deterioration of interior grade SFRM due to ex-
                     posure to unfavorable environmental conditions. If temporary enclosures are impractica-
                     ble, provide SFRM designed to resist deterioration when exposed to unfavorable envi-
                     ronmental conditions.
              3.     Avoid unnecessary exposure of SFRM to abrasion and other damage likely to occur dur-
                     ing construction operations subsequent to its application.
              4.     Do not begin applying SFRM until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items
                     penetrating fire SFRM are in place to the greatest extent possible. If attachments to pro-
                     tected steel are not installed prior to application of SFRM, damaged sections shall be re-
                     paired with equivalent materials as specified in this section. Prime bare surfaces as rec-
                     ommended by the manufacturer of the SFRM.
              5.     Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying SFRM
                     until fire-protection is completed.
              6.     Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after SFRM have been applied,
                     inspected, tested, and corrections made to defective applications.


1.9           WARRANTY

      A.      General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of
              other rights Owner may have under other provision of the Contract Documents and shall be in
              addition to, and run, concurrently, with other warranties made by Contractor under requirements
              of the Contract Documents.


© Populous Group, LLC 2012          SPRAYED FIRE RESISTIVE MATERIALS
                                               07 81 00 - 4
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                        DECEMBER 19, 2012



      B.      Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by Contractor and cosigned by Installer,
              agreeing to repair or replace SFRM that fail within the specified warranty period.
              1.    Failures include, but are not limited to, cracking, flaking, spalling, or eroding in excess of
                    specified requirements; peeling; or delaminating of SFRM from substrates.
              2.    Not covered under the warranty are failures due to damage by occupants and Owner’s
                    maintenance personnel, exposure to environmental conditions other than those investi-
                    gated and approved during fire-response testing, and other causes not reasonably fore-
                    seeable under conditions of normal use.

      C.      Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1           SPRAYED FIRE RESISTIVE MATERIALS

      A.      Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
              1.   Type A - SFRM for dry interior surfaces concealed from view. Factory-mixed, dry formu-
                   lation of gypsum binders, additives, and lightweight mineral or synthetic aggregates
                   mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar for conveyance and application.
                   a.     Carboline Co., Fireproofing Products Div.; Pyrolite 15.
                   b.     Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn., Construction Products Div.; Monokote Type MK-6.
                   c.     Isolatek International Corp.; Cafco 300.


2.2           AUXILIARY FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS

      A.      General: Provide auxiliary fire-resistive materials that are compatible with SFRM and sub-
              strates; are approved for use indicated by manufacturer of SFRM; and are approved by UL or
              other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire-
              resistance rated designs indicated.

      B.      Adhesive for Bonding Fire-resistive materials: Type recommended by manufacturer of SFRM.

      C.      Substrate Primers: Coordinate the steel primer with the sprayed fire-resistive product. Provide
              a primer that complies with one or more of the following requirements:
              1.    Primer's bond strength complies with requirements specified in UL "Fire Resistance Di-
                    rectory" for coating materials based on a series of bond tests per ASTM E 736.
              2.    Primer is identical to those used in assemblies tested for the fire-test-response character-
                    istics of SFRM, per ASTM E 119, by UL or another testing and inspecting agency ac-
                    ceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

      D.      Metal Lath: Expanded metal lath fabricated from material of weight, configuration and finish re-
              quired to comply with fire-resistive designs indicated and fire-resistive materials manufacturer's
              recommendations. Include clips, lath accessories, corner beads, and other anchorage devices
              required to attach lath to substrates and to receive SFRM.




© Populous Group, LLC 2012          SPRAYED FIRE RESISTIVE MATERIALS
                                               07 81 00 - 5
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                         DECEMBER 19, 2012



PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1           EXAMINATION

      A.      Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with require-
              ments for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of work. A substrate is in satis-
              factory condition if it complies with the following:
              1.     Substrates comply with requirements in the Section in which the substrate and related
                     work is specified.
              2.     Substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale,
                     loose scale, incompatible primers, incompatible paints, incompatible encapsulants, or
                     other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fire-resistive materials with
                     substrates under conditions of normal use or fire exposure.
              3.     Objects penetrating fire-resistive materials, including clips, hangers, support sleeves and
                     similar items have been securely attached to substrates.
              4.     Substrates are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, and other suspended con-
                     struction that could interfere with application of fire-resistive materials.

      B.      Conduct tests according to SFRM manufacturer's written recommendations to verify that sub-
              strates are free of free of substances capable of interfering with bond.

      C.      Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2           PREPARATION

      A.      Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fire-resistive material, including dirt,
              oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, and incompatible
              primers, paints, and encapsulants.

      B.      Prime substrates where recommended by SFRM manufacturer, unless compatible shop primer
              has been applied and is in satisfactory condition to receive SFRM.

      C.      For exposed applications, repair substrates to remove any surface imperfections that could af-
              fect uniformity of texture and thickness in finished surface of SFRM. Remove minor projections
              and fill voids which would telegraph through.

      D.      Cover other work subject to damage from fall-out or over spray of fire-resistive materials during
              application. Provide temporary enclosure as required to confine spraying operations, protect
              the environment, and to ensure maintenance of adequate ambient conditions for temperature
              and ventilation.


3.3           INSTALLATION, GENERAL

      A.      Comply with SFRM manufacturer's instructions for mixing material, application procedures, and
              types of equipment used to mix, convey, and spray on fire-resistive materials; as applicable to
              the particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicat-
              ed.

      B.      Apply SFRM that are identical to products tested as specified in Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Arti-
              cle and substantiated by test reports, with respect to rate of application, accelerator use, seal-


© Populous Group, LLC 2012           SPRAYED FIRE RESISTIVE MATERIALS
                                                07 81 00 - 6
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                        DECEMBER 19, 2012



              ers, topcoats, tamping, troweling, water overspray, or other materials and procedures affecting
              test results.

      C.      Install metal lath, as required, to comply with fire-resistive ratings and written recommendations
              of fire-resistive materials manufacturer for conditions of exposure and intended use. Securely
              attach lath to substrate in position required for support and reinforcement of fire-resistive mate-
              rials. Use anchorage devices of type recommended by fire-resistive materials manufacturer.
              Attach lathing accessories where indicated or required for secure attachment to substrate.

      D.      Coat metal deck substrates with adhesive before applying fire-resistive material where required
              to achieve fire-resistance rating or as recommended in writing by fire-resistive material manu-
              facturer for material and application indicated.

      E.      Extend fire-resistive materials in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protect-
              ed. Unless otherwise recommended by fire-resistive materials manufacturer, install body of
              fireproof covering in a single course.

      F.      Spray apply fire-resistive materials to maximum extent possible.


3.4           FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

      A.      Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
              perform field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.
              1.    Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report whether tested
                    work complies with or deviates from requirements.

      B.      Tests and Inspections: Testing and inspecting of completed applications of SFRM shall take
              place in successive stages, in areas of extent and using methods as follows. Do not proceed
              with application of SFRM for the next area until test results for previously completed
              applications of SFRM show compliance with requirements. Tested values must equal or
              exceed values indicated and required for approved fire-resistance design.
              1.     Thickness for Structural Frame Members: From a sample of 25 percent of structural
                     members per floor, taking 9 measurements at a single cross section for structural frame
                     beams or girders, 7 measurements of a single cross section for joists and trusses, and 12
                     measurements of a single cross section for columns per ASTM E 605.
              2.     Density for Structural Frame Members: At frequency and from sample size indicated for
                     determining thickness of each type of construction and structural framing member, per
                     ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A, Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method."
              3.     Bond Strength for Structural Framing Members: For each 10,000-sq. ft. (929 sq. m) area,
                     or partial area, on each floor, cohesion and adhesion from one sample of size indicated
                     for determining thickness of each type of construction and structural framing member, per
                     ASTM E 736.
                     a.      Field test SFRM that is applied to flanges of wide-flange, structural-steel members
                             on surfaces matching those that will exist for remainder of steel receiving fire-
                             resistive material.
                     b.      If surfaces of structural steel receiving SFRM are primed or otherwise painted for
                             coating materials, perform series of bond tests specified in UL's "Fire Resistance
                             Directory." Provide bond strength indicated in referenced UL fire-resistance
                             criteria, but not less than 300 lbf/sq. ft. (14.4 kPa) minimum per ASTM E 736.
              4.     If testing finds applications of SFRM are not in compliance with requirements, testing and
                     inspecting agency will perform additional random testing to determine extent of
                     noncompliance.


© Populous Group, LLC 2012           SPRAYED FIRE RESISTIVE MATERIALS
                                                07 81 00 - 7
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012



      C.      Remove and replace applications of SFRM that do not pass tests and inspections for cohesion
              and adhesion, for density, or for both and retest as specified above.

      D.      Apply additional SFRM, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results indicate that
              thickness does not comply with specified requirements, and retest as specified above.


3.5           CLEANING, REPAIR, AND PROTECTION

      A.      Cleaning: Immediately after completion of spraying operations in each containable area of Pro-
              ject, remove overspray and fall-out of materials from surfaces of other work and clean exposed
              surfaces to remove evidence of soiling.

      B.      Cure sprayed fire-resistive material according to product manufacturer’s written recommenda-
              tions to prevent premature drying.

      C.      Protect fire-resistive materials according to advice of fire-resistive materials manufacturer and
              Installer, from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that fire-
              resistive materials will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

      D.      Coordinate application of fire-resistive materials with other construction to minimize the need to
              cut or remove fire-protection. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect fire-
              resistive materials and patch areas which have been removed or damaged.

      E.      Repair or replace work that has not been successfully protected.


END OF SECTION




© Populous Group, LLC 2012          SPRAYED FIRE RESISTIVE MATERIALS
                                               07 81 00 - 8
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

SECTION 07 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1           SUMMARY

      A.      This Section covers the design, materials, and installation requirements for sealing penetrations
              through fire-rated walls, floors, ceilings, and other area separations. Each penetration shall be
              designed and installed to comply with an assembly tested in accordance with an accredited
              testing agency.

      B.      Firestopping at fire rated construction includes, but is not limited to, the following:
              1.     Ductwork, conduits, piping, wiring, and other penetrations through rated floor slabs, roof
                     slabs, and walls.
              2.     Blank or empty openings in fire-rated floor, roof and wall assemblies.
              3.     Openings where floor slabs meet exterior walls, including the inside of hollow curtain
                     walls and the openings within perimeter heating units.
              4.     At expansion joints in rated floor slabs, roofs, and walls.
              5.     Other locations indicated on the Drawings or otherwise specified.

      C.      Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
              1.    Division 07 Section “Building Insulation” for general non-rated insulation materials.
              2.    Division 07 Section “Sprayed Fire Resistive Materials” for spray applied fire resistive ma-
                    terials for structural steel and metal deck surfaces.
              3.    Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants” for non-rated sealing and caulking materials.


1.2           PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

      A.      Firestopping consists of materials, or combinations of materials, to form an effective barrier
              against spread of flame and hot gases, and to maintain integrity of fire rated construction.

      B.      Systems shall be capable of preventing passage of smoke, flame and hot gases sufficient to ig-
              nite cotton waste, when tested in accordance with ASTM E814.

      C.      Where required by code, firestopping shall conform to flame (F) and temperature (T) ratings as
              tested by nationally accepted test agencies in accordance with ASTM E814 or UL 1479.
              1.     “F” rating shall be a minimum of one hour but not less than the fire resistance rating of
                     assembly being penetrated.
              2.     “T” rating shall be based on temperature rise on penetrating item.

      D.      Materials shall be compatible with one another and with other specified items with which they
              may come in contact, and shall not cause corrosion of penetrating items.

      E.      Materials shall be free of asbestos or PCB’s and non-toxic to human beings at all stages of ap-
              plication.

      F.      Materials shall remain sufficiently flexible after installation to accommodate expected vibration
              and movement between penetrating items and floor, roof or wall assemblies.

      G.      Caulk, foam, and putty materials shall be autobonding to permit changes to penetrating items.




© Populous Group, LLC 2012                       FIRESTOPPING
                                                   07 84 00 - 1
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

      H.      Intumescent materials shall be capable of expanding up to 10 times when exposed to tempera-
              tures over 250 degrees F.

      I.      Caulk, foam, putty, and intumescent materials shall be UL classified in through-penetration fire-
              stop systems in accordance with UL 1479 (ASTM E814).


1.3           SUBMITTALS

      A.      Systems Data: Comprehensive and organized bound brochures addressing each applicable
              firestopping condition.
              1.     Submit product data for each material required showing characteristics, performance,
                     and limitations.
              2.     Systems Schedules: Provide data on the Firestopping Schedules located at the end of
                     this Section. Complete and certify each schedule for each condition.

      B.      The manufacturer shall review and provide a letter of certification stating that the information in-
              cluded in the submitted Firestopping Schedules has been reviewed and is accurate and that the
              assemblies noted have been tested according to U.L., WHI, or other accepted testing agency
              for the required ratings.

      C.      For unusual penetrations which have no formal tested assembly, the Firestopping manufacturer
              shall submit engineering judgments on how most appropriately the required ratings may be
              achieved.

      D.      Provide copies of all tested assemblies appropriately organized with the penetration schedule
              with which they refer and any installation instructions which the manufacturer provides.

      E.      Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

      F.      Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating firestopping has been installed in compliance with
              requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations.

      G.      Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
              testing agency, for firestopping.


1.4           QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.      Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing firestopping similar in material, design,
              and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a rec-
              ord of successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff,
              and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's will-
              ingness to sell its firestopping products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does
              not in itself confer qualification on buyer.

      B.      Installation of firestopping materials shall be performed by a single installer with 5 years of de-
              monstrable experience on projects of similar size, scope, and complexity. Installer shall be ac-
              ceptable to the Firestopping manufacturer.

      C.      Firestopping materials shall be products of a single manufacturer. Variations to this require-
              ment will only be made for special and unique conditions requiring the use of exotic and unusual
              methods.




© Populous Group, LLC 2012                        FIRESTOPPING
                                                    07 84 00 - 2
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                     DECEMBER 19, 2012

      D.      Provide the services of a manufacturer’s technical representative to review the field mock up
              construction samples and at other times during the construction as requested by the Architect
              for review of odd, unusual or suspect installations. The manufacturer’s representative shall is-
              sue a written report accepting or rejecting the mockup installations with appropriate comments
              to the Architect

      E.      Firestopping and firesafing system products shall bear classification marking of a qualified and
              accepted testing and inspection laboratory.

      F.      Owner will provide the services of an independent and qualified inspection agency. Provide ac-
              cess, notify inspection agency, and receive approval prior to enclosure. Replace any penetra-
              tions deemed unacceptable.

      G.      Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Firestopping shall comply with the following requirements:
              1.    Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities
                    having jurisdiction. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:
                    a.     Firestopping products bear classification marking of qualified testing and
                           inspecting agency.
                    b.     Classification markings on firestopping correspond to designations listed by the
                           following:
                           1)     UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."
                           2)     Intertek ETL SEMKO in its "Directory of Listed Building Products."
                           3)     FM Global in its "Building Materials Approval Guide."

      H.      Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


1.5           REGULATORY REQUIREMENT

      A.      Except where ASTM E814/UL 1479 or ASTM E119/UL263 are specified, conform to applicable
              codes, in accordance with ASTM E84


1.6           FIELD SAMPLES

      A.      Provide typical samples of each generic type and condition of firestopping.

      B.      Approved samples may remain part of the work.


1.7           DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

      A.      Do not apply materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below 50 de-
              grees F, unless otherwise permitted by manufacturer. Maintain this minimum temperature be-
              fore, during, and for 3 days after installation.

      B.      Environmental Limitations: Do not install firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures
              are outside limits permitted by firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet because
              of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

      C.      Install and cure firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of
              ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.




© Populous Group, LLC 2012                       FIRESTOPPING
                                                   07 84 00 - 3
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                      DECEMBER 19, 2012

1.8           COORDINATION

      A.      Firestopping assemblies shall be reviewed as part of the coordination of the project.

      B.      Review actual required clearances for assemblies including sleeves, pipe supports, devices and
              any other aspect of firesafing not intended for view in finished spaces to confirm proper clear-
              ances.

      C.      Special attention shall be paid to constructability of firestopping at large ductwork, electrical
              conduit banks, and other construction whereby improper sequencing would preclude access for
              proper firestopping.

      D.      Limit to the greatest extent practicable penetrations to a single sleeve. Avoid block-outs for
              multiple penetrations to as great an extent as possible.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1           MANUFACTURERS

      A.      Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
              following:
              1.     A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.
              2.     Grace Construction Products.
              3.     Hilti, Inc.
              4.     Johns Manville.
              5.     Nelson Firestop Products.
              6.     RectorSeal Corporation.
              7.     Specified Technologies Inc.
              8.     3M Fire Protection Products.
              9.     Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group.
              10.    USG Corporation.


2.2           MATERIALS

      A.      Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorpo-
              rated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following

      B.      Firestopping materials
              1.     Firestop Mortars:
                     a.     Hilti “FS 635 Trowelable Firestop Compound”.
                     b.     Tremco “Tremstop M”.
                     c.     USG “Firecode” Compound”.
                     d.     3M Fire Barrier Mortar.
                     e.     STI Specseal Mortar.
              2.     Unfaced Mineral Fiber: ASTM C665 and ASTM E136; for concealed applications.
                     a.     2.5 to 4 pounds per cubic foot density; flame spread 15, smoke developed 0, when
                            tested in accordance with ASTM E84; melt point 2000 degrees F minimum when
                            tested in accordance with ASTM C24. Use with firestop caulk.
                            1)      Provide manufacturer’s standard impaling clips.
                                    a)    USG “Thermafiber FS-15 Commercial Blankets”.
              3.     Foil Faced Mineral Fiber: ASTM C665 and ASTM E136; for exposed applications



© Populous Group, LLC 2012                       FIRESTOPPING
                                                   07 84 00 - 4
                                     GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                      DECEMBER 19, 2012

                       a.     3 pounds per cubic foot density; flame spread 25, smoke developed 0, when test-
                              ed in accordance with ASTM E84; melt point 2000 degrees F minimum when test-
                              ed in accordance with ASTM C24. Use with firestop caulk.
                              1)      Provide manufacturer’s standard impaling clips.
                                      a)      USG “Thermafiber FS-25 Commercial Blankets”.
              4.       Firestop Sealants and Caulks:
                       a.     STI LC150 sealant.
                       b.     3M “Firestop Foam”.
                       c.     BIO Fireshield “Biotherm 100” or “Biotherm 200” as applicable.
                       d.     STI Specseal Pensil 100 and 300 SL silicone sealant.
                       e.     Hilti “CP-601S Elastomeric Firestop Sealant” or CP-606 Flexible Firestop Sealant”
                              as applicable.
                       f.     Nelson “CLK Firestop Sealant”.
                       g.     3M “Silicone Fire Stop Sealant”.
                       h.     Tremco “FYRE-Sil” or “FYRE-Sil-SL”, Tremstop Acrylic, Dymeric, Dymeric 511.
              5.       Firestop Foam:
                       a.     Two part liquid product; flame spread 15 when tested in accordance with ASTM E
                              84. After dispensing, foam shall be fully expanded in 5 minutes, fully cured in 24
                              hours. Approximate density 16 pounds per cubic foot, with uniform cell structure.
                              1)      STI Specseal Pensil 200 foam.
                              2)      3M “Firestop Foam”.
              6.       High Temperature Firestop caulk:
                       a.     One part product; flame spread 0, smoke developed 0, fuel contributed 0 when
                              tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
                              1)      The Carborundum Company “Fyreputty”.
                              2)      Tremco “FYRE-Shield”.
                              3)      3M “Firemaster” mastic and putty.
              7.       Intumescent sealants and caulks:
                       a.     One part product
                              1)      Hilti “FS One High Performance Intumescent Firestop”.
                              2)      Metacaulk “835”.
                              3)      3M “Fire Barrier CP-25WB Caulk”.
                              4)      STI Specseal Series 100 sealant.
              8.       Intumescent Putty or Mastic:
                       a.     One component moldable compound
                              1)      Hilti “CP 617 and CP617L.”
                              2)      3M “Fire Barrier Moldable Putty”.
                              3)      STI Specseal Firestop putty bars and pads.”
                              4)      Nelson “FSP Firestop Putty”
                              5)      Tremco “Tremstop WBM”.
                              6)      Tremco “Tremstop FP” with “Tremstop M”.
              9.       Intumescent sheet:
                       a.     Self-supporting board or panel.
                              1)      3M “CS-195 + Composite sheet”.
                       b.     Tremco “Tremstop WS”.
              10.      Intumescent Pipe Wrap:
                       a.     3M “FS-195 Wrap Strip”.
                       b.     Specseal gray, blue or red wrap strip.
              11.      Intumescent Sleeves, Collars, and Plastic Pipe Devices:
                       a.     Shop or field fabricated; heavy gauge galvanized steel with intumescent liner.
                              1)      Bio Fireshield “Bio Firestop Sleeve”.
                              2)      Hilti “CP 642 or CP643, Firestop Collar.”
                              3)      3M “Plastic Pipe Device”.
                              4)      Tremco “Tremstop MCR/WS”, Tremstop D, Trestop Fyrecan, Tremstop
                                      Fyrecan sleeve.
                              5)      STI Specseal Firestop Collars.

© Populous Group, LLC 2012                         FIRESTOPPING
                                                     07 84 00 - 5
                                     GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

              12.      Seal Bags
                       a.    IPC “KBS Sealbags”.
                       b.    Metacaulk :910.
                       c.    Nelson “PLW Firestop Pillow”.
                       d.    Tremco “Tremstop PS”.
                       e.    STI Specseal firestop pillows.
              13.      Intumescent Cable Management Devices:
                       a.    Rectangular metal frame with intumescent elastomer modules grooved to fit snugly
                             around cables, pipes or conduits passing through the frame. Provide “EMCT”
                             components for EMI/EMP enhancement for sensitive electronic equipment.] Nel-
                             son “MCT” or “MPS” as applicable


2.3           SAFING INSULATION AND ACCESSORIES

      A.      Slag-Wool-Fiber Board Safing Insulation: Semirigid boards designed for use as fire stop at
              openings between edge of slab and exterior wall panels, produced by combining slag-wool
              fibers with thermosetting resin binders to comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA and IB; nominal
              density of 4 lb/cu. ft. (64 kg/cu. m); passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics; thermal
              resistivity of 4 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (27.7 K x m/W at 24 deg C).

      B.      Calking Compound: Material approved by manufacturer of safing insulation for sealing joint
              between foil backing of safing insulation and edge of concrete floor slab against penetration of
              smoke.

      C.      Safing Clips: Galvanized steel safing clips approved by manufacturer of safing insulation for
              holding safing insulation in place.


2.4           ACCESSORIES/OTHER MATERIALS

      A.      All accessories shall be the products of the firestopping manufacturer unless otherwise accept-
              ed by the Architect, due to unusual conditions.

      B.      Packing material:
              1.    Unfaced mineral wool: 4 pcf, suitable for friction fit in voids. Do not use glass fiber.
              2.    Other forming and backing materials: As recommended by firestopping manufacturer.

      C.      Primers, sealers, foil tape and solvent cleaners: As recommended by firestopping manufacturer
              for specific substrate surfaces.

      D.      Provide galvanized steel fasteners, restraining collars, and clips as required to hold firestopping
              products and backing materials firmly in place.

      E.      Provide protective covers, escutcheons, or devices for soft firestopping products which will be
              left exposed to view in finished construction.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1           INSPECTION

      A.      Verify that penetrating items are in place and ready to receive firestopping.



© Populous Group, LLC 2012                        FIRESTOPPING
                                                    07 84 00 - 6
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                        DECEMBER 19, 2012

      B.      Verify that field configurations match those noted in the tested assembly.

      C.      Verify that mockup samples have been accepted prior to beginning work.


3.2           INSTALLATION

      A.      Install backing materials, forms, clips, and other items as required to hold firestopping materials
              in place.

      B.      Unfaced mineral fiber backing material: Use mineral fiber to seal gaps between tops of parti-
              tions and decks, between tops of beams and decks, as a backing material for firestopping seal-
              ants and caulks, and elsewhere as permitted by code. Pack mineral fiber tightly into voids. In-
              stall firestopping sealant over backing material. Do not use unfaced mineral fiber by itself for
              firestopping purposes.

      C.      Foil faced mineral fiber: At opening where floor slabs meet exterior walls, install foil faced min-
              eral fiber, foil side up. Cover foil completely with firestop caulk.

      D.      Use foam, sealant, mortar or ceramic fiber putty to seal duct, conduit, and metal pipe penetra-
              tions through rated construction. Use flexible sealant around all ductwork, piping and any other
              penetrating item which is subject to movement or vibration.
              1.     Seal ceiling penetrations from exposed side only. Seal wall penetrations on both side.
              2.     Fill voids behind firestopping with mineral fiber backing material.
              3.     Seal space between penetrating element and sleeve or collar. Seal space between
                     sleeve, collar, or penetrating element and adjacent construction.

      E.      Use firestop sealant, caulk or foam at construction joints between walls/ceiling, wall/wall, and
              wall/floor as required by rating requirements.

      F.      Intumescent Firestopping:
              1.    Use intumescent materials where non-metal piping penetrates rated construction or
                    where fiberglass insulation is required to be continuous through rated construction.
              2.    Where non-metal pipe penetrations are too large to be firestopped by other means, or
                    where polypropylene pipe penetrates rated construction, use intumescent devices or pipe
                    wrap in telescoping configuration.
              3.    Use moldable putty pads or composite sheet to firestop the backs of electrical boxes,
                    valve boxes, light fixtures and other installed items which exceed the following require-
                    ments for penetrations in one face of gypsum board walls
                    a.    Any penetration greater than 16 square inches in one face of rated wall area.
                    b.    Any aggregate penetrations greater than 100 square inches in 100 square feet of
                          rated wall area
                    c.    Any penetrations which occur on opposite faces of rated construction which fall
                          within 24 inches horizontally of each other.
              4.    Intumescent materials are approved for use in lieu of or in addition to other firestopping
                    a.    After installation and curing, remove backing materials which are not fire-resistive.
                    b.    Install protective covers or devices


3.3           INSTALLATION OF SAFING INSULATION

      A.      Install safing insulation to fill gap between edge of concrete floor slab and back of exterior
              spandrel panels on safing clips spaced as needed to support insulation, but not further apart
              than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. Cut safing insulation wider than gap to be filled to ensure



© Populous Group, LLC 2012                        FIRESTOPPING
                                                    07 84 00 - 7
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                      DECEMBER 19, 2012

              compression fit and seal joint between insulation and edge of slab with calking approved by
              safing insulation manufacturer for this purpose. Leave no voids in completed installation.


3.4           FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

      A.      Inspecting agency employed and paid by owner will examine completed firestopping to deter-
              mine, in general, if it is being installed in compliance with requirements.

      B.      Inspecting agency will report observations promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

      C.      Do not proceed to enclose Firestopping with other construction until reports of examination are
              issued

      D.      Where deficiencies are found repair or replace firestopping so that it complies with require-
              ments.


3.5           CLEANING

      A.      Clean off excess fill materials and sealants adjacent to openings and joints as work progress by
              methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of firestopping products in
              which opening and joints occur.

      B.      Protect Firestopping during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances
              or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without
              deterioration or damage at time of Substantial completion. If, despite such protection, damage
              or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated firestopping immediately
              and install new materials to produce firestopping complying with specified requirements.


PART 4 - SCHEDULE


4.1           FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE

      A.      Complete the following schedules and provide written certification from the manufacturer.
              Submit according to the provisions of this Section.




© Populous Group, LLC 2012                       FIRESTOPPING
                                                   07 84 00 - 8
                                  GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                             DECEMBER 19, 2012

SINGLE UNINSULATED METALLIC PIPING & CONDUIT
Manufacturer/Product Name:
Color:
Accessories:

Wall or                                                                          Firestop    Tested
                                         Sleeve    “F”        “T”     Annular
Floor                                                                             Thick-    Assembly
                Item Size/ Description    Type    Rating     Rating    Space
Const.                                                                             ness      Number




MULTIPLE UNINSULATED METALLIC PIPING & CONDUIT
Manufacturer/Product Name:
Color:
Accessories:

Wall or                                                                          Firestop    Tested
                                         Sleeve    “F”        “T”     Annular
Floor           Item Size/ Description                                            Thick-    Assembly
                                          Type    Rating     Rating    Space
Const.                                                                             ness      Number




© Populous Group, LLC 2012                  FIRESTOPPING
                                              07 84 00 - 9
                                  GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                    DECEMBER 19, 2012

UNINSULATED PLASTIC PIPING & CONDUIT
Manufacturer/Product Name:
Color:
Accessories:

Wall or                                                                                 Firestop    Tested
                                              Sleeve      “F”      “T”       Annular
Floor                                                                                    Thick-    Assembly
                 Item Size/ Description        Type      Rating   Rating      Space
Const.                                                                                    ness      Number




GLASS PIPING
Manufacturer/Product Name:
Color:
Accessories:

Wall or                                                                                    Tested
                    Sleeve Type       “F”        “T”        Annular         Firestop
Floor                                                                                     Assembly
                                     Rating     Rating       Space         Thickness
Const.                                                                                     Number




© Populous Group, LLC 2012                      FIRESTOPPING
                                                  07 84 00 - 10
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                              DECEMBER 19, 2012

INSULATED METALLIC PIPING
Manufacturer/Product Name:
Color:
Accessories:

Wall or                                                                              Tested
                    Sleeve Type       “F”       “T”       Annular     Firestop
Floor                                                                               Assembly
                                     Rating    Rating      Space     Thickness
Const.                                                                               Number




BLANKS, VOIDS, HOLES
Manufacturer/Product Name:
Color:
Accessories:

Wall or                                                          Firestop    Tested
                                               “F”       “T”
Floor                        Size                                 Thick-    Assembly
                                              Rating    Rating
Const.                                                             ness      Number




© Populous Group, LLC 2012                     FIRESTOPPING
                                                 07 84 00 - 11
                                  GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                              DECEMBER 19, 2012

INSULATED HIGH TEMPERATURE FLUES & EXHAUST PIPES
(Boiler flues, generator exhausts insulated with calcium silicate or other non-combustible insula-
tion)
Manufacturer/Product Name:
Color:
Accessories:

Wall or                                                                Annular    Firestop    Tested
                                          Sleeve    “F”        “T”
Floor.            Item Size/Description                                 Space      Thick-    Assembly
                                           Type    Rating     Rating
Const.                                                                  Range       ness      Number




ELECTRICAL/TELEPHONE CABLE
Cable Type:
Manufacturer/Product Name:
Color:
Accessories:

Wall or                                   Sleeve                                  Firestop    Tested
                                                    “F”        “T”     Annular
Floor.              Single or Bundled      Type                                    Thick-    Assembly
                                                   Rating     Rating    Space
Const.                                                                              ness     Number.




© Populous Group, LLC 2012                  FIRESTOPPING
                                              07 84 00 - 12
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                DECEMBER 19, 2012

CABLE TRAY
Manufacturer/Product Name:
Color:
Accessories:

Wall or                                                                  Annular     Firestop    Tested
                                           Sleeve     “F”       “T”
Floor.            Item Size/Description                                   Space       Thick-    Assembly
                                            Type     Rating    Rating
Const.                                                                    Range        ness      Number




BUS DUCT
Manufacturer/Product Name:
Color:
Accessories:

Wall or                                                                   Firestop      Tested
                                             “F”      “T”      Annular
Floor              Item Size/Description                                   Thick-      Assembly
                                            Rating   Rating     Space
Const.                                                                      ness       Number.




© Populous Group, LLC 2012                   FIRESTOPPING
                                               07 84 00 - 13
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                DECEMBER 19, 2012

FIRE RATED JOINTS
Manufacturer/Product Name:
Color:
Accessories:

                                                                                      Tested
                                               “F”       “T”            Firestop
Joint Description                                                                    Assembly
                                              Rating   Rating          Thickness
                                                                                     Number.




MISCELLANEOUS PENETRATIONS
Manufacturer/Product Name:
Color:
Accessories:

Wall or                                                                  Annular   Firestop    Tested
                                          Sleeve    “F”        “T”
Floor.            Item Size/Description                                   Space     Thick-    Assembly
                                           Type    Rating     Rating
Const.                                                                    Range      ness      Number




© Populous Group, LLC 2012                  FIRESTOPPING
                                              07 84 00 - 14
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                              DECEMBER 19, 2012

ENGINEERING JUDGMENTS/
OVERSIZE OR UNUSUAL CONDITIONS
(Submit Actual Installation Drawing and Letter of Certification)
Manufacturer/Product Name:
Color:
Accessories:

Wall or                                                                Annular    Firestop   Packing
                                          Sleeve    “F”        “T”
Floor.               Item Description                                   Space      Thick-     Thick-
                                           Type    Rating     Rating
Const.                                                                  Range       ness       ness




END OF SECTION




© Populous Group, LLC 2012                  FIRESTOPPING
                                              07 84 00 - 15
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                        DECEMBER 19, 2012

SECTION 07 92 00 – JOINT SEALANTS


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1           SUMMARY

      A.      This Section includes joint sealants for the following locations:
              1.    Single-Part Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealants:
                    a.     Exterior joints in the following vertical and horizontal nontraffic surfaces and
                           horizontal traffic surfaces:
                           1)     Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete.
                           2)     Joints between different concrete and masonry materials.
                           3)     Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors,
                                  windows, and louvers.
                           4)     Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
                           5)     Joints between tops of non-load-bearing unit masonry walls and underside
                                  of cast-in-place concrete slabs and beams.
                           6)     Joints between dissimilar materials.
                           7)     Other joints as indicated.
                    b.     Interior joints:
                           1)     Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
                           2)     Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
                           3)     Vertical control joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry walls and
                                  partitions.
                           4)     Joints between dissimilar materials.
                           5)     Other joints as indicated.
              2.    One part Mildew-Resistant Silicone: Interior joints in wet areas. Typical locations include,
                    but are not limited to, the following:
                    a.     Control and expansion joints in or around surfaces of ceramic tile, solid surfacing
                           materials, and plastic laminate in toilet rooms, showers, locker rooms, bars, and
                           kitchens, and other areas subject to moisture and mildew.
              3.    Latex: Interior joints in field-painted vertical and overhead gypsum board surfaces;
                    perimeters of hollow metal frames within interior partitions; all other interior locations not
                    indicated otherwise.


1.2           PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

      A.      Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous
              joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.

      B.      Provide elastomeric joint sealants that are water, ozone, chemical, and UV resistant and will not
              detrimentally affect joint substrates.

      C.      Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-
              resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.


1.3           SUBMITTALS

      A.      Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.




© Populous Group, LLC 2012                       JOINT SEALANTS
                                                    07 92 00 - 1
                                      GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                        DECEMBER 19, 2012

              1.       Certification by joint sealant manufacturer that sealants, primers, and cleaners required
                       for complete installation comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic
                       compounds (VOC).

      B.      Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips or beads of cured
              sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

      C.      Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint sealants
              in 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide joints formed between two 6-inch- (150-mm-) long strips of material
              matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

      D.      Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of joint sealants certifying that products
              furnished comply with requirements and are suitable for the use indicated.

      E.      SWRI Validation Certificate: For each elastomeric sealant specified to be validated by Sealant
              Validation Program as provided by Sealant, Waterproofing and Restoration Institute (SWRI).

      F.      Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
              demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
              names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
              specified.

      G.      Preconstruction Field Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods
              resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on preconstruction testing specified in
              "Quality Assurance" Article.

      H.      Field Test Report Log: For each elastomeric sealant application. Include information specified
              in "Field Quality Control" Article.

      I.      Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer indicating the following:
              1.  Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for
                  compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.
              2.  Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate
                  preparation needed for adhesion.

      J.      Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating sealants comply with
              requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current product formulations.

      K.      Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


1.4           QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.      Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint sealants
              similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has
              resulted in joint-sealant installations with a record of successful in-service performance.

      B.      Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single
              manufacturer.

      C.      Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint sealant manufacturers, for
              testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.
              1.     Use manufacturers standard test methods to determine whether priming and other
                     specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of
                     joint sealants to joint substrates.

© Populous Group, LLC 2012                        JOINT SEALANTS
                                                     07 92 00 - 2
                                      GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                         DECEMBER 19, 2012

                       a.     Perform tests under environmental conditions replicating those that will exist during
                              installation.
              2.       Submit not fewer than nine pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates,
                       shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.
              3.       Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
              4.       For materials failing tests, obtain joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions for
                       corrective measures, including the use of specially formulated primers.
              5.       Testing will not be required if joint sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data
                       that are based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and
                       compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted.

    D.        Product Testing: Obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in "Submittals"
              Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-
              month period.
              1.     Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to
                     ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to
                     ASTM E 548.
              2.     Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to
                     ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods.
              3.     Test elastomeric joint sealants according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for
                     compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920 for adhesion and
                     cohesion under cyclic movement, low temperature flexibility, modulus of elasticity at 100
                     percent strain, effects of heat aging, effects of accelerated weathering, adhesion-in peel,
                     and indentation hardness.
                     a.     Test new and aged sealants
              4.     Test other joint sealants for compliance with requirements indicated by referencing
                     standard specifications and test methods.

    E.        Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their
              adhesion to joint substrates as follows:
              1.    Locate test joints where indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
              2.    Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:
                    a.     Each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.
                    b.     Each type of nonelastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.
              3.    Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be
                    erected.
              4.    Arrange for tests to take place with joint sealant manufacturer's technical representative
                    present.
              5.    Test Method: Test joint sealants by hand-pull method described below:
                    a.     Install joint sealants in 60-inch- (1500-mm-) long joints using same materials and
                           methods for joint preparation and joint-sealant installation required for the
                           completed Work. Allow sealants to cure fully before testing.
                    b.     Make knife cuts from one side of joint to the other, followed by two cuts
                           approximately 2 inches (50 mm) long at sides of joint and meeting cross cut at one
                           end. Place a mark 1 inch (25 mm) from cross-cut end of 2-inch (50-mm) piece.
                    c.     Use fingers to grasp 2-inch (50-mm) piece of sealant between cross-cut end and
                           1-inch (25-mm) mark; pull firmly at a 90-degree angle or more in direction of side
                           cuts while holding a ruler along side of sealant. Pull sealant out of joint to the
                           distance recommended by sealant manufacturer for testing adhesive capability,
                           but not less than that equaling specified maximum movement capability in
                           extension; hold this position for 10 seconds.
                    d.     For joints with dissimilar substrates, check adhesion to each substrate separately.
                           Do this by extending cut along one side, checking adhesion to opposite side, and
                           then repeating this procedure for opposite side.
              6.    Report whether sealant in joint connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint
                    substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of

© Populous Group, LLC 2012                        JOINT SEALANTS
                                                     07 92 00 - 3
                                      GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                        DECEMBER 19, 2012

                       product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory
                       adhesion is obtained.
              7.       Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing
                       adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with
                       requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to
                       joint substrates during testing.


1.5           DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

      A.      Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating
              manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and
              mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.

      B.      Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent
              their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other
              causes.


1.6           PROJECT CONDITIONS

      A.      Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following
              conditions:
              1.     When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint
                     sealant manufacturer.
              2.     When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint
                     sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C).
              3.     When joint substrates are wet.

      B.      Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are
              less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.

      C.      Joint-Substrate Conditions:
              1.     Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering
                     with adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
              2.     Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants if joint substrates are irregular, chipped,
                     spalled, or otherwise unsuitable for long term adhesion.


1.7           WARRANTY

      A.      General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other
              rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in
              addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of
              the Contract Documents.

      B.      Special Installer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by Installer agreeing to repair or replace
              elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified
              in this Section within specified warranty period.
              1.      Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

      C.      Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by elastomeric sealant
              manufacturer agreeing to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not
              comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified
              warranty period.

© Populous Group, LLC 2012                        JOINT SEALANTS
                                                     07 92 00 - 4
                                     GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                        DECEMBER 19, 2012

              1.       Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

      D.      Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint
              sealants from the following:
              1.    Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant
                    manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by
                    structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction.
              2.    Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.
              3.    Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
              4.    Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric
                    contaminants.


1.8           SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

      A.      Schedule installations of joint sealants to occur not less than 21 days nor more than 30 days
              after completion of waterproofing or sealing of substrates unless otherwise indicated.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1           JOINT SEALER MATERIALS

      A.      Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each
              liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920
              classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

      B.      Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified for use on
              porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248
              and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

      C.      Single-Component Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant:
              1.    Basis-of-Design Product: The design is based on Dow Corning “795.” Subject to
                    compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product
                    by one of the other specified manufacturers. Comparable products are subject to review
                    and approval through the submittal process specified. Other manufacturers that may be
                    considered include the following:
                    a.     GE Silicones.
                    b.     Pecora Corporation.
                    c.     Tremco.
              2.    Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
              3.    Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
              4.    Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates
                    indicated, O.
              5.    Stain-Test-Response Characteristics:        Nonstaining to porous substrates per
                    ASTM C 1248.

      D.      Single-Component Non-Sag Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant:
              1.    Basis-of-Design Product: The design is based on Dow Corning “NS Parking Structure
                    Sealant.” Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or
                    a comparable product by one of the other specified manufacturers. Comparable products
                    are subject to review and approval through the submittal process specified. Other
                    manufacturers that may be considered include the following:
                    a.    GE Silicones.


© Populous Group, LLC 2012                       JOINT SEALANTS
                                                    07 92 00 - 5
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                  DECEMBER 19, 2012

                       b.     Pecora Corporation.
                       c.     Tremco.
              2.       Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
              3.       Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic) and T (traffic).
              4.       Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates
                       indicated, O.
              5.       Stain-Test-Response Characteristics:       Nonstaining to porous substrates per
                       ASTM C 1248.

    E.        Single-Component Self-Leveling Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant:
              1.    Basis-of-Design Product: The design is based on Dow Corning “SL Parking Structure
                    Sealant.” Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or
                    a comparable product by one of the other specified manufacturers. Comparable products
                    are subject to review and approval through the submittal process specified. Other
                    manufacturers that may be considered include the following:
                    a.    GE Silicones.
                    b.    Pecora Corporation.
                    c.    Tremco.
              2.    Type and Grade: S (single component).
              3.    Class: 100/50.
              4.    Uses Related to Exposure: NT and T (traffic).
              5.    Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M and O, as applicable to joint substrates indicated.
              6.    Use O Joint Substrates: Galvanized steel and structural steel.

    F.        Single-Component Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant (Non-Porous surfaces):
              1.    Basis-of-Design Product: The design is based on Dow Corning “799.” Subject to
                    compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product
                    by one of the other specified manufacturers. Comparable products are subject to review
                    and approval through the submittal process specified. Other manufacturers that may be
                    considered include the following:
                    a.     GE Silicones.
                    b.     Pecora Corporation.
                    c.     Tremco.
              2.    Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
              3.    Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
              4.    Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates
                    indicated, O.

    G.        Single Component Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant:
              1.    Basis-of-Design Product: The design is based on Dow Corning "786 Mildew Resistant.”
                    Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a
                    comparable product by one of the other specified manufacturers. Comparable products
                    are subject to review and approval through the submittal process specified. Other
                    manufacturers that may be considered include the following:
                    a.    GE Silicones.
                    b.    Pecora Corporation.
                    c.    Tremco.

    H.        Single Component Acrylic Latex Sealant:
              1.    Basis-of-Design Product: The design is based on Tremco "Tremflex 834.” Subject to
                    compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product
                    by one of the other specified manufacturers. Comparable products are subject to review
                    and approval through the submittal process specified. Other manufacturers that may be
                    considered include the following:
                    a.    Dow Corning


© Populous Group, LLC 2012                     JOINT SEALANTS
                                                  07 92 00 - 6
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                          DECEMBER 19, 2012

                       b.    GE Silicones.
                       c.    Pecora Corporation.


2.2           JOINT SEALER MATERIALS

      A.      Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible
              with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
              demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

      B.      VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers for use inside the
              weatherproofing system that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated
              according to 40 CFR 59, Part 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
              1.    Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.
              2.    Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
              3.    Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

      C.      Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following:
              1.    Match existing installation of adjacent or similar construction.

      D.      Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing elastomeric
              sealants that comply with ASTM C 920.

      E.      Latex Sealant: Provide product complying with ASTM C 834 that accommodates joint
              movement of not more than 5 percent in both extension and compression for a total of 10
              percent.


2.3           JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

      A.      General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible
              with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications
              indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

      B.      Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of type indicated below and of size and density to
              control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:
              1.    Type C: Closed-cell material with a surface skin.
              2.    Type B: Bicellular material with a surface skin.
              3.    Type: Either material indicated above.

      C.      Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant
              manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint
              surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-
              adhesive tape where applicable.


2.4           MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

      A.      Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
              sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate
              tests and field tests.

      B.      Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants
              and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or



© Populous Group, LLC 2012                         JOINT SEALANTS
                                                      07 92 00 - 7
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                         DECEMBER 19, 2012

              harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to
              promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates.

      C.      Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
              adjacent to joints.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1           EXAMINATION

      A.      Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
              requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-
              sealant performance.

      B.      Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until unsatisfactory conditions have been
              corrected.


3.2           PREPARATION

      A.      Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
              comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
              1.    Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of
                    joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
                    approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint
                    sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
              2.    Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical
                    abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate
                    capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles
                    remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free
                    compressed air.
              3.    Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
              4.    Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm
                    substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.

      B.      Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or
              prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
              Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining
              surfaces.

      C.      Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining
              surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by
              cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling
              without disturbing joint seal.


3.3           INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

      A.      General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products
              and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

      B.      Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
              sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

© Populous Group, LLC 2012                       JOINT SEALANTS
                                                    07 92 00 - 8
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

      C.      Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position
              required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint
              widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
              1.      Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
              2.      Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
              3.      Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application
                      and replace them with dry materials.

      D.      Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between
              sealants and back of joints.

      E.      Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time
              backings are installed:
              1.     Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
              2.     Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration.
              3.     Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
                     optimum sealant movement capability.

      F.      Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
              curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform
              beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of
              sealant with sides of joint.
              1.     Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint.
              2.     Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
                     discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
              3.     Provide concave joint configuration in accordance with ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise
                     indicated.
              4.     Provide flush joint configuration in accordance with ASTM C 1193, where indicated.
              5.     Provide recessed joint configuration in accordance with ASTM C 1193, of recess depth
                     and at locations indicated.
                     a.     Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints.


3.4           FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

      A.      Field-Adhesion Testing: Field-test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:
              1.     Extent of Testing: Test completed elastomeric sealant joints as follows:
                     a.    Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length for each type of
                           elastomeric sealant and joint substrate.
                     b.    Perform one test for each 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length thereafter or one test
                           per each floor per elevation.
              2.     Test Method: Test joint sealants by hand-pull method described below:
                     a.    Make knife cuts from one side of joint to the other, followed by two cuts
                           approximately 2 inches (50 mm) long at sides of joint and meeting cross cut at one
                           end. Place a mark 1 inch (25 mm) from cross-cut end of 2-inch (50-mm) piece.
                     b.    Use fingers to grasp 2-inch (50-mm) piece of sealant between cross-cut end and
                           1-inch (25-mm) mark; pull firmly at a 90-degree angle or more in direction of side
                           cuts while holding a ruler along side of sealant. Pull sealant out of joint to the
                           distance recommended by sealant manufacturer for testing adhesive capability,
                           but not less than that equaling specified maximum movement capability in
                           extension; hold this position for 10 seconds.
                     c.    For joints with dissimilar substrates, check adhesion to each substrate separately.
                           Do this by extending cut along one side, checking adhesion to opposite side, and
                           then repeating this procedure for opposite side.



© Populous Group, LLC 2012                      JOINT SEALANTS
                                                   07 92 00 - 9
                                      GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                          DECEMBER 19, 2012

              3.       Inspect joints for complete fill, for absence of voids, and for joint configuration complying
                       with specified requirements. Record results in a field adhesion test log.
              4.       Inspect tested joints and report on the following:
                       a.      Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint
                               substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type
                               of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion
                               passes sealant manufacturer's field- adhesion hand-pull test criteria.
                       b.      Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free from voids.
                       c.      Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified
                               requirements.
              5.       Record test results in a field adhesion test log. Include dates when sealants were
                       installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether
                       joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant
                       configuration, and sealant dimensions.
              6.       Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same
                       procedures used to originally seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean
                       and new sealant contacts original sealant.

      B.      Evaluation of Field Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or
              noncompliance with other indicated requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Remove
              sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other
              requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated
              requirements.


3.5           CLEANING

      A.      Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by
              methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and
              of products in which joints occur.


3.6           PROTECTION

      A.      Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances
              and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without
              deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage
              or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately
              so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work.


END OF SECTION




© Populous Group, LLC 2012                         JOINT SEALANTS
                                                     07 92 00 - 10
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                   DECEMBER 19, 2012

SECTION 08 11 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1           SUMMARY

      A.      This Section includes the following:
              1.    Standard hollow-metal doors.
              2.    Stainless steel hollow-metal doors.
              3.    Standard hollow-metal frames for doors.

      B.      Related Sections include the following:
              1.    Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for building anchors into and grouting hollow metal
                    frames in masonry construction.
              2.    Division 08 Section “Door Hardware” for door hardware and coordination requirements.
              3.    Division 09 painting Sections for field painting hollow metal doors and frames.


1.2           DEFINITIONS

      A.      Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings.

      B.      Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.


1.3           SUBMITTALS

      A.      Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, label
              compliance, and finishes for each type of hollow metal door and frame specified.

      B.      Shop Drawings: In addition to requirements below, provide a schedule of hollow metal doors
              and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings:
              1.     Elevations of each door design.
              2.     Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details.
              3.     Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles.
              4.     Details and locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
              5.     Details of each different wall opening condition.
              6.     Details of anchorages, accessories, joints, and connections.

      C.      Coordination Drawings: Drawings of each opening, including door and frame, drawn to scale
              and coordinating door hardware. Show elevations of each door design type, showing
              dimensions, locations of door hardware, and preparations for power, signal, and   control
              systems.

      D.      Qualification Data: For Installer.


1.4           QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.      Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

      B.      Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal doors and frames through one source from a single
              manufacturer.

© Populous Group, LLC 2012           HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
                                               08 11 13 - 1
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                     DECEMBER 19, 2012

1.5           DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

      A.      Deliver doors and frames palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and
              Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.
              1.    Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished doors and
                    frames.

      B.      Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded
              to jambs and mullions.

      C.      Store doors and frames under cover at Project site. Place units in a vertical position with heads
              up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch- (102-mm-) high wood blocking. Avoid using
              nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber.
              1.    If wrappers on doors become wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4-
                    inch (6-mm) space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.


1.6           PROJECT CONDITIONS

      A.      Field Measurements: Verify openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
              measurements on Shop Drawings.
              1.    Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying
                    the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating hollow metal
                    frames without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual
                    opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions.


1.7           COORDINATION

      A.      Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings,
              templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
              bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
              such items to Project site in time for installation.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1           MANUFACTURERS

      A.      Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
              following members of the Steel Door Institute (SDI):
              1.     Amweld Building Products, LLC.
              2.     Ceco Door Products; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company.
              3.     CURRIES Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company.
              4.     Deansteel Manufacturing, Inc.
              5.     Kewanee Corporation (The).
              6.     Mesker Door Inc.
              7.     Pioneer Industries, Inc.
              8.     Republic Builders Products Company.
              9.     Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand Company.




© Populous Group, LLC 2012          HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
                                              08 11 13 - 2
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

2.2           MATERIALS

      A.      Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with
              minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating.

      B.      Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G) coating designation;
              mill phosphatized.
              1.     For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M
                     or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M,
                     Class B.

      C.      Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Provide items to be built into exterior walls and all masonry walls,
              hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

      D.      Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application
              indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for
              attaching hollow metal door frames of type indicated.

      E.      Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm), as measured
              according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

      F.      Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting
              of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-lb/cu. ft. (96- to 192-kg/cu. m)
              density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50 respectively;
              passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.


2.3           HOLLOW METAL DOORS

      A.      General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with
              smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces, unless otherwise indicated.
              Comply with ANSI A250.8.
              1.   Design: Flush panel.
              2.   Core Construction:
                   a.     Non-Rated Doors: Steel-stiffened core with 0.026-inch- (0.7-mm-) thick, steel
                          vertical stiffeners of same material as face sheets extending full-door height, with
                          vertical webs spaced not more than 6 inches (152 mm) apart, spot welded to face
                          sheets a maximum of 5 inches (127 mm) o.c. Spaces filled between stiffeners with
                          glass- or mineral-fiber insulation.
                   b.     Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: Where indicated, provide doors fabricated with
                          thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 4.0 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu
                          (0.704 K x sq. m/W) when tested according to ASTM C 1363.
              3.   Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Beveled edge.
                   a.     Beveled Edge: 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3 mm in 50 mm).
              4.   Vertical Edges for Double-Acting Doors: Round vertical edges with 2-1/8-inch (54-mm)
                   radius.
              5.   Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick end
                   closures or channels of same material as face sheets.
              6.   Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors
                   and Frames."

      B.      Hollow Metal Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Provide doors
              complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI A250.8 for level and model
              and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level:



© Populous Group, LLC 2012          HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
                                              08 11 13 - 3
                                     GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                    DECEMBER 19, 2012

              1.       Exterior Doors: Level 4 and Physical Performance Level A (Maximum Duty), Model 2
                       (Seamless).
              2.       Service Level Interior Doors (Kitchen Doors): Level 4 and Physical Performance Level A
                       (Maximum Duty), Model 2 (Seamless).
              3.       Interior Doors: Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 2
                       (Seamless).

      C.      Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate reinforcement plates from same material as door face
              sheets to comply with the following minimum sizes:
              1.    Hinges: Minimum 0.123 inch (3.0 mm) thick by 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 6 inches
                    (152 mm) longer than hinge, secured by not less than 6 spot welds.
              2.    Lock Face, Flush Bolts, Closers, and Concealed Holders: Minimum 0.067 inch (1.7 mm)
                    thick.
              3.    All Other Surface-Mounted Hardware: Minimum 0.067 inch (1.7 mm) thick.

      D.      Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel
              sheet.


2.4           STAINLESS-STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

      A.      Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
              products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
              1.    Ambico Limited.
              2.    Ceco Door Products; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
              3.    CURRIES Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
              4.    Dawson Doors.
              5.    Fleming Steel Doors & Frames Products Ltd.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
              6.    Forms+Surfaces.
              7.    Gensteel Doors, Incorporated.
              8.    Habersham Metal Products Company.
              9.    Krieger Specialty Products Company.
              10.   LaForce, Inc.
              11.   Next Door Company.
              12.   Security Metal Products Corporation.
              13.   Stainless Doors, Incorporated.
              14.   Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.


2.5           STAINLESS-STEEL DOORS

      A.      Description: Stainless-steel doors, not less than 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) thick, of seamless,
              hollow-metal construction. Construct doors with smooth, flush surfaces without visible joints or
              seams on faces.
              1.    Face Sheets: Fabricate from 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-) thick, stainless-steel sheet.
              2.    Core Construction: Fabricate doors with core indicated.
                    a.     Welded Steel-Stiffened Core: 0.030-inch- (0.76-mm-) nominal thickness uncoated
                           steel vertical stiffeners extending full-door height, spaced not more than 6 inches
                           (152 mm) apart, spot welded to face sheets a maximum of 5 inches (127 mm) o.c.
                           Fill spaces between stiffeners with mineral-fiber insulation.
              3.    Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Beveled 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3 mm in 50 mm).
              4.    Vertical Edges for Double-Acting Doors: Round vertical edges with 2-1/8-inch (54-mm)
                    radius.
              5.    Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: 0.038-inch- (0.95-mm-) thick stainless steel.
              6.    Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Doors: 0.038-inch- (0.95-mm-) thick stainless steel.


© Populous Group, LLC 2012           HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
                                               08 11 13 - 4
                                      GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                        DECEMBER 19, 2012

              7.       Top and Bottom Channels: Closed with continuous channels, 0.060-inch- (1.52-mm-)
                       nominal thickness uncoated steel.
                       a.     Spot welded to both face sheets.
              8.       Hardware Reinforcement:         Fabricate according to ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 866 with
                       reinforcing plates from stainless steel.
              9.       Electrical Hardware Enclosures: Provide enclosures and junction boxes within doors for
                       electrically operated door hardware, interconnected with UL-approved, 1/2-inch- (12.7-
                       mm-) diameter conduit and connectors.
                       a.     Where indicated for installation of wiring, provide access plates to junction boxes,
                              fabricate from same material and thickness as face sheet and fasten with at least
                              four security fasteners spaced not more than 6 inches (152 mm) o.c.

      B.      Performance: Level A, ANSI A250.4.

      C.      Materials:
              1.    Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, austenitic stainless steel, Type 316.
              2.    Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Insulation composed of rock-wool fibers, slag-wool fibers, or
                    glass fibers.

      D.      Stainless-Steel Finishes:
              1.     Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.
              2.     Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross
                     scratches.
                     a.    Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.
                     b.    When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded
                           foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
                     c.    Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.


2.6           HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

      A.      General: Comply with ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.

      B.      Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet.
              1.     Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and welded face corners and seamless face
                     joints.
              2.     Frames for Level 4 Steel Doors: 0.067-inch- (1.7-mm-) thick steel sheet.

      C.      Interior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet.
              1.     Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and welded face corners and seamless face
                     joints, except as indicated for gypsum board partitions.
              2.     Frames for Level 4 Steel Doors: 0.067-inch- (1.7-mm-) thick steel sheet.
              3.     Frames for Level 3 Hollow Metal Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet.
              4.     Frames for Wood Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet.

      D.      Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate reinforcement plates from same material as frames to
              comply with the following minimum sizes:
              1.   Hinges: Minimum 0.123 inch (3.0 mm) thick by 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 6 inches
                   (152 mm) longer than hinge, secured by not less than 6 spot welds.
              2.   Lock Face, Flush Bolts, Closers, and Concealed Holders: Minimum 0.067 inch (1.7 mm)
                   thick.
              3.   All Other Surface-Mounted Hardware: Minimum 0.067 inch (1.7 mm) thick.

      E.      Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from electrolytic zinc-coated or metallic-coated steel sheet.



© Populous Group, LLC 2012            HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
                                                08 11 13 - 5
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                     DECEMBER 19, 2012

2.7           FRAME ANCHORS

      A.      Jamb Anchors:
              1.   Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not
                   less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2
                   inches (50 mm) wide by 10 inches (250 mm) long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177
                   inch (4.5 mm) thick.

      B.      Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick,
              and as follows:
              1.    Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.
              2.    Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips,
                    allowing not less than 2-inch (50-mm) height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at
                    finish floor surface.


2.8           STOPS AND MOLDINGS

      A.      Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, fabricated from same
              material as door face sheet in which they are installed.

      B.      Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, minimum 5/8 inch (16 mm)
              high, unless otherwise indicated.

      C.      Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, fabricated from
              same material as frames in which they are installed.


2.9           ACCESSORIES

      A.      Ceiling Struts: Minimum 1/4-inch-thick by 1-inch- (6.4-mm-thick by 25.4-mm-) wide steel.

      B.      Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick.


2.10          FABRICATION

      A.      General: Fabricate hollow metal doors and frames to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or
              buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness
              of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper
              assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled
              before shipment.

      B.      Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117

      C.      Hollow Metal Doors:
              1.    Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit
                    moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.

      D.      Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling
              limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal
              as frames.
              1.      Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth,
                      flush, and invisible.



© Populous Group, LLC 2012          HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
                                              08 11 13 - 6
                                     GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

              2.       Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners,
                       unless otherwise indicated.
              3.       Plaster and Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames
                       installed in concrete or masonry.
              4.       Where installed in masonry, leave vertical mullions in frames open at top for grouting.
              5.       Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot
                       welds per anchor.
              6.       Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
                       a.      Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and
                               bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as
                               follows:
                               1)     Three anchors per jamb up to 90 inches (2286 mm) in height.
                               2)     Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches (2286 to 3048 mm) in height.
                               3)     Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches
                                      (610 mm) or fraction thereof more than 120 inches (3048 mm) in height.
                       b.      Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and
                               bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as
                               follows:
                               1)     Four anchors per jamb from up to 90 inches (2286 mm) in height.
                               2)     Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 mm) in height.
                               3)     Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches
                                      (610 mm) or fraction thereof more than 96 inches (2438 mm) in height.
                               4)     Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches (1066 mm) wide and
                                      mounted in metal-stud partitions.
              7.       Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as
                       follows. Provide plastic plugs to keep holes clear during construction.
                       a.      Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.
                       b.      Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

    E.        Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal doors and frames to receive templated
              mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping, according to
              the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door
              Hardware."
              1.    Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated mortised and surface-mounted door
                    hardware.
              2.    Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series
                    specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. Locate hardware as
                    indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to ANSI A250.8.
              3.    Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Facility
                    Services Subgroup Sections.

    F.        Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form
              corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.
              1.    Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of door or
                    frame.
              2.    Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings such that each
                    glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.
              3.    Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors
                    and frames.
              4.    Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of doors and frames.
              5.    Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type
                    of installation indicated.




© Populous Group, LLC 2012            HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
                                                08 11 13 - 7
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

2.11          STEEL FINISHES

      A.      General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
              for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
              1.     Finish hollow metal door and frames after assembly.

      B.      Metallic-Coated Steel Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so
              surfaces are free of oil and other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating
              suited to the organic coating to be applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and
              abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair paint specified below to comply with ASTM A 780.
              1.     Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel,
                     complying with SSPC-Paint 20.

      C.      Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer specified below immediately after
              surface preparation and pretreatment. Apply a smooth coat of even consistency to provide a
              uniform dry film thickness of not less than 0.7 mils (0.018 mm).
              1.    Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer
                    complying with ANSI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer
                    for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied finish paint system indicated;
                    and providing a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1           EXAMINATION

      A.      Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
              requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of hollow
              metal doors and frames.
              1.     Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations of
                     hollow metal frame connections before frame installation.
              2.     For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental
                     to performance of work.
              3.     Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2           PREPARATION

      A.      Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory.

      B.      Prior to installation and with installation spreaders in place, adjust and securely brace hollow
              metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
              1.     Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90
                     degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
              2.     Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line
                     parallel to plane of wall.
              3.     Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on
                     parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
              4.     Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a perpendicular
                     line from head to floor.

      C.      Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated mortised and surface-mounted door
              hardware.



© Populous Group, LLC 2012          HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
                                              08 11 13 - 8
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

3.3           INSTALLATION

      A.      General: Provide doors and frames of sizes, thicknesses, and designs indicated. Install hollow
              metal doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply
              with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

      B.      Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames for doors and other openings, of size and
              profile indicated. Comply with SDI 105.
              1.      Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
                      anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving
                      surfaces smooth and undamaged.
                      a.      Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations,
                              field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill,
                              dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
                      b.      Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening.
                      c.      Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
                      d.      Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been
                              properly set and secured.
                      e.      Check plumb, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as
                              necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
              2.      Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor and
                      secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
                      a.      Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled
                              expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.
              3.      Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames.
              4.      Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between
                      frames and masonry with grout.
              5.      Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to supporting
                      construction above, unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural support at
                      each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting
                      construction above. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb
                      members.
              6.      Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment,
                      twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
                      a.      Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line
                              90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
                      b.      Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal
                              line parallel to plane of wall.
                      c.      Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of
                              jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
                      d.      Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.

      C.      Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified
              below. Shim as necessary.
              1.    Non-Fire-Rated Hollow Metal Doors:
                    a.    Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
                    b.    Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6
                          mm).
                    c.    Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch (9.5 mm).
                    d.    Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4
                          inch (19 mm).

      D.      Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with hollow
              metal door and frame manufacturer's written instructions.



© Populous Group, LLC 2012          HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
                                              08 11 13 - 9
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                   DECEMBER 19, 2012

              1.       Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not
                       more than 9 inches (230 mm) o.c., and not more than 2 inches (50 mm) o.c. from each
                       corner.


3.4           ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

      A.      Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final
              inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace
              defective work, including hollow metal doors or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise
              unacceptable.

      B.      Clean grout and other bonding material off hollow metal doors and frames immediately after
              installation.

      C.      Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of
              prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer.


END OF SECTION




© Populous Group, LLC 2012           HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
                                               08 11 13 - 10
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                     DECEMBER 19, 2012



SECTION 08 14 16 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1           SUMMARY

      A.      This Section includes the following:
              1.    Solid-core doors with wood-veneer, faces.
              2.    Factory finishing flush wood doors.
              3.    Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.


1.2           SUBMITTALS

      A.      Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction, and trim for
              openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.

      B.      Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
              construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and
              other pertinent data.
              1.     Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
              2.     Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.
              3.     Indicate requirements for veneer matching.
              4.     Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.

      C.      Samples for Verification:
              1.   Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200
                   by 250 mm), for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish,
                   provide set of three samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in
                   the finished work.


1.3           QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.      Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer.

      B.      Quality Standard: These specifications are based on the Architectural Woodwork Standards
              (AWS), jointly endorse by the Architectural Woodwork Institute, the Architectural Woodwork
              Manufacturers Association of Canada, and the Woodwork Institute. Unless otherwise
              indicated, comply with AWS for grades of flush wood doors, construction, finishes, and other
              requirements.

      C.      Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
              Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


1.4           DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

      A.      Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.

      B.      Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.

© Populous Group, LLC 2012                   FLUSH WOOD DOORS
                                                 08 14 16 - 1
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                      DECEMBER 19, 2012



      C.      Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.


1.5           PROJECT CONDITIONS

      A.      Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work is
              complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at
              occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.


1.6           WARRANTY

      A.      Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and
              Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in
              materials or workmanship, have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a
              42-by-84-inch (1067-by-2134-mm) section, or show telegraphing of core construction in face
              veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch (0.25 mm in a 75-mm) span.
              1.    Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or
                    replacement of defective doors.
              2.    Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial
                    Completion:
                    a.      Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1           MANUFACTURERS

      A.      Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
              products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
              1.    Solid Core Wood Doors:
                    a.     Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.
                    b.     Eggers Industries.
                    c.     Graham; an Assa Abloy Group company.
                    d.     Marshfield Door Systems, Inc.
                    e.     VT Industries Inc.


2.2           SOLID-CORE DOORS

      A.      Interior Solid-Core Doors:
              1.     Grade: AWS Premium, with Grade AA faces.
              2.     Species and Cut: As indicated in the Finish Legend.
              3.     Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match.
              4.     Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match.
              5.     Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by
                     mullions.
              6.     Room Match: Match door faces within each separate room or area of building. Corridor-
                     door faces do not need to match where they are separated by 10 feet (3 m) or more.
              7.     Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Same species as faces.
              8.     Core: Either glued wood stave or structural composite lumber.



© Populous Group, LLC 2012                   FLUSH WOOD DOORS
                                                 08 14 16 - 2
                                      GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                         DECEMBER 19, 2012



              9.       Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive
                       planed before veneering. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press.


2.3           FABRICATION

      A.      Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances
              and bevels, unless otherwise indicated:
              1.    Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. Comply
                    with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

      B.      Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply
              with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings,
              DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates.
              1.    Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and
                    alignment before factory machining.
              2.    Metal Astragals: Premachine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for pairs of
                    fire-rated doors.


2.4           FACTORY FINISHING

      A.      General: Comply with AWS's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for factory finishing.

      B.      Finish doors at factory.

      C.      Transparent Finish:
              1.    Grade: Premium.
              2.    Finish: AWS System 11 - catalyzed polyurethane.
              3.    Staining: Match existing.
              4.    Effect: Match existing finish.
              5.    Sheen: Match existing.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1           EXAMINATION

      A.      Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.
              1.   Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing
                   characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.
              2.   Reject doors with defects.

      B.      Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2           INSTALLATION

      A.      Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."

      B.      Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written
              instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated.


© Populous Group, LLC 2012                      FLUSH WOOD DOORS
                                                    08 14 16 - 3
                                     GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                        DECEMBER 19, 2012



              1.       Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.

      C.      Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

      D.      Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at
              Project site.


3.3           ADJUSTING

      A.      Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

      B.      Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors
              may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of
              repair or refinishing.


END OF SECTION




© Populous Group, LLC 2012                     FLUSH WOOD DOORS
                                                   08 14 16 - 4
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                         DECEMBER 19, 2012

SECTION 08 31 13 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1           SUMMARY

      A.      This Section includes the following types of access doors:
              1.    Ceiling access doors.


1.2           SUBMITTALS

      A.      Product data for each type of access door assembly specified, including details of construction
              relative to materials, individual components, profiles, finishes, and fire-protection ratings (if re-
              quired).

      B.      Access Door and Frame Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame schedule, includ-
              ing types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.

      C.      Ceiling Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling-
              mounted items including access doors and frames, lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,
              sprinklers, and special trim are shown and coordinated with each other.


1.3           QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.      Source Limitations: Obtain access door(s) and frame(s) through one source from a single man-
              ufacturer.

      B.      Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard size units, which may
              vary slightly from sizes indicated.


1.4           COORDINATION

      A.      Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to
              concealed equipment, and indicate on schedule specified under "Submittals" Article.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1           MANUFACTURERS

      A.      Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
              products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
              1.    Dur-Red Products.
              2.    J.L. Industries.
              3.    Karp Associates, Inc.
              4.    Larsen's Manufacturing Co.
              5.    Milcor, Inc.
              6.    Nystrom, Inc.


© Populous Group, LLC 2012               ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
                                                 08 31 13 - 1
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                     DECEMBER 19, 2012

2.2           MATERIALS

      A.      Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
              1.    ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products.
              2.    ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.

      B.      Steel Sheet:    electrolytic zinc-coated, ASTM A 591/A 591M with cold-rolled steel sheet sub-
              strate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.

      C.      Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with A60
              (ZF180) zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating or G60 (Z180) mill-phosphatized zinc coating;
              stretcher-leveled standard of flatness; with minimum thickness indicated representing specified
              thickness according to ASTM A 924/A 924M.

      D.      Drywall Beads: Edge trim formed from 0.0299-inch (0.76-mm) zinc-coated steel sheet formed
              to receive joint compound and in size to suit thickness of gypsum board.


2.3           ACCESS DOORS

      A.      Recessed Access Doors and Trimless Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet.
              1.   Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces.
              2.   Door: Minimum 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick sheet metal in the form of a pan recessed
                   5/8 inch (16 mm) for gypsum board infill.
              3.   Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick sheet metal with drywall bead for gypsum
                   board surfaces.
              4.   Hinges: Concealed pivoting rod hinge.
              5.   Locks: Screwdriver operated cam
              6.   Available Product: JL Industries “CTWB Series”


2.4           FABRICATION

      A.      General: Manufacture each access door assembly as an integral unit ready for installation.

      B.      Steel Access Doors and Frames: Continuous welded construction. Grind welds smooth and
              flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to se-
              cure access panels to types of supports indicated.
              1.     Exposed Flange: Nominal 1 to 1-1/2 inches (25 to 37 mm) wide around perimeter of
                     frame.
              2.     For gypsum board assemblies furnish frames with edge trim for gypsum board.

      C.      Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when
              closed.
              1.    For recessed panel doors, provide access sleeves for each locking device. Furnish plas-
                    tic grommets and install in holes cut through finish.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1           PREPARATION

      A.      Advise Installers of other work about specific requirements relating to access door installation,
              including sizes of openings to receive access door and frame, as well as locations of supports,


© Populous Group, LLC 2012              ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
                                                08 31 13 - 2
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                  DECEMBER 19, 2012

              inserts, and anchoring devices. Furnish inserts and anchoring devices for access doors that
              must be built into other construction. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.


3.2           INSTALLATION

      A.      Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installing access doors.

      B.      Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels
              aligned with adjacent finished surfaces.


3.3           ADJUST AND CLEAN

      A.      Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation.

      B.      Remove and replace panels or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.


END OF SECTION




© Populous Group, LLC 2012              ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
                                                08 31 13 - 3
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

SECTION 08 41 13 – ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1           SUMMARY

      A.      This Section includes the following:
              1.    Exterior and interior aluminum-framed storefronts.
                    a.     Glazing is retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.

      B.      Related Sections include the following:
              1.    Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation" for insulation materials field installed with alumi-
                    num-framed systems.
              2.    Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for installation of joint sealants installed with alumi-
                    num-framed systems and for sealants to the extent not specified in this Section.
              3.    Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glazing requirements to the extent not specified in this
                    Section.


1.2           PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

      A.      General: Provide aluminum-framed systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding,
              without failure, the effects of the following:
              1.    Structural loads.
              2.    Thermal movements.
              3.    Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to,
                    story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.
              4.    Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.
              5.    Failure includes the following:
                    a.      Deflection exceeding specified limits.
                    b.      Thermal stresses transferred to building structure.
                    c.      Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and
                            structural movements, to glazing.
                    d.      Glazing-to-glazing contact.
                    e.      Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
                    f.      Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
                    g.      Sealant failure.
                    h.      Failure of operating units to function properly.

      B.      Glazing: Physically and thermally isolate glazing from framing members.

      C.      Thermally Broken Construction: Provide systems that isolate aluminum exposed to exterior
              from aluminum exposed to interior with a material of low thermal conductance.

      D.      Deflection of Framing Members:
              1.    Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6
                    inches (4.1 m) and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) for spans greater than
                    13 feet 6 inches (4.1 m) or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing
                    lites to 3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is less.
              2.    Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to amount not exceeding that which reduces
                    glazing bite to less than 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces edge
                    clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed components directly be-



© Populous Group, LLC 2012   ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
                                              08 41 13 - 1
                                      GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                         DECEMBER 19, 2012

                       low to less than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and clearance between members and operable units
                       directly below to less than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
              3.       Static-Pressure Test Performance: Provide entrance and storefront systems that do not
                       evidence material failures, structural distress, failure of operating components to function
                       normally, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of
                       clear span when tested according to ASTM E 330.
                       a.     Test Pressure: 150 percent of inward and outward wind-load design pressures.
                       b.     Duration: As required by design wind velocity; fastest 1 mile (1.609 km) of wind for
                              relevant exposure category.

    E.        Wind Loads: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront systems, including anchorage, capable
              of withstanding wind-load design pressures calculated according to requirements of the Massa-
                                            th
              chusetts Building Code – 6 Edition (CMR 780) and the Structural Notes on the Drawings,
              whichever are more stringent.
              1.     Deflection of framing members in a direction normal to wall plane is limited to 1/175 of
                     clear spane or 3/4 inch (19mm), whichever is smaller, unless otherwise indicated.
              2.     Static-Pressure Test Performance: Provide entrance and storefront systems that do not
                     evidence material failures, structural distress, failure of operating components to function
                     normally, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of
                     clear span when tested according to ASTM E 330.
                     a.     Test Pressure: 150 percent of nward and outward wind-load design pressures.
                     b.     Duration: As required by design wind velocity; fastest 1 mile (1.609 km) of wind for
                            relevant exposure category.

    F.        Dead Loads: Provide entrance- and storefront-system members that do not deflect an amount
              which will reduce glazing bite below 75 percent of design dimension when carrying full dead
              load.
              1.    Provide a minimum 1/8-inch (3.18-mm) clearance between members and top of glazing
                    or other fixed part immediately below.
              2.    Provide a minimum 1/16-inch (1.59-mm) clearance between members and operable win-
                    dows and doors.

    G.        Live Loads: Provide entrance and storefront systems, including anchorage, that accommodate
              the supporting structures' deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads indi-
              cated without failure of materials or permanent deformation.

    H.        Air Infiltration: Provide entrance and storefront systems with permanent resistance to air leak-
              age through fixed glazing and frame areas of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.3 L/s/sq. m) of
              fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a static-air-pressure difference of 1.57
              lbf/sq. ft. (75.2 Pa).

    I.        Water Penetration: Provide entrance and storefront systems that do not evidence water leak-
              age through fixed glazing and frame areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at minimum
              differential pressure of 20 percent of inward-acting wind-load design pressure as defined by
              ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures," but not less than 6.24
              lbf/sq. ft. (299 Pa). Water leakage is defined as follows:
              1.      Uncontrolled water infiltrating systems or appearing on systems' normally exposed interi-
                      or surfaces from sources other than condensation. Water controlled by flashing and gut-
                      ters that is drained back to the exterior and cannot damage adjacent materials or finishes
                      is not water leakage.

    J.        Thermal Movements: Provide entrance and storefront systems, including anchorage, that ac-
              commodate thermal movements of systems and supporting elements resulting from the follow-
              ing maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures without buckling, damaging
              stresses on glazing, failure of joint sealants, damaging loads on fasteners, failure of doors or
              other operating units to function properly, and other detrimental effects.

© Populous Group, LLC 2012   ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
                                              08 41 13 - 2
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

              1.       Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),
                       material surfaces.

      K.      Structural-Support Movement: Provide entrance and storefront systems that accommodate
              structural movements including, but not limited to, sway and deflection.

      L.      Condensation Resistance: Provide storefront systems with condensation resistance factor
              (CRF) of not less than 45 when tested according to AAMA 1503.1.

      M.      Average Thermal Conductance: Provide storefront systems with average U-values of not more
              than 0.63 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (3.57 W/sq. m x K) when tested according to AAMA 1503.1.

      N.      Dimensional Tolerances: Provide entrance and storefront systems that accommodate dimen-
              sional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.


1.3           SUBMITTALS

      A.      Product Data: For each product specified. Include details of construction relative to materials,
              dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes.

      B.      Shop Drawings: For entrance and storefront systems. Show details of fabrication and installa-
              tion, including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, provisions for expansion and
              contraction, and attachments to other work.
              1.      For entrance systems, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types,
                      quantities, and locations.
              2.      For installed products indicated to comply with certain design loadings, include structural
                      analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for
                      their preparation.

      C.      Samples for Verification: Of each type of exposed finish required in manufacturer's standard
              sizes. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets showing
              the full range of variations expected.

      D.      Cutaway Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal framing intersection of systems, made from
              minimum 6-inch (150-mm) lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following:
              1.   Joinery.
              2.   Anchorage.
              3.   Expansion provisions.
              4.   Glazing.
              5.   Flashing and drainage.
              6.   Structural-sealant joints.

      E.      Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified re-
              quirements.

      F.      Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating that
              materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility
              and adhesion with sealants; include joint sealant manufacturers' written interpretation of test re-
              sults relative to sealant performance and recommendations for primers and substrate prepara-
              tion needed to obtain adhesion.

      G.      Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with storefront systems'
              performance requirements.



© Populous Group, LLC 2012   ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
                                              08 41 13 - 3
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

      H.      Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed
              by a qualified independent testing agency, indicate compliance of entrance and storefront sys-
              tems with requirements based on comprehensive testing of current systems.


1.4           QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.      Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to prac-
              tice in the jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering
              services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installa-
              tions of entrance and storefront systems that are similar to those indicated for this Project in ma-
              terial, design, and extent.

      B.      Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to assume engineering responsibility
              and perform work of this Section who has specialized in installing glazed aluminum curtain wall
              systems similar to those required for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer.
              1.     Engineering Responsibility: Engage a qualified professional engineer to prepare or su-
                     pervise the preparation of data for entrance and storefront systems, including drawings,
                     testing program development, test-result interpretation, and comprehensive engineering
                     analysis that shows systems' compliance with specified requirements.
              2.     Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for entrance and storefront systems, including
                     Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard
                     units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.

      C.      Testing Agency Qualifications: Demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on Architect's
              evaluation of criteria conforming to ASTM E 699, that the independent testing agency has the
              experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct the testing indicated without delaying the
              Work.

      D.      Source Limitations: Obtain each type of entrance and storefront system through one source
              from a single manufacturer.

      E.      Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of entrance
              and storefront systems and are based on the specific systems indicated. Other manufacturers'
              systems with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 01 Sec-
              tion "Product Requirements."
              1.     Do not modify intended aesthetic effect, as judged solely by Architect, except with Archi-
                     tect's approval and only to the extent needed to comply with performance requirements.
                     Where modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect
                     for review.

      F.      Preconstruction Sealant Testing: Perform sealant manufacturers' standard tests for compatibil-
              ity and adhesion of sealants with each material that will come in contact with sealants and each
              condition required by system.
              1.     Test a minimum of 8 samples of each metal, glazing, and other material.
              2.     Prepare samples using techniques and primers required for installed systems.
              3.     Perform tests under environmental conditions that duplicate those under which systems
                     will be installed.
              4.     For materials that fail tests, determine corrective measures required to prepare each ma-
                     terial to ensure compatibility with and adhesion of sealants, including, but not limited to,
                     specially formulated primers. After performing these corrective measures on the mini-
                     mum number of samples required for each material, retest materials.

      G.      Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code-
              -Aluminum."


© Populous Group, LLC 2012   ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
                                              08 41 13 - 4
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                    DECEMBER 19, 2012

1.5           PROJECT CONDITIONS

      A.      Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
              measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress
              to avoid delaying the Work.


1.6           WARRANTY

      A.      General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of
              other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall
              be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under re-
              quirements of the Contract Documents.

      B.      Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer agreeing to repair
              or replace components of entrance and storefront systems that fail in materials or workmanship
              within the specified warranty period.
              1.     Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
                     a.     Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
                     b.     Adhesive sealant failures.
                     c.     Cohesive sealant failures.
                     d.     Failure of system to meet performance requirements.
                     e.     Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weath-
                            ering.
                     f.     Failure of operating components to function normally.
                     g.     Water leakage through fixed glazing and frame areas.
              2.     Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1           MANUFACTURERS

      A.      Basis-of-Design Product: The design is based on the product named. Subject to compliance
              with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the
              other specified manufacturers. Comparable products are subject to review and approval
              through the submittal process specified.
              1.     Kawneer, “VG 451T”

      B.      Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
              products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
              1.    EFCO Corporation.
              2.    Kawneer Company, Inc.
              3.    Tubelite Architectural Systems.
              4.    YKK AP America Inc.
              5.    Vistawall Architectural Products.


2.2           MATERIALS

      A.      Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicat-
              ed, complying with the requirements of standards indicated below.
              1.    Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
              2.    Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).


© Populous Group, LLC 2012   ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
                                              08 41 13 - 5
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                      DECEMBER 19, 2012

              3.       Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.
              4.       Bars, Rods, and Wire: ASTM B 211 (ASTM B 211M).
              5.       Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10.

      B.      Steel Reinforcement: Complying with ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M) for structural shapes, plates,
              and bars; ASTM A 611 for cold-rolled sheet and strip; or ASTM A 570 (ASTM A 570M) for hot-
              rolled sheet and strip.

      C.      Glazing as specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing."

      D.      Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard pressure-glazing system of black, resilient glazing
              gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers, fabricated from an elastomer of type and in
              hardness recommended by system and gasket manufacturer to comply with system perfor-
              mance requirements. Provide gasket assemblies that have corners sealed with sealant rec-
              ommended by gasket manufacturer.

      E.      Spacers, Setting Blocks, Gaskets, and Bond Breakers: Manufacturer's standard permanent,
              nonmigrating types in hardness recommended by manufacturer, compatible with sealants, and
              suitable for system performance requirements.

      F.      Framing system gaskets, sealants, and joint fillers as recommended by manufacturer for joint
              type.

      G.      Sealants and joint fillers for joints at perimeter of entrance and storefront systems as specified
              in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

      H.      Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied coal tar mastic, SSPC-Paint 33, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-
              mm) dry film thickness per coat.


2.3           COMPONENTS

      A.      Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide manufacturer's standard brackets and reinforcements
              that are compatible with adjacent materials. Provide nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning
              system components.

      B.      Fasteners and Accessories:         Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,
              nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
              1.    Reinforce members as required to retain fastener threads.
              2.    Do not use exposed fasteners, except for hardware application. For hardware applica-
                    tion, use countersunk Phillips flat-head machine screws finished to match framing mem-
                    bers or hardware being fastened, unless otherwise indicated.

      C.      Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts
              complying with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153 requirements.

      D.      Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding
              flashing, compatible with adjacent materials, and of type recommended by manufacturer.

      E.      Concealed Flashing: Dead-soft, 0.018-inch- (0.457-mm-) thick stainless steel, complying with
              ASTM A 666, of type selected by manufacturer for compatibility with system.




© Populous Group, LLC 2012   ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
                                              08 41 13 - 6
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                     DECEMBER 19, 2012

2.4           FABRICATION

      A.      General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, will have accurately fitted joints with
              ends coped or mitered to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. After fabrication,
              clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.
              1.     Fabricate components for shear-block frame construction.

      B.      Forming: Form shapes with sharp profiles, straight and free of defects or deformations, before
              finishing.

      C.      Prepare components to receive concealed fasteners and anchor and connection devices.

      D.      Fabricate components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or
              migrating within the system to the exterior.

      E.      Welding: Weld components to comply with referenced AWS standard. Weld before finishing
              components to greatest extent possible. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possi-
              ble to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides
              from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.

      F.      Glazing Channels: Provide minimum clearances for thickness and type of glass indicated ac-
              cording to FGMA's "Glazing Manual."

      G.      Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action
              by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manu-
              facturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against
              corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

      H.      Storefront: Fabricate framing in profiles indicated for flush glazing (without projecting stops).
              Provide subframes and reinforcing of types indicated or, if not indicated, as required for a com-
              plete system. Factory assemble components to greatest extent possible. Disassemble compo-
              nents only as necessary for shipment and installation.


2.5           ALUMINUM FINISHES

      A.      Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and
              designating finishes.

      B.      Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by the Aluminum Associ-
              ation for designating aluminum finishes.

      C.      Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.7 mils (0.018 mm) or thicker.


2.6           STEEL PRIMING

      A.      General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
              for recommendations relative to applying primer.

      B.      Surface Preparation: Perform manufacturer's standard cleaning operations to remove dirt, oil,
              grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if pre-
              sent, from uncoated steel.




© Populous Group, LLC 2012   ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
                                              08 41 13 - 7
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                        DECEMBER 19, 2012

      C.      Priming: Apply manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant primer immediately after surface
              preparation and pretreatment.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1           EXAMINATION

      A.      Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation toleranc-
              es and other conditions affecting performance of entrance and storefront systems. Do not pro-
              ceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2           INSTALLATION

      A.      General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for protecting, handling, and installing
              entrance and storefront systems. Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to pro-
              duce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Seal joints
              watertight.

      B.      Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action
              by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manu-
              facturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against
              corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

      C.      Install components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or
              migrating within the system to the exterior.

      D.      Set continuous sill members and flashing in a full sealant bed to provide weathertight construc-
              tion, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements of Division 07 Section "Joint Seal-
              ants."

      E.      Install framing components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades with-
              out warp or rack of framing members.

      F.      Install glazing to comply with requirements of Division 08 Section "Glazing," unless otherwise
              indicated.
              1.      Prepare surfaces that will contact structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's
                      written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not
                      limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.
              2.      Install structural silicone sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
              3.      Mechanically fasten glazing in place until structural sealant is cured.
              4.      Remove excess sealant from component surfaces before sealant has cured.

      G.      Install perimeter sealant to comply with requirements of Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants,"
              unless otherwise indicated.

      H.      Erection Tolerances: Install entrance and storefront systems to comply with the following max-
              imum tolerances:
              1.     Variation from Plane: Limit variation from plane or location shown to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3
                     mm in 3.7 m); 1/4 inch (6 mm) over total length.
              2.     Alignment: Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.5
                     mm). Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch (0.8
                     mm).


© Populous Group, LLC 2012   ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
                                              08 41 13 - 8
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                          DECEMBER 19, 2012

              3.       Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch (3
                       mm).


3.3           FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

      A.      Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
              perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

      B.      Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of representative areas to determine compliance of
              installed systems with specified requirements shall take place as follows and in successive
              stages as indicated on Drawings. Do not proceed with installation of the next area until test re-
              sults for previously completed areas show compliance with requirements.
              1.      Structural-Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion: Structural sealant shall be tested accord-
                      ing to recommendations in ASTM C 1401.
                      a.      Destructive test method, Method A, Hand Pull Tab (Destructive) in ASTM C 1401,
                              Appendix X2 shall be used.
                              1)      A minimum of four areas on each building face shall be tested.
                              2)      Repair installation areas damaged by testing.
              2.      Air Infiltration: Areas shall be tested for air leakage of 1.5 times the rate specified for la-
                      boratory testing under Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article, but not more than 0.09
                      cfm/sq. ft. (0.03 L/s per sq. m), of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 783
                      at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa) .
              3.      Water Penetration: Areas shall be tested according to ASTM E 1105 at a minimum uni-
                      form and cyclic static-air-pressure difference of 0.67 times the static-air-pressure differ-
                      ence specified for laboratory testing under Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article,
                      but not less than 4.18 lbf/sq. ft. (200 Pa), and shall not evidence water penetration.
              4.      Water Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, a minimum area of
                      75 feet (23 m) by 1 story of aluminum-framed systems designated by Architect shall be
                      tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration.

      C.      Repair or remove work where test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with
              specified requirements.

      D.      Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine com-
              pliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.


3.4           ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

      A.      Adjust doors and hardware to provide tight fit at contact points and weather stripping, smooth
              operation, and weathertight closure.

      B.      Remove excess sealant and glazing compounds, and dirt from surfaces.


3.5           PROTECTION

      A.      Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
              Installer, that ensure entrance and storefront systems are without damage or deterioration at the
              time of Substantial Completion.


END OF SECTION



© Populous Group, LLC 2012   ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
                                              08 41 13 - 9
                                GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                  DECEMBER 19, 2012


SECTION 08 71 10 - DOOR HARDWARE


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1        SUMMARY

      A.   This Section includes the following:
           1.    Commercial door hardware for the following:
                 a.     Swinging doors

      B.   Related Sections include the following:
           1.    Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames"

      C.   Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section: Coordinating, purchasing, delivering,
           and scheduling remain requirements of this Section.
           1.    Final replacement cores will be installed as directed by Owner.


1.2        SUBMITTALS

      A.   Product Data: Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of
           individual components and profiles, and finishes.

      B.   Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Architectural Hardware
           Consultant, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and di-
           agrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to
           ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
           1.    Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and
                 Format for the Hardware Schedule." Double space entries, and number and date each
                 page. A horizontal schedule format is not acceptable.
           2.    Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating
                 complete designations of every item required for each door or opening.
           3.    Content: Include the following information:
                 a.     Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, and material of each door and
                        frame
                 b.     Type, style, function, size, quantity, and finish of each door hardware item
                 c.     Complete designations of every item required for each door or opening including
                        name and manufacturer
                 d.     Fastenings and other pertinent information
                 e.     Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor
                        plans and in door and frame schedule
                 f.     Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule
                 g.     Mounting locations for door hardware
                 h.     Door and frame sizes and materials
                 i.     List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and frame.
                 j.     List the maximum degree of door opening attainable on doors with Hold Open Stop
                        Closers and OH Holders/Stops
           4.    Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date,
                 particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of
                 other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule.




                                            DOOR HARDWARE
                                              08 71 00 - 1
                                 GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                   DECEMBER 19, 2012


           5.    Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier employing an Archi-
                 tectural Hardware Consultant (AHC), detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks.
                 Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations.

      C.   Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section


1.3        QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.   Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed door hardware similar in
           material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in
           construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
           1.     Installer's responsibilities include installing door hardware.

      B.   Supplier Qualifications: Door hardware supplier with warehousing facilities in Project's vicinity
           and who is or employs a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) member of the door
           and hardware institute, available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Archi-
           tect, and Owner about door hardware and keying.

      C.   Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by the
           Door and Hardware Institute (DHI) as an Architectural Hardware Consultant and who is experi-
           enced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in
           material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project.

      D.   Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufacturer,
           unless otherwise indicated.

      E.   Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following:
           1.    Comply with accessibility requirements, Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessi-
                bility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG), and ANSI A117.1, as follows:
                a.      Door Closers: Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements in-
                        dicated:
                b.      Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) high. Bevel raised thresholds with a
                        slope of not more than 1:2
           2.   NFPA 101: Comply with means of egress requirements:

      F.   Coordination Conferences: Conduct conferences at Project site.
           1.    Attendees shall include the Construction Manager, Architect, Architectural Hardware
                 Consultant, Hardware Suppliers, and Installers.
           2.    Pre-Fabrication Conference: Review coordination requirements for installation of door
                 hardware.
                 a.    Provide hardware templates and installation instructions to steel and wood door
                       suppliers
                 b.    Verify hardware selections, installation, and operation requirements


1.4        DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

      A.   Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to
           Project site.

      B.   Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware
           Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.



                                            DOOR HARDWARE
                                              08 71 00 - 2
                                 GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                   DECEMBER 19, 2012


      C.   Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service.


1.5        COORDINATION

      A.   Templates: Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to
           be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm
           that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with
           indicated requirements.


1.6        WARRANTY

      A.   General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other
           rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addi-
           tion to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the
           Contract Documents.


1.7        MAINTENANCE SERVICE

      A.   Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and mainte-
           nance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and
           replacement of door hardware.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1        SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

      A.   General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section, and
           the Door Hardware Sets included at the end of Part 3.
           1.    Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named
                 manufacturer's products.

      B.   Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive quali-
           ties of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets included at the end
           of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:
           Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each
                   door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing quality requirements. An as-
                   terisk (*) after a manufacturer name indicates whose product designation is used in the
                   Door Hardware Sets.


2.2        HINGES

      A.   Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the follow-
           ing:
           1.   Hinges:
                a.     McKinney *
                b.     Stanley
                c.     Hager*


                                            DOOR HARDWARE
                                              08 71 00 - 3
                                GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                DECEMBER 19, 2012


      B.   Standards: Comply with the following:
           1.   Butts and Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1

      C.   Hinge Weight: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
           1.    Entrance Doors and doors over 3’0” wide: Heavy-weight hinges.
           2.    Doors with Closers: Antifriction-bearing hinges

      D.   Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
           1.    Exterior Hinges: Stainless-steel

      E.   Fasteners: Comply with the following:
           1.    Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes


2.3        LOCKS AND LATCHES

      A.   Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the follow-
           ing:
           1.   Mechanical Locks and Latches:
                a.     Best Access Systems *

      B.   Standards: Comply with the following:
           1.   Mortise Locks and Latches: ANSI/BHMA A156.13
           2.   Auxiliary Locks: ANSI/BHMA A156.5

      C.   Lock Trim: Comply with the following:
           1.    Lever: Forged or Cast.
           2.    Escutcheon (Rose): Wrought
           3.    Lockset Designs: Provide the lockset trim design as specified

      D.   Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts to comply with labeled fire
           door requirements, and as follows:
           1.     Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch (19-mm) latchbolt throw
           2.    Deadbolts: Minimum 1-inch (25-mm) bolt throw

      E.   Backset: 2-3/4 inches (70 mm), unless otherwise indicated


2.4        DOOR BOLTS

      A.   Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the follow-
           ing:
           1.   Flush Bolts:
                a.     Glynn-Johnson
                b.     Hager Ives
                c.     Rockwood *
                d.     Triangle Brass

      B.   Standards: Comply with the following:
           1.    Manual Flush Bolts: ANSI/BHMA A156.16




                                           DOOR HARDWARE
                                             08 71 00 - 4
                                 GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                   DECEMBER 19, 2012


2.5        EXIT DEVICES

      A.   Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the follow-
           ing:
             1.   Precision *

      B.   Standard: ANSI/BHMA A156.3.

      C.   Certified Products: Provide exit devices listed in BHMA's "Directory of Certified Exit Devices."

      D.   Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to au-
           thorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305.


2.6        CYLINDERS AND KEYING

      A.   Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a grandmaster key system:
           1.   Cylinders:
                a.     Best Access Systems

      B.   Standards: Comply with the following:
           1.    Cylinders: ANSI/BHMA A156.5
           2.   Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised
                trim ring
           3.   Removable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key, and for use with only
                the core manufacturer's cylinder and door hardware

      C.   Keying System: Unless otherwise indicated, provide a factory-registered Best Access Systems
           keyed to existing system complying with the following requirements:
           1.    Great-Grand Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by a change key, a master
                 key, a grand master key, and a great-grand master key

      D.   Keys: Provide nickel-silver keys complying with the following:
           1.    Quantity: In addition to one extra blank key for each lock, provide the following:
                 a.    Cylinder Change Keys: Three
                 b.    Master Keys: Five
                 c.    Grand Master Keys: Five
                 d.    Great-Grand Master Keys: Five


2.7        CLOSERS

      A.   Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the follow-
           ing:
           1.   Surface-Mounted Closers:
                a.     LCN *

      B.   Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written recommendations
           for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated fre-
           quency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and require-
           ments for opening force to comply with ANSI A117.1.




                                            DOOR HARDWARE
                                              08 71 00 - 5
                                GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                DECEMBER 19, 2012


2.8        OPERATING TRIM

      A.   Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the follow-
           ing:
           1.   Baldwin
           2.   Burns
           3.   Ives
           4.   Rockwood *
           5.   Triangle Brass

      B.   Standard: Comply with ANSI/BHMA A156.6

      C.   Materials: Fabricate from stainless steel unless otherwise indicated


2.9        PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS

      A.   Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the follow-
           ing:
           1.   Metal Protective Trim Units:
                a.     Baldwin
                b.     Burns
                c.     Ives
                d.     Rockwood *

      B.   Standard: Comply with ANSI/BHMA A156.6

      C.   Materials: Fabricate protection plates from the following:
           1.    Stainless Steel: 0.050 inch (1.3 mm) thick; beveled top and 2 sides

      D.   Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for door trim units consisting of
           either machine or self-tapping screws.


2.10       DOOR GASKETING

      A.   Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the follow-
           ing:
           1.   Door Gasketing:
                a.     Hager *
           2.   Door Bottoms:
                a.     Hager *

      B.   Standard: Comply with ANSI/BHMA A156.22

      C.   General: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke,
           light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive
           fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. Provide only neoprene material.

      D.   Replaceable Neoprene Strips: Provide only units where seal strips are easily replaceable and
           readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.




                                            DOOR HARDWARE
                                              08 71 00 - 6
                            GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                              DECEMBER 19, 2012


2.11   THRESHOLDS

  A.   Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the follow-
       ing:
       1.   Hager *

  B.   Standard: Comply with ANSI/BHMA A156.21


2.12   MISC. BI-FOLD DOOR HARDWARE

  A.   Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
       following:
       1.     KN Crowder *


2.13   FABRICATION

  A.   Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method indi-
       cated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish
       metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and
       ANSI/BHMA A156.18 for finishes.

  B.   Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally
       prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to commer-
       cially recognized industry standards for application intended. Provide Phillips flat-head screws
       with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.
       1.      Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed,
               except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for
               installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed.


2.14   FINISHES

  A.   Standard: Comply with ANSI/BHMA A156.18

  B.   Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protec-
       tive covering before shipping.

  C.   Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable.
       Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of ap-
       proved Samples.

  D.   ANSI/BHMA Designations: Comply with base material and finish requirements indicated by the
       following:
       1.     ANSI/BHMA 628: Satin Aluminum, clear anodized, over aluminum base metal
       2.     ANSI/BHMA 630: Satin stainless steel, over stainless-steel base metal
       3.     ANSI/BHMA 626: Satin Chromium over nickel, over bronze base metal




                                        DOOR HARDWARE
                                          08 71 00 - 7
                                 GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                    DECEMBER 19, 2012


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1        EXAMINATION

      A.   Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installa-
           tion tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other
           conditions affecting performance.

      B.   Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections
           before electrified door hardware installation.

           Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2        PREPARATION

      A.   Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 series.
           1.    Surface-Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to SDI 107


3.3        INSTALLATION

      A.   Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publi-
           cations, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations:
           1.    Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for
                 Custom Steel Doors and Frames"


      B.   Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cut-
           ting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be
           painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface
           protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 09 Sections. Do not install surface-
           mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.
           1.      Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment
                   substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.
           2.      Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space
                   fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.
           3.      On doors with weatherstripping or sound gasketing: Maintain the integrity of the sound
                   gasketing or weatherstripping by installing the gasketing first, before the closer or O.H.
                   stop/holder foot. Do not notch the gasketing system.

      C.   Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements
           specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."


3.4        ADJUSTING

      A.   Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to
           ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to op-
           erate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and
           ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.




                                             DOOR HARDWARE
                                               08 71 00 - 8
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012


              1.    Door Closers: Adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the
                    door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch,
                    measured to the leading edge of the door.

      B.      Six-Month Adjustment: Approximately six months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer
              shall perform the following:
              1.     Examine and readjust each item of door hardware as necessary to ensure function of
                     doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware.
              2.     Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel on recommended maintenance procedures.
              3.     Replace door hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, mate-
                     rials, or installation of door hardware units.


3.5           CLEANING AND PROTECTION

      A.      Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

      B.      Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.

      C.      Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or
              deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.




                                                HARDWARE SET

SET #1 – Pair Doors

 2         Continuous Hinges                 780 – 053 HD                            AL         HA
 2         Exit Devices                      2708 x 4900C                            32D        PE
 2         Cylinders                         IE – 72                                 626        BE
                                                                   th
 2         Closer                            4111 H Spring Cush x 5 Hole Spacer      AL         LC
 2         Kick Plate                        K1050 10” x 2” LDW x B4E                32D        RO
 1         Cast Threshold                    627S – 5”                               AL         HA
 2         Sweeps                            872S                                    32D        HA
 1         Astragal                          846S x 845S                             MIL        HA
 1         Head Gasket                       881S                                    MIL        HA
 1         Set Jamb Weather                  877S                                    MIL        HA

SET #2 – Pair Double Egress Doors

 6         Hinges                            T4A3786 5” x 4 1/2”                     26D        MK
 1         Deadlock                          48H 7K                                  26D        BE
 1         Flush Bolt                        555                                     26D        RO
 2         Push Plate                        73 8 x 16 (1 ea CFC)                    32D        RO
 1         Closer                            4111 Spring H Cush                      AL         LC
 1         Closer                            4011 Reg                                AL         LC
 1         Overhead Holder                   590H (Inswing Door)                     26D        LC
 2         Silencers                         SR64                                               IV




                                              DOOR HARDWARE
                                                08 71 00 - 9
                            GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                              DECEMBER 19, 2012


SET #3 – Bi-Fold Doors

 1   Set Trackless Pivots         C-409                         26D    CR
 4   Hinges                       TA2714 4” x 4”                26D    MK
 1   Bottom Guide                 C-913SL                       26D    CR
 1   Guide Channel                C-914                         26D    CR
 1   Pull                         106                           32D    RO

SET #4 – Pair Doors

 6   Hinges                       TA2714 4 1/2” x 4”            26D    MK
 1   Lockset                      45H 7R3H                      626    BE
 2   Flush Bolts                  555 x 570 Dust Proof Strike   26D    RO
 2   Overhead Holders             1540H                         26D    SA
 2   Silencers                    SR64                                 IV


SET #5 – Single Door

 3   Hinges                       T4A3786 4 1/2” x 4 1/2”       26D    MK
 1   Lockset                      45H 7R3H                      626    BE
 1   Closer                       4011 Reg                      AL     LC
 1   Kickplate                    K1050 10” x 2” LDW x B4E      32D    RO
 1   Overhead Holder              590H                          26D    SA
 3   Silencers                    SR64                                 IV


END OF SECTION




                                    DOOR HARDWARE
                                      08 71 00 - 10
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

SECTION 08 81 00 - GLAZING


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1           SUMMARY

      A.      This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those speci-
              fied in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:
              1.      Storefront framing.
              2.      Doors.


1.2           DEFINITIONS

      A.      Manufacturer: A firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass as defined in referenced
              glazing publications.

      B.      Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a
              specified gas.

      C.      Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the
              manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintain-
              ing and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include
              peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating.

      D.      Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal under normal use that is attribut-
              ed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for
              maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evi-
              dence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of
              glass.


1.3           PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

      A.      General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind
              and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable
              to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gas-
              kets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in con-
              struction.
              1.     Kind HS (heat strengthened), Condition A (uncoated surfaces) or Kind FT (fully tem-
                     pered) where full tempering is required at doors and sidelights and other locations where
                     safety glass is required by local building code.

      B.      Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm
              glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites for
              various size openings in nominal thicknesses indicated, but not less than thicknesses and in
              strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria:
              1.     Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300,
                     according to the following requirements:
                     a.    Specified Design Wind Loads: As indicated.
                     b.    Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically
                           or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action.
                           1)     Load Duration: 60 seconds or less.


© Populous Group, LLC 2012                           GLAZING
                                                    08 81 00 - 1
                                     GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                      DECEMBER 19, 2012

                       c.    Maximum Lateral Deflection: For the following types of glass supported on all four
                             edges, provide thickness required that limits center deflection at design wind
                             pressure to 1/50 times the short side length or 1 inch (25 mm), whichever is less.
                             1)    For insulating glass.
                       d.    Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6 mm.

      C.      Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the fol-
              lowing maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing
              members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of
              materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
              1.    Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),
                    material surfaces.

      D.      Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties speci-
              fied based on manufacturer's published test data, as determined according to procedures indi-
              cated below:
              1.     For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick.
              2.     For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units with lites 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick
                     and a nominal 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide interspace.
              3.     Center-of-Glass U-Values: NFRC 100 methodology using LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer
                     program, expressed as Btu/ sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K).
              4.     Center-of-Glass Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200 methodology using LBL's
                     WINDOW 5.2 computer program.
              5.     Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300.


1.4           SUBMITTALS

      A.      Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

      B.      Samples: For the following products, in the form of 12-inch- (300-mm-) square Samples for
              glass.
              1.     Insulating glass for each designation indicated.

      C.      Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in pre-
              paring a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location.

      D.      Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that
              products furnished comply with requirements.

      E.      Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demon-
              strate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names
              and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information speci-
              fied.

      F.      Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Test Report: From glazing sealant manufacturer
              indicating glazing sealants were tested for adhesion to glass and glazing channel substrates
              and for compatibility with glass and other glazing materials.

      G.      Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating the following products comply
              with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products:
              1.     Insulating glass.
              2.     Ceramic-coated insulating spandrel glass
              3.     Glazing sealants.
              4.     Glazing gaskets.


© Populous Group, LLC 2012                            GLAZING
                                                     08 81 00 - 2
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

      H.      SWRI Validation Certificate: For each elastomeric glazing sealant specified to be validated by
              SWRI's Sealant Validation Program.

      I.      Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


1.5           QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.      Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material,
              design, and extent to that indicated for Project and whose work has resulted in construction with
              a record of successful in-service performance.

      B.      Source Limitations for Coated Glass: Obtain coated glass from one manufacturer for each type
              of coating and each type and class of float glass indicated.

      C.      Source Limitations for Insulating Glass: Obtain insulating-glass units from one manufacturer us-
              ing the same type of glass and other components for each type of unit indicated.

      D.      Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories from one source for
              each product and installation method indicated.

      E.      Glass Product Testing: Obtain glass test results for product test reports in "Submittals" Article
              from a qualified testing agency based on testing glass products.
              1.    Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience
                    and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

      F.      Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Product Testing: Obtain sealant test results for product test re-
              ports in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant
              formulations within a 36-month period.
              1.     Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified
                     according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to
                     ASTM E 548.
              2.     Test elastomeric glazing sealants for compliance with requirements specified by
                     reference to ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods.
              3.     Test elastomeric glazing sealants according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for
                     compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920 for adhesion and
                     cohesion under cyclic movement, adhesion-in-peel, and indentation hardness.

      G.      Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Submit to elastomeric glazing sealant
              manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of each glass type, tape sealant, gasket,
              glazing accessory, and glass-framing member that will contact or affect elastomeric glazing
              sealants.
              1.    Use manufacturer's standard test methods to determine whether priming and other
                    specific preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing
                    sealants to glass, tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates.
                    a.     Perform tests under normal environmental conditions replicating those that will
                           exist during installation.
              2.    Submit not fewer than nine pieces of each type and finish of glass-framing members and
                    each type, class, kind, condition, and form of glass as well as one sample of each glazing
                    accessory (gaskets, tape sealants, setting blocks, and spacers).
              3.    Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
              4.    For materials failing tests, obtain sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective
                    measures, including the use of specially formulated primers.




© Populous Group, LLC 2012                           GLAZING
                                                    08 81 00 - 3
                                     GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                        DECEMBER 19, 2012

              5.       Testing will not be required if elastomeric glazing sealant manufacturers submit data
                       based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility
                       with, glazing materials matching those submitted.

      H.      Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and
              ANSI Z97.1.
              1.    Subject to compliance with requirements, permanently mark safety glass with certification
                    label of Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to
                    authorities having jurisdiction.

      I.      Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers
              and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these pub-
              lications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
              1.      GANA Publications: GANA'S "Glazing Manual.”
              2.      SIGMA Publications: SIGMA TM-3000, "Vertical Glazing Guidelines.”

      J.      Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least
              one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the following inspecting and
              testing agency:
              1.     Insulating Glass Certification Council.
              2.     Associated Laboratories, Inc.
              3.     National Accreditation and Management Institute.


1.6           DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

      A.      Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to pre-
              vent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct
              exposure to sun, or other causes.

      B.      For insulating-glass units that will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply with insu-
              lating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing to avoid hermetic
              seal ruptures.


1.7           PROJECT CONDITIONS

      A.      Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate tempera-
              ture conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing
              channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
              1.     Do not install liquid glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions
                     are outside limits permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F (4.4
                     deg C).


1.8           WARRANTY

      A.      General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other
              rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addi-
              tion to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the
              Contract Documents.

      B.      Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Coated-Glass Products: Written warranty, made out to
              Owner and signed by coated-glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for those



© Populous Group, LLC 2012                             GLAZING
                                                      08 81 00 - 4
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                        DECEMBER 19, 2012

              coated-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping
              point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below.
              1.     Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

      C.      Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Written warranty, made out to Owner and
              signed by insulating-glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for insulating-glass
              units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Pro-
              ject site, within specified warranty period indicated below.
              1.      Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1           PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS

      A.      Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the fol-
              lowing:
              1.    AGC Flat Glass North America
              2.    Guardian Industries, SunGuard Advanced Architectural Glass
              3.    Pilkington
              4.    PPG Industries

      B.      Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the follow-
              ing:
              1.    Arch Aluminum & Glass Co., Inc.
              2.    Oldcastle
              3.    Viracon


2.2           PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS

      A.      Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select); class as
              indicated in schedules at the end of Part 3.


2.3           HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS

      A.      Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent glass, flat); Quality q3 (glazing
              select); class, kind, and condition as indicated in schedules at the end of Part 3.
              1.     Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion paral-
                     lel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.
              2.     Flatness Tolerances:
                     a.      Overall bow and warp shall not exceed 50 percent of values tabulated in ASTM C
                             1048.
                     b.      Roller wave peak-to-valley deviation shall not exceed 0.003 inch (0.076 mm). Di-
                             rection of roller wave shall be consistent throughout building.
              3.     For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A.
              4.     For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated glass).




© Populous Group, LLC 2012                            GLAZING
                                                     08 81 00 - 5
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                      DECEMBER 19, 2012

2.4           CERAMIC-COATED GLASS

      A.      Ceramic-Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition B (spandrel glass, one-surface ce-
              ramic coated), Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select), and complying with
              other requirements specified in schedules at the end of Part 3.
              1.     Fallout Resistance: Provide spandrel units identical to those passing the fallout-
                     resistance test for spandrel glass specified in ASTM C 1048.


2.5           COATED FLOAT GLASS

      A.      General: Provide coated glass complying with requirements indicated in this Article and in
              schedules at the end of Part 3.
              1.   Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) coated float glass in place of coated annealed glass
                   where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual
                   glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in "Performance
                   Requirements" Article. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) where safety glass is indicated.
              2.   Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) coated float glass, except provide Kind FT (fully
                   tempered) products where coated safety glass is indicated.

      B.      Pyrolytic-Coated Float Glass: Float glass with solar-reflective metallic-oxide coating applied by
              pyrolytic deposition process during initial manufacture, complying with requirements specified in
              schedules at the end of Part 3.

      C.      Coated Spandrel Float Glass: Float glass complying with requirements specified in glass
              schedules at the end of Part 3 and the following:
              1.   Fallout Resistance: Provide spandrel units identical to those passing the fallout-
                   resistance test for spandrel glass specified in ASTM C 1048.


2.6           INSULATING GLASS

      A.      Insulating-Glass Units: Preassembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a
              dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units and with require-
              ments specified in this Article and in the Insulating-Glass Schedule at the end of Part 3.
              1.     Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where
                     needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites
                     and to comply with glass design requirements specified in "Performance Requirements"
                     Article. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) where safety glass is indicated or otherwise
                     required by loading conditions or building code.

      B.      Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated in the Insulating-
              Glass Schedule at the end of Part 3 are nominal and the overall thicknesses of units are meas-
              ured perpendicularly from outer surfaces of glass lites at unit's edge.

      C.      Sealing System: Provide one of the following manufacturer's standard warm edge spacer mate-
              rial and construction:
              1.     Dual seal, with primary and secondary polyisobutylene and silicone sealants.
              2.     Triple seal with thermoset foam spacer incorporating integral 3A desiccant, pre-applied
                     adhesive for glass bonding, a captive polyisobutylene primary seal, and a structural seal,
                     qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other requirements specified.
                     a.           Sealing System: Triple seal.
                     b.           Warm Edge Spacer Systems: Edgetech “Tri-seal” Foam Super Spacer.




© Populous Group, LLC 2012                          GLAZING
                                                   08 81 00 - 6
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                      DECEMBER 19, 2012

2.7           ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS

      A.      General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements:
              1.   Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with
                   other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units,
                   and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as
                   demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
              2.   Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for
                   selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at
                   time of installation.
              3.   Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
                   range for this characteristic.

      B.      Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indi-
              cated for each liquid-applied, chemically curing sealant in the Glazing Sealant Schedule at the
              end of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and
              uses.


2.8           GLAZING TAPES

      A.      Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids con-
              tent of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or
              without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application
              indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with ASTM C 1281
              and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:
              1.     AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated.
              2.     AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous
                     pressure.
              3.     AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous
                     pressure.

      B.      Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape: Closed-cell, PVC foam tape; factory coated with adhesive on
              both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with
              AAMA 800 for the following types:
              1.    Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.
              2.    Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of
                    liquid sealant.


2.9           GLAZING GASKETS

      A.      Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames
              with molded corner units and zipper lock strips, complying with ASTM C 542, black.

      B.      Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below, comply-
              ing with standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile and hard-
              ness required to maintain watertight seal:
              1.     Neoprene, ASTM C 864.
              2.     EPDM, ASTM C 864.
              3.     Silicone, ASTM C 1115.
              4.     Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber, ASTM C 1115.
              5.     Any material indicated above.




© Populous Group, LLC 2012                           GLAZING
                                                    08 81 00 - 7
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                      DECEMBER 19, 2012

      C.      Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned gaskets of mate-
              rial indicated below; complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; and of profile and hardness
              required to maintain watertight seal:
              1.      Neoprene.
              2.      EPDM.
              3.      Silicone.
              4.      Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber.
              5.      Any material indicated above.


2.10          MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

      A.      General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing
              standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application in-
              dicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

      B.      Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

      C.      Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

      D.      Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness re-
              quired by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

      E.      Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side
              walking).

      F.      Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and
              density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant perfor-
              mance.

      G.      Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Identical to product used in test assembly to ob-
              tain fire-resistance rating.


2.11          FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS

      A.      Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Pro-
              ject, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with writ-
              ten instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard, to comply with sys-
              tem performance requirements.

      B.      Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites in a manner that produces
              square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with indoor and outdoor faces.

      C.      Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1           EXAMINATION

      A.      Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:
              1.   Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and
                   offsets at corners.

© Populous Group, LLC 2012                          GLAZING
                                                   08 81 00 - 8
                                     GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

              2.       Presence and functioning of weep system.
              3.       Minimum required face or edge clearances.
              4.       Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.

      B.      Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2           PREPARATION

      A.      Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing.
              Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.


3.3           GLAZING, GENERAL

      A.      Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and
              other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in
              referenced glazing publications.

      B.      Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, mini-
              mum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.
              Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation.

      C.      Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass
              from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge dam-
              age or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance
              and appearance.

      D.      Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by pre-
              construction sealant-substrate testing.

      E.      Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publica-
              tions, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible
              sealant suitable for heel bead.

      F.      Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

      G.      Provide spacers for glass lites where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm)
              as follows:
              1.     Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.
                     Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and
                     glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face
                     clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.
              2.     Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to
                     sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed
                     thickness of tape.

      H.      Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways
              in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to re-
              quirements in referenced glazing publications.

      I.      Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.




© Populous Group, LLC 2012                            GLAZING
                                                     08 81 00 - 9
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                      DECEMBER 19, 2012

      J.      Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gas-
              ket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation
              is subjected to movement.

      K.      Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by
              gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with
              sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.


3.4           TAPE GLAZING

      A.      Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush
              with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

      B.      Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to
              make them fit opening.

      C.      Where framing joints are vertical, cover these joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first
              and then to jambs. Where framing joints are horizontal, cover these joints by applying tapes to
              jambs and then to heads and sills.

      D.      Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped.
              Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

      E.      Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed.

      F.      Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.

      G.      Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense
              compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops.
              Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

      H.      Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.


3.5           GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

      A.      Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings
              exactly, with stretch allowance during installation.

      B.      Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place
              with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

      C.      Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gas-
              ket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces
              of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
              Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass.
              Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

      D.      Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.




© Populous Group, LLC 2012                          GLAZING
                                                   08 81 00 - 10
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012



3.6           SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

      A.      Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass
              lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding
              into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers
              and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clear-
              ance for optimum sealant performance.

      B.      Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond
              of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

      C.      Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.


3.7           PROTECTION AND CLEANING

      A.      Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed stream-
              ers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonper-
              manent labels, and clean surfaces.

      B.      Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction opera-
              tions, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come in-
              to contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer.

      C.      Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at
              frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum,
              alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended by glass manufacturer.

      D.      Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way,
              including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.

      E.      Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before
              date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as
              recommended by glass manufacturer.


3.8           MONOLITHIC FLOAT-GLASS SCHEDULE

      A.      Uncoated Clear Float Glass: Where glass as designated below is indicated, provide Type I
              (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear) glass lites complying with the following:
              1.     Uncoated Clear Fully Tempered Float Glass at Doors: Kind FT (fully tempered).


3.9           INSULATING-GLASS SCHEDULE

      A.      Low-E Insulating Vision Glass: Where glass of this designation is indicated, provide low-
              emissivity insulating-glass units complying with the following:
              1.    Products: The standard of quality is based on the following product:
                    a.      Viracon “VE1-85 ”
              2.    Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: 1 inch overall and 1/4 inch (minimum)
                    each lite
              3.    Interspace Content: Air.
              4.    Indoor Lite: Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear) float glass.


© Populous Group, LLC 2012                          GLAZING
                                                   08 81 00 - 11
                                     GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

                       a.     Kind HS (heat strengthened) or Kind FT (fully tempered).
              5.       Outdoor Lite: Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear) float glass.
                       a.     Kind HS (heat strengthened), Condition A (uncoated surfaces) or Kind FT (fully
                              tempered) Condition C (other coated glass).
              6.       Low-Emissivity Coating: Second surface.
              7.       Visible Light Transmittance: 76 percent.
              8.       Winter nighttime U-Value: 0.31
              9.       Summer daytime U-Value: 0.29
              10.      Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.54
              11.      Outdoor Visible Reflectance: 12 percent.
              12.      Shading Coefficient: 0.63

    B.        Ceramic-Coated, Low-E, Insulating Spandrel Glass: Where glass of this designation is
              indicated, provide low-emissivity insulating-glass units complying with the following:
              1.     Products: The standard of quality is based on the following product:
                     a.     Viracon “VE1-85 ”
              2.     Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: 1 inch overall and 1/4 inch (minimum)
                     each lite
              3.     Interspace Content: Air.
              4.     Indoor Lite: Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear) float glass.
                     a.     Kind HS (heat strengthened) or Kind FT (fully tempered).
              5.     Outdoor Lite: Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear) float glass.
                     a.     Kind HS (heat strengthened), Condition A (uncoated surfaces) or Kind FT (fully
                            tempered) Condition C (other coated glass).
              6.     Low-Emissivity Coating: Second surface.
              7.     Ceramic Coating: Third surface.
              8.     Winter nighttime U-Value: 0.31
              9.     Summer daytime U-Value: 0.29


3.10          GLAZING SEALANT SCHEDULE

    A.        Medium-Modulus Nonacid-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealant: Provide products complying with
              the following:
              1.      Products: Provide one of the following:
                      a.     795; Dow Corning.
                      b.     Silpruf NB SCS9000; GE Silicones.
                      c.     UltraPruf II SCS2900; GE Silicones.
                      d.     Spectrem 2; Tremco.
              2.      Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
              3.      Class: 50.
              4.      Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
              5.      Uses Related to Glazing Substrates: M, G, A, and, O.
              6.      Use O Glazing Substrates: Coated glass, color anodic aluminum, aluminum coated with
                      a high-performance coating, galvanized steel, brick, stone, tile, and wood.


END OF SECTION




© Populous Group, LLC 2012                           GLAZING
                                                    08 81 00 - 12
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATIONS
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                         DECEMBER 19, 2012

SECTION 09 21 16 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1           SUMMARY

      A.      This Section includes the following:
              1.    Nonload-bearing steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies.
              2.    Gypsum board panels attached to steel framing.
              3.    Tile backing panels attached to steel framing.

      B.      Nomenclature: Framing products provided under this Section are indicated on the Drawings as
              “steel studs.” Structural framing specified in Division 05 Section “Cold Formed Metal Framing”
              is indicated on the Drawings as “metal framing.”


1.2           DEFINITIONS

      A.      Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA-505 for definitions of
              terms for gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards.


1.3           PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

      A.      Structural Performance: Provide steel framing capable of withstanding design loads within lim-
              its and under conditions indicated.
              1.     Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections
                     greater than the following:
                     a.    Interior Nonload-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/240 of the wall
                           height under dead load and a horizontal live load of 5 lbf/sq. ft. (239 Pa).
                     b.    Ceiling Joist Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the span of the greatest ceil-
                           ing dimension under dead load and a vertical live load of 10 lbf/sq. ft. (478 Pa)..


1.4           SUBMITTALS

      A.      Product Data for each type of product specified.

      B.      Shop Drawings showing locations, fabrication, and installation of control and expansion joints
              including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of
              Work.

      C.      Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations
              and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:
              1.    Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures; air outlets and inlets; speakers; sprinklers;
                    access panels; and special moldings at walls, column penetrations, and other junctures
                    of gypsum board ceilings with adjoining construction.
              2.    Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/8 inch = 1 foot (1:96).
                    a.     Provide larger scale details of sufficient size to indicate light cove, including but not
                           limited to, cantilever and lighting detailing.




© Populous Group, LLC 2012                GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
                                                 09 21 16 - 1
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATIONS
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

1.5           QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.      Single-Source Responsibility for Steel Framing: Obtain steel framing members for gypsum
              board assemblies from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

      B.      Single-Source Responsibility for Panel Products: Obtain each type of gypsum board and other
              panel products from a single manufacturer.

      C.      Single-Source Responsibility for Finishing Materials: Obtain finishing materials from either the
              same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel products or from a manufac-
              turer acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer.

      D.      Mockups: Before installing soffits and ceilings, construct mockups to demonstrate aesthetic ef-
              fects and qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following re-
              quirements, using materials indicated for completed work:
              1.     Provide the following mockups:
                     a.     Portion of wood panel ceiling soffit to include edge conditions and incorporation of
                            drapery track, lighting, and diffusers.
              2.     Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be
                     constructed.
              3.     Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
              4.     Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting construction.
              5.     Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
                     judging the completed Work.
                     a.     Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial
                            Completion may become part of the completed Work.


1.6           DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

      A.      Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identifi-
              cation of manufacturer or supplier.

      B.      Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
              weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes.
              Neatly stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging.


1.7           PROJECT CONDITIONS

      A.      Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for apply-
              ing and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board
              manufacturer's recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

      B.      Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not
              less than 40 deg F (4 deg C). For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain
              not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 48 hours before application and continuously after until
              dry. Do not exceed 95 deg F (35 deg C) when using temporary heat sources.

      C.      Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces as required to dry joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts
              during hot, dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly.




© Populous Group, LLC 2012               GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
                                                09 21 16 - 2
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATIONS
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1           MANUFACTURERS

      A.      Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
              products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
              1.    Steel Framing and Furring:
                    a.     ClarkWestern Building Systems.
                    b.     Consolidated Systems, Inc.
                    c.     Dale Industries, Inc.
                    d.     Dietrich Industries, Inc.
              2.    Gypsum Board and Related Products:
                    a.     CertainTeed Corporation
                    b.     G-P Gypsum.
                    c.     Lafarge North America Inc.
                    d.     National Gypsum Company.
                    e.     Temple-Inland
                    f.     USG Corporation.


2.2           STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS

      A.      General: Provide components complying with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

      B.      Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indi-
              cated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for at-
              taching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to
              10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to
              ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

      C.      Wire Ties: ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641M), Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062 inch (1.6
              mm) thick.

      D.      Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641M), Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch
              (4.1-mm) diameter.

      E.      Angle-Type Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch (22.2 mm) wide, formed from
              0.0635-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653, G 90
              (ASTM A 653M, Z 180) coating designation, with bolted connections and 5/16-inch (8-mm) di-
              ameter bolts.

      F.      Channels: Cold-rolled steel, 0.0598-inch (1.5-mm) minimum thickness of base (uncoated) met-
              al and 7/16-inch- (11.1-mm-) wide flanges, and as follows:
              1.     Carrying Channels: 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm) deep, 475 lb/1000 feet (70 kg/100 m), unless
                     otherwise indicated.
              2.     Furring Channels: 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) deep, 300 lb/1000 feet (45 kg/100 m), unless
                     otherwise indicated.
              3.     Finish: ASTM A 653, G 60 (ASTM A 653M, Z 180) hot-dip galvanized coating.

      G.      Steel Studs for Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent back 90 de-
              grees and doubled over to form 3/16-inch- (5-mm-) wide minimum lip (return), and complying
              with the following requirements for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth:
              1.     Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.84 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
              2.     Depth: As indicated.


© Populous Group, LLC 2012               GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
                                                09 21 16 - 3
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATIONS
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                    DECEMBER 19, 2012

              3.       Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G 40 (ASTM A 653M, Z 90) hot-dip galvanized coating.


2.3           STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS

      A.      General: Provide steel framing members complying with the following requirements:
              1.   Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G 60 (ASTM A 653M, Z 180) hot-dip galvanized
                   coating.

      B.      Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent back 90 degrees and
              doubled over to form 3/16-inch- (5-mm-) wide minimum lip (return), and complying with the fol-
              lowing requirements for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth:
              1.    Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.84 mm).
              2.    Depth: 3-5/8 inches (92.1 mm), unless otherwise indicated.

      C.      Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:
              1.     Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch- (50.8-mm-)
                     deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and
                     outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner.
              2.     Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes
                     applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in
                     thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
                     a.     Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
                            1)    SLP-TRK; Brady Construction innovations, Inc.
                            2)    Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD Series.
                            3)    Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT).

      D.      Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with
              movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly
              indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of
              studs.
              1.     Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
                     a.     Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak attached to studs with Fire Trak Slip Clip.
                     b.     Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System.

      E.      Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width
              indicated.
              1.     Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0528 inch (1.5 mm).

      F.      Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat shaped, depth and minimum thickness of base
              (uncoated) metal as follows:
              1.    Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
              2.    Thickness: As indicated.
              3.    Depth: 7/8 inch (22.2 mm).

      G.      Furring Brackets: Serrated-arm type, adjustable, fabricated from corrosion-resistant steel sheet
              complying with ASTM C 645, minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal of 0.0329 inch (0.84
              mm), designed for screw attachment to steel studs and steel rigid furring channels used for fur-
              ring.

      H.      Fasteners for Metal Framing: Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistance,
              holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel framing and furring members se-
              curely to substrates involved; complying with the recommendations of gypsum board manufac-
              turers for applications indicated.



© Populous Group, LLC 2012               GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
                                                09 21 16 - 4
                                  GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATIONS
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                    DECEMBER 19, 2012

2.4           GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS

      A.      General: Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available that will mini-
              mize end-to-end butt joints in each area indicated to receive gypsum board application.
              1.    Widths: Provide gypsum board in widths of 48 inches (1219 mm).

      B.      Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396.
              1.   Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X.
              2.   Long Edges: Tapered.


2.5           TILE BACKING PANELS

      A.      Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each
              area and correspond with support system indicated.

      B.      Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M, with manufacturer's
              standard edges.
              1.    Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
                    a.    CertainTeed Corp.; GlasRoc Tile Backer.
                    b.    Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensShield Tile Backer.
              2.    Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X.

      C.      Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or 1325, with manufacturer's
              standard edges.
              1.    Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
                    a.    FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board.
                    b.    National Gypsum Company, Permabase Cement Board.
                    c.    USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.
              2.    Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).


2.6           TRIM ACCESSORIES

      A.      Accessories for Interior Installation: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints complying with
              ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below:
              1.   Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced
                   galvanized steel sheet.
              2.   Shapes indicated below by reference to Fig. 1 designations in ASTM C 1047:
                   a.     Cornerbead on outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.
                   b.     LC-bead with both face and back flanges; face flange formed to receive joint
                          compound. Use LC-beads for edge trim, unless otherwise indicated.
                   c.     L-bead with face flange only; face flange formed to receive joint compound. Use
                          L-bead where indicated.
                   d.     U-bead with face and back flanges; face flange formed to be left without
                          application of joint compound. Use U-bead where indicated.
                   e.     One-piece expansion joint formed with V-shaped slot and removable strip covering
                          slot opening.


2.7           JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

      A.      General: Provide joint treatment materials complying with ASTM C 475/C 475M and the rec-
              ommendations of both the manufacturers of sheet products and of joint treatment materials for
              each application indicated.


© Populous Group, LLC 2012              GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
                                               09 21 16 - 5
                                  GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATIONS
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                     DECEMBER 19, 2012

      B.      Joint Tape for Gypsum Board: Pressure-sensitive or staple-attached, open-weave, glass-fiber
              reinforcing tape with setting-type joint compound.

      C.      Setting-Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory-packaged vinyl-based products
              complying with the following requirements for formulation and intended use.
              1.     Ready-Mixed Formulation: Factory-mixed product.
                     a.   Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over fasteners
                          and face flanges of trim accessories.
                     b.   Topping compound formulated for fill (second) and finish (third) coats.
                     c.   All-purpose compound formulated for both taping and topping compounds.

      D.      Tile Backing Panel Finishing Materials: Tape, joint and skim coat compounds as recommended
              by manufacturer or as follows:
              1.     Tiled Surfaces:
                     a.     Joint Tape: G-P Dens-Shield glass mesh tape or equivalent.
                     b.     Reinforcing Mesh: 2 inch coated mesh tape equivalent to Sto “Reinforcing Fiber
                            Mesh.”
                     c.     Tile setting materials as specified in Division 09 Section “Tiling.”


2.8           ACOUSTICAL MATERIALS

      A.      Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) pro-
              duced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag
              wool, or rock wool.

      B.      Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex
              sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission
              through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing rep-
              resentative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

      C.      Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
              1.   Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:
                   a.     Pecora Corp.; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.
                   b.     United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.


2.9           MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

      A.      General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum board construction that comply with referenced
              standards and recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer.

      B.      Fastening Adhesive for Metal: Special adhesive recommended for laminating gypsum panels to
              steel framing.

      C.      Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
              1.    Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from
                    0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.
              2.    For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by
                    panel manufacturer.

      D.      Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation."




© Populous Group, LLC 2012              GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
                                               09 21 16 - 6
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATIONS
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1           EXAMINATION

      A.      Examine substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach or abut, installed hollow metal
              frames, cast-in-anchors, and structural framing, with Installer present, for compliance with re-
              quirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies
              specified in this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have
              been corrected.


3.2           PREPARATION

      A.      Ceiling Anchorages: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of
              overhead structural assemblies to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to
              building structure have been installed to receive ceiling hangers that will develop their full
              strength and at spacing required to support ceilings.

      B.      After sprayed-on fire resistant materials have been applied, remove only as much as needed to
              complete installation of gypsum board assemblies without reducing thickness of fire resistant
              materials below that is required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect remaining fire
              resistant materials from damage.


3.3           INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL

      A.      Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C 754 and with
              ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation.

      B.      Install supplementary framing, and backing plates to support fixtures, equipment services,
              signage, TV monitor supports, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar
              construction.

      C.      Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

      D.      Comply with details indicated and with recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer or, if
              none available, with United States Gypsum Co.'s "Gypsum Construction Handbook."

      E.      Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading
              imposed by structural movement. Comply with details shown on Drawings.
              1.     Where building structure abuts ceiling perimeter or penetrates ceiling.
              2.     Where partition framing and wall furring abut structure, except at floor.
                     a.     Provide slip- or cushioned-type joints as detailed to attain lateral support and avoid
                            axial loading.
                     b.     Install deflection track top runner to attain lateral support and avoid axial loading.
                     c.     Install deflection and firestop track top runner at fire-resistance-rated assemblies
                            where indicated.
                            1)      Attach jamb studs at openings to tracks using manufacturer's standard stud
                                    clip.

      F.      Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members. In-
              dependently frame both sides of joints with framing or furring members as indicated.




© Populous Group, LLC 2012               GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
                                                09 21 16 - 7
                                  GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATIONS
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                     DECEMBER 19, 2012

3.4           INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS

      A.      Suspend ceiling hangers from building structural members and as follows:
              1.   Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
                   plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay
                   hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by
                   bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
              2.   Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
                   spacings that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard
                   suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in
                   form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and
                   hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced
                   standards.
              3.   Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts,
                   eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate,
                   and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
              4.   Secure flat, angle, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members,
                   by attaching to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and
                   appropriate for structure as well as for type of hanger involved, and in a manner that will
                   not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
              5.   Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

      B.      Sway-brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support.

      C.      Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and at spacings indicated, but not less
              than that required by the referenced steel framing installation standard.
              1.      Wire Hangers: 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c.
              2.      Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c.
              3.      Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.

      D.      Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so that cross-
              furring or grid suspension members are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) as
              measured both lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members.


3.5           INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS

      A.      Install runners (tracks) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum board
              stud assemblies abut other construction.
              1.      Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt felt strips.

      B.      Installation Tolerances: Install each steel framing and furring member so that fastening surfac-
              es do not vary more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent fram-
              ing.

      C.      Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceil-
              ings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue fram-
              ing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above
              ceiling to provide support for gypsum board.

      D.      Terminate partition framing at suspended ceilings where indicated.

      E.      Install steel studs and furring in sizes and at spacings indicated.
              1.      Single-Layer Construction: Space studs 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise
                      indicated.


© Populous Group, LLC 2012              GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
                                               09 21 16 - 8
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATIONS
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

      F.      Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each gyp-
              sum board panel can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

      G.      Frame door openings to comply with GA-219, and with applicable published recommendations
              of gypsum board manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. Attach vertical studs at jambs with
              screws either directly to frames or to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track sec-
              tion (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
              1.      Install 2 studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
              2.      Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof
                      structure above.

      H.      Frame openings other than door openings to comply with details indicated or, if none indicated,
              as required for door openings. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required
              above door heads.


3.6           APPLYING AND FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

      A.      Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and finish gypsum panels to comply
              with ASTM C 840 and GA-216.

      B.      Install sound-attenuation blankets, where indicated, prior to installing gypsum panels unless
              blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

      C.      Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to
              avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adja-
              cent panels not less than one framing member.

      D.      Install gypsum panels with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged, or damp panels.
              Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm)
              of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

      E.      Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate
              supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered
              edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Avoid
              joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings where possible.

      F.      Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open
              (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

      G.      Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts.

      H.      Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

      I.      Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above
              ceilings, etc.), except in chases that are braced internally.
              1.     Except where concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke
                     ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m)
                     in area.
              2.     Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
              3.     Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and other structural
                     members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to
                     fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch-
                     (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant.



© Populous Group, LLC 2012               GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
                                                09 21 16 - 9
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATIONS
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                        DECEMBER 19, 2012

      J.      Isolate perimeter of nonload-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except
              floors, as detailed. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations
              and trim edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints
              between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

      K.      Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and fin-
              ishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations.
              1.     Space screws a maximum of 12 inches (304.8 mm) o.c. for vertical applications.

      L.      Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches (203.2 mm) o.c.


3.7           GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION METHODS

      A.      Single-Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard panels as follows:
              1.    On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest
                    extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.
              2.    On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing), unless
                    otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end
                    joints.
                    a.      Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses
                            of board.
                    b.      At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indi-
                            cated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
              3.    On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end
                    joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.
              4.    Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.


3.8           APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS

      A.      Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Comply with manufacturer's written installation
              instructions and install where indicated to receive tile. Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap where
              panels abut other construction or penetrations.

      B.      Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at showers and other wet areas indicated locations
              indicated to receive tile.

      C.      Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a
              uniform plane across panel surfaces.


3.9           INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

      A.      General: For trim accessories with back flanges, fasten to framing with the same fasteners
              used to fasten gypsum board. Otherwise, fasten trim accessories according to accessory man-
              ufacturer's directions for type, length, and spacing of fasteners.

      B.      Install cornerbead at external corners.

      C.      Install edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed. Provide edge trim
              type with face flange formed to receive joint compound, except where other types are indicated.
              1.      Install LC-bead where gypsum panels are tightly abutted to other construction and back
                      flange can be attached to framing or supporting substrate.
              2.      Install L-bead where edge trim can only be installed after gypsum panels are installed.


© Populous Group, LLC 2012               GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
                                               09 21 16 - 10
                                     GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATIONS
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                      DECEMBER 19, 2012

              3.       Install U-bead where indicated.

    D.        Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for
              visual effect; except, that in no case shall control joints in ceilings, soffits, or partitions be
              spaced at distance greater than 30”-0”.


3.10          FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

    A.        General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, flanges of cornerbead, edge trim, control
              joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gyp-
              sum board surfaces for decoration.

    B.        Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged areas using setting-type joint com-
              pound.

    C.        Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim accessories having flanges not
              requiring tape.

    D.        Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints and to flanges of trim accessories as recommended
              by trim accessory manufacturer.

    E.        Gypsum Board Finish Levels:         Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to
              ASTM C 840, for locations indicated:
              1.   Level 1: Embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indi-
                   cated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies and
                   sound-rated assemblies.
              2.   Level 2: Embed tape and apply separate first coat of joint compound to tape, fasteners,
                   and trim flanges where panels are substrate for tile and where indicated.
              3.   Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to
                   tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless
                   otherwise indicated.
              4.   Level 5: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to
                   tape, fasteners, and trim flanges, and apply skim coat of joint compound over entire sur-
                   face of the following:
                   a.     Curved partitions
                   b.     Partitions with continuous, unbroken length of 20 feet or greater.
                   c.     Horizontal and vertical surfaces of soffits.

    F.        Tile Backing Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
              1.     Apply base coat to exposed surfaces of tile backing panel in minimum thickness of 1/16-
                     inch (1.6-mm) dry-coat thickness.
              2.     Embed reinforcing mesh in wet base coat to produce wrinkle-free installation with mesh
                     continuous at corners and overlapped not less than 2-1/2 inches (64 mm). Do not lap re-
                     inforcing mesh within 8 inches (204 mm) of corners. Completely embed mesh, applying
                     additional base-coat material if necessary, so reinforcing-mesh color and pattern are not
                     visible.
              3.     Apply skim coat to completely embed mesh over entire surface and to achieve a fine
                     sand texture.
              4.     Primer and Finish Coat: As specified in Division 09 Section “Painting.”




© Populous Group, LLC 2012                GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
                                                09 21 16 - 11
                                 GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATIONS
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                DECEMBER 19, 2012

3.11          PROTECTION

    A.        Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other
              non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall
              application.

    B.        Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
              construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

    C.        Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
              1.  Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
                  discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
              2.  Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
                  splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.


END OF SECTION




© Populous Group, LLC 2012            GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
                                            09 21 16 - 12
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATIONS
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                        DECEMBER 19, 2012

SECTION 09 30 00 - TILING


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1           SUMMARY

      A.      This Section includes the following:
              1.    Thin-set wall and floor tile.
              2.    Thin-set stone wall tile.
              3.    Anti-fracture membrane for thin-set tile installations.
              4.    Metal edge strips installed as part of tile installations.

      B.      Related Sections include the following:
              1.    Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for cementitious backer units installed in
                    gypsum wallboard assemblies.


1.2           DEFINITIONS

      A.      Module Size: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499) plus joint
              width indicated.

      B.      Facial Dimension: Nominal tile size as defined in ANSI A137.1.


1.3           PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

      A.      Slip Resistance: Provide finished surfaces with a verifiable slip resistance as recommended in
              the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities
              (ADAAG), and as determined by the Owner and the Owner’s insurance and legal counsels for
              slip and fall insurability and legal liability.

      B.      Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the
              following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028:
              1.     Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6.
              2.     Step Treads: Minimum 0.6.
              3.     Ramp Surfaces: Minimum 0.8.


1.4           SUBMITTALS

      A.      Product Data: For each type of tile, mortar, grout, and other products specified.

      B.      Shop Drawings: For the following:
              1.   Tile patterns and locations.
              2.   Widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile
                   substrates and finished tile surfaces.

      C.      Grout Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual sections of
              grout showing the full range of colors available for each type of grout indicated.




© Populous Group, LLC 2012                              TILING
                                                      09 30 00 - 1
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATIONS
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                         DECEMBER 19, 2012

      D.      Samples for Verification: Of each item listed below, prepared on Samples of size and construc-
              tion indicated. Where products involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets
              showing the full range of variations expected.
              1.     Each type and composition of tile and for each color and texture required, at least 12
                     inches (300 mm) square, mounted on braced cementitious backer units, and with grouted
                     joints using product complying with specified requirements and approved for completed
                     work in color or colors selected by Architect.
              2.     Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color required.
              3.     Metal edge strips in 6-inch (150-mm) lengths.

      E.      Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile
              manufacturer and Installer.

      F.      Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the products furnished comply
              with requirements.

      G.      Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
              demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
              names and addresses, names of architects and owners, and other information specified.

      H.      Tile Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance of special-purpose tile with
              specified requirements.

      I.      Setting Material Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance of tile-setting
              and -grouting products with specified requirements.


1.5           QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.      Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed tile installations
              similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of suc-
              cessful in-service performance.

      B.      Tile Council of North America (TCNA) Installation Guidelines: TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic,
              Glass, and Stone Tile Installation." Comply with TCNA installation methods indicated in ceram-
              ic tile installation schedules.

      C.      Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, composition, and variety of
              tile from one source with resources to provide products from the same production run for each
              contiguous area of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the
              Work.

      D.      Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality
              for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggre-
              gate from one source or producer.

      E.      Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this
              Section from one source and by a single manufacturer for each product:
              1.    Joint sealants.
              2.    Anti-fracture membrane.




© Populous Group, LLC 2012                             TILING
                                                     09 30 00 - 2
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATIONS
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

1.6           DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

      A.      Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels in-
              tact until time of use. Comply with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packag-
              es.

      B.      Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, and other
              causes.

      C.      Handle tile with temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces
              from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile,
              remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.


1.7           PROJECT CONDITIONS

      A.      Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is completed and am-
              bient temperature and humidity conditions are being maintained to comply with referenced
              standards and manufacturer's written instructions.


1.8           EXTRA MATERIALS

      A.      Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products
              installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels de-
              scribing contents.
              1.      Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount in-
                      stalled, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1           MANUFACTURERS

      A.      Basis-of-Design Product: The design is based on the products named in the Finish Legend.
              Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named products or comparable
              products by one of the other manufacturers specified. Comparable products are subject to re-
              view and approval through the submittal process specified

      B.      Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
              products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
              1.    Tile Products:
                    a.     American Olean Tile Company.
                    b.     Crossville Ceramics.
                    c.     Dal-Tile Corporation.
                    d.     Florida Tile Industries, Inc.
                    e.     Metropolitan Ceramics.
                    f.     Summitville Tiles, Inc.
              2.    Tile-Setting and -Grouting Materials:
                    a.     Custom Building Products
                    b.     Laticrete International, Inc.
                    c.     Mapei




© Populous Group, LLC 2012                            TILING
                                                    09 30 00 - 3
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATIONS
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

2.2           PRODUCTS, GENERAL

      A.      ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for
              Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
              1.   Provide tile complying with Standard Grade requirements, unless otherwise indicated.
              2.   For facial dimensions of tile, comply with requirements relating to tile sizes specified in
                   Part 1 "Definitions" Article.

      B.      ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI stand-
              ards referenced in "Setting Materials" and "Grouting Materials" articles.

      C.      Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated in the
              Finish Legend, provide specific products or materials complying with the following requirements:
              1.     Match colors, textures, and patterns indicated by referencing manufacturer's standard
                     designations for these characteristics.

      D.      Mounting: Where factory-mounted tile is required, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assem-
              blies as standard with manufacturer, unless another mounting method is indicated.

      E.      Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where needed to prevent grout from staining or
              adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat tile with continuous film of temporary protective coat-
              ing, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.

      F.      Trim Units: Provide tile trim units to match characteristics of adjoining flat tile and to comply
              with the following requirements:
              1.     Size: As indicated, coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where appli-
                     cable.
              2.     Shapes: As follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:
                     a.     Base for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Straight.
                     b.     Wainscot Cap for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose.
                     c.     External Corners for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose.
                     d.     Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners, except with coved base and cap
                            angle pieces designed to member with stretcher shapes.


2.3           ANTI-FRACTURE MEMBRANE FOR THIN-SET TILE INSTALLATIONS

      A.      General: Manufacturer's standard product, selected from the following, that complies with
              ANSI A118.10 and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include
              reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer.

      B.      Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Crack Isolation Membrane: Manufacturer's standard product
              that complies with ANSI A118.12 for high performance and is recommended by the
              manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories
              recommended by manufacturer.


2.4           SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS

      A.      Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4, consisting of the following:
              1.    Prepackaged dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive
                    to which only water must be added at Project site.
              2.    Prepackaged dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene-rubber
                    liquid-latex additive.



© Populous Group, LLC 2012                            TILING
                                                    09 30 00 - 4
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATIONS
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

                       a.    For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar that complies with Paragraph F-
                             4.6.1 in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.
              3.       Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be in-
                       corporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following
                       a.    Custom Building Products; “OptiCure Fortified Thin-Set Mortar.”
                       b.    “Grani/Rapid System”; Mapei.
                       c.    “Laticrete 211/4237”; Laticrete.

      B.      Latex-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, composed as follows:
              1.    Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be in-
                    corporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following
                    a.     Sanded Dry-Grout Mix: Commercial portland cement grout for joints 1/8 inch (3.2
                           mm) and wider.
                           1)    Custom Building Products: “Polyblend Sanded Grout.”
                           2)    MAPEI Corporation: “Keracolor S.”
                    b.     Unsanded Dry-Grout Mix: Commercial portland cement grout for joints 1/8 inch
                           (3.2 mm) or less.
                           1)    Custom Building Products: “Polyblend Non-sanded Grout.”
                           2)    Laticrete International, Inc. “1600 Sanded Grout/1776 Grout Enhancer.”
                           3)    MAPEI Corporation: “Keracolor U.”

      C.      Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7, color as indicated.
              1.   Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be in-
                   corporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following
                   a.    Unsanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and narrower.
                   b.    Sanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and wider.
                         1)     Laticrete International, Inc.: “1500 Sanded Grout/1776 Grout Enhancer.”
                         2)     MAPEI Corporation: “Ultracolor.”

      D.      Chemical-Resistant, Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy: ANSI A118.3, with a
              VOC content of 65 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
              Method 24).
              1.   Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to
                   temperatures of up to 140 deg F (60 deg C) and 212 deg F (100 deg C), respectively,
                   and certified by manufacturer for intended use.
              2.   Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be in-
                   corporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following
                   a.     Custom Building Products: “100% Solids Epoxy Grout.”
                   b.     Laticrete International, Inc. “SpectraLock ProGrout.”
                   c.     MAPEI Corporation: “Kerapoxy.”


2.5           MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

      A.      Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based
              formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indi-
              cated.

      B.      Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or
              combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications,
              stainless steel; ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed-edge material.

      C.      Temporary Protective Coating: Either product indicated below that is formulated to protect ex-
              posed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; compatible with tile, mortar, and
              grout products; and easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile.


© Populous Group, LLC 2012                             TILING
                                                     09 30 00 - 5
                                     GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATIONS
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                         DECEMBER 19, 2012

              1.       Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined and odorless, containing at least 0.5 percent oil with
                       a melting point of 120 to 140 deg F (49 to 60 deg C) per ASTM D 87.
              2.       Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is special-
                       ly formulated and recommended for use as temporary protective coating for tile.

      D.      Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and
              grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout
              manufacturers.

      E.      Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints and that does not
              change color or appearance of grout.


2.6           MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

      A.      Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufactur-
              ers' written instructions.

      B.      Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.

      C.      Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and
              other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance
              characteristics for installations indicated.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1           EXAMINATION

      A.      Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for
              compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
              performance of installed tile.
              1.    Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are
                    incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances
                    that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by
                    ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.
              2.    Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with bonded mortar bed or thin-set
                    mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations
                    indicated.
                    a.     Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically
                           scarified.
                    b.     Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or
                           grinding.
              3.    Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical
                    units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed.
              4.    Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if
                    not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.

      B.      Moisture Testing: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
              1.    Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed
                    with installation only after substrates pass testing.
                    a.     Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation
                           only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of
                           water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.


© Populous Group, LLC 2012                              TILING
                                                      09 30 00 - 6
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATIONS
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                           DECEMBER 19, 2012

                       b.    Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after
                             substrates pass testing.

      C.      Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2           PREPARATION

      A.      Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that contain soap, wax,
              oil, or silicone and are incompatible with tile-setting materials by using a terrazzo or concrete
              grinder, a drum sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy-duty wire brush.

      B.      Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with latex-portland cement mortars that com-
              ply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 series of tile installation stand-
              ards for installations indicated.
              1.     Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per tile-setting material manufacturer's
                     written instructions to fill cracks, holes, and depressions.
              2.     Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.

      C.      Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during Sample submit-
              tals, verify that tile has been blended in the factory and packaged so tile units taken from one
              package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match ap-
              proved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project
              site before installing.

      D.      Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where needed to prevent grout from staining or
              adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary protective
              coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.


3.3           INSTALLATION, GENERAL

      A.      ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 series of tile installation
              standards in "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and
              grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.

      B.      TCNA Installation Guidelines: TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installa-
              tion." Comply with TCNA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.

      C.      Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete
              covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstruc-
              tions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

      D.      Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring
              visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight
              aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so
              plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

      E.      Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining
              tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are the same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in
              both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uni-
              form joint widths, unless otherwise indicated.
              1.     For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets the same width as joints with-
                     in tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.



© Populous Group, LLC 2012                              TILING
                                                      09 30 00 - 7
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATIONS
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                        DECEMBER 19, 2012

      F.      Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.

      G.      Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, con-
              traction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar
              beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.
              1.     Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.
              2.     Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements of Division 07 Section
                     "Joint Sealants."
              3.     Comply with TCNA Handbook for joint placement criteria.

      H.      Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the following tile installation standards:
              1.    For ceramic tile grouts comply with ANSI A108.10.


3.4           CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

      A.      Install crack isolation membrane to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to produce
              membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate.

      B.      Do not install tile or setting materials over crack isolation membrane until membrane has cured.


3.5           FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

      A.      General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Ceramic Tile Floor Installation Schedule,
              including those referencing TCNA installation methods and ANSI A108 series of tile installation
              standards.
              1.     For installations indicated, obtain 100 percent mortar coverage by complying with appli-
                     cable special requirements for back buttering of tile in referenced ANSI A108 series of tile
                     installation standards:
                     a.      Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches (200 by 200 mm) or larger.

      B.      Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with 1/4 inch (6 mm) joint widths.

      C.      Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets
              carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile.

      D.      Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints according to grout-sealer manu-
              facturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove ex-
              cess sealer and sealer that has gotten on tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.


3.6           WALL TILE INSTALLATION

      A.      Install types of tile designated for wall installations to comply with requirements in the Ceramic
              Tile Wall Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCNA installation methods and
              ANSI setting-bed standards.
              1.      For installations indicated, obtain 100 percent mortar coverage by complying with appli-
                      cable special requirements for back buttering of tile in referenced ANSI A108 series of tile
                      installation standards:
                      a.      Tile installed with chemical-resistant mortars and grouts.
                      b.      Tile wall installations composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches (203 by 203 mm) or larger.
                      c.      Where recommended by tile manufacturer.




© Populous Group, LLC 2012                             TILING
                                                     09 30 00 - 8
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATIONS
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                        DECEMBER 19, 2012

3.7           CLEANING AND PROTECTING

      A.      Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are
              free of foreign matter.
              1.     Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible.
              2.     Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile and grout
                     manufacturer's written instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Protect
                     metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning.
                     Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning.
              3.     Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer
                     that is acceptable to brick and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it
                     from clogging drains.

      B.      Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, un-
              bonded, and otherwise defective tile work.

      C.      Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
              Installer, that ensure tile is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Comple-
              tion.
              1.     When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective
                     cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or
                     other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear.
              2.     Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is com-
                     pleted.

      D.      Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.


3.8           FLOOR INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

      A.      Interior Ceramic Tile Floor Installation over Anti-Fracture Membrane: For dry interior floor instal-
              lations over above-ground structural slab construction, comply with the following:
              1.     Installation Method: TCNA F115A-11 (thin-set mortar with crack isolation membrane - full
                     coverage).
              2.     Anti-Fracture Membrane: ANSI A108.17 with the following materials:
                     a.     Anti-Fracture Membrane: ANSI A118.12
              3.     Setting Bed: ANSI A108.5 with the following mortar materials:
                     a.     Latex-portland cement mortar ANSI A118.4 (ISO C2S1) or better.
              4.     Grout: ANSI A108.10, with the following grout materials:
                     a.     Epoxy grout: ANSI A118.3 (ISO RG).


3.9           WALL INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

      A.      Interior Tile Wall Installations: Where interior wall installations are indicated, comply with the
              following:
              1.     Installation Method: TCNA W244C-11 (thin-set mortar bonded to cementitious backer
                     units on metal studs) or TCNA 245-11 (thin-set mortar bonded to glass-mat, water-
                     resistant backing boards).
              2.     Setting Bed: ANSI A108.5 with the following mortar materials:
                     a.      Latex-portland cement mortar ANSI A118.4 (ISO C2S1) or better.
              3.     Grout: ANSI A108.10 with the following grout materials:
                     a.      Sanded latex-portland cement grout. ANSI A118.6 (ISO CG1) or better for joints
                             1/8 inch or wider.



© Populous Group, LLC 2012                             TILING
                                                     09 30 00 - 9
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATIONS
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                     DECEMBER 19, 2012

                       b.     Unsanded latex portland cement grout: ANSI A118.6 (ISO CG1) or better for joints
                              less than 1/8 inch wide.
              4.       At glass tile, use white mortar with ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, or as recommended by
                       glass tile manufacturer.


END OF SECTION




© Populous Group, LLC 2012                             TILING
                                                    09 30 00 - 10
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

SECTION 09 51 13 - SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEMS


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1           SUMMARY

      A.      This Section includes suspended ceiling system consisting of acoustical panels and exposed
              and concealed suspension systems.

      B.      Related Sections:
              1.    Division 09 Section “Gypsum Board Assemblies” for interior suspended gypsum board
                    ceilings and soffits.


1.2           SUBMITTALS

      A.      Product Data: For each type of product specified.

      B.      Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations
              and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:
              1.    Ceiling suspension system members.
              2.    Method of attaching suspension system hangers to building structure.
              3.    Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures; air outlets and inlets; speakers; sprinklers;
                    curtains, and special moldings at walls, column penetrations, and other junctures of
                    acoustical ceilings with adjoining construction.
              4.    Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/8 inch = 1 foot (1:96).

      C.      Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each type of ceiling assembly indicated; in sets for
              each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these
              characteristics.
              1.    6-inch- (150-mm-) square samples of each acoustical panel type, pattern, and color.
              2.    Full-size samples of each acoustical panel type, pattern, and color.
              3.    Set of 12-inch- (300-mm-) long samples of exposed suspension system members,
                    including moldings, for each color and system type required.

      D.      Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demon-
              strate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names
              and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information speci-
              fied.

      E.      Product Test Reports: Indicate compliance of acoustical panel ceilings and components with
              requirements based on comprehensive testing of current products.

      F.      Research/Evaluation Reports: Evidence of acoustical panel ceiling's and components' compli-
              ance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to au-
              thorities having jurisdiction.


1.3           PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

      A.      Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions de-
              termined according to ASCE/SEI 7.



© Populous Group, LLC 2012              SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEMS
                                               09 51 13 - 1
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                        DECEMBER 19, 2012

1.4           QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.      Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed acoustical panel
              ceilings similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record
              of successful in-service performance.

      B.      Source Limitations for Ceiling Units: Obtain each acoustical ceiling panel from one source with
              resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties with-
              out delaying the Work.

      C.      Source Limitations for Suspension System: Obtain each suspension system from one source
              with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties
              without delaying the Work.

      D.      Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the
              following requirements:
              1.     Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical panel ceilings
                     identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or
                     another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
                     a.     Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire
                            Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency.
                     b.     Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
                            agency.
              2.     Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels with the following surface-
                     burning characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined
                     by testing identical products per ASTM E 84:
                     a.     Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.


1.5           DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

      A.      Deliver acoustical panels and suspension system components to Project site in original, uno-
              pened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against
              damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

      B.      Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized
              moisture content.

      C.      Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.


1.6           PROJECT CONDITIONS

      A.      Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed
              and weatherproof, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete,
              and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Pro-
              ject when occupied for its intended use.


1.7           COORDINATION

      A.      Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other con-
              struction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equip-
              ment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.



© Populous Group, LLC 2012              SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEMS
                                               09 51 13 - 2
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                     DECEMBER 19, 2012

1.8           EXTRA MATERIALS

      A.      Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with pro-
              tective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
              1.     Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size units equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed.
              2.     Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0
                     percent of amount installed.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1           MANUFACTURERS

      A.      Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
              products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
              1.    Ceiling Panels:
                    a.     Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
                    b.     Celotex Corp.
                    c.     Chicago Metallic Corporation.
                    d.     Hunter Douglas
                    e.     USG Acoustical Products Co.
              2.    Manufacturers Suspension Systems:
                    a.     Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
                    b.     Chicago Metallic Corporation.
                    c.     Donn Corporation.
                    d.     Eastern Products Div., Armstrong World Industries, Inc.


2.2           ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL

      A.      Basis-of-Design Product: The design is based on the products named in the Finish Legend.
              Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named products or comparable
              products by one of the other manufacturers specified. Comparable products are subject to re-
              view and approval through the submittal process specified.


2.3           METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL

      A.      Basis-of-Design Product: The design is based on the products named in the Finish Legend.
              Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named products or comparable
              products by one of the other manufacturers specified. Comparable products are subject to re-
              view and approval through the submittal process specified.

      B.      Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung galvanized
              metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply
              with applicable ASTM C 635 requirements.

      C.      Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural
              and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manu-
              facturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated.
              1.     High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635 requirements for "Coating Classification
                     for Severe Environment Performance" where high-humidity finishes are indicated.




© Populous Group, LLC 2012             SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEMS
                                              09 51 13 - 3
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                        DECEMBER 19, 2012

      D.      Attachment Devices: Size for five times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct
              Hung, unless otherwise indicated.
              1.    Postinstalled Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable
                    for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other
                    accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain,
                    without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as
                    determined by testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting
                    agency.

      E.      Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:
              1.    Zinc-Coated Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.
              2.    Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635,
                    Table 1, Direct Hung) will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than
                    0.106-inch- (2.69-mm-) diameter wire.

      F.      Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.

      G.      Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.

      H.      Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch (22 mm) wide; formed with 0.04-inch-
              (1-mm-) thick, galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating
              designation; with bolted connections and 5/16-inch- (8-mm-) diameter bolts.

      I.      Roll-Formed Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicat-
              ed, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge
              details and suspension systems indicated; formed from galvanized sheet metal of same materi-
              al, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners.
              1.       For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms re-
                       veal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at ex-
                       posed suspension member.
              2.       For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required
                       to fit penetration exactly.
              3.       For narrow-face suspension systems, provide suspension system and manufacturer's
                       standard edge moldings that match width and configuration of exposed runners.

      J.      Hold-Down Clips for Non-Fire-Resistance-Rated Ceilings: For interior ceilings consisting of
              acoustical panels weighing less than 1 lb/sq. ft. (4.88 kg/sq. m), provide hold-down clips spaced
              24 inches (610 mm) o.c. on all cross tees.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1           EXAMINATION

      A.      Examine substrates and structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with
              Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that af-
              fect ceiling installation and anchorage, and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical
              panel ceilings.
              1.     Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.




© Populous Group, LLC 2012              SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEMS
                                               09 51 13 - 4
                                   GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                     DECEMBER 19, 2012

3.2           PREPARATION

      A.      Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at
              opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply
              with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.


3.3           INSTALLATION

      A.      General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic
              design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's
              "Ceiling Systems Handbook."

      B.      Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
              1.   Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
                   plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.
              2.   Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces
                   by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
              3.   Splay hangers only where required and, if permitted with fire-resistance-rated ceilings, to
                   miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other
                   equally effective means.
              4.   Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
                   spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard
                   suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in
                   form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and
                   hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced
                   standards and publications.
              5.   Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a
                   minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts,
                   eye screws, or other devices that are secure; that are appropriate for substrate; and that
                   will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
              6.   Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing
                   members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and
                   appropriate for both structure to which hangers are attached and type of hanger involved.
                   Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age,
                   corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
              7.   Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten
                   hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or drilled-in anchors
                   that extend through forms into concrete.
              8.   Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
              9.   Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
              10.  Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported
                   directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; and provide hangers not more than 8
                   inches (200 mm) from ends of each member.

      C.      Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four
              tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, with-
              out attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires in-
              to concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.

      D.      Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and
              where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
              1.      Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.
                      and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system
                      to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m). Miter corners accurately and
                      connect securely.

© Populous Group, LLC 2012             SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEMS
                                              09 51 13 - 5
                                     GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                     DECEMBER 19, 2012

              2.       Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
              3.       Attach suspension grids components to edge molding with manufacturer’s standard clip.

      E.      Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one anoth-
              er. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

      F.      Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fitted accurately into suspension system
              runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a
              neat, precise fit.
              1.      Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows:
                      a.      As indicated on reflected ceiling plans.
              2.      For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of
                      suspension system runners and moldings.
              3.      For reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of
                      reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges.
              4.      For reveal-edged panels on suspension system members with box-shaped flanges,
                      install panels with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension system surfaces and
                      panel faces flush with bottom face of runners.
              5.      Paint cut panel edges remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel
                      surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel
                      manufacturer.
              6.      Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having
                      jurisdiction, and for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel
                      manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated or required.
              7.      Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire-
                      resistance-rated assembly.


3.4           CLEANING

      A.      Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and sus-
              pension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and
              touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be suc-
              cessfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.


END OF SECTION




© Populous Group, LLC 2012               SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEMS
                                                09 51 13 - 6
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012



SECTION 09 68 16 - SHEET CARPETING


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1           SUMMARY

      A.      This Section includes carpet installation.

      B.      Owner-Furnished Material: Carpet.


1.2           SUBMITTALS

      A.      Shop Drawings: Show the following:
              1.   Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where
                   cutouts are required in carpet.
              2.   Existing flooring materials to be removed.
              3.   Existing flooring materials to remain.
              4.   Seam locations, types, and methods.
              5.   Type of subfloor.
              6.   Type of installation.
              7.   Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction, and starting point.
              8.   Pile direction.
              9.   Type, color, and location of insets and borders.
              10.  Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips.
              11.  Transition details to other flooring materials.

      B.      Product Schedule: Use same room and product designations indicated on Drawings and in
              schedules.

      C.      Test Results: Indicate and interpret results of moisture, alkalinity, adhesion and other manufac-
              turer recommended tests on concrete substrates. Verify compliance with requirements.


1.3           QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.      Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installa-
              tion Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements.

      B.      Mockups: Before installing carpet, install mockups for each type of carpet installation required
              to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Install mockups to
              comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:
              1.    Install mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
                    Architect.
              2.    Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be in-
                    stalled.
              3.    Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
              4.    Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work.
              5.    Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judg-
                    ing the completed Work.


© Populous Group, LLC 2012                     SHEET CARPETING
                                                  09 68 16 - 1
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                        DECEMBER 19, 2012



              6.       Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undamaged at time of
                       Substantial Completion.


1.4           DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

      A.      General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."


1.5           PROJECT CONDITIONS

      A.      Maintain a temperature of not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C)
              in spaces to receive products for at least 48 hours before installation, during installation, and for
              at least 48 hours after installation, unless manufacturer's written recommendations specify
              longer time periods. After postinstallation period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55
              deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C).

      B.      Do not install carpet until it is the same temperature as the space where it will be installed.

      C.      Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond
              with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer.

      D.      Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet, in-
              stall carpet before installing these items.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1           INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

      A.      Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formu-
              lation provided by or recommended by the following:
              1.     Carpet manufacturer.

      B.      Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor
              conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and is
              recommended or provided by carpet manufacturer .

      C.      Seaming Cement: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufac-
              turer for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent
              pile loss at seams.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1           EXAMINATION

      A.      Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum
              moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet
              performance. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and
              comply with requirements specified.
© Populous Group, LLC 2012                      SHEET CARPETING
                                                   09 68 16 - 2
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                          DECEMBER 19, 2012



      B.      Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
              1.   Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
              2.   Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed
                   with installation only after substrates pass testing.
              3.   Moisture Testing:
                   a.     Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation
                          only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of wa-
                          ter/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.
                   b.     Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after
                          substrates pass testing.
              4.   Substrate finishes shall comply with requirements specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-
                   in-Place Concrete" for slabs receiving carpeting.
              5.   Substrates shall be free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.

      C.      Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2           PREPARATION

      A.      General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.3, "Site Conditions - All Installations; Floor Prepara-
              tion," and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicat-
              ed to receive carpet installation.

      B.      Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instruc-
              tions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.

      C.      Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with
              adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical
              methods recommended in writing by the carpet manufacturer.

      D.      Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. After
              cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with in-
              stallation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.3           INSTALLATION

      A.      Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 9, "Direct Glue-Down Installation."

      B.      Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations for seam locations and direction of
              carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under
              the door in closed position.

      C.      Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet.

      D.      Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture in-
              cluding cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as
              recommended by carpet manufacturer.

      E.      Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable
              flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.



© Populous Group, LLC 2012                      SHEET CARPETING
                                                   09 68 16 - 3
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                      DECEMBER 19, 2012



      F.      Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
              by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking
              device.

      G.      Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.


3.4           CLEANING AND PROTECTION

      A.      Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet:
              1.    Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner rec-
                    ommended by carpet manufacturer.
              2.    Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface.
              3.    Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element.

      B.      Protect installed carpet according to CRI 104, Section 16 "Protecting Indoor Installations."

      C.      Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and
              fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or rec-
              ommended in writing by carpet manufacturer.
              1.     Do not use plastic sheeting.


END OF SECTION




© Populous Group, LLC 2012                      SHEET CARPETING
                                                   09 68 16 - 4
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

SECTION 09 91 00 - PAINTING


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1           SUMMARY

      A.      This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following:
              1.    Exposed exterior items and surfaces.
              2.    Exposed interior items and surfaces.

      B.      Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop
              priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.

      C.      Paint exposed surfaces, except where the Finish Schedule indicates that a surface or material
              is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or surface is not specifically mentioned,
              paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not
              schedule indicates colors. If the schedule does not indicate color or finish, the Architect will se-
              lect from standard colors and finishes available.
              1.      Painting includes the following:
                      a.     Field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts, hangers, exposed
                             steel and iron supports, and surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment that
                             do not have a factory-applied final finish.
                      b.     Provide color banding for insulated and uninsulated piping in accordance with
                             ANSI A13.1, “Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems” and the Owner’s
                             specific requirements.

      D.      Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts,
              and labels.
              1.    Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components:
                    a.     Architectural woodwork and casework.
                    b.     Acoustical wall panels.
                    c.     Metal toilet enclosures.
                    d.     Metal lockers.
                    e.     Elevator entrance doors and frames.
                    f.     Elevator equipment.
                    g.     Factory finished mechanical and electrical equipment.
                    h.     Light fixtures.
                    i.     Distribution cabinets.
              2.    Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spac-
                    es:
                    a.     Foundation spaces.
                    b.     Furred areas.
                    c.     Ceiling plenums.
                    d.     Utility tunnels.
                    e.     Pipe spaces.
                    f.     Duct shafts.
                    g.     Elevator shafts.
              3.    Finished metal surfaces include the following:
                    a.     Anodized aluminum.
                    b.     Stainless steel.
                    c.     Chromium plate
                    d.     Coil coated wall and roof panels.
                    e.     Copper
                    f.     Bronze and brass

© Populous Group, LLC 2012                           PAINTING
                                                    09 91 00 - 1
                                     GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

              4.       Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following:
                       a.     Valve and damper operators.
                       b.     Linkages.
                       c.     Sensing devices.
                       d.     Motor and fan shafts.
              5.       Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual Global (FMG),
                       or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or
                       nomenclature plates.

      E.      Related Sections include the following:
              1.    Division 06 Section "Architectural Woodwork" for shop finishing architectural woodwork.
              2.    Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for factory priming steel doors and
                    frames.
              3.    Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for surface preparation of gypsum
                    board.


1.2           DEFINITIONS

      A.      General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.

      B.      Gloss Levels: The following gloss designations as determined in accordance with ASTM D 523
              apply to paint products specified in this Section:
              1.     “Flat” refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 5 when measured at a
                     60-degree meter.
              2.     “Eggshell” refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 10 and 20 when meas-
                     ured at a 60-degree meter.
              3.     “Satin” refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when measured
                     at a 60-degree meter.
              4.     “Semi-Gloss” refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when
                     measured at a 60-degree meter.
              5.     “Gloss” refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 70 when measured at a
                     60-degree meter.


1.3           SUBMITTALS

      A.      Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers.
              1.   Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each mate-
                   rial and cross-reference Finish Schedule with specific coating, finish system, color desig-
                   nation, sheen, and application methods. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog
                   number and general classification.
              2.   Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label
                   analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material pro-
                   posed for use.
              3.   VOC Compliance: Provide manufacturer’s certified documentation that products supplied
                   comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).

      B.      Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors availa-
              ble for each type of finish-coat material indicated.
              1.     After color selection, the Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated.

      C.      Samples for Verification: For each color, sheen, and material to be applied, with texture to simu-
              late actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate.



© Populous Group, LLC 2012                            PAINTING
                                                     09 91 00 - 2
                                     GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

              1.       Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and pri-
                       mers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until re-
                       quired sheen, color, and texture are achieved.
              2.       Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each Sample. Label each
                       sample for location and application.
              3.       Submit Samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and texture
                       only:
                       a.    Stained or Natural Wood: Provide two 4-by-8-inch (100 mm by 200 mm) Samples
                             of natural- or stained-wood finish on actual wood surfaces.
                       b.    Ferrous Metal: Provide two 4-inch (100 mm) square samples of flat metal and two
                             8-inch (200 mm) long samples of solid metal for each color and finish.

      D.      Qualification Data: For Applicator.


1.4           QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.      Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings
              similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has
              resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance.
              1.     Specialty Finish Applicators shall have successfully completed the manufacturer’s train-
                     ing program.

      B.      Source Limitations for Field Applied Systems: Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating
              system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.
              1.    Applicator shall verify compatibility of field applied materials with shop applied primers.
                    Application of finish coat establishes acceptance of primed surfaces.

      C.      Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample of each type of
              coating and substrate required on the Project. Comply with procedures specified in Painting
              and Decorating Contractors of America (PDCA) P5. Duplicate finish of approved Samples.
              1.    Architect will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for each
                    type of coating and substrate to be painted.
                    a.     Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 square feet (9 sq. m).
                    b.     Small Areas and Items: Architect will designate an item or area required.
              2.    After permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated, apply
                    coatings in this room or to each surface according to the Schedule or as specified. Pro-
                    vide required sheen, color, and texture on each surface.
                    a.     After finishes are accepted, Architect will use the room or surface to evaluate coat-
                           ing systems of a similar nature.
              3.    Final approval of colors will be from benchmark samples.


1.5           DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

      A.      Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and con-
              tainers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information:
              1.     Product name or title of material.
              2.     Product description (generic classification or binder type).
              3.     Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
              4.     Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
              5.     Thinning instructions.
              6.     Application instructions.
              7.     Color name and number.
              8.     Volatile Organic Content (VOC).


© Populous Group, LLC 2012                            PAINTING
                                                     09 91 00 - 3
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

      B.      Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum
              ambient temperature of 45 degrees F (7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean
              condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
              1.     Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste
                     daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected
                     from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application.


1.6           PROJECT CONDITIONS

      A.      Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding
              air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C).

      B.      Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surround-
              ing air temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F (7 and 35 deg C).

      C.      Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent;
              or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
              1.      Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are
                      enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during applica-
                      tion and drying periods.


1.7           EXTRA MATERIALS

      A.      Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied in the quan-
              tities described below. Package paint materials in unopened, factory-sealed containers for
              storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to the Owner.
              1.      Quantity: Furnish the Owner with an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gallon or 1
                      case, as appropriate, of each material, color, and sheen applied.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1           MANUFACTURERS

      A.      Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
              products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
              1.    Benjamin Moore & Co.
              2.    PPG Protective & Marine Coatings.
              3.    Sherwin-Williams Co.
              4.    Tnemec, Inc.
              5.    M.A.B. Paints
              6.    Akzo Nobel Paints LLC


2.2           PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL

      A.      Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are compati-
              ble with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and applica-
              tion, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

      B.      VOC Compliance for Field-Applied Exterior Paints and Coatings: Provide materials that comply
              with the Air Quality Control regulations of the local Air Quality Management District having juris-


© Populous Group, LLC 2012                           PAINTING
                                                    09 91 00 - 4
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                        DECEMBER 19, 2012

              diction over the location of the project or EPA Region II. In the event that local regulations are
              silent on specific applications, comply with the National Volatile Organic Compound Emission
              Standards for Architectural Coatings (40 CFR Part 59).

      C.      Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types
              specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicat-
              ed. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be ac-
              ceptable.
              1.     Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors
                     or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the
                     exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material
                     data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.


2.3           PAINT COLORS

      A.      Basis-of-Design Colors: The design is based on the colors indicated by manufacturer's desig-
              nations in the Finish Schedule Legend. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide exact
              duplicates of the named colors.


2.4           PAINT MATERIALS

      A.      Basis-of-Design Products: The design for each type of paint is based on the products named.
              Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable
              product by one of the other manufacturers specified.

      B.      Primers:
              1.    Latex Block Filler: Sherwin Williams, “PrepRite Block Filler”
              2.    Acrylic Cementitious Block Filler: Tnemec Series 130 “Envirofill,” Color 130-6602 Off-
                    White.
              3.    Latex-based Interior Primer: Sherwin Williams, “ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Primer.”
              4.    Polyamine Epoxy Primer: Tnemec Series 201 “Epoxoprime.”
              5.    Rust Inhibiting Primer for Non-Galvanized Ferrous Metal:
                    a.     Shop Applied: Tnemec Series V10 “Tnemec Primers.”
                    b.     Field Applied: Tnemec Series 135 “Chembuild.”
              6.    Galvanized Steel and Non-Ferrous Metal Primer: Tnemec Series 135 “Chembuild.”
              7.    Intermediate for Shop Primed Structural Steel: Tnemec Series L69 “Hi-Build Epoxoline
                    II.”
              8.    Exterior Wood Primer: Tnemec Series 10 “Tnemec Primers,” Color 99W White.

      C.      Exterior Finish Paint Materials:
              1.     Semi-Gloss Acrylic Polymer: Tnemec Series 1029 “Enduratone.”
              2.     Semi-Gloss Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane: Tnemec Series 1075 “Endura-Shield II.”

      D.      Interior Finish Coat Material:
              1.     Semi-Gloss Acrylic Polymer: Tnemec Series 1029 “Enduratone.”
              2.     Polyamine Epoxy Finish: Two component, high-performance, modified polyamine epoxy
                     coating: Tnemec, Series 280 “Tneme-Glaze.”
              3.     Semi-Gloss Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane: Tnemec Series 1075 “Endura-Shield II.”
              4.     Latex-based Interior Eggshell: Sherwin Williams “ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Finish.”
              5.     Latex-based Interior Flat: Sherwin Williams “ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Finish.”




© Populous Group, LLC 2012                           PAINTING
                                                    09 91 00 - 5
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1           EXAMINATION

      A.      Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
              requirements for paint application.
              1.     Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
                     and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry.
              2.     Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions
                     within a particular area.

      B.      Coordination of Work: Review other Sections under which primers are provided to ensure com-
              patibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on charac-
              teristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
              1.      Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over sub-
                      strates primed by others.


3.2           PREPARATION

      A.      General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fix-
              tures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or
              impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before
              surface preparation and painting.
              1.     After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using
                     workers skilled in the trades involved.

      B.      Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances
              that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.
              1.     Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning pro-
                     cess will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.

      C.      Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's
              written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
              1.     Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
              2.     Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry, cement plaster, and glass
                     fiber reinforced gypsum board surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk,
                     dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If
                     hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of sur-
                     face preparation.
                     a.      Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer.
                     b.      Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate
                             tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and
                             burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where mois-
                             ture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
              3.     Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral
                     spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off.
                     a.      Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shel-
                             lac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill
                             holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand
                             smooth when dried.
                     b.      Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges,
                             ends, faces, undersides, and back sides of wood, including cabinets, counters,
                             cases, and paneling.


© Populous Group, LLC 2012                           PAINTING
                                                    09 91 00 - 6
                                     GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

                       c.    If transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish.
                       d.    Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall
                             construction occurs on back side.
                       e.    Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of var-
                             nish or sealer immediately on delivery.
              4.       Ferrous Metals:
                       a.    Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; re-
                             move oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent
                             or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with surface preparation specifica-
                             tions prepared by The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC).
                             1)      Abrasive blast clean steel surfaces as recommended by paint system manu-
                                     facturer and according to requirements of SSPC-SP 6, Commercial Blast
                                     Cleaning.
                             2)      Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment
                                     wash coat before priming.
                       b.    Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged.
                             Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch
                             up with the same primer as the shop coat.
                       c.    Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based sol-
                             vents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment
                             from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.

      D.      Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written in-
              structions.
              1.     Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign
                     materials and residue.
              2.     Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required
                     during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface
                     film and strain paint before using.
              3.     Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.


3.3           APPLICATION

      A.      General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and
              techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
              1.    Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules.
              2.    Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detri-
                    mental to formation of a durable paint film.
              3.    Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
              4.    The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures,
                    convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiators, grilles, and similar components are in
                    place. Extend coatings into these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and
                    provide desired protection.
              5.    Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed sur-
                    faces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed
                    equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
              6.    Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through
                    registers or grilles.
              7.    Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed
                    surfaces.

      B.      Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or other-
              wise prepared for painting within eight hours of preparation and before subsequent surface de-
              terioration.


© Populous Group, LLC 2012                            PAINTING
                                                     09 91 00 - 7
                                      GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                        DECEMBER 19, 2012

              1.       The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application
                       method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended
                       by manufacturer. Sand between applications to produce a smooth, even surface accord-
                       ing to manufacturer's written instructions.
              2.       Omit full coat primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.
                       a.     Repair damaged shop-applied primer by spot priming with compatible materials.
              3.       If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats
                       until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to en-
                       sure edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness
                       equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
              4.       Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat
                       surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under
                       moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause
                       the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.

    C.        Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators
              according to manufacturer's written instructions.
              1.    Brush Application: Use brushes best suited for material applied and of appropriate size
                    for the surface or item being coated.
                    a.     Apply primers and first coats by brush unless manufacturer's written instructions
                           permit using roller or mechanical applicators.
                    b.     Brush out and work brush coats into surfaces in an even film.
                    c.     Eliminate cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness,
                           or other surface imperfections. Neatly draw glass lines and color breaks.
              2.    Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by
                    manufacturer for the material and texture required.
              3.    Spray Equipment: Use mechanical methods to apply coating if permitted by manufactur-
                    er's written instructions and governing regulations.
                    a.     Use airless or air-assisted spray equipment with orifice size recommended by
                           manufacturer for material and texture required.
                    b.     Apply each coat to provide the equivalent hiding of brush-applied coats.
                    c.     Do not double back with spray equipment building-up film thickness of two coats in
                           one pass, unless recommended by manufacturer.

    D.        Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommend-
              ed spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by
              the manufacturer. Finish coats shall be provided in the dry film thickness specified in the
              schedules located at the end of this Section.

    E.        Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items
              exposed in public and occupied spaces.
              1.   Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
                   a.     Uninsulated metal piping.
                   b.     Uninsulated plastic piping.
                   c.     Pipe hangers and supports.
                   d.     Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.
                   e.     Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets
                          and outlets.
                   f.     Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having "all-service jacket" or other paintable
                          jacket material.
                   g.     Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field
                          painting.
              2.   Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
                   a.     Switchgear.
                   b.     Panelboards.


© Populous Group, LLC 2012                             PAINTING
                                                      09 91 00 - 8
                                     GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                         DECEMBER 19, 2012

                       c.    Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field paint-
                             ing.

      F.      Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry and cast-in-place concrete at a rate to en-
              sure complete coverage with all pores filled.

      G.      Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by
              the manufacturer, to substrates that are required to be painted or finished and that have not
              been prime coated by others.
              1.    Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in
                    first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to in-
                    sufficient sealing.

      H.      Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth,
              opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holi-
              days, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be ac-
              ceptable.
              1.    Apply additional coats as required to provide a completely opaque and uniform finish sur-
                    face.

      I.      Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of
              even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks,
              orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections.
              1.    Provide satin finish for final coats.

      J.      Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish,
              or repaint work not complying with requirements.


3.4           FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

      A.      The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as
              the Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied:
              1.    Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to sample paint material being
                    used.
              2.    The testing agency will monitor application and ambient conditions as follows:
                    a.      Surface condition and cleanliness.
                    b.      Wet and dry film thicknesses.
                    c.      Temperature, humidity, and dew point readings at various times of the work day.
                    d.      Hiding ability of opaque coatings.
                    e.      Uniformity of color and sheen.
              3.    Samples of material delivered to the Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified
                    in the presence of the Contractor. The testing agency will perform appropriate tests for
                    the following characteristics as required by the Owner:
                    a.      Quantitative material analysis.
                    b.      Abrasion resistance.
                    c.      Apparent reflectivity.
                    d.      Flexibility.
                    e.      Washability.
                    f.      Absorption.
                    g.      Accelerated weathering.
                    h.      Dry opacity.
                    i.      Accelerated yellowness.
                    j.      Recoating.
                    k.      Skinning.
                    l.      Color retention.

© Populous Group, LLC 2012                             PAINTING
                                                      09 91 00 - 9
                                      GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                        DECEMBER 19, 2012

                       m.     Alkali and mildew resistance.
              4.       The Owner may direct the Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being
                       used does not comply with specified requirements. The Contractor shall remove non-
                       complying paint from the site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously coated with
                       the rejected paint. If necessary, the Contractor may be required to remove rejected paint
                       from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with specified paint, the two coatings
                       are incompatible.


3.5           CLEANING

      A.      Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded
              paint materials from the site.
              1.     After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered
                     paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfac-
                     es.


3.6           PROTECTION

      A.      Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct
              damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.

      B.      Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective
              wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations.
              1.    At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
                    defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in Painting and Decorating
                    Contractors of America (PDCA) Specification P1.


3.7           SHOP APPLIED PRIMER SCHEDULE

      A.      General: Provide the following paint system for the various substrates indicated.

      B.      Non-Galvanized Ferrous Metal Shapes and Plates:
              1.   Primer: Rust Inhibiting Primer (3 mils)

      C.      Galvanized Surfaces, including Railings and Miscellaneous Shapes and Plates:
              1.   Primer: Galvanized Steel and Non-Ferrous Metal Primer (4 mils)


3.8           EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

      A.      General: Provide the following paint system for the various substrates indicated.

      B.      Concrete Masonry Units:
              1.   Acrylic: Three coats
                   a.     Block Filler: Acrylic Cementitious Block Filler
                   b.     First Coat: Semi-Gloss Acrylic Polymer (3 mils)
                   c.     Second Coat: Semi-Gloss Acrylic Polymer (3 mils)

      C.      Non-Galvanized Ferrous Metal including steel doors and frames:
              1.   Acrylic: Three coats
                   a.     Primer: Rust Inhibiting Primer (Primer is not required on shop primed items. Shop
                          primer may require field touchup.)


© Populous Group, LLC 2012                            PAINTING
                                                     09 91 00 - 10
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                    DECEMBER 19, 2012

                       b.    First Coat: Semi-Gloss Acrylic Polymer (3 mils)
                       c.    Second Coat: Semi-Gloss Acrylic Polymer (3 mils)


3.9           INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

      A.      General: Provide the designated paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated in the
              Room Finish Schedule.

      B.      Gypsum Board Walls and Partitions (Not Subject to Moisture and Food Preparation):
              1.   Eggshell Enamel Finish: Three coats
                   a.   Primer: Latex-based Interior Primer
                   b.   First Coat: Latex-based Interior Eggshell (1.7 mils)
                   c.   Second Coat: Latex-based Interior Eggshell (1.7 mils)

      C.      Gypsum Board Ceilings and Soffits (Not Subject to Moisture and Food Preparation):
              1.   Flat Enamel Finish: Three coats
                   a.     Primer: Latex-based Interior Primer
                   b.     First Coat: Latex-based Interior Flat (1.8 mils)
                   c.     Second Coat: Latex-based Interior Flat (1.8 mils)
              2.   Refer to Finish Legend for special finish at Patriot logos.

      D.      Non-Galvanized Ferrous Metal including steel doors and frames:
              1.   Acrylic: Three coats
                   a.     Primer: Rust Inhibiting Primer (Primer is not required on shop primed items. Shop
                          primer may require field touchup.)
                   b.     First Coat: Semi-Gloss Acrylic Polymer (3 mils)
                   c.     Second Coat: Semi-Gloss Acrylic Polymer (3 mils)

      E.      Stained Woodwork: Provide the following stained finishes over new interior woodwork:
              1.    Stained Polyurethane Finish: Two finish coats over a sealer coat and interior wood stain.
                    a.    Stain Coat: Interior wood stain.
                    b.    Sealer Coat: Manufacturer’s recommended sanding sealer.
                    c.    Finish Coats: Catalyzed Polyurethane.


END OF SECTION




© Populous Group, LLC 2012                          PAINTING
                                                   09 91 00 - 11
                                  GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                     DECEMBER 19, 2012



SECTION 10 22 26 - OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1          SUMMARY

      A.     Section Includes:
             1.    Manually operated, acoustical panel partitions.

      B.     Related Sections include the following:
             1.    Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for sound barrier construction above the
                   ceiling at track.


1.2          DEFINITIONS

      A.     NIC: Noise Isolation Class.

      B.     STC: Sound Transmission Class.


1.3          ACTION SUBMITTALS

      A.     Product Data: For each type of product.

      B.     Shop Drawings: For operable panel partitions.
             1.   Include plans, elevations, sections, details, numbered panel installation sequence, and
                  attachments to other work.
             2.   Indicate stacking and operating clearances. Indicate location and installation
                  requirements for hardware and track, blocking, and direction of travel.

      C.     Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed material, finish, covering, or facing,
             prepared on Samples of size indicated below:
             1.    Textile Facing Material: Full width by not less than 36-inch- (914-mm-) long section of
                   fabric from dye lot to be used for the Work, with specified treatments applied. Show
                   complete pattern repeat.
             2.    Hardware: One of each exposed door-operating device.

      D.     Delegated-Design Submittal: For operable panel partitions.
             1.    Include design calculations for seismic restraints.


1.4          INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

      A.     Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items
             are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
             1.    Partition track, track supports and bracing, switches, turning space, and storage layout.
             2.    Suspended ceiling components.
             3.    Structural members to which suspension systems are attached.
             4.    Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:
                   a.      Lighting fixtures.


©Populous Group, LLC 2012                  OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS
                                                  10 22 26 - 1
                                     GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                     DECEMBER 19, 2012



                       b.   HVAC ductwork, outlets, and inlets.
                       c.   Speakers.
                       d.   Sprinklers.
                       e.   Access panels.
                       f.   Rigging points.
             5.        Plenum acoustical barriers.

      B.     Setting Drawings: For embedded items and cutouts required in other work, including support-
             beam, mounting-hole template.

      C.     Seismic Qualification Certificates: For operable panel partitions, tracks, accessories, and
             components, from manufacturer. Include seismic capacity of partition assemblies to remain in
             vertical position during a seismic event and the following:
             1.     Basis for Certification: Indicate whether certification is based on analysis, testing, or
                    experience data, according to ASCE/SEI 7.
             2.     Detailed description of partition anchorage devices on which the certification is based and
                    their installation requirements.

      D.     Product Test Reports: For each operable panel partition, for tests performed by a qualified
             testing agency.

      E.     Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.


1.5          CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

      A.     Operation and Maintenance Data: For operable panel partitions to include in maintenance
             manuals.
             1.   Panel finish facings and finishes for exposed trim and accessories. Include precautions
                  for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and
                  performance.
             2.   Seals, hardware, track, track switches, carriers, and other operating components.


1.6          QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.     Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and
             approved by manufacturer.


1.7          DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

      A.     Protectively package and sequence panels in order for installation. Clearly mark packages and
             panels with numbering system used on Shop Drawings. Do not use permanent markings on
             panels.


1.8          WARRANTY

      A.     Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of operable panel
             partitions that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
             1.      Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
                     a.     Faulty operation of operable panel partitions.


©Populous Group, LLC 2012                    OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS
                                                    10 22 26 - 2
                                     GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                      DECEMBER 19, 2012



                       b.   Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.
             2.        Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1          PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

      A.     Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer to design seismic bracing of tracks
             to structure above.

      B.     Seismic Performance: Operable panel partitions shall withstand the effects of earthquake
             motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7 as stated on the structural drawings.
             1.    The term "withstand" means "the partition panels will remain in place without separation
                   of any parts from the system when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

      C.     Acoustical Performance: Provide operable panel partitions tested by a qualified testing agency
             for the following acoustical properties according to test methods indicated:
             1.     Sound-Transmission Requirements: Operable panel partition assembly tested for
                    laboratory sound-transmission loss performance according to ASTM E 90, determined by
                    ASTM E 413, and rated for not less than the STC indicated.

      D.     Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide panels with finishes complying with one of the
             following as determined by testing identical products by UL or another testing and inspecting
             agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
             1.     Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84 or UL 723; testing by a
                    qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing
                    agency.
                    a.     Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
                    b.     Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
             2.     Fire Growth Contribution: Complying with acceptance criteria of local code and
                    authorities having jurisdiction when tested according to NFPA 265 Method B Protocol or
                    NFPA 286.


2.2          OPERABLE ACOUSTICAL PANELS

      A.     Operable Acoustical Panels: Partition system, including panels, seals, finish facing, suspension
             system, operators, and accessories.
             1.    Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kwik-Wall
                   Model 3020.

      B.     Panel Operation: Manually operated, individual panels.

      C.     Panel Construction: As required to support panel from suspension components and with
             reinforcement for hardware attachment. Fabricate panels with tight hairline joints and
             concealed fasteners. Fabricate panels so finished in-place partition is rigid; level; plumb;
             aligned, with tight joints and uniform appearance; and free of bow, warp, twist, deformation, and
             surface and finish irregularities.

      D.     Dimensions: Fabricate operable acoustical panel partitions to form an assembled system of
             dimensions indicated and verified by field measurements.


©Populous Group, LLC 2012                     OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS
                                                     10 22 26 - 3
                                     GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                      DECEMBER 19, 2012



             1.        Panel Width: As indicated on the Drawings.

      E.     STC: Not less than 52.

      F.     Panel Weight:      13 lb/sq. ft. (59 kg/sq. m) maximum.

      G.     Panel Thickness: Not less than 3 5/8 inches (92 mm).

      H.     Panel Materials:
             1.    Steel Frame: Steel sheet, manufacturer's standard nominal minimum thickness for
                   uncoated steel.
             2.    Steel Face/Liner Sheets: Tension-leveled steel sheet, manufacturer's standard
                   minimum nominal thickness for uncoated steel.

      I.     Panel Closure: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.
             1.    Initial Closure: Flexible, resilient PVC, bulb-shaped acoustical seal .
             2.    Final Closure: Constant-force, lever-operated mechanical closure expanding from panel
                   edge to create a constant-pressure acoustical seal.

      J.     Hardware: Manufacturer's standard as required to operate operable panel partition and
             accessories; with decorative, protective finish.


2.3          SEALS

      A.     General: Provide seals that produce operable panel partitions complying with performance
             requirements and the following:
             1.     Manufacturer's standard seals unless otherwise indicated.
             2.     Seals made from materials and in profiles that minimize sound leakage.
             3.     Seals fitting tight at contact surfaces and sealing continuously between adjacent panels
                    and between operable panel partition perimeter and adjacent surfaces, when operable
                    panel partition is extended and closed.

      B.     Horizontal Top Seals: Continuous-contact, extruded-PVC seal exerting uniform constant
             pressure on track or PVC-faced, mechanical, retractable, constant-force-contact seal exerting
             uniform constant pressure on track when extended.

      C.     Horizontal Bottom Seals: PVC-faced, mechanical, retractable, constant-force-contact seal
             exerting uniform constant pressure on floor when extended, ensuring horizontal and vertical
             sealing and resisting panel movement.
             1.     Mechanically Operated for Acoustical Panels: Extension and retraction of bottom seal by
                    operating handle or built-in operating mechanism, with operating range not less than 4
                    inches (102 mm) between retracted seal and floor finish.


2.4          PANEL FINISH FACINGS

      A.     General: Provide finish facings for panels that comply with indicated fire-test-response
             characteristics and that are factory applied to operable panel partitions with appropriate
             backing, using mildew-resistant nonstaining adhesive as recommended by facing
             manufacturer's written instructions.

      B.     Finish:


©Populous Group, LLC 2012                    OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS
                                                    10 22 26 - 4
                                     GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                      DECEMBER 19, 2012



             1.        Fabric covering where indicated in the Finish Legend and Schedule.

      C.     Cap-Trimmed Edges: Protective perimeter-edge trim with tight hairline joints concealing edges
             of panel and finish facing, finished as follows:
             1.    Steel, Painted: Finished with manufacturer's standard color selected by Architect from
                   manufacturer's full range.
             2.    Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type
                   of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties of
                   alloy and temper required to comply with performance requirements; and with
                   manufacturer's standard clear anodic finish.


2.5          SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

      A.     Tracks: Aluminum with adjustable hanger rods for overhead support, designed for operation,
             size, and weight of operable panel partition indicated. Size track to support partition operation
             and storage without damage to suspension system, operable panel partitions, or adjacent
             construction. Limit track deflection to no more than 0.10 inch (2.54 mm) between bracket
             supports. Provide a continuous system of track sections and accessories to accommodate
             configuration and layout indicated for partition operation and storage.
             1.     Head Closure Trim: As required for acoustical performance; primed for field finish.

      B.     Carriers: Trolley system as required for configuration type, size, and weight of partition and for
             easy operation; with ball-bearing wheels.
             1.    Multidirectional Carriers: Capable of negotiating intersections without track switches.

      C.     Track Intersections, Switches, and Accessories: As required for operation, storage, track
             configuration, layout indicated for operable panel partitions, and compatible with partition
             assembly specified. Fabricate track intersections and switches from steel.
             1.    Curve-and-Diverter Switches: Allow radius turns to divert panels to an auxiliary track.
             2.    L Intersections: Allow panels to change 90 degrees in direction of travel.
             3.    T Intersections: Allow panels to pass through or change 90 degrees to another direction
                   of travel.
             4.    X Intersections: Allow panels to pass through or change travel direction full circle in 90-
                   degree increments, and allow one partition to cross track of another.

      D.     Steel Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied, corrosion-resistant, protective coating
             unless otherwise indicated.


2.6          ACCESSORIES

      A.     Pass Doors: Fabricated to comply with recommendations in ANSI A117.1 and Americans with
             Disabilities Act (ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." Swinging
             door built into and matching panel materials, construction, acoustical qualities, finish, and
             thickness, complete with frames and operating hardware. Hinges finished to match other
             exposed hardware.
             1.    Single Pass Door: 36 by 84 inches (914 by 2134 mm), with the following:
                   a.       Door Seals: Mechanically operated floor seal on panels containing pass doors.
                   b.       Panic hardware.
                   c.       Concealed door closer.
                   d.       Door Viewer: Installed with view in direction of swing.
                   e.       Exit Sign: Recessed, self-illuminated.


©Populous Group, LLC 2012                    OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS
                                                    10 22 26 - 5
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012



                       f.   Lock: Deadlock to receive cylinder, operable from both sides of door. Refer to
                            Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" for lock cylinder and keying requirements.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1          EXAMINATION

      A.     Examine flooring, structural support, and opening, with Installer present, for compliance with
             requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of operable
             panel partitions.

      B.     Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2          INSTALLATION

      A.     General: Comply with ASTM E 557 except as otherwise required by operable panel partition
             manufacturer's written installation instructions.

      B.     Install operable panel partitions and accessories after other finishing operations, including
             painting, have been completed in area of partition installation.

      C.     Install panels from marked packages in numbered sequence indicated on Shop Drawings.

      D.     Broken, cracked, chipped, deformed, or unmatched panels are not acceptable.

      E.     Broken, cracked, deformed, or unmatched gasketing or gasketing with gaps at butted ends is
             not acceptable.

      F.     Light-Leakage Test: Illuminate one side of partition installation and observe vertical joints and
             top and bottom seals for voids. Adjust partitions for alignment and full closure of vertical joints
             and full closure along top and bottom seals.


3.3          ADJUSTING

      A.     Adjust operable panel partitions, hardware, and other moving parts to function smoothly, and
             lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

      B.     Adjust pass doors and storage pocket doors to operate smoothly and easily, without binding or
             warping.

      C.     Verify that safety devices are properly functioning.


3.4          MAINTENANCE SERVICE

      A.     Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include
             12 months' full maintenance by manufacturer's authorized service representative. Include
             quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components,



©Populous Group, LLC 2012                   OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS
                                                   10 22 26 - 6
                                  GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                     DECEMBER 19, 2012



             lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper operable-partition operation. Parts
             and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies.


3.5          DEMONSTRATION

      A.     Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
             adjust, operate, and maintain operable panel partitions.


END OF SECTION




©Populous Group, LLC 2012                  OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS
                                                  10 22 26 - 7
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                          DECEMBER 19, 2012

SECTION 12 22 00 - CURTAINS AND DRAPES


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1           SUMMARY

      A.      This Section includes curtain fabrics and drapery tracks for fixed and operable drapes.


1.2           SUBMITTALS

      A.      Product Data: For the following:
              1.   Tracks: Include maximum weights of draperies that can be supported.
              2.   Fabrics and textile treatments.

      B.      Shop Drawings:
              1.   Tracks: Show installation and anchorage details and locations of controls.
              2.   Draperies: Show sizes, locations, and details of installation.

      C.      Coordination Drawings: For track installation; reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and
              coordinating track installation with openings and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:
              1.    Suspended ceiling components.

      D.      Samples for Verification: As follows:
              1.   Tracks: 18 inches (450 mm) long, with carriers, controls, and accessories.
              2.   Fabrics: For each color and pattern indicated, provide Sample, full width by 36 inches
                   (1000 mm) long, from dye lot to be used for the Work and with specified textile treatments
                   applied. Show complete pattern repeat if any. Mark top and face of fabric.
              3.   Textile Trims: For each color and pattern indicated, 18 inches (450 mm) long.
              4.   Drapery Fabrication Samples: For each heading, fabric, color, and pattern indicated, a
                   complete full-size panel to verify details of fabrication and thread colors.

      E.      Product Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

      F.      Product Certificates: For each fabric treated with flame retardant, signed by fabric supplier and
              indicating treatment durability and cleaning procedures required to maintain treatment
              effectiveness.

      G.      Maintenance Data: For products to include in maintenance manuals.


1.3           QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.      Installer Qualifications: For draperies and tracks, fabricator of draperies.

      B.      Source Limitations: For draperies, obtain each color and pattern of fabric and trim from one dye
              lot.

      C.      Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fabrics treated with fire retardants, provide products
              that pass NFPA 701 as determined by testing of fabrics that were treated using treatment-
              application method intended for use for this Project by a testing and inspecting agency
              acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


© Populous Group, LLC 2012                   CURTAINS AND DRAPES
                                                  12 22 00 - 1
                                    GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                        DECEMBER 19, 2012

      D.      Mockups: Install mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
              demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
              1.   Install mockup for each type of product and combination of products indicated.
              2.   Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
                   Substantial Completion.


1.4           PROJECT CONDITIONS

      A.      Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements before drapery fabrication and
              indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

      B.      Scheduling: Do not deliver or install draperies until after other finish work, including painting, is
              complete and spaces are otherwise ready for occupancy.


1.5           EXTRA MATERIALS

      A.      Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
              with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
              1.     Fabrics: For each fabric, color, and pattern indicated, full-width lengths equal to 5
                     percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 10 yards of each fabric, color, and pattern.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1           DRAPERY TRACKS

      A.      Construction: Extruded aluminum.
              1.    Curved Track: Factory fabricated, not less than 12-inch- (300-mm-) radius bends.
              2.    Splicing Clamp: Of same material and finish as track.
              3.    Lengths and Configurations: As indicated on Drawings.
              4.    Finish: Clear anodized.

      B.      Mounting Brackets: Of type suitable for fastening track to surface indicated and designed to
              support weight of track assembly and drapery plus force applied to operate track.
              1.    Mounting Surface: As indicated on the Drawings.

      C.      Installation Fasteners: Sized to support track assembly and drapery, and fabricated from metal
              compatible with track, brackets, and supporting construction. Provide two fasteners to fasten
              each bracket to supporting construction.

      D.      Operation: Fixed or draw as indicated.
              1.   Draw: One-way, stack as indicated on the Drawings.

      E.      Track Accessories: Provide end caps, connectors, end stops, coupling sleeves, brackets, and
              other accessories as required for secure and operational installation.
              1.     Carriers: Nylon rollers and axle with chrome-plated steel hook.


2.2           DRAPERIES

      A.      Operable Draperies:


© Populous Group, LLC 2012                   CURTAINS AND DRAPES
                                                  12 22 00 - 2
                                     GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                       DECEMBER 19, 2012

              1.       Basis-of-Design Product: The design is based on the products named in the Drawings.
                       Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named products or
                       comparable products by another qualified fabric supplier. Comparable products are
                       subject to review and approval through the submittal process specified
              2.       Drapery:
                       a.    Heading:
                             1)      Banding: 1 inch heavyweight banding surged to top of fabric; fabric shall be
                                     folded back and set with a double-needle lock-stitch:
                             2)      Heading Accessories:
                                     a)     Nonwoven buckram.
                                     b)     Woven snap tape, 7/8 inch (22 mm) wide, with nickel-plated snaps at
                                            4 inches (102 mm) o.c.
                                     c)     Hooks.
                       b.    Drapery Fabric: As indicated in the Drawings.
                       c.    Lining Fabric:
                             1)      Lining Type: As recommended by fabricator for use with drapery fabric
                                     indicated.
                             2)      Manufacturer: Selected by fabricator for use with drapery fabric indicated.
                             3)      Textile Treatments: Stain repellent; and flame retardant, polymer type.
                       d.    Hem Weights: 1-inch- (25-mm-) square lead weights.


2.3           DRAPERY FABRICATION

      A.      Fabricate draperies in heading styles and fullnesses indicated. Fabricate headings to stand
              erect. If less than a full width of fabric is required to produce panel of specified fullness, use
              equal widths of not less than one-half width of fabric located at ends of panel.

      B.      Seams: Sew vertical seams with twin-needle sewing machine with selvage trimmed and
              overlocked. Join widths so that patterns match and vertical seams lay flat and straight without
              puckering. Horizontal seams are not acceptable.

      C.      Side Hems: Double-turned, 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) wide hems consisting of three layers of fabric,
              and blindstitched so that stitches are not visible on face of drapery.

      D.      Bottom Hems: Double-turned, 4-inch- (102-mm-) wide hems consisting of three layers of fabric,
              and weighted and blindstitched so that weights and stitches are not visible on face of drapery.
              1.    Sew in square lead weights at each seam and at panel corners.

      E.      Interlinings: Extend from top of drapery to within 1/2 inch (13 mm) of lining's bottom hem and to
              leading edge of side hems to produce full-shadowed appearance.

      F.      Labels: Laundry care and fire-retardant notification labels shall be sewn into the reverse side of
              the right hem, approximately 6 inches above the bottom hem.

      G.      Packaging: Curtains shall be enclosed in plastic and packaged flat for shipping. Shipping
              cartons shall be full flapped and have department and purchase order marked on the outside for
              receiving room ease of check-in.




© Populous Group, LLC 2012                    CURTAINS AND DRAPES
                                                   12 22 00 - 3
                                  GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
POPULOUS 12.3509.10                                                                   DECEMBER 19, 2012

PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1           DRAPERY TRACK INSTALLATION

      A.      Install track systems according to manufacturer's written instructions, level and plumb, and
              recessed at location in relation to adjoining openings as indicated on Drawings.

      B.      Isolate metal parts of tracks and brackets from concrete, masonry, and mortar to prevent
              galvanic action. Use tape or another method recommended in writing by track manufacturer.


3.2           DRAPERY INSTALLATION

      A.      Where draperies abut overhead construction, hang draperies so that clearance between
              headings and overhead construction is 1/4 inch (6.4 mm).

      B.      Where draperies extend to floor, install so that bottom hems clear finished floor by not more
              than 1 inch (25 mm) and not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm).


3.3           ADJUSTING

      A.      After hanging draperies, test and adjust each track to produce unencumbered, smooth
              operation.

      B.      Steam and dress down draperies as required to produce crease- and wrinkle-free installation.

      C.      Remove and replace draperies that are stained or soiled.


END OF SECTION




© Populous Group, LLC 2012                 CURTAINS AND DRAPES
                                                12 22 00 - 4
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                                                                 DECEMBER 17, 2012

                                                           TABLE OF CONTENTS


SECTION 21 00 00 – FIRE SUPPRESSION
PART 1 - GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.1      GENERAL PROVISIONS ................................................................................................................. 1
  1.2      SCOPE OF WORK .......................................................................................................................... 1
  1.3      RELATED WORK ............................................................................................................................ 1
  1.4      PRODUCTS FURNISHED, BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION ................................ 2
  1.5      PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION ................................. 2
  1.6      DEFINITIONS .................................................................................................................................. 2
  1.7      CODES, REFERENCES AND PERMITS ........................................................................................ 3
  1.8      PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................... 3
  1.9      MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS ................................................................................. 4
  1.10 SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................................................... 5
  1.11 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA .................................................................................... 5
  1.12 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA...................................................................................... 8
  1.13 RECORD DRAWINGS ..................................................................................................................... 9
  1.14 WARRANTIES ............................................................................................................................... 10
  1.15 COORDINATION ........................................................................................................................... 10
  1.16 COORDINATION DRAWINGS ...................................................................................................... 11
  1.17 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................... 12
  1.18 INSPECTION OF SITE CONDITIONS .......................................................................................... 13
  1.19 SURVEY AND MEASUREMENTS................................................................................................. 13
  1.20 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING ...................................................................................... 13
  1.21 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY ................................................................................ 13
  1.22 SUPERVISION ............................................................................................................................... 14
  1.23 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .............................................................................................................. 14
  1.24 SCHEDULE .................................................................................................................................... 14
  1.25 HOISTING, SCAFFOLDING AND PLANKING .............................................................................. 14
  1.26 CUTTING AND PATCHING ........................................................................................................... 14
  1.27 SLEEVES, INSERTS AND ANCHOR BOLTS ............................................................................... 15
  1.28 SUPPLEMENTARY STEEL, CHANNELS AND SUPPORTS ........................................................ 16
  1.29 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ........................................................................................................... 16
  1.30 ACCESSIBILITY............................................................................................................................. 16
  1.31 SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................................... 17
  1.32 WELDING QUALIFICATIONS ....................................................................................................... 17
  1.33 ELECTRICAL WORK ..................................................................................................................... 17


                                                            FIRE SUPPRESSION
                                                                21 00 00 - I
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                                                               DECEMBER 17, 2012

  1.34 PROJECT CLOSEOUT .................................................................................................................. 17
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................................ 19
  2.1      PIPE, FITTINGS AND VALVES ..................................................................................................... 19
  2.2      FIRE DEPARTMENT VALVE CABINET ........................................................................................ 23
  2.3      FIRE HOSE VALVES ..................................................................................................................... 23
  2.4      SPRINKLERS................................................................................................................................. 23
  2.5      HANGERS AND SUPPORTS ........................................................................................................ 24
  2.6      SEISMIC RESTRAINTS ................................................................................................................. 24
PART 3 - EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................... 25
  3.1      EXISTING SYSTEM IMPAIRMENTS AND REMOVAL ................................................................. 25
  3.2      GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................. 25
  3.3      SEISMIC PROTECTION OF PIPING............................................................................................. 26
  3.4      PIPE INSTALLATION .................................................................................................................... 26
  3.5      PIPE AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORT .............................................................................................. 26
  3.6      PENETRATIONS ........................................................................................................................... 27
  3.7      DRAIN INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................. 28
  3.8      FIRE HOSE VALVE INSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 29
  3.9      SPRINKLER INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................ 29
  3.10 IDENTIFICATION........................................................................................................................... 30
  3.11 STANDARDIZED FACILITY IDENTIFICATION ............................................................................. 30
  3.12 CLEANING AND FLUSHING ......................................................................................................... 30
  3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL & TESTING ...................................................................................... 31
  3.14 WET PIPE SYSTEM TESTS ......................................................................................................... 31
  3.15 STANDIPE SYSTEM TESTS ......................................................................................................... 32
  3.16 INSTRUCTING OPERATING PERSONNEL ................................................................................. 32
  3.17 SPECIAL TOOLS ........................................................................................................................... 32




                                                            FIRE SUPPRESSION
                                                                21 00 00 - II
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                        DECEMBER 17, 2012

SECTION 21 00 00 – FIRE SUPPRESSION



PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1   GENERAL PROVISIONS

      A.    The GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, DIVISION 1, and BIDDING AND CONTRACT
            REQUIREMENTS, DIVISION 0, are hereby made a part of this Specification Section.

      B.    Examine all Drawings and all Sections of the Specifications and requirements and
            provisions affecting the work of this Section.


1.2   SCOPE OF WORK

      A.    This project includes the partial renovation of approximately 20,000 SF of
            bar/lounge/service space with minimal expansion.          The work generally includes
            modification of the existing fire sprinkler system and existing dry standpipe system to
            accommodate the new interior partition and ceiling arrangement.

      B.    The building is to be commissioned and Contractor shall provide all labor required to fully
            test and demonstrate that all systems operate as designed.

      C.    The work under this Section shall include the furnishing of all materials, labor, equipment
            and supplies and the performance of all operations to provide complete working systems,
            in general, to include the following systems:
            1.      Automatic wet-pipe sprinkler system to provide protection for a fully sprinklered
                    building as defined by the State Building Code.
            2.      Dry standpipe system to provide fire hose valves throughout the building
                    (unconditioned spaces) as required by the State Building Code.


1.3   RELATED WORK

      A.    Principal classes of Work related to the Work of this Section are listed below, and are
            specified to be performed under the indicated Sections of the Specifications. Refer to the
            indicated Sections for description of the extent and nature of the indicated Work, and for
            coordination with related trades. This listing may not include all related Work items. It is
            the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate and schedule the Work of this Section
            with that of all other trades.

      B.    The following work is not included in this Section and will be provided under other
            Sections:
            1.      Concrete work including housekeeping pads
            2.      Field painting
            3.      Electrical power wiring for all equipment
            4.      Heating, ventilating and air conditioning
            5.      Temporary light, power, water, heat, gas and sanitary facilities for use during
                    construction and testing. Refer to Division 1, General Conditions.



                                      FIRE SUPPRESSION
                                          21 00 00 - 1
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                         DECEMBER 17, 2012

1.4   PRODUCTS FURNISHED, BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION

      A.      Furnish pipe sleeves for placement into formwork by the General Contractor.

      B.      Furnish access panels and doors for installation by the General Contractor.
              1.      Furnish access panels for installation in walls, ceiling and floors at locations to
                      permit access for adjustment, removal, replacement and servicing of all
                      concealed equipment, valves and materials installed under this Section.
              2.      Access panels will be installed under the Section of the related trades of the
                      finished surfaces in which they are located.
              3.      Access panels shall be located in closets, storage rooms and / or other non-
                      public areas if possible, positioned so that the equipment can be easily reached,
                      and the size shall be sufficient for this purpose (min. 16” X 16”). When access
                      panels are required in corridors, lobby or other habitable areas, they will be
                      located as directed by the CM.
              4.      Access panels shall be prime painted, keyed alike and provided with cylinder
                      lock.


1.5   PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION
      Not applicable.



1.6   DEFINITIONS

      A.      As used in this Section, the following terms are understood to have the following
              meanings:
              1.     “Contractor” unless otherwise qualified shall mean the installer of the work
                     specified under this Section.
              2.     “Furnish” purchase and deliver to the project site, complete with every
                     necessary appurtenance and support.
              3.     “Install” unload at the delivery point at the site and perform all work necessary to
                     establish secure mounting and proper location and operation in the project.
              4.     “Provide” "Furnish" and "Install".
              5.     “Work” all labor, materials, equipment, apparatus, controls, accessories and all
                     other items required for a proper and complete installation.
              6.     “Piping” in addition to pipe or tubing, all fittings, flanges, unions, valves,
                     strainers, drains, hangers and other accessories relative to such piping.
              7.     “Concealed” hidden from sight in chases, furred spaces, shafts, embedded in
                     construction or in a crawl space.
              8.     “Exposed” not installed underground or concealed as defined above.
              9.     “Furnished by Others” materials or equipment purchased and set in place
                     under other sections of the general contract and connected to the systems
                     covered by this Section.
              10.    “Coordinate” all work provided under this Section of the specifications shall be
                     in compliance with other trades.
              11.    “Owners Representative” shall be the party responsible to make decisions
                     regarding all contractual obligations in reference to the Scope of Work for the
                     Owner.
              12.    “Date of Substantial Completion” shall indicate the date where the work has
                     been formally accepted as evidenced by completed final punch list or where the



                                        FIRE SUPPRESSION
                                            21 00 00 - 2
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                         DECEMBER 17, 2012

                    work has reached the stage that the owner obtains beneficial use and
                    commences utilization of the installed systems for business or occupancy
                    purposes. The GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, DIVISION 1, shall supersede this
                    definition where specifically defined.
            13.     “Work by Others” shall mean work not provided by this Contractor, but work
                    furnished and / or installed by other Contractors (performing their respective
                    work) as a part of this contract.


1.7   CODES, REFERENCES AND PERMITS

      A.    Materials, installation of systems and equipment provided under this section shall be done
            in strict accordance with applicable state and local laws, regulations and ordinances
            having jurisdiction. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, materials, workmanship and
            equipment performance shall conform with the latest governing (as referenced by state
            codes) edition of the following standards, publications, codes, specifications,
            requirements and regulations, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are
            required by applicable codes but not limited to:
            1.       State Building Code
            2.       State Fire and Life Safety Codes
            3.       Applicable National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards
                     a.       NFPA 13, Installation of Sprinkler Systems
                     b.       NFPA 14, Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems
            4.       Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
            5.       Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc (UL)
            6.       Factory Mutual (FM)
            7.       Owner / Tenant Construction Standards

      B.    Codes, laws and standards provide a basis for the minimum installation criteria
            acceptable. The drawings and specifications illustrate the scope required for this project,
            which may exceed minimum codes, laws and standards.

      C.    The Contractor shall give all notices, file all plans, obtain all permits and licenses, and
            obtain all necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction. Deliver all certificates
            of inspection to the authorities having jurisdiction. No work shall be covered before
            examination and approval by inspectors, and authorities having jurisdiction. Replace
            imperfect or condemned work to conform to requirements, satisfactory to CM without
            extra cost to the Authority. If work is covered before inspection and approval, the
            Contractor shall pay costs of uncovering and reinstalling the covering, whether it meets
            contract requirements or not.


1.8   PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

      A.    Sprinkler System
            1.      Light Hazard Occupancies:
                    a.      Public areas, offices and similar; designed for application of 0.10-
                            gpm/sqft over the most remote 1,500-sqft with 250-gpm hose allowance.
            2.      Ordinary Hazard Group 1 Occupancies:
                    a.      Mechanical areas and similar; designed for application of 0.15-gpm/sqft
                            over the most remote 1,500-sqft with 250-gpm hose allowance.




                                      FIRE SUPPRESSION
                                          21 00 00 - 3
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                         DECEMBER 17, 2012

      B.    Standpipe System
            1.     100 psi minimum at most remote hose valves while flowing 500 gpm at the most
                   remote standpipe and 250 gpm at each additional standpipe up to a maximum
                   total of 1,000 gpm (1,250 gpm for buildings not protected throughout with
                   sprinkler system).

      C.    Work shall include sizing of piping to meet the performance criteria specified herein via
            hydraulic calculations performed in accordance with NFPA 13.

      D.    Hydraulic calculation results shall indicate that the difference between the residual system
            pressure required and the residual pressure available is no less than 10 psi.


1.9   MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS

      A.    Where equipment or materials are specified with the name of a manufacturer, such
            specification shall be deemed to be used for the purpose of establishing a standard for
            that particular item. No equipment or material shall be used unless previously approved
            by the Owner’s Representative.
            1.       Acceptable Manufacturers: Products and equipment shall be obtained from
                     manufacturers included in the Acceptable Manufacturers lists indicated in Part 2.
            2.       Substitutions may be acceptable only if, at a minimum, they:
                     a.       Meet all performance criteria listed in the schedules and outlined in the
                              specifications.
                     b.       Fit within the available space it was designed for, including space for
                              maintenance and component removal, with no modification to either the
                              space or the product. Clearances to walls, ceilings, and other equipment
                              will be at least equal to those shown on the design drawings. The fact
                              that a manufacturer’s name appears as acceptable shall not be taken to
                              mean the Engineer has determined that the manufacturer’s products will
                              fit within the available space – this determination is solely the
                              responsibility of the Contractor.
                     c.       Products must adhere to all architectural considerations including, but not
                              limited to; being of the same color as the product scheduled or specified
                              and fitting within the architectural enclosures and details.

      B.    Substitutions may be offered for review provided the material, equipment or process
            offered for consideration is equal in every respect to that indicated or specified. The
            request for each substitution must be accompanied by complete specifications together
            with drawings or samples to properly appraise the materials, equipment or process.

      C.    If a substitution of materials or equipment in whole or in part is made, this Contractor shall
            bear the cost of any changes necessitated by any other trade as a result of said
            substitution.

      D.    All materials, equipment and accessories provided under this Section shall be new and
            unused, UL listed & FM Approved, domestically manufactured products of recognized
            manufacturers as approved.

      E.    Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address, type
            or style, model or serial number, and catalog number on a plate secured to the
            equipment.




                                      FIRE SUPPRESSION
                                          21 00 00 - 4
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                         DECEMBER 17, 2012

1.10   SUBMITTALS

       A.   Conform to the requirements of Division 1, General Conditions, for schedule and form
            of all submittals noted in other Articles of this Section unless specifically noted otherwise
            in this Section

       B.   Provide sufficient notice and engineering review time as indicated in this Section such that
            the following is completed by the Contractor:
            1.       Submit and resubmit for approval product data and shop drawing prior to
                     beginning system installation.
            2.       Submit written notification of completion, test certificates, record drawings and
                     O&M information prior to request for engineer’s final substantial completion
                     inspection and issuance of engineers certification of completion.
            3.       Submit warranties and written confirmation of completion of final punch list items
                     prior to final project closeout.


1.11   SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA

       A.   Definitions:
            1.       Product Data: Published manufacturer’s equipment or product data sheet with all
                     selected options and finishes indicated.
            2.       Shop Drawings: Drawings prepared by the Contractor, using the Contract
                     Documents as a basis of design, to illustrate the detailed and coordinated system
                     configuration to be installed. Shop drawings and design layouts shall be prepared
                     by licensed installing Contractors and shall note the name(s), license number(s)
                     and license expiration dates(s) of the Contractor(s) installing the Fire Suppression
                     work.
                     a.      Calculations: Calculations prepared by the Contractor in accordance with
                             the applicable NFPA standards which demonstrate that the shop drawing
                             pipe sizes, wire sizes, battery capacities, etc. comply with the minimum
                             performance requirements of the Contract Documents.

       B.   Product Data: Submit complete manufacturer’s product description and technical
            information for the following:
            1.      Pipe, fittings and joints for each piping application
            2.      Hangers, inserts and anchors
            3.      Seismic restraint assemblies and expansion joints
            4.      Sprinklers for each application
            5.      Fire hose valves and roof manifolds
            6.      Identification placards, valve tags and charts
            7.      Fire stopping
            8.      Access panels
            9.      Spare parts: spare parts data shall be included for each different item of material
                    and equipment specified. The data shall include a complete list of parts and
                    supplies with current unit prices and source of supply, and a list of parts
                    recommended by the manufacturer to be replaced after 1 year and 3 years of
                    service. A list of special tools and test equipment required for maintenance and
                    testing of the products supplied by the Contractor shall be included.

       C.   Shop Drawings: Submit hydraulically calculated shop drawings for approval of entire
            system. Drawings shall conform to the requirements established for “Working Plans” as




                                      FIRE SUPPRESSION
                                          21 00 00 - 5
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                        DECEMBER 17, 2012

            prescribed in NFPA 13. The requirements of this paragraph are in addition to
            requirements for coordination drawings. Each set of drawings shall include the following:
            1.      Descriptive index of drawings in the submittal with drawings listed in sequence by
                    drawing number. A legend identifying device symbols, nomenclature, and
                    conventions used.
            2.      Floor plans (with reflected ceiling plan) drawn to a scale not less than 1:100 (1/8"
                    = 1'-0") which clearly show locations of sprinklers, risers, pipe hangers, seismic
                    separation assemblies, sway bracing, inspector's test connections, drains, and
                    other applicable details necessary to clearly describe the proposed arrangement.
                     Each type of fitting used and the locations of bushings, reducing couplings, and
                    welded joints shall be indicated.
            3.      Details showing the dimension from the sprinkler deflector to the ceiling or deck
                    above with the NFPA 13 construction type identified.
            4.      Details of each type of riser assembly; pipe hanger; sway bracing for earthquake
                    protection, and restraint of underground water main at point-of-entry into the
                    building, and electrical devices and interconnecting wiring.
            5.      Longitudinal and transverse building sections showing typical branch line and
                    cross-main pipe routing as well as elevation of each typical sprinkler above
                    finished floor.
            6.      Fire pump flow test results; indicate date of test(s).
            7.      Hydraulic calculation reports for each system and hazard classification; show
                    corresponding remote areas, node points and results summaries on plans.

      D.    Shop Drawing and Product Data Submittal Procedures, Format and Requirements
            1.     Review submittal packages for compliance with Contract Documents and then
                   submit to Owner’s Representative for review. Submit enough sets of shop
                   drawings and product data such that, after review, two sets will be kept by the
                   reviewer, with only the remaining sets returned with reviewer’s marks and
                   comments.
            2.     Each Shop Drawing shall indicate in title block, and each Product Data package
                   shall indicate on cover sheet, the following information:
                   a.       Title
                   b.       Equipment number
                   c.       Name and location of project
                   d.       Names of Owner, Engineer and Seller
                   e.       Names of manufacturers, suppliers, vendors, etc.
                   f.       Date of submittal
                   g.       Whether original submittal or resubmitted
            3.     Shop Drawings showing manufacturer’s product data shall contain detailed
                   dimensional drawings (minimum 1/4” – 1’ scale) including plans and sections
                   (where physical clearance could be an issue). Provide larger scale details as
                   necessary.
            4.     Product data shall include accurate and complete description of materials of
                   construction, manufacturer’s published performance characteristics, sizes,
                   weights, capacity ratings (performance data, alone, is not acceptable), electrical
                   requirements, starting characteristics, wiring diagrams, and acoustical
                   performance for complete assemblies. Drawings shall clearly indicate location
                   (terminal block or wire number), voltage and function for all field terminations, and
                   other information necessary to demonstrate compliance with all requirements of
                   Contract Documents.
            5.     Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified.
            6.     Include Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for each applicable product with
                   submittal.



                                      FIRE SUPPRESSION
                                          21 00 00 - 6
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                         DECEMBER 17, 2012

            7.      Show details of piping connections to all equipment. If connection details are not
                    submitted and connections are found to be installed incorrectly, this Contractor
                    shall reinstall them within the original contract price.
            8.      Provide complete data for all auxiliary services and utilities required by submitted
                    equipment.
            9.      Provide a complete description of all controls and instrumentation required
                    including electrical power connection drawing for all components and
                    interconnection wiring to starters, detailed information on starters, control
                    diagrams, termination diagrams, and all control interfaces with a central control
                    system.
            10.     Provide installation and erection information including; lifting requirements, and
                    any special rigging or installation requirements for all equipment.
            11.     The Owner’s Representative shall approve all materials before commitment for
                    materials is made.
            12.     Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals
                    of related systems, products and accessories in an individual (combined)
                    submittal.
                    a.       Do not submit multiple product information in a single bound manual.
                    b.       Three-ring binders shall not be accepted.

      E.    Deviations:
            1.      Concerning deviations other than substitutions, proposed deviations from
                    Contract Documents shall be requested individually in writing whether deviations
                    result from field conditions, standard shop practice, or other cause. Submit letter
                    with transmittal of Shop Drawings and Product Data which flags the deviation to
                    the attention of the Owner’s Representative.
            2.      Without letters flagging the deviation to the Owner’s Representative, it is possible
                    that the Engineer may not notice such deviation or may not realize its
                    ramifications. Therefore, if such letters are not submitted to the Owner’s
                    Representative, the Seller shall hold the Engineers, his consultants and the
                    Owner harmless for any and all adverse consequences resulting from the
                    deviations being implemented. This shall apply regardless of whether the
                    Engineer has reviewed or approved shop drawings containing the deviation, and
                    will be strictly enforced.
            3.      Approval of proposed deviations, if any, will be made at discretion of Engineer.

      F.    Schedule: Incorporate shop drawing / product data review period into construction
            schedule so that Work is not delayed. This Contractor shall assume full responsibility for
            delays caused by not incorporating the following shop drawing review time requirements
            into his project schedule. Allow at least 10 working days, exclusive of transmittal time, for
            review each time shop drawing is submitted or resubmitted with the exception that 20
            working days, exclusive of transmittal time are required when more than five shop
            drawings of a single trade are received in one calendar week.

      G.    Responsibility
            1.    Intent of Submittal review is to check for capacity, rating, and certain construction
                  features. The Fire Suppression Contractor shall ensure that work meets
                  requirements of Contract Documents regarding information that pertains to
                  fabrication processes or means, methods, techniques, sequences and
                  procedures of construction; and for coordination of work of this and other
                  Sections. Work shall comply with approved submittals to extent that they agree
                  with Contract Documents. Submittal review shall not diminish responsibility under
                  this Contract for dimensional coordination, quantities, installation, wiring, supports



                                      FIRE SUPPRESSION
                                          21 00 00 - 7
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                        DECEMBER 17, 2012

                    and access for service, nor the shop drawing errors or deviations from
                    requirements of Contract Documents. The Engineer's noting of some errors
                    while overlooking others will not excuse the Fire Suppression Contractor from
                    proceeding in error. Contract Documents requirements are not limited, waived
                    nor superseded in any way by review.
            2.      Inform Contractors, manufacturers, suppliers, etc. of scope and limited nature of
                    review process and enforce compliance with contract documents.

       H.   In the event that the Fire Suppression Contractor fails to provide Shop Drawings / Product
            Data for any of the products specified herein:
            1.       The Fire Suppression Contractor shall furnish and install all materials and
                     equipment herein specified in complete accordance with these Specifications.
            2.       If the Fire Suppression Contractor furnishes and installs material and/or
                     equipment that are not in complete accordance with these Specifications, he shall
                     be responsible for the removal of this material and/or equipment. He shall also
                     be responsible for the replacement of this material and/or equipment with material
                     and/or equipment that is in complete accordance with these Specifications, at the
                     direction of the Owner’s Representative.
            3.       Removal and replacement of materials and/or equipment that is not in complete
                     compliance with these Specifications shall be done at no extra cost to the Owner.
            4.       Removal and replacement of materials and/or equipment that is not in complete
                     compliance with these Specifications shall not be allowed as a basis for a claim of
                     delay of completion of the Work.


1.12   OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

       A.   Commence preparation of the “Fire Suppression” section of the master project Operating
            and Maintenance (O&M) Manual immediately upon receipt of “Approved” or “Approved as
            Noted” shop drawings and submit each item within one month.

       B.   Submit O&M table of contents in the submittal phase. O&M manual sections shall be built
            as submittals are accepted.

       C.   Each O&M document shall include the manufacturer’s web address for equipment
            specific O&M information for Internet access by the Owner. The manual shall highlight the
            actual equipment used and not be a master catalog of all similar products of the
            manufacturer.
            1.       Include the individual equipment manufacturer’s data retrieval sheet, as per
                     Attachment A in Part IV for input into the Owner’s Maintenance Management
                     System. Form shall be provided and completed electronically.

       D.   Provide a consistent “Fire Suppression” section format in regards to other trades by
            coordinating the submission format of the master project O&M manual with the General
            Contractor.
            1.      Three (3) copies of the final master project O&M shall be submitted with three (3)
                    corresponding CD’s, which shall contain the scanned content of the entire
                    manual, to be created after approval of the hard copy O&M manual.

       E.   The Manual shall contain the following as applicable:
            1.    Operations Manual
                  a.      Product Data Sheets.




                                      FIRE SUPPRESSION
                                          21 00 00 - 8
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                         DECEMBER 17, 2012

                    b.      Systems description including all relevant information needed for day-to-
                            day operations and management including start-up and shut-down
                            instructions.
                    c.      Valve and System Chart: corresponding to valve tags as provided per
                            Part 3 “Standardized Facility Identification”.
            2.      Maintenance Manual
                    a.      Original soft-bound copy of NFPA 25.
                    b.      Recommended List of Spare Parts: With sectional views of the fittings or
                            equipment showing parts numbered or labeled to facilitate ordering
                            replacements. Include a list with itemized prices of those parts
                            recommended to be kept on hand as spares, as well as the name and
                            address of where they may be obtained.
                    c.      Warrantee Information.
                    d.      Emergency contact list for reporting of malfunctioning equipment during
                            the warrantee period.
            3.      Provide O&M information for each of the following equipment and products:
                    a.      Sprinklers


1.13   RECORD DRAWINGS

       A.   Refer to DIVISION 1, General Conditions, for record drawings and procedures to be
            provided under this Section, unless specifically noted otherwise in this section.

       B.   Record Drawings (red-line drawings) will be updated by this Contractor daily for review
            with the monthly requisition. The record drawing shall be an accurate depiction of the
            systems as completed, including dimensions (vertical/horizontal) of concealed
            components off fixed building elements.

       C.   The Fire Suppression Foreman shall maintain complete and separate set of prints of
            Contract Drawings at job site at all times and shall record work completed and all
            changes from original Contract Drawings clearly and accurately including work installed
            as a modification or addition to the original design.

       D.   At completion of work the Fire Suppression Contractor shall prepare a complete set of
            record drawings on AutoCAD showing all systems as actually installed. The Architectural
            background AutoCAD files will be made available for the Contractor’s copying, at his
            expense, to serve as backgrounds for the drawings. The Fire Suppression Contractor
            shall transfer changes from field drawings onto AutoCAD drawings and submit copy of
            files and three sets of prints to Owner’s Representative for comments as to compliance
            with this section. CADD layering as established by the A&E design team shall be
            maintained with any and all changes done by the Contractor.

       E.   The Architect and Engineer are not granting to the Contractor any ownership or property
            interest in the CADD Drawings by the delivery of the CADD Disks to the Contractor. The
            Contractor’s rights to use the CADD disks and the CADD Drawings are limited to use for
            the sole purpose of assisting in the Contractor’s performance of its contractual obligations
            under its contract with respect to the Project. The Architect and Engineer are granting no
            further rights. Any reuse or other use by the Contractor will be at the Contractor’s sole risk
            and without liability to the Architect and Engineer. The Contractor hereby waives and
            releases any losses, claims, damages, liabilities of any nature whatsoever, and costs
            (including attorney fees) arising out of, resulting from, or otherwise related to the use of
            the CADD Disks and CADD Drawings by the Contractor. The Contractor, to the maximum



                                      FIRE SUPPRESSION
                                          21 00 00 - 9
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                        DECEMBER 17, 2012

            extent permitted by law, hereby agrees to indemnify, defend and hold the Architect and
            Engineer harmless from all loses, claims, damages, liabilities, and costs (including
            attorney fees) arising out of, resulting from, or otherwise related to the use of the CADD
            Disks and CADD Drawings by the Contractor.

       F.   Record Drawings, shall show “as-built” condition of details, sections, riser diagrams,
            control changes and corrections to schedules. Schedules shall show actual manufacturer
            and model numbers of final equipment installation.

       G.   The Fire Suppression Contractor shall submit the record set for approval by the engineer
            as described under “Project Closeout” of this Section. One copy of final record drawings
            shall also be included with the O&M Manual.


1.14   WARRANTIES

       A.   Submit as part of O&M Manual, manufacturer's standard replacement warranties for
            material and equipment furnished under this Section. Such warranties shall be in addition
            to and not in lieu of all liabilities which the manufacturer and this Contractor may have by
            law or by provisions of the Contract Documents.

       B.   Submit as part of O&M Manual, Contractor’s written warranty of workmanship. All
            materials, equipment and work furnished under this Section shall be guaranteed against
            all defects in materials and workmanship for a minimum period of one-year (1)
            commencing with the Date of Substantial Completion. Any failure due to defective
            material, equipment or workmanship which may develop, shall be corrected at no
            expense to the Owner including all damage to areas, materials and other systems
            resulting from such failures.

       C.   Guarantee that all elements of each system meet the specified performance requirements
            as set forth herein or as indicated on the Drawings.

       D.   Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of the failure of any part of the systems during the
            warranty period, the affected parts shall be replaced. Any equipment requiring excessive
            service shall be considered defective and shall be replaced.


1.15   COORDINATION

       A.   Refer to Division 1, General Conditions for record drawings and procedures to be under
            this Section, unless specifically noted otherwise in this Section.

       B.   Materials and apparatus shall be installed as fast as conditions of the building will permit
            and must be installed promptly when and as required.

       C.   Confer with all other trades relative to location of all apparatus and equipment to be
            installed and select locations so as not to conflict with work of other Sections. Any
            conflicts shall be referred immediately to the Owner’s Representative for decision to
            prevent delay in installation of work. All work and materials placed in violation of this
            clause shall be readjusted to the Owner’s Representative's satisfaction at no expense to
            the Owner.




                                      FIRE SUPPRESSION
                                         21 00 00 - 10
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                        DECEMBER 17, 2012

       D.   Where work of this section will be installed in close proximity to work of other sections or
            where there is evidence that the work of this Section may interfere with work of other
            sections, assist in working out space conditions to make satisfactory adjustment. Prepare
            and submit for approval 3/8" scale or larger working drawings and sections, clearly
            showing how the work is to be installed in relation to the work of other sections. If the
            work of this section is installed before coordinating with other trades or so as to cause
            interference with work of other trades, make changes necessary to protect conditions
            without extra charge.

       E.   Keep fully informed as to the shape, size and position of all openings required for all
            apparatus, pipes, sleeves, etc., and give information in advance to allow construction of
            required openings. Furnish all sleeves, pockets, supports and incidentals, and coordinate
            with the General Contractor for the proper setting of same.

       F.   All distribution systems which require pitch or slope such as condensate drains and water
            piping shall have the right of way over those which do not. Confer with other trades as to
            the location of pipes, ducts, lights and apparatus and install work to avoid interferences.

       G.   Make reasonable modifications in the work as required by normal structural interferences,
            or by interference with work of other trades, or for proper execution of the work without
            extra charge.


1.16   COORDINATION DRAWINGS

       A.   Coordinate with the General Contractor and other sections of the Work to develop project
            Coordinating Drawings for use in verifying required code clearances (as well as
            clearances for operation, repair, removal and testing) of all equipment and for use in
            coordinating installation of equipment with other trades.

       B.   The HVAC Contractor’s Coordination Drawings shall be the basis for floor plan
            coordination. The Electrical Contractor’s reflected ceiling plans shall be the basis for
            ceiling coordination.

       C.   Use approved Fire Suppression Shop Drawings (Working Plans) as basis of coordination.
            Overlay onto project Coordination Drawings as directed by the General Contractor.

       D.   Coordination Drawings shall show all fire suppression work including all equipment, pipes,
            sprinklers, sleeves, hangers, anchors and inserts to be installed as part of Fire
            Suppression Section 21 00 00. The Coordination Drawings shall be created using
            AutoCAD and shall have a scale of ⅜”.

       E.   Where practical, the CADD layering as established by the A&E team for the construction
            documents shall be utilized in the preparation of all Coordination Drawings. Where CADD
            layering deviates from the A&E team’s layering convention, submit the proposed layering
            system for approval. The CADD layering used shall provide, as a minimum, the flexibility
            of illustrating trade specific items similar to the established A&E team layering standard.

       F.   The Architect and Engineer are not granting to the Contractor any ownership or property
            interest in the CADD Drawings by the delivery of the CADD Disks to the Contractor. The
            Contractor’s rights to use the CADD disks and the CADD Drawings are limited to use for
            the sole purpose of assisting in the Contractor’s performance of its contractual obligations



                                      FIRE SUPPRESSION
                                         21 00 00 - 11
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                          DECEMBER 17, 2012

            under its contract with respect to the Project. The Architect and Engineer are granting no
            further rights. Any reuse or other use by the Contractor will be at the Contractor’s sole risk
            and without liability to the Architect and Engineer. The Contractor hereby waives and
            releases any losses, claims, damages, liabilities of any nature whatsoever, and costs
            (including attorney fees) arising out of, resulting from, or otherwise related to the use of
            the CADD Disks and CADD Drawings by the Contractor. The Contractor, to the maximum
            extent permitted by law, hereby agrees to indemnify, defend and hold the Architect and
            Engineer harmless from all loses, claims, damages, liabilities, and costs (including
            attorney fees) arising out of, resulting from, or otherwise related to the use of the CADD
            Disks and CADD Drawings by the Contractor.

       G.   The intent of the Coordination Drawings is to identify and resolve installation conflicts prior
            to fabrication and installation of any MEP trade.

       H.   Do not install any of the work prior to the preparation and approval of the final
            Coordination Drawings. If Fire Suppression work proceeds prior to the final Coordination
            Drawings, any change to the Fire Suppression work to correct the interferences and
            conflicts which result will be made by this Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.

       I.   Coordination Drawings are for this Contractor’s and Owner’s Representative’s use during
            construction and shall not be construed as replacing any shop, “as-built”, or Record
            Drawings required elsewhere in these Contract Documents.

       J.   Review of Coordination Drawings shall not relieve this Contractor from his overall
            responsibility for coordination of all work performed pursuant to the Contract or from any
            other requirements of the Contract.


1.17   INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

       A.   It is the intention of the Specifications and Drawings to call for complete, finished work,
            tested and ready for continuous operation. Any apparatus, appliance, material or work
            not shown on the Drawings, but mentioned in the Specifications or vice-versa, or any
            incidental accessories necessary to make the work complete in all respects and ready for
            operation, even if not particularly specified, shall be provided by this Contractor without
            additional expense to the Owner.

       B.   The Drawings are generally diagrammatic. The locations of all items that are not
            definitely fixed by dimensions are approximate only. The exact locations must be
            determined at the project and shall have the approval of the Owner’s Representative
            before being installed. This Contractor shall follow Drawings, including his shop
            drawings, in laying out work and shall check the Drawings of other trades to verify spaces
            in which work will be installed. Maintain maximum headroom and space conditions.
            Where space conditions appear inadequate, notify the Owner’s Representative before
            proceeding with the installation. This Contractor shall, without extra charge, make
            reasonable modifications in the layout as needed to prevent conflict with work of other
            trades or for proper execution of the work.

       C.   Size of pipes and methods of running them are shown, but it is not intended to show every
            offset and fitting, nor every structural difficulty that may be encountered. To carry out the
            true intent and purpose of the Drawings, all necessary parts to make complete approved




                                       FIRE SUPPRESSION
                                          21 00 00 - 12
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                         DECEMBER 17, 2012

             working systems ready for use, shall be furnished without extra charge. All work shall be
             installed in such a manner as to avoid being unsightly.


1.18   INSPECTION OF SITE CONDITIONS

       A.    Prior to submission of bid, this Contractor shall visit the site and / or review the related
             construction documents to determine the conditions under which the Work has to be
             performed. He shall report, in writing, to the Owner’s Representative, any conditions
             which might adversely affect the Contractor’s work.

       B.    The Contractor shall perform or secure the results of a hydrant flow test(s) and/or fire
             pump test to establish the available water supply for use with preparing hydraulic
             calculations. The date of tests shall be within three (3) months of the date of shop
             drawing submittal and within twelve (12) months of occupancy of the building. Contractor
             shall retest as necessary to comply.
             1.       Fire pump tests shall be performed and documented in accordance with NFPA
                      20.


1.19   SURVEY AND MEASUREMENTS

       A.    Base all required measurements, both horizontal and vertical, from referenced points
             established WITH the Owner’s Representative. The Fire Suppression Contractor shall be
             responsible for correctly laying out the Work required under this Section of the
             Specifications.

       B.    In the event of discrepancy between actual measurements and those indicated, notify the
             Owner’s Representative in writing and do not proceed with the related work until
             instructions have been issued.


1.20   DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

       A.    No materials shall be delivered or stored on site until Shop Drawings have been
             approved.

       B.    All manufactured materials shall be delivered to the site in original packages or containers
             bearing the manufacturer's labels and product identification.

       C.    Protect materials against dampness. Store off floors, under cover and adequately
             protected from damage.

       D.    Inspect all Fire Suppression equipment and materials, upon receipt at the job site, for
             damage and conformance to approved Shop Drawings.


1.21   PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY

       A.    Be responsible for the care and protection of all work included under this Section until the
             completion and final acceptance of this Contract.




                                       FIRE SUPPRESSION
                                          21 00 00 - 13
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                       DECEMBER 17, 2012

       B.   Protect all equipment and materials from damage from all causes including, but not
            limited to, fire, vandalism and theft. All materials and equipment damaged or stolen shall
            be repaired or replaced with equal material or equipment at no additional cost to the
            Authority.

       C.   Protect all equipment, outlets and openings with temporary plugs, caps and covers.
            Protect work and materials of other trades from damage that might be caused by work or
            workmen under this Section and make good damage thus caused.

       D.   Damaged materials are to be removed from the site; no site storage of damaged
            materials will be allowed.


1.22   SUPERVISION

       A.   Supply the service of a competent Supervisor with a minimum of 5 years experience in
            Fire Suppression Construction Supervision who shall be in charge of the Fire Suppression
            work at the site.


1.23   SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

       A.   Life safety, accident prevention shall be a primary consideration. Provide all required and
            prudent material, labor and equipment to comply with the safety requirements of the
            Owner and OSHA throughout the entire construction period of the project.

       B.   Furnish, place and maintain proper guards and any other necessary construction required
            to secure safety of life and/or property.

       C.   Perform work only in areas of the building as approved by the Owner’s Representative
            equipment access to the site, laydown areas, parking areas and areas of work shall only
            be as designated and allowed by the Owner’s Representative.


1.24   SCHEDULE

       A.   Construct work in sequence under provisions of Division 1 and as coordinated with the
            Owner’s Representative.


1.25   HOISTING, SCAFFOLDING AND PLANKING

       A.   The work to be done under this Section shall include the furnishing, set-up and
            maintenance of all derricks, hoisting machinery, cranes, scaffolds, staging and planking
            as required for the work.


1.26   CUTTING AND PATCHING

       A.   Provide all cutting and patching necessary for the proper installation of work to be
            performed under this Section.




                                      FIRE SUPPRESSION
                                         21 00 00 - 14
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                          DECEMBER 17, 2012

       B.   All work shall be fully coordinated with all phases of construction, in order to minimize the
            requirements for cutting and patching.

       C.   Form all chases or openings for the installation of the work of this Section, or cut the
            same in existing work and see that all sleeves or forms are in the work and properly set in
            ample time to prevent delays. Be responsible that all such chases, openings, and sleeves
            are located accurately and are of the proper size and shape and consult with the Owner’s
            Representative and all other trades concerned in reference to this work. Confine the
            cutting to the smallest extent possible consistent with the work to be done. In no case
            shall piers or structural members be cut without the approval of the CM.

       D.   Fit around, close up, repair, patch, and point around the work specified herein to match
            the existing adjacent surfaces and to the satisfaction of the CM.

       E.   Fill and patch all openings or holes left in the existing structures by the removal of existing
            equipment which is part of this Section.

       F.   All of this work shall be carefully done by workmen qualified to do such work and with the
            proper and smallest tools applicable.

       G.   Any cost caused by defective or ill-timed work required by this Section shall be borne by
            this Contractor.

       H.   When, in order to accommodate the work required under this Section, finished materials
            of other trades must be cut or fitted, furnish the necessary drawings and information to
            the trades whose materials must be cut or fitted.


1.27   SLEEVES, INSERTS AND ANCHOR BOLTS

       A.   Coordinate with other trades the location of and maintaining in proper positions, sleeves,
            inserts and anchor bolts to be supplied and/or set in place under this Section. In the
            event of incorrectly located preset sleeves, inserts and anchor bolts, etc., all required
            cutting and patching of finished work shall be done under this Section.

       B.   All pipes passing through floors, walls, ceilings or partitions shall be provided with fire
            stopping to maintain the fire rating of the structure. All penetrations and associated fire
            stopping shall be installed in accordance with the fire stopping manufacturer’s listed
            installation details. Provide sleeves for all penetrations where required by the listed detail,
            for the penetration of all mechanical room floors and where specifically required on the
            drawings.

       C.   Field drilling (core drilling), when required, shall be performed under this Section, after
            receipt of approval by the Owner’s Representative.
            1.       When coring can not be avoided, provide ¼” pilot hole prior to coring. When
                     coring through floor or slab, verify location of core on floor below and protect and
                     piping, ductwork, wiring, furniture, personnel, etc., below the location of the core.




                                       FIRE SUPPRESSION
                                          21 00 00 - 15
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                          DECEMBER 17, 2012

1.28   SUPPLEMENTARY STEEL, CHANNELS AND SUPPORTS

       A.    Provide all supplementary steel, factory fabricated channels and supports required for the
             proper installation, mounting and support of all Fire Suppression equipment and systems
             provided under this Section.

       B.    Supplementary steel and factory fabricated channels shall be firmly connected to building
             construction in a manner approved by the CM as shown on the drawings, or herein
             specified.

       C.    The type and size of the supporting channels and supplementary steel provided under this
              Section shall accommodate all deflections in conformance with the manufacturer’s
             requirements for the specific loading on the system installed therein.

       D.    All supplementary steel and factory fabricated channels shall be installed in a neat and
             workmanlike manner parallel to the walls, floors and ceiling construction. All turns shall
             be made with 90° and 45° fittings, as required to suit the construction and installation
             conditions.

       E.    All supplementary steel including factory fabricated channels, supports and fittings shall
             be Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. approved, shall be galvanized steel, where exposed or
             subject to rust producing atmosphere and shall be manufactured by Unistrut, H-strut,
             Powerstrut or approved equal.


1.29   HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

       A.    Dispose of all hazardous materials in accordance with Federal and State laws. All
             handling shall conform to EPA requirements. A uniform hazardous waste manifest shall
             be prepared for all disposals and return with all applicable signoffs prior to application for
             final payment. Provide breakout cost for this scope.

       B.    Removed equipment or fluids containing any hazardous materials such as ethylene
             glycol, halon or oil shall be recycled by a licensed facility approved by the Owner’s
             Representative.

       C.    Where it has been identified that asbestos-containing material exists within the scope
             limits, refer to the Asbestos Abatement specification section for requirements.


1.30   ACCESSIBILITY

       A.    All work provided under this Section of the Specification shall be installed so that parts
             requiring periodic inspection, maintenance and repair are accessible. Work of this trade
             shall not infringe upon clearances required by equipment of other trades, especially code
             required clearances to electrical gear. Minor deviations from the drawings may be made
             to accomplish this, but changes of substantial magnitude shall not be made prior to
             written approval from the Owner’s Representative.




                                       FIRE SUPPRESSION
                                          21 00 00 - 16
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                         DECEMBER 17, 2012

1.31   SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS

       A.   Piping installation and restraint shall comply with the State Building Code for seismic
            protection and NFPA 13 requirements for “Protection of Piping Against Damage Where
            Subject to Earthquakes”.


1.32   WELDING QUALIFICATIONS

       A.   Piping shall be welded in accordance with qualified procedures using performance
            qualified welders and welding operators. Procedures and welders shall be qualified in
            accordance with ASME BPV IX. Welding procedures qualified by others, and welders
            and welding operators qualified by another employer may be accepted as permitted by
            ASME B31.1. The Owner’s Representative shall be notified 24 hours in advance of tests
            and the tests shall be performed at the work site if practicable. The welder or welding
            operator shall apply his assigned symbol near each weld he makes as a permanent
            record. Structural members shall be welded in accordance with Sections 05055 Welding,
            Structural.

       B.   A fire watchman with an approved fire extinguisher shall be posted at the site of the
            welding work, during that work, and for a minimum of 30 minutes after the work is
            completed, to see that sparks or drops of hot metal do not start fires.


1.33   ELECTRICAL WORK

       A.   All electrical apparatus and controls furnished and the installation thereof, as a part of the
            Fire Suppression work, equipment, and controls shall conform to applicable requirements
            under DIVISION 26—ELECTRICAL.


1.34   PROJECT CLOSEOUT

       A.   Construction Observations By The Engineer
            1.     The engineer is contracted to make one progress site visit during construction,
                   one substantial completion (punch list) site visit for determining substantial
                   completion and one Final inspection visit to determine if all work is complete.
            2.     Note that substantial completion for fire/life safety related systems is considered a
                   completed and tested system ready for occupancy with only minor cosmetic or
                   signage tasks remaining as punch list items. It is the responsibility of the General
                   Contractor and Contractor to sequence the completion of the work to allow for
                   sufficient time for inspections and closeout of fire/life safety systems prior to
                   request for the Engineer’s Construction Completion Certification.
            3.     The Contractor and the General Contractor are required to inspect their own work
                   and make any corrections to the work to comply with the specifications and the
                   contract documents. It is not the responsibility of the engineer to develop lists of
                   incomplete work items.

       B.   Progress Site Visits
            1.     The purpose of the progress site visit by the engineer is to observe if the work is
                   proceeding in accordance with the contract documents.




                                      FIRE SUPPRESSION
                                         21 00 00 - 17
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                        DECEMBER 17, 2012

            2.      The engineer will prepare a field report which will note in general the work
                    completed since the last observation visit, work found not to be in accordance
                    with the contract documents and work not corrected since the previous
                    observation visit.

      C.    Substantial Completion
            1.     When the Contractor considers the Work under this Section to be substantially
                   complete, the Contractor shall submit written notice, through the General
                   Contractor. A request for substantial completion inspection shall not be accepted
                   if the submittal review process is incomplete. The written request for substantial
                   completion inspection shall include:
                   a.        A statement that the work has been installed generally consistent with the
                             construction documents and all applicable codes, that systems have
                             been successfully tested and are operational, and systems are ready for
                             substantial completion inspection. The request shall include the project
                             address, permit number, date of construction documents including
                             amendments and shall be signed by the Contractor with date, company
                             name and license number indicated.
                   b.        An attachment with a detailed list of miscellaneous items remaining to be
                             completed or corrected and a schedule of when each remaining work
                             item will be completed.
            2.     The following shall be submitted and approved by the Engineer together with or
                   prior to the written request for substantial completion inspection:
                   a.        Testing reports (prepare a separate report for each system or floor zone):
                             1)       NFPA 13 – “Material & Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping”
                             2)       NFPA 14 – “Material & Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping”
                   b.        Record Drawings.
            3.     Should the engineer determine the list of remaining work does not constitute
                   substantial completion or that the necessary submittals are not complete the
                   engineer will notify the Architect and/or Owner and he will not make a substantial
                   completion site visit.
                   a.        The work under this Section falls under the definition of a Fire Protection
                             System per the State Building Code. As such, substantial completion is
                             considered to be a completed and tested system ready for occupancy
                             with only minor cosmetic or signage tasks remaining as punch list items.
                             It is necessary that the Work of this Section and other fire / life safety
                             systems be completed as priority. It is the responsibility of the General
                             Contractor and Contractor to sequence the completion of the work to
                             allow for sufficient time for inspections and closeout of fire/life safety
                             systems prior to request for the Engineer’s Construction Completion
                             Certification.
            4.     Should the Engineer, during the substantial completion visit, observe that the
                   Work is substantially complete, s/he will provide a written listing of the observed
                   deficiencies referred herein as the Punch List. The Punch List will provide for a
                   place for the Contractor and general Contractor to sign off and date each item
                   individually indicating that the observed deficiency item has been corrected.
            5.     Should the Engineer, during the substantial completion site visit, observe that the
                   Work is not substantially complete, s/he will provide, a written list of the major
                   deficiencies and a reason for the work not being considered substantially
                   complete.
            6.     The Contractor shall remedy all deficiencies listed in the punch list within the time
                   frame required by the contract. Systems shall be retested as necessary and
                   reports resubmitted for approval.



                                      FIRE SUPPRESSION
                                         21 00 00 - 18
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                         DECEMBER 17, 2012

      D.    Engineer’s Construction Completion Certification
            1.     Where required by the applicable code, the Engineers Construction Completion
                   Certification will be issued by RDK Engineers when all life safety and health
                   related issues are complete, all required functional tests are complete and all
                   reports are complete. The following is a minimum listing of the required systems
                   to be tested with reports generated indicating they are complete and ready for
                   use:
                   a.       Fire Protection Systems as defined by the State Building Code.
            2.     There shall be NO outstanding items identified on the punch list for scope within
                   any of these categories.

      E.    Final Completion
            1.      The following items shall be submitted prior to the written request for Engineer’s
                    Construction Completion Certification:
                    a.      Revised Substantial Completion items resubmitted in accordance with
                            the review process comments.
                    b.      Individual Signed and dated Punch List acknowledging completion of all
                            punch list items
                    c.      O&M manual including manufacturer’s equipment warranties and
                            Contractor’s installation workmanship warranty.
                    d.      Documented indication of training of the owner’s personnel in the
                            operation of the systems.
            2.      When the Contractor considers all of the punch list work items complete, the
                    Contractor shall submit written notice through the General Contractor that all
                    Punch List items are complete and resolved and the work is ready for final
                    inspection. The signature lines for completion of each punch list item shall be
                    signed by the Contractor indicating the work is complete and signed by the
                    General Contractor indicating s/he has inspected the work and found it to be
                    complete. Should the Engineer find the work to be finally complete and all Punch
                    List items are complete the Engineer will make a recommendation to the
                    Architect or Owner. If the Engineer has found the punch list work to be
                    incomplete during final inspection a written listing of the observed deficiencies will
                    be prepared by the Engineer.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1   PIPE, FITTINGS AND VALVES

      A.    Pipe, fittings and valves shall conform to the latest standards per relevant requirements of
            UL, FM, ANSI, ASTM, AWWA and NFPA.

      B.    Use system components rated for working pressure greater than they will be exposed to
            but not less than 175 psig.

      C.    All threaded piping and fittings shall conform to thread cuts listed in ANSI/ASME B1.20.1.

      D.    Welding methods shall comply with all the requirements listed in American Welding
            Society document D10.9 levels AR-3.




                                      FIRE SUPPRESSION
                                         21 00 00 - 19
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                       DECEMBER 17, 2012

      E.    Each length of pipe, each pipe fitting, material or device used in the respective system
            shall have cast, stamped or indelibly marked, the maker’s name or mark, weight and
            quality of the product when such marking is required by the approved standards to which
            it applies.

      F.    Fittings into which sprinklers, drop nipples or riser nipples are screwed shall be threaded
            type. Plain end fittings with mechanical couplings, fittings which use steel gripping
            devices to bite into the pipe and segmented welded fittings shall not be used.

      G.    Acceptable Manufacturers
            1.     Pipe & Fittings
                   a.      Allied Tube & Conduit Corp
                   b.      Bullmoose Tube Co
                   c.      Wheatland Tube Co
            2.     UL Listed Mechanical Grooved Fittings & Couplings and Hole-cut Fittings
                   a.      Tyco Building & Fire Products Ltd
                   b.      Victaulic Co
            3.     Threaded Fittings
                   a.      Anvil International LP
                   b.      Tyco Building & Fire Products Ltd
                   c.      Ward Manufacturing Inc
            4.     UL Listed Valves
                   a.      McWane, Inc; Kennedy Valve Div
                   b.      Mueller Co
                   c.      NIBCO Inc
                   d.      Stockham Valves & Fittings
                   e.      Tyco Building & Fire Products, Ltd
                   f.      Viking Corp

      H.    Pipe, fittings, couplings, valves and related products shall be in accordance with the
            following service schedules:




                                      FIRE SUPPRESSION
                                         21 00 00 - 20
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                                               DECEMBER 17, 2012
                                      BLACK CARBON STEEL SERVICE SCHEDULE
                                 Applications: Wet-pipe sprinkler, wet-pipe standpipe, and drain.
                                                         PIPE AND FITTINGS
                                       THICKNESS,
        ITEM            SIZE                                     MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
                                      WEIGHT or DUTY
                         1"            Schedule 40
        Pipe           1 1/4”-                                   ASTM A53 black carbon steel
                                      Schedule 10 or 40
                         10”
                                     <175 psi
      Threaded                                      125 lb
                                      (wwp)
      Fittings &       1"-10"                                    ASME B16.4 cast iron
      Couplings                      >175 psi
                                                    250 lb
                                      (wwp)
  Grooved
 Mechanical            1 1/4”-                                                                                    (2)
                                        250 psi (wwp)            UL 213, ductile iron body with rigid couplings
 Fittings and            10”
            (1)
 Couplings
   Welded
                        1"-4"           250 psi (wwp)            UL 213B forged steel
    Outlets
                                     <175 psi
      Flanges &                                     125 lb       ASME B16.1 cast iron or ASME B16.5 steel plain-face
                                      (wwp)
       Flanged         1"-10"
       Fittings                      >175 psi
                                                    250 lb       ASME B16.1 cast iron or ASME B16.5 steel raised-face
                                      (wwp)
                                                                VALVES
                                                             WEIGHT OR
        TYPE               USE              SIZE                                               SPECIFICATION
                                                               DUTY
                                                                                  UL 1091, bronze body w/ threaded ends,
                                            1"-2"            175 psi (wwp)
                                                                                  integral indicator and supervisory switch
      Butterfly          Isolation
                                                                                  UL 1091, ductile iron body w/ grooved ends
                                         2 1/2"-10"          300 psi (wwp)
                                                                                  integral indicator and supervisory switch
                                                         <175 psi                 UL 262, ductile iron body with flanged ends
                                                                    125 lb
                                                          (wwp)                   and pre-grooved rising stem
        Gate             Isolation         4"-10"
                                                         >175 psi                 UL 262, ductile iron body with flanged ends
                                                                    250 lb
                                                          (wwp)                   and pre-grooved rising stem
       Globe            Drain/Test          1"-2"             175 psi             Bronze body w/ threaded ends.
                                                                                  UL 312 bronze body swing type with threaded
                                            1"-2"               175 psi
                                                                                  ends
                         Reverse                                                  UL 312 cast or ductile iron body swing type
       Check               flow                                                   with grooved or flanged ends; main riser
                        prevention       2 1/2"-10"             250 psi           check valves shall include factory tapped
                                                                                  ½”NPT ports for inlet & outlet gauges and
                                                                                  2”NPT port for main drain.
                                                      BOLTING AND GASKETS
      TYPE                  BOLTS                                    NUTS                               GASKETS
                   ASTM 183, track head zinc
 Grooved                                                ASTM 183, zinc plated heat-        ASTM D2000, prelubricated Grade
                   plated heat-treated carbon
Mechanical                                                 treated carbon steel                     'E' EPDM
                             steel
                                                                                                           ASME B16.21, 1/8"
                                                        ASME B18.2.2 heavy series          Plain Face
                                                                                                          thick full face rubber
  Flanges           ASME B18.2.1, stud bolts            hex-nuts w/ ASME B18.22.1
                                                                                                           ASME B16.20, 1/8"
                                                              plain washers               Raised Face
                                                                                                           thick spiral wound

(1)    Hole-cut outlet fittings utilizing a clip-on strap shall not be used.
(2)    See Part 3 "Seismic Protection of Piping" for use of flexible couplings.




                                                        FIRE SUPPRESSION
                                                           21 00 00 - 21
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                                                 DECEMBER 17, 2012

                             GALVANIZED BLACK CARBON STEEL SERVICE SCHEDULE
                  Applications: Dry-pipe sprinkler, dry-pipe standpipe, preaction, and piping installed outdoors.
                                                          PIPE AND FITTINGS
                                        THICKNESS,
        ITEM             SIZE                                     MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
                                       WEIGHT or DUTY
                                                                  ASTM A53 black carbon steel with ASTM A123 hot-dipped
        Pipe             1"-10"           Schedule 40
                                                                  galvanized coating
                                      <175 psi
      Threaded                                       125 lb
                                       (wwp)                      ASME B16.4 cast iron with ASTM A123 hot-dipped
      Fittings &         1"-10"
                                      >175 psi                    galvanized coating
      Couplings                                      250 lb
                                       (wwp)
  Grooved
                                                                                                                   (2)
 Mechanical             2 1/2”-                                   UL 213, ductile iron body with rigid couplings         with ASTM
                                          250 psi (wwp)
 Fittings and             10”                                     A123 hot-dipped galvanized coating
             (1)
 Couplings
 Socket Weld
                        Not permitted.
    Fittings
                                      <175 psi                    ASME B16.1 cast iron or ASME B16.5 steel plain-face with
      Flanges &                                      125 lb
                                       (wwp)                      ASTM A123 hot-dipped galvanized coating
       Flanged           1"-10"
       Fittings                       >175 psi                    ASME B16.1 cast iron or ASME B16.5 steel raised-face with
                                                     250 lb
                                       (wwp)                      ASTM A123 hot-dipped galvanized coating
                                                                 VALVES
                                                              WEIGHT OR
        TYPE                USE             SIZE                                                SPECIFICATION
                                                                DUTY
                                                                                   UL 1091, bronze body w/ threaded ends,
                                             1"-2"            175 psi (wwp)
                                                                                   integral indicator and supervisory switch
      Butterfly           Isolation
                                                                                   UL 1091, ductile iron body w/ grooved ends
                                          2 1/2"-10"          300 psi (wwp)
                                                                                   integral indicator and supervisory switch
                                                          <175 psi                 UL 262, ductile iron body with flanged ends
                                                                     125 lb
                                                           (wwp)                   and pre-grooved rising stem
        Gate              Isolation         4"-10"
                                                          >175 psi                 UL 262, ductile iron body with flanged ends
                                                                     250 lb
                                                           (wwp)                   and pre-grooved rising stem
       Globe             Drain/Test          1"-2"             175 psi             Bronze body w/ threaded ends.
                                                                                   UL 312 bronze body swing type with threaded
                          Reverse            1"-2"               175 psi
                                                                                   ends
       Check                flow
                                                                                   UL 312 cast or ductile iron body swing type
                         prevention       2 1/2"-10"             250 psi
                                                                                   with grooved or flanged ends
                                                       BOLTING AND GASKETS
      TYPE                        BOLTS                              NUTS                                 GASKETS
                     ASTM 183, track head zinc
 Grooved                                                ASTM 183, zinc plated heat-         ASTM D2000, prelubricated Grade
                     plated heat-treated carbon
Mechanical                                                 treated carbon steel                      'E' EPDM
                               steel
                                                                                                             ASME B16.21, 1/8"
                                                        ASME B18.2.2 heavy series            Plain Face
                                                                                                            thick full face rubber
  Flanges             ASME B18.2.1, stud bolts          hex-nuts w/ ASME B18.22.1
                                                                                                             ASME B16.20, 1/8"
                                                              plain washers                 Raised Face
                                                                                                             thick spiral wound

(1)    Hole-cut outlet fittings utilizing a clip-on strap shall not be used.
(2)    See Part 3 " Seismic Protection of Piping” for use of flexible couplings.




                                                        FIRE SUPPRESSION
                                                           21 00 00 - 22
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                       DECEMBER 17, 2012



2.2   FIRE DEPARTMENT VALVE CABINET


      Equipment Tag                   FDVC-1


      Description                     Furnish and install where indicated on drawings a Potter Raemer
                                      Model FR18, semi recessed fire department valve cabinet.
                                      Cabinet shall consist of a steel tub, steel door with full panel
                                      glass, and steel trim with white enamel finish interior and prime
                                      coated exterior.

      Size                            18” x 18” x 8” minimum inside dimensions. Cabinet shall be large
                                      enough and oriented such that a standard 2 ½” fire department
                                      valve with reducer, cap, and chain (specified herein) can be
                                      installed and operated to the satisfaction of the AHJ.

      Trim Required                   Semi-recessed trim to be coordinated with architectural plans and
                                      specifications.
      Certification/Approvals
                                      Accepted by the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction.
      Guarantee
                                      See Division 1
      Valves And
      Accessories Located             Include the following in each cabinet:
      At Cabinet Interior             One (1) Fire Department Hose Valve


2.3   FIRE HOSE VALVES

      A.      UL 668, 300-psi rated, cast brass angle-pattern body, 2½” NHS outlet, threads compatible
              with local fire department apparatus; include 2½” X 1½” reducer with lugged cap and
              chain.

      B.      Finish: Chrome

      C.      Acceptable Manufacturers: Elkhart Brass Manufacturing Co; Fire-End & Croker Corp;
              Smith Industries Inc., Potter Roemer Div


2.4   SPRINKLERS

      A.      General, unless otherwise noted: UL 199, 175-psi rated, ½” NPT, K=5.6, quick response
              frangible bulb, 155°F, standard spray pattern; pendent, upright, sidewall frame style as
              shown on drawings or appropriate to application.

      B.      General Applications:
              1.     Pendent, concealed, white cover-plate; in public areas with gypsum ceilings.
              2.     Pendent, concealed, white cover-plate; in public areas with ACT ceilings.
              3.     Pendent, concealed, black cover-plate; in public areas with wood ceilings.



                                       FIRE SUPPRESSION
                                          21 00 00 - 23
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                       DECEMBER 17, 2012

            4.      Upright, brass finished; non-public areas exposed to structure above.
            5.      Dry pendant, concealed, white cover-plate; in vestibules.

      C.    Temperature rating: 200°F-212°F for applications similar to skylights, unconditioned attics
            and close proximity to heat generating equipment such as unit heaters and steam
            equipment.

      D.    Cages: Protective guards listed for use with sprinkler.

      E.    Acceptable Manufacturers: Reliable Sprinkler Co; Tyco Building & Fire Products Ltd;
            Victaulic Co; Viking Corp

      F.    Spare Sprinklers and Cabinet
            1.     Cabinet size and number of each type of spare sprinkler shall be in accordance
                   with NFPA 13.
            2.     Cabinet shall be dust tight and red in color, enameled finish with outside of the
                   cabinet door painted on it in legible and clear lettering "Automatic Sprinklers -
                   Reserve Supply" with shelves for storing the spare sprinklers in an orderly
                   manner and subdivided to segregate the sprinklers of each type of sprinkler.
                   Cabinet shall have proper arrangements for hanging wrenches.
            3.     Upright, brass; unfinished, non public areas exposed to structure above.


2.5   HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

      A.    Hangers: UL 203, ferrous metal; band hanger type for NPS up to 4”; clevis hanger type for
            6” and larger.

      B.    Attachments: UL 203, beam clamp, concrete insert, post-installed concrete anchor or
            wood-lag-screw. See Part 3 “Pipe & Equipment Support” for restrictions.

      C.    Floor Support: Adjustable pipe support complete with pipe standard and flange, anchored
            to floor.

      D.    Hangers, rods, clamps, nuts, washers and shields shall be electro-galvanized coated
            steel.

      E.    Acceptable Manufacturers: AFCON Inc; Carpenter & Patterson Inc; Cooper B-Line Inc;
            Erico Inc; PHD Manufacturing Inc; Tolco – Div of Nibco Inc


2.6   SEISMIC RESTRAINTS

      A.    UL 203A, ferrous lateral and longitudinal assemblies utilizing beam clamp attachments
            and rigid restraint members.

      B.    Acceptable Manufacturers: AFCON Inc; Erico Inc; Tolco – Div of Nibco Inc




                                      FIRE SUPPRESSION
                                         21 00 00 - 24
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                         DECEMBER 17, 2012




PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1   EXISTING SYSTEM IMPAIRMENTS AND REMOVAL

      A.    Existing sprinkler or standpipe system removal or impairments shall be performed by
            sprinkler fitters licensed in good standing in the state that the work is performed.

      B.    Obtain permits and approvals for system impairments from building owner and authorities
            having jurisdiction.

      C.    Use owner and authority having jurisdiction impairment procedures and provide
            temporary equipment and connections to safeguard the work area maintain system
            function in areas outside of the scope of Work to the satisfaction of the owner and
            authority having jurisdiction.


3.2   GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

      A.    The installation shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of NFPA 13, NFPA
            14 and publications referenced therein.

      B.    Piping or other apparatus shall not be installed in such a manner so as to not interfere
            with the full swing of the doors and access to other equipment.

      C.    The arrangement, positions and connections of pipes, drains, valves, and the like,
            indicated on the drawings shall be followed as a basis of design, but the right is reserved
            by the Owner’s Representative to change locations and elevations to accommodate the
            work, where such work is installed prior to completing the submittal process or prior to
            obtaining permissions otherwise required.

      D.    All Fire Suppression service piping shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work to
            permit finished covering to be not less than 1" from other work.

      E.    Quiet Operation: All work provided under this Section shall operate under conditions of
            load without sound or vibration which is abnormally objectionable for such equipment in
            the opinion of the Owner’s Representative. In case of moving machinery, sound or
            vibration noticeable outside of the room in which it is installed, or annoyingly noticeable
            inside its own room will be considered objectionable shall be corrected in an approved
            manner by this Contractor at no additional cost.

      F.    Install gauges at the inlet & outlet of backflow preventers, riser valves, regulating valves,
            at zone control assemblies and top of each riser. Gauges shall be controlled by a valve
            with arrangements for drainage. An outlet, at least ¼" size, plugged for the installation of
            the inspector's gauge shall be located between each valve and gauge.

      G.    Locate spare sprinkler cabinets adjacent to each main system riser; securely attach
            cabinets to masonry walls or wall studs.



                                      FIRE SUPPRESSION
                                         21 00 00 - 25
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                       DECEMBER 17, 2012

3.3   SEISMIC PROTECTION OF PIPING

      A.    The system piping shall be protected against damage from earthquakes. Seismic
            protection of the piping system shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 13 and the
            State Building Code. Seismic protection shall include flexible couplings, sway bracing,
            seismic separation assemblies where piping crosses building seismic separation joints,
            and other features as required in NFPA 13 for protection of piping against damage from
            earthquakes.


3.4   PIPE INSTALLATION

      A.    Applications: Unless otherwise noted, use products and materials listed under Part 2
            “Black Carbon Steel Service Schedule” for wet-pipe and drainage systems.

      B.    Pipe Joints:
            1.      Conform to NFPA 13, except as where more stringent requirements as specified
                    herein.
            2.      Do not use threaded or cut-groove joints with Schedule 10 pipe.
            3.      Not more than four threads shall show after threaded joints are made up. Ream
                    screwed pipe ends smooth before installation.
            4.      Welded joints will be permitted, only if welding operations are performed as
                    required by NFPA 13 at the Contractor's fabrication shop, not at the project
                    construction site.
            5.      Flanged joints shall be provided where indicated or required by NFPA 13.
            6.      Grooved pipe and fittings shall be prepared in accordance with the
                    manufacturer's latest published specification according to pipe material, wall
                    thickness and size. Grooved couplings and fittings shall be from the same
                    manufacturer.

      C.    Piping shall be run straight and bear evenly on hangers and supports.

      D.    Piping in Exposed Areas shall be installed so as not to diminish exit access widths,
            corridors or equipment access. Exposed horizontal piping, including drain piping, shall be
            installed to provide maximum headroom.

      E.    Piping in Finished Areas: in areas with suspended or dropped ceilings and in areas with
            concealed spaces above the ceiling, piping shall be concealed above ceilings. Piping
            shall be inspected, tested and approved before being concealed. Risers and similar
            vertical runs of piping in finished areas shall be concealed.

      F.    Reductions in pipe sizes shall be made with one-piece tapered reducing fittings.
            Bushings shall be used only as permitted by NPFA 13.


3.5   PIPE AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORT

      A.    All piping shall be supported from the building structure by means of approved hangers
            and supports, to maintain proper grading and pitching of lines, to prevent vibration and to
            secure piping in place, and shall be so arranged as to provide for expansion and
            contraction. All piping shall be independently supported from the building structure and
            not from the piping, ductwork, conduit or ceiling suspension systems of other systems.



                                      FIRE SUPPRESSION
                                         21 00 00 - 26
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                        DECEMBER 17, 2012

      B.    Provide and install hangers, threaded rods and structural attachments in accordance with
            NFPA 13 and Manufacturer's Standardization Society (MSS) Standard Practice Bulletins
            SP-58 & 69.

      C.    Support piping from structural steel beam or truss flanges with beam clamps. Use
            supplemental steel to span structural members as necessary.
            1.     Where attachment to structural steel is not possible, attachment to concrete slabs
                   or beams using inserts or post-installed anchors as restricted by NFPA 13 is
                   permissible.
            2.     Where attachment to structural steel is not possible, attachment to wood beams
                   using lag-screws as restricted by NFPA 13 is permissible.
            3.     Attachment to ceiling sheathing or metal roof deck shall not be permitted.

      D.    All supplementary steel including factory fabricated channels and associated accessories
            throughout both suspended and floor mounted shall be provided by this Contractor and
            shall be subject to the approval of the CM. See Part 1.

      E.    Remove all rust from the ferrous galvanized hanger equipment (hangers and rods) and
            apply one coat of galvanized paint immediately after erection.

      F.    Wire, tape or wood fastenings for shims or support shall not be used.

      G.    Installation of hangers which permit wide lateral motion of any pipe will not be acceptable.

      H.    Hangers shall be located so that their removal is not required to service, assemble or
            remove equipment.

      I.    Vertical hanger rods used to support piping from the structure or supplementary steel
            shall not exceed four feet in total length vertically.

      J.    Support of vertical pipe runs shall be by means of riser clamps with anchors (anchors with
            split ring type allowable up to 2" size only).

      K.    Supports shall be installed at each control valve, riser tee or elbow and where any
            unsupported section exceeds 4'-0" in length measured along piping centerline.

      L.    Friction clamps shall be installed at the base of the risers and at each floor (above or
            below floor slabs). Friction clamps installed above floor slabs shall not be supported from
            or rest on floor sleeves.

      M.    Use listed pipe stanchions anchored to floors with saddle or fitting for attachment to
            flanges when supporting equipment and pipe and laterals from floors.


3.6   PENETRATIONS

      A.    Pipe penetrations through walls or floors shall provided with pipe sleeves.

      B.    Sleeves in masonry or concrete construction shall be schedule 40 galvanized steel,
            ductile iron or cast iron pipe.




                                      FIRE SUPPRESSION
                                         21 00 00 - 27
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                       DECEMBER 17, 2012

      C.    Sleeves through non-masonry stud construction shall be 22 gauge galvanized sheet
            metal.

      D.    At walls, sleeves shall be flush with each wall surface.

      E.    At floors sleeves shall set 1" above the finished floor surface or as indicated on the
            Architectural Drawings.

      F.    The sleeved penetration shall provide required annular space clearance between the
            pipe and the sleeve per NFPA 13; 2” larger in nominal diameter for pipe 1” to 3 ½” and 4”
            larger in nominal diameter for pipe 4” and larger. Strict conformance with the clearance
            requirements of NFPA 13 shall be followed.

      G.    For penetrations through non-fire resistance rated construction, the annular space
            between the sleeve and the pipe shall be firmly packed with mineral wool insulation.

      H.    For penetrations through fire resistance rated construction the annular space between the
            sleeve and pipe will be protected with an elastomeric, latex, intumescent firestopping
            sealant. The depth of sealant, penetrating pipe type and diameter, sleeve and mineral
            wool/backer rod assembly shall represent a listed through penetration firestop system
            tested in accordance with UL 1479 appropriate to the type and fire resistance rating of the
            construction penetrated.

      I.    Field cutting of beams or other structural members for passage of pipes or for
            pipe-hanger fastenings shall not be permitted.

      J.    Inserts required for work under this Section shall be set in the formwork before the
            concrete in poured.

      K.    Metal escutcheons shall be provided for pipe penetration of ceilings and walls.
            Escutcheons shall be securely fastened to the pipe at surfaces through which piping
            passes and shall fit snugly around the bare or insulated pipe.


3.7   DRAIN INSTALLATION

      A.    Locating drain risers, main riser drains, test connections, auxiliary drains and their
            discharge is the responsibility of the Contractor. Show drainage system on shop drawings
            for approval.

      B.    Drain risers, system riser main drain piping and other equipment drains shall be piped to
            discharge at a safe location outside the building or at an approved drain receptacle if
            outside discharge is not possible. Drain discharge to exterior shall terminate at a
            galvanized, 45 degreed flanged elbow to splash block provided under this Section of the
            Work.

      C.    The system, in general, shall be installed to drain back to main drains and drain risers
            without the use of auxiliary drains. Auxiliary drains shall be provided as required by NFPA
            13 except that drain valves shall be used where drain plugs are otherwise permitted.

      D.    Inspector's Test Connection: unless otherwise indicated, test connection shall consist of
            1" pipe connected to the remote branch line; a test valve located approximately 7' above



                                      FIRE SUPPRESSION
                                         21 00 00 - 28
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                         DECEMBER 17, 2012

            the floor; a smooth bore brass outlet equivalent to the smallest orifice sprinkler used in the
            system; and a painted metal identification sign affixed to the valve with the words
            "Inspector's Test." The discharge orifice shall be located outside the building wall directed
            so as not to cause damage to adjacent construction or landscaping during full flow
            discharge.


3.8   FIRE HOSE VALVE INSTALLATION

      A.    Install hose valves approximately 48” above finish floor, measured from valve handle
            centerline.

      B.    Install angle-pattern valves with outlets oriented down towards the floor.

      C.    Coordinate in advance the location of standpipes, cabinets, and fire hose valves to limit
            projections into the clear width of stairs, corridors and similar to that which is allowed by
            the State Building Code and applicable accessibility requirements.


3.9   SPRINKLER INSTALLATION

      A.    Install sprinklers in accordance with architectural reflected ceiling plans, with sprinklers
            centered in ceiling tiles and in-line with adjacent ceiling fixtures and equipment.

      B.    Determining the requirement for additional sprinklers required beneath obstructions (such
            as but not limited to ductwork, pipes, stairs, catwalks, etc.) that obstruct primary sprinkler
            discharge pattern (as defined by NFPA 13) is the responsibility of the Contractor and part
            of the base scope of Work. Show additional sprinklers required on Shop Drawings for
            approval.

      C.    Provide and install shields above exposed electrical equipment to prevent water
            discharge into and onto the electrical equipment.

      D.    Provide protective guards/cages for sprinklers subject to mechanical damage. At a
            minimum guards/cages shall be provided for pendent and upright sprinklers located in the
            following locations: electrical rooms and closets, near ceiling mounted equipment
            requiring maintenance, beneath obstructions such as ductwork or catwalks, walk-in
            freezers or cold rooms and stair landings.

      E.    Wet pendent sprinklers shall be connected to piping in accordance with NFPA detail
            "Return Bend" connection, to prevent the collection of piping corrosion, scale and
            sediment in the sprinkler.

      F.    Drop nipples to pendent sprinklers shall consist of minimum 1" pipe with a reducing
            coupling into which the sprinkler shall be threaded. Provide hangers at return bends that
            offset more than 12”.

      G.    Riser nipples or "sprigs" to upright sprinklers shall contain no fittings between the branch
            line tee and the reducing coupling at the sprinkler. Riser nipples exceeding 30" in length
            shall be individually supported.




                                      FIRE SUPPRESSION
                                         21 00 00 - 29
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                          DECEMBER 17, 2012

       H.    Where sprinklers are installed below suspended or dropped ceilings, drop nipples shall be
             cut such that sprinkler ceiling plates or escutcheons are of a uniform depth throughout the
             finished space.


3.10   IDENTIFICATION

       A.    In addition to standardized facility identification requirements elsewhere required by this or
             other Sections, system equipment, valves and piping shall be provided with signage and
             identification indicating function as required by NFPA and authorities having jurisdiction.

       B.    Signs and placards shall be durable metal compliant with content, size and lettering
             requirements of NFPA 13 and be attached to equipment via daisy-chain, locking tie-wraps
             or similar.

       C.    Hydraulic design data nameplates shall be provided at each system riser valve installed
             as part of the Work.

       D.    Signage indicating function and system controlled shall be provided at each control valve
             installed as part of the Work.

       E.    Signage indicating function and system tested/drained shall be provided at each test/drain
             valve or auxiliary drain valve installed as part of the Work.

       F.    Provide signage as directed by the authority having jurisdiction and otherwise appropriate
             to field conditions.


3.11   STANDARDIZED FACILITY IDENTIFICATION

       A.    Comply with “Identification” requirements of Section 23 00 00 “HVAC” with regards to
             valve tags, equipment placards, bar-code markers, pipe markers, charts and similar.


3.12   CLEANING AND FLUSHING

       A.    Piping shall be flushed in accordance with NFPA 13. Flushing operations shall continue
             until water is clear, but not less than 10 minutes.

       B.    At the completion of the work, all parts of the installation shall be thoroughly cleaned. All
             equipment, pipe, valves and fittings shall be cleaned of grease, metal cuttings and sludge
             which may have accumulated by operation of the system for testing.

       C.    Any stoppage or discoloration or other damage to parts of the building, its finish, or
             furnishings, due to this Contractor's failure to properly clean the piping system shall be
             repaired by this Contractor at no additional cost to the Authority.

       D.    All items of equipment shall be thoroughly inspected and any items dented, scratched or
             otherwise damaged in any manner shall be replaced or repaired and painted to match the
             original finish. All items so repaired and refinished shall be brought to the attention of the
             Owner’s Representative for inspection and approval.




                                       FIRE SUPPRESSION
                                          21 00 00 - 30
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                            DECEMBER 17, 2012

       E.    Remove, or coordinate the removal of, tape or similar from sprinklers used to protect from
             painting. Replace sprinklers with any amount of field applied paint or tape residue on the
             operating element, deflector or frame.

       F.    Remove protective shipping caps or brackets from sprinklers and install all escutcheons
             and cover-plates.


3.13   FIELD QUALITY CONTROL & TESTING

       A.    All labor, materials, instruments, devices and power required for testing shall be provided
             by this Contractor. The tests shall be performed in the presence and to the satisfaction of
             the Owner’s Representative and such other parties as may have legal jurisdiction. No
             piping in any location shall be closed up, furred in, or covered before testing.

       B.    Testing shall be performed in accordance with the acceptance requirements of the
             applicable NFPA standard.

       C.    Testing results shall be documented using the Contractor’s Test & Material Certificate of
             the applicable NFPA standard. See Part 1 “Project Closeout” for submittal requirements.

       D.    Where portions of piping systems are to be covered or concealed before completion of
             the project, those portions shall be tested separately in the manner specified herein for
             the respective entire system.

       E.    Any piping or equipment that has been left unprotected and subject to mechanical or
             other injury in the opinion of the Owner’s Representative shall be retested in part or in
             whole as directed.

       F.    Should the work not meet testing acceptance criteria, repair, or if directed, replace any
             defective work with new work without extra charge to the Contract. Repeat tests as
             directed, until the work is proven to meet the requirements specified herein.

       G.    Restore to its finished condition any work, damaged or disturbed, provided by other
             Contractors and engage the original Contractor to do the work of restoration to the
             damaged or disturbed work.

       H.    Caulking of screwed joints or holes in piping will not be acceptable.

       I.    Notify the Owner’s Representative and any inspectors having jurisdiction, a minimum of
             48 hours in advance of making any required tests so that arrangements may be made for
             their presence to witness his scheduled tests.


3.14   WET PIPE SYSTEM TESTS

       A.    Hydrostatically test system piping at 225 psi for a period of two (2) hours. For
             modifications to existing systems where modifications cannot be isolated from the existing
             system, hydrostatic test shall be at normal working pressure. Gauge reading shall not
             drop over test duration.

       B.    Perform main drain flow test; document gauge readings.



                                       FIRE SUPPRESSION
                                          21 00 00 - 31
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                      DECEMBER 17, 2012

       C.   Coordinate with fire alarm system testing; functionally operate each valve tamper switch,
            service low-pressure switch, and water flow switch to confirm correct operation and
            supervision by the fire alarm system.


3.15   STANDIPE SYSTEM TESTS

       A.   Confirm hose threads are compatible with local fire department equipment by threading
            coupling samples onto each thread.

       B.   Hydrostatically test system piping at 225 psi for a period of two (2) hours. Gauge reading
            shall not drop over test duration.


3.16   INSTRUCTING OPERATING PERSONNEL

       A.   Upon completion of the work and at a time designated by the Owner’s Representative, the
            Contractor shall provide, for a period of not less than one 8-hour working day, the
            services of experienced technicians regularly employed by the manufacturer to instruct
            operating personnel in the proper operation, inspection, testing, and maintenance of the
            equipment. Manufacturer's representatives who were present during the final tests shall
            be present and shall conduct or assist in the instruction.


3.17   SPECIAL TOOLS

       A.   Provide any and all special tools, recommended by the manufacturer of items furnished,
            noted as not being commonly available.


                                       END OF SECTION




                                     FIRE SUPPRESSION
                                        21 00 00 - 32
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                                                                 DECEMBER 17, 2012

                                                           TABLE OF CONTENTS


SECTION 22 00 00 – PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.1      GENERAL PROVISIONS ................................................................................................................. 1
  1.2      SCOPE OF WORK .......................................................................................................................... 1
  1.3      RELATED WORK ............................................................................................................................ 2
  1.4      DEFINITIONS .................................................................................................................................. 2
  1.5      CODES, REFERENCES AND PERMITS ........................................................................................ 2
  1.6      GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................................................... 3
  1.7      MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS ................................................................................. 3
  1.8      SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................................................... 4
  1.9      RECORD DRAWINGS ..................................................................................................................... 7
  1.10 WARRANTIES ................................................................................................................................. 7
  1.11 COORDINATION ............................................................................................................................. 8
  1.12 COORDINATION DRAWINGS ........................................................................................................ 9
  1.13 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................... 10
  1.14 INSPECTION OF SITE CONDITIONS .......................................................................................... 10
  1.15 SURVEY AND MEASUREMENTS................................................................................................. 10
  1.16 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING ...................................................................................... 11
  1.17 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY ................................................................................ 11
  1.18 SUPERVISION ............................................................................................................................... 11
  1.19 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .............................................................................................................. 11
  1.20 SCHEDULE .................................................................................................................................... 11
  1.21 HOISTING, SCAFFOLDING AND PLANKING .............................................................................. 12
  1.22 CUTTING AND PATCHING ........................................................................................................... 12
  1.23 SLEEVES, INSERTS AND ANCHOR BOLTS ............................................................................... 12
  1.24 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ........................................................................................................... 13
  1.25 ACCESSIBILITY............................................................................................................................. 13
  1.26 ELECTRICAL WORK ..................................................................................................................... 13
  1.27 PROJECT CLOSEOUT .................................................................................................................. 13
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................................ 16
  2.1      PIPE, FITTINGS AND JOINTS - GENERAL .................................................................................. 16
  2.2      SANITARY WASTE, INDIRECT WASTE, ROOF DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING ..................... 16
  2.3      DOMESTIC WATER PIPING ......................................................................................................... 17
  2.4      GAS PIPING................................................................................................................................... 17
  2.5      INSULATION .................................................................................................................................. 17


                                                                    PLUMBING
                                                                    22 00 00 - I
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                                                                   DECEMBER 17, 2012

  2.6      PIPING, EQUIPMENT AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION ................................................................. 18
  2.7      VALVES (DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM) ..................................................................................... 18
  2.8      VALVES (NATURAL GAS)............................................................................................................. 18
  2.9      CLEANOUTS ................................................................................................................................. 18
PART 3 - EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................... 18
  3.1      DEMOLITION ................................................................................................................................. 18
  3.2      IDENTIFICATION........................................................................................................................... 19
  3.3      TESTING ........................................................................................................................................ 21
  3.4      DISINFECTION, CLEANING AND ADJUSTING ........................................................................... 22
  3.5      SPECIAL TOOLS ........................................................................................................................... 23
  3.6      CERTIFICATES OF APPROVAL ................................................................................................... 23
  3.7      QUIET OPERATION ...................................................................................................................... 24
  3.8      SYSTEMS ...................................................................................................................................... 24
  3.9      PATCHING, REPLACEMENT AND MODIFICATION OF EXISTING WORK ............................... 25
  3.10 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................. 25




                                                                     PLUMBING
                                                                     22 00 00 - II
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                         DECEMBER 17, 2012



SECTION 22 00 00 – PLUMBING



PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1   GENERAL PROVISIONS

      A.    The GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, DIVISION 1, and BIDDING AND CONTRACT
            REQUIREMENTS, DIVISION 0, are hereby made a part of this Specification Section.

      B.    Examine all Drawings and all Sections of the Specifications and requirements and
            provisions affecting the work of this Section.


1.2   SCOPE OF WORK

      A.    This project includes the partial renovation of approximately 20,000 SF of
            bar/lounge/service space with minimal expansion. Selective demolition of existing natural
            gas systems, domestic water, reclaim water, sanitary waste and vent systems, including
            removal of all floor drains, sink and plumbing fixtures shall be required. Insulation and
            pipe labels shall be installed on all new piping and existing piping affected by this project.

      B.    The building is to be commissioned and Contractor shall provide all labor required to fully
            test and demonstrate that all systems operate as designed.

      C.    The work under this Section shall include the furnishing of all materials, labor, equipment
            and supplies and the performance of all operations to provide complete working systems,
            in general, to include the following items:
            1.      Piping - General
            2.      Waste and Vent Piping
            3.      Indirect Waste Piping
            4.      Demolition As Indicated On Plans
            5.      Hot and Cold Water Piping
            6.      Hot Water Recirculation Piping
            7.      Reclaim Water Piping
            8.      Unions and Flanges
            9.      Pipe Joint Materials
            10.     Hangers, Inserts and Supports
            11.     Valves
            12.     Cleanouts
            13.     Insulation
            14.     Access Panels
            15.     Cleaning and Testing
            16.     Shop Drawings
            17.     Record (As-Built) Drawings
            18.     Natural Gas Piping

      D.    Work of this Section is generally shown on the Plumbing Drawings.




                                            PLUMBING
                                            22 00 00 - 1
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                         DECEMBER 17, 2012

1.3   RELATED WORK

      A.    Principal classes of Work related to the Work of this Section are listed in the Specification
            Table of Contents, and are specified to be performed under the indicated Sections of the
            Specifications. Refer to the indicated Sections for description of the extent and nature of
            the indicated Work, and for coordination with related trades. This listing may not include
            all related Work items. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate and schedule
            the Work of this Section with that of all other trades.

      B.    The following work is not included in this Section and will be provided under other
            Sections:
            1.      Painting, except as specified herein.
            2.      Electrical power wiring for all equipment.
            3.      Temporary light, power, water, heat, gas and sanitary facilities for use during
                    construction and testing. Refer to Division 1, General Conditions.


1.4   DEFINITIONS

      A.    As used in this Section, the following items are understood to have the following meaning:
            1.     “Contractor”, unless otherwise qualified, shall mean the installer of the work
                   specified under this Section.
            2.     “Furnish” shall mean purchase and deliver to the project site, complete with
                   every necessary appurtenance.
            3.     “Install” shall mean unload at the delivery point at the site and perform all work
                   necessary to establish secure mounting and proper operation at the proper
                   location in the project.
            4.     “Provide” shall mean "Furnish" and "Install".
            5.     “Work” shall mean all labor, materials, equipment, apparatus, controls,
                   accessories and all other items required for a proper and complete installation.
            6.     “Concealed” shall mean hidden from sight in chases, furred-in spaces, shafts,
                   hung ceilings, embedded in construction or in a crawl space. Areas to be
                   concealed as part of tenant alterations to the building shall also be considered in
                   this definition.
            7.     “Exposed” shall mean not installed underground or concealed as defined above.
            8.     “Furnished by others” shall mean materials or equipment purchased under
                   other sections of the general contract and installed by this section of the
                   specifications by this trade Contractor.
            9.     “Owners Representative” shall be the party responsible to make decisions
                   regarding all contractual obligations in reference to the Scope of Work for the
                   Owner.
            10.    “Date of Substantial Completion” shall indicate the date where the work has
                   been formally accepted as evidenced by completed final punch list or where the
                   work has reached the stage that the owner obtains beneficial use and
                   commences utilization of the installed systems for business or occupancy
                   purposes. The GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, DIVISION 1, shall supercede this
                   definition where specifically defined.
            11.    “Piping” shall mean, in addition to pipe or tubing, all fittings, flanges, unions,
                   valves, strainers, drains, hangers and other accessories relative to such piping.


1.5   CODES, REFERENCES AND PERMITS

      A.    Materials, installation of systems and equipment provided under this section shall be done
            in strict accordance with Massachusetts Department of Public Safety Codes,
            Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection, Massachusetts State Building

                                           PLUMBING
                                           22 00 00 - 2
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                         DECEMBER 17, 2012

            Code 780 CMR and any other Codes and Regulations having jurisdiction including but not
            limited to:
            1.       Massachusetts State Plumbing Code (248 CMR 10.00)
            2.       Massachusetts Fuel Gas Code (248 CMR 3.00, 4.00, 5.00 and 7.00)
            3.       State and Local Building Codes
            4.       All applicable NFPA Standards
            5.       Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
            6.       Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc (UL)

      B.    Unless otherwise specified or indicated, materials, workmanship and equipment
            performance shall conform with the latest governing edition of the following standards,
            codes, specifications, requirements, and regulations, except when more rigid
            requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes but not limited to:
            1.      American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
            2.      American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
            3.      American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM)
            4.      American Water Works Association (AWWA)
            5.      Factory Mutual System (FM)
            6.      Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)
            7.      Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI)
            8.      Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI)
            9.      National Association of Plumbing-Heating Cooling Contractors (NAPHCC)
            10.     National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA)
            11.     National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
            12.     National Sanitation Foundation (NSF)
            13.     Plastic Pipe and Fittings Associations (PPFA)

      C.    Codes, laws and standards provide a basis for the minimum installation criteria
            acceptable. The drawings and specifications illustrate the scope required for this project,
            which may exceed minimum codes, laws and standards.

      D.    Give all notices, file all plans, obtain all permits and licenses, and obtain all necessary
            approvals from authorities having jurisdiction. Deliver all certificates of inspection to the
            authorities having jurisdiction. No work shall be covered before examination and approval
            by the Owner’s Representative, inspectors, and authorities having jurisdiction. Replace
            imperfect or condemned work to conform to requirements, satisfactory to Owner’s
            Representative, and without extra cost to the Owner. If work is covered before inspection
            and approval, this Contractor shall pay costs of uncovering and reinstalling the covering,
            whether it meets contract requirements or not.


1.6   GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

      A.    Nameplates
            1.    Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name,
                  address, type or style, model or serial number, and catalog number on a plate
                  secured to the equipment.


1.7   MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS

      A.    Where equipment or materials are specified with the name of a manufacturer, such
            specification shall be deemed to be used for the purpose of establishing a standard for
            that particular item. No equipment or material shall be used unless previously approved
            by the Owner’s Representative.


                                           PLUMBING
                                           22 00 00 - 3
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                         DECEMBER 17, 2012

      B.    Substitutions may be offered for review provided the material, equipment or process
            offered for consideration is equal in every respect to that indicated or specified. The
            request for each substitution must be accompanied by complete specifications together
            with drawings or samples to properly appraise the materials, equipment or process. The
            Contractor shall highlight and list all applicable specification requirements, which the
            substituted material deviates from.

      C.    If a substitution of materials or equipment in whole or in part is made, this Contractor shall
            bear the cost of any changes necessitated by any other trade as a result of said
            substitution.

      D.    All materials, equipment and accessories provided under this section shall be new and
            unused products of recognized manufacturers as approved.


1.8   SUBMITTALS

      A.    Conform to the requirements of Division 1, General Conditions, for schedule and form of
            all submittals unless specifically noted otherwise in this Section. Coordinate this submittal
            with submittals for all other finishes. Shop drawings and design layouts shall be prepared
            by licensed installing Contractors and shall note the name(s), license number(s) and
            license expiration dates(s) of the Contractor(s) installing the Plumbing work.

      B.    Definitions:
            1.       Shop Drawings are information prepared by the Contractor to illustrate portions of
                     the work in more detail than indicated in the Contract Documents.
            2.       Acceptable Manufacturers: The mechanical design for each product is based on
                     the single manufacturer listed in the schedule or shown on the drawings. In Part
                     2 of the specifications, certain Alternate Manufacturers are listed as being
                     acceptable. In addition, the MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS
                     paragraph potentially allows for substitutions as being acceptable. These are
                     acceptable only if, as a minimum, they:
                     a.      Meet all performance criteria listed in the schedules and outlined in the
                             specifications.
                     b.      Fit within the available space it was designed for, including space for
                             maintenance and component removal, with no modification to either the
                             space or the product. Clearances to walls, ceilings, and other equipment
                             will be at least equal to those shown on the design drawings. The fact
                             that a manufacturer’s name appears as acceptable shall not be taken to
                             mean the Engineer has determined that the manufacturer’s products will
                             fit within the available space – this determination is solely the
                             responsibility of the Contractor.
                     c.      Products must adhere to all architectural considerations including, but not
                             limited to; being of the same color as the product scheduled or specified
                             and fitting within the architectural enclosures and details.

      C.    Submittal Procedures, Format and Requirements
            1.     Review submittal packages for compliance with Contract Documents and then
                   submit to Owner’s Representative for review. Submit enough sets of shop
                   drawings such that, after review, two sets will be kept by the reviewer, with only
                   the remaining sets returned with reviewer’s marks and comments.
            2.     Each Shop Drawing shall indicate in title block, and each Product Data package
                   shall indicate on cover sheet, the following information:
                   a.       Title
                   b.       Equipment number
                   c.       Name and location of project

                                            PLUMBING
                                            22 00 00 - 4
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                        DECEMBER 17, 2012

                    d.      Names of Owner, Engineer and Seller
                    e.      Names of manufacturers, suppliers, vendors, etc.
                    f.      Date of submittal
                    g.      Whether original submittal or resubmitted
            3.      Shop Drawings showing manufacturer’s product data shall contain detailed
                    dimensional drawings (minimum ¼” = 1’ scale) including plans and sections
                    (where physical clearance could be an issue). Provide larger scale details as
                    necessary.
            4.      Submit accurate and complete description of materials of construction,
                    manufacturer’s published performance characteristics, sizes, weights, capacity
                    ratings (performance data, alone, is not acceptable), electrical requirements,
                    starting characteristics, wiring diagrams, and acoustical performance for
                    complete assemblies. Drawings shall clearly indicate location (terminal block or
                    wire number), voltage and function for all field terminations, and other information
                    necessary to demonstrate compliance with all requirements of Contract
                    Documents.
            5.      Provide Shop Drawings showing details of piping connections to all equipment. If
                    connection details are not submitted and connections are found to be installed
                    incorrectly, this Contractor shall reinstall them within the original contract price.
            6.      Provide complete data for all auxiliary services and utilities required by submitted
                    equipment.
            7.      Provide a complete description of all controls and instrumentation required
                    including electrical power connection drawing for all components and
                    interconnection wiring to starters, detailed information on starters, control
                    diagrams, termination diagrams, and all control interfaces with a central control
                    system.
            8.      Provide installation and erection information including; lifting requirements, and
                    any special rigging or installation requirements for all equipment.
            9.      The Owner’s Representative shall approve all materials before commitment for
                    materials is made.

      D.    Product Data: Submit complete manufacturer’s product description and technical
            information including:
            1.      Piping - General
            2.      Waste and Vent Piping
            3.      Hot and Cold Water Piping
            4.      Hot Water Recirculation Piping
            5.      Reclaim Water Piping
            6.      Pipe Joint Materials
            7.      Seismic Restraints
            8.      Valves
            9.      Cleanouts
            10.     Insulation
            11.     Access Panels
            12.     Identification, labels and tags, including database for all equipment & devices.
            13.     O&M table of contents
            14.     Natural Gas Piping

      E.    Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related
            systems, products and accessories in a single submittal.
            1.     Do not submit multiple product information in a single bound manual.
            2.     Three-ring binders shall not be accepted.

      F.    Deviations
            1.      Concerning deviations other than substitutions, proposed deviations from
                    Contract Documents shall be requested individually in writing whether deviations


                                           PLUMBING
                                           22 00 00 - 5
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                        DECEMBER 17, 2012

                    result from field conditions, standard shop practice, or other cause. Submit letter
                    with transmittal of Shop Drawings which flags the deviation to the attention of the
                    Owner’s Representative.
            2.      Without letters flagging the deviation to the Owner’s Representative, it is possible
                    that the Engineer may not notice such deviation or may not realize its
                    ramifications. Therefore, if such letters are not submitted to the Owner’s
                    Representative, the Seller shall hold the Engineers, his consultants and the
                    Owner harmless for any and all adverse consequences resulting from the
                    deviations being implemented. This shall apply regardless of whether the
                    Engineer has reviewed or approved shop drawings containing the deviation, and
                    will be strictly enforced.
            3.      Approval of proposed deviations, if any, will be made at discretion of Engineer.

      G.    Schedule: Incorporate shop drawing review period into construction schedule so that
            Work is not delayed. This Contractor shall assume full responsibility for delays caused by
            not incorporating the following shop drawing review time requirements into his project
            schedule. Allow at least 10 working days, exclusive of transmittal time, for review each
            time shop drawing is submitted or resubmitted with the exception that 20 working days,
            exclusive of transmittal time are required when more than five shop drawings of a single
            trade are received in one calendar week.

      H.    Responsibility
            1.    Intent of Submittal review is to check for capacity, rating, and certain construction
                  features. Plumbing Contractor shall ensure that work meets requirements of
                  Contract Documents regarding information that pertains to fabrication processes
                  or means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction; and
                  for coordination of work of this and other Sections. Work shall comply with
                  approved submittals to extent that they agree with Contract Documents.
                  Submittal review shall not diminish responsibility under this Contract for
                  dimensional coordination, quantities, installation, wiring, supports and access for
                  service, nor the shop drawing errors or deviations from requirements of Contract
                  Documents. The Engineer's noting of some errors while overlooking others will
                  not excuse the Plumbing Contractor from proceeding in error. Contract
                  Documents requirements are not limited, waived nor superseded in any way by
                  review.
            2.    Inform Contractors, manufacturers, suppliers, etc. of scope and limited nature of
                  review process and enforce compliance with contract documents.

      I.    In the event that the Plumbing Contractor fails to provide Shop Drawings for any of the
            products specified herein:
            1.      The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install all materials and equipment
                    herein specified in complete accordance with these Specifications.
            2.      If the Plumbing Contractor furnishes and installs material and/or equipment that is
                    not in complete accordance with these Specifications, he shall be responsible for
                    the removal of this material and/or equipment. He shall also be responsible for
                    the replacement of this material and/or equipment with material and/or equipment
                    that is in complete accordance with these Specifications, at the direction of the
                    Owner’s Representative.
            3.      Removal and replacement of materials and/or equipment that is not in complete
                    compliance with these Specifications shall be done at no extra cost to the Owner.
            4.      Removal and replacement of materials and/or equipment that is not in complete
                    compliance with these Specifications shall not be allowed as a basis for a claim of
                    delay of completion of the Work.

      J.    Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified.



                                           PLUMBING
                                           22 00 00 - 6
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                         DECEMBER 17, 2012

       K.   Submit Material Safety Data Sheets (MSD) on each applicable product with submittal.


1.9    RECORD DRAWINGS

       A.   Refer to DIVISION 1, General Conditions, for record drawings and procedures to be
            provided under this section, unless specifically noted otherwise in this section.

       B.   Record Drawings (red-line drawings) will be updated by this Contractor daily for review
            with the monthly requisition. The record drawing shall be an accurate depiction of the
            systems as completed, including dimensions (vertical/horizontal of concealed
            components off fixed building elements.

       C.   The Plumbing Foreman shall maintain complete and separate set of prints of Contract
            Drawings at job site at all times and shall record work completed and all changes from
            original Contract Drawings clearly and accurately including work installed as a
            modification or addition to the original design.

       D.   At completion of work the Plumbing Contractor shall prepare a complete set of record
            drawings on AutoCAD showing all systems as actually installed. The Architectural
            background AutoCAD files will be made available for the Contractor’s copying, at his
            expense, to serve as backgrounds for the drawings. The Plumbing Contractor shall
            transfer changes from field drawings onto AutoCAD drawings and submit copy of files and
            three sets of prints to Owner’s Representative for comments as to compliance with this
            section. CAD layering as established by the A&E design team shall be maintained with
            any and all changes done by the Contractor.

       E.   The Architect and Engineer are not granting to the Contractor any ownership or property
            interest in the CADD Drawings by the delivery of the CADD Disks to the Contractor. The
            Contractor’s rights to use the CADD disks and the CADD Drawings are limited to use for
            the sole purpose of assisting in the Contractor’s performance of its contractual obligations
            under its contract with respect to the Project. The Architect and Engineer are granting no
            further rights. Any reuse or other use by the Contractor will be at the Contractor’s sole risk
            and without liability to the Architect and Engineer. The Contractor hereby waives and
            releases any losses, claims, damages, liabilities of any nature whatsoever, and costs
            (including attorney fees) arising out of, resulting from, or otherwise related to the use of
            the CADD Disks and CADD Drawings by the Contractor. The Contractor, to the maximum
            extent permitted by law, hereby agrees to indemnify, defend and hold the Architect and
            Engineer harmless from all loses, claims, damages, liabilities, and costs (including
            attorney fees) arising out of, resulting from, or otherwise related to the use of the CADD
            Disks and CADD Drawings by the Contractor.

       F.   Record Drawings, shall show “as-built” condition of details, sections, riser diagrams,
            control changes and corrections to schedules. Schedules shall show actual manufacturer
            and model numbers of final equipment installation.

       G.   The Plumbing Contractor shall submit the record set for approval by the engineer a
            minimum of four weeks prior to seeking the permanent certificate of occupancy.


1.10   WARRANTIES

       A.   Submit manufacturer's standard replacement warranties for material and equipment
            furnished under this Section. Such warranties shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all
            liabilities which the manufacturer and the Contractor may have by law or by provisions of
            the Contract Documents.

                                            PLUMBING
                                            22 00 00 - 7
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                        DECEMBER 17, 2012

       B.   All materials, equipment and work furnished under this Section shall be guaranteed
            against all defects in materials and workmanship for a minimum period of one-year (1)
            commencing with the Date of Substantial Completion. Any failure due to defective
            material, equipment or workmanship which may develop, shall be corrected at no
            expense to the Owner including all damage to areas, materials and other systems
            resulting from such failures.

       C.   Guarantee that all elements of each system meet the specified performance requirements
            as set forth herein or as indicated on the Drawings.

       D.   Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of the failure of any part of the systems during the
            warranty period, the affected parts shall be replaced. Any equipment requiring excessive
            service shall be considered defective and shall be replaced.


1.11   COORDINATION

       A.   Refer to DIVISION 1, GENERAL CONDITIONS, for record drawings and procedures to
            be provided under this Section, unless specifically noted otherwise in this Section.

       B.   Materials and apparatus shall be installed as fast as conditions of the building will permit
            and must be installed promptly when and as required.

       C.   Confer with all other trades relative to location of all apparatus and equipment to be
            installed and select locations so as not to conflict with work of other Sections. Any
            conflicts shall be referred immediately to the Owner’s Representative for decision to
            prevent delay in installation of work. All work and materials placed in violation of this
            clause shall be readjusted to the Owner’s Representative's satisfaction at no expense to
            the Owner.

       D.   Where work of this section will be installed in close proximity to work of other sections or
            where there is evidence that the work of this section may interfere with work of other
            sections, assist in working out space conditions to make satisfactory adjustment. Prepare
            and submit for approval 3/8" scale or larger working drawings and sections, clearly
            showing how the work is to be installed in relation to the work of other sections. If the
            work of this section is installed before coordinating with other trades or so as to cause
            interference with work of other trades, make changes necessary to protect conditions
            without extra charge.

       E.   Keep fully informed as to the shape, size and position of all openings required for all
            apparatus, pipes, sleeves, etc., and give information in advance to allow construction of
            required openings. Furnish all sleeves, pockets, supports and incidentals, and coordinate
            with the General Contractor for the proper setting of same.

       F.   All distribution systems which require pitch or slope such as condensate drains and water
            piping shall have the right of way over those which do not. Confer with other trades as to
            the location of pipes, ducts, lights and apparatus and install work to avoid interferences.

       G.   Make reasonable modifications in the work as required by structural interferences,
            interference with work of other trades, or for proper execution of the work without extra
            charge.




                                           PLUMBING
                                           22 00 00 - 8
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                          DECEMBER 17, 2012

1.12   COORDINATION DRAWINGS

       A.   Provide a set of Plumbing coordination drawings for use in verifying required code
            clearances (as well as clearances for operation, repair, removal and testing) of all
            Plumbing equipment and for use in coordinating installation of equipment with other
            trades. Where practical, the CADD layering as established by the A&E team for the
            construction documents shall be utilized in the preparation of all coordination drawings.
            Where CADD layering deviates from the A&E team’s layering convention, submit the
            proposed layering system for approval. The CADD layering used shall provide, as a
            minimum, the flexibility of illustrating trade specific items similar to the established A&E
            team layering standard.
       B.   The intent of the coordination drawings is to identify and resolve installation conflicts prior
            to fabrication and installation of any MEP trade.

       C.   The HVAC Contractor’s coordination drawings shall be the basis for floor plan
            coordination. The Electrical Contractor’s reflected ceiling plans shall be the basis for
            ceiling coordination.

       D.   The CADD Drawings prepared by the Architect and Engineer contain representations of
            certain elements of the Project, and are not necessarily complete, nor are the CADD
            Drawings comparable or identical to final construction drawings. The Architect and
            Engineer make no representations or warranties with respect to the accuracy or
            completeness of the CADD Drawings. The Architect and Engineer do not recommend
            that the Contractor use the CADD Drawings in connection with the preparation of shop
            drawings. Should the Contractor choose to do so, however, the Contractor shall carefully
            review and compare the CADD Drawings with the corresponding final construction
            drawings to verify their accuracy and identify all discrepancies, differences, and
            inconsistencies in design, locations, dimensions, scope, and all other respects between
            the CADD Drawings and the corresponding final construction drawings. The Contractor,
            shall base the preparation and submission of shop drawings, and in general, shall base
            the performance of all its obligations with respect to the Project upon the information
            contained in the final construction drawings and not the CADD drawings. Nothing shall be
            construed as to relieve the Contractor of any of its obligations (such as, by way of
            illustration, the obligation to make field measurements or to coordinate drawings) under
            its contract with respect to the Project.

       E.   Plumbing Coordination Drawings
            1.      The Contractor shall prepare Coordination Drawings showing all Plumbing work
                    to be installed as part of Section 15400. The Coordination Drawings shall be
                    created using AutoCAD and shall have a scale not less than ⅜ inch for
                    Mechanical / Electrical Rooms and ¼ inch for all the areas.
            2.      The Plumbing Coordination Drawings shall show all piping, drains, equipment,
                    sleeves, inserts, fixtures and supports.
            3.      After incorporating all trades, resolve any areas of conflicts between trades under
                    the direction of the General Contractor / Construction Manager and submit fully
                    coordinated drawings to the Owner’s Representative.
            4.      Do not install any of this work prior to the preparation and Engineer’s review of
                    the final Coordination Drawings. If Plumbing work proceeds prior to the final
                    Coordination Drawings, any changes to the Plumbing work to correct the
                    interferences and conflicts which result will be made by this Contractor at no
                    additional cost to the Owner.
            5.      Coordination Drawings are for this Contractor's and Owner’s Representative's
                    use during construction and shall not be construed as replacing any shop, "as-
                    built", or Record Drawings required elsewhere in these Contract Documents.




                                            PLUMBING
                                            22 00 00 - 9
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                          DECEMBER 17, 2012

             6.      Owner’s Representative's review of Coordination Drawings shall not relieve this
                     Contractor from his overall responsibility for coordination of all work performed
                     pursuant to the Contract or from any other requirements of the Contract.


1.13   INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

       A.    It is the intention of the Specifications and Drawings to call for complete, finished work,
             tested and ready for continuous operation. Any apparatus, appliance, material or work
             not shown on the Drawings, but mentioned in the Specifications or vice-versa, or any
             incidental accessories necessary to make the work complete in all respects and ready for
             operation, even if not particularly specified, shall be provided by this Contractor without
             additional expense to the Owner.

       B.    The Drawings are generally diagrammatic. The locations of all items that are not
             definitely fixed by dimensions are approximate only. The exact locations must be
             determined at the project and shall have the approval of the Owner’s Representative
             before being installed. This Contractor shall follow Drawings, including his shop
             drawings, in laying out work and shall check the Drawings of other trades to verify spaces
             in which work will be installed. Maintain maximum headroom and space conditions.
             Where space conditions appear inadequate, notify the Owner’s Representative before
             proceeding with the installation. This Contractor shall, without extra charge, make
             reasonable modifications in the layout as needed to prevent conflict with work of other
             trades or for proper execution of the work.

       C.    Any requests for information (RFI) for resolving an apparent conflict or unclarity, or a
             request for additional detail, shall include a sketch or equivalent description of Contractors
             proposed solution.

       D.    Size of pipes and methods of running them are shown, but it is not intended to show every
             offset and fitting, nor every structural difficulty that may be encountered. To carry out the
             true intent and purpose of the Drawings, all necessary parts to make complete approved
             working systems ready for use, shall be furnished without extra charge. All work shall be
             installed in an approved workmanlike manner.


1.14   INSPECTION OF SITE CONDITIONS

       A.    Prior to submission of bid, visit the site and review the related construction documents to
             determine the conditions under which the Work has to be performed. The Plumbing
             Contractor shall report, in writing, to the Owner’s Representative, any conditions which
             might adversely affect his work.


1.15   SURVEY AND MEASUREMENTS

       A.    Base all required measurements, horizontal and vertical, from referenced points
             established WITH the Owner’s Representative and be responsible for correctly laying out
             the Work required under this Section of the Specification.

       B.    In the event of discrepancy between actual measurements and those indicated, notify the
             Owner’s Representative in writing and do not proceed with the related work until
             instructions have been issued.




                                             PLUMBING
                                            22 00 00 - 10
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                        DECEMBER 17, 2012

1.16   DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

       A.   No materials shall be delivered or stored on site until corresponding Shop Drawings have
            been approved.

       B.   All manufactured materials shall be delivered to the site in original packages or containers
            bearing the manufacturers labels and product identification.

       C.   Protect materials against dampness. Store off floors, under cover and adequately
            protected from damage.

       D.   Inspect all plumbing equipment and materials, upon receipt at the job site, for damage
            and conformance to approved shop drawings.


1.17   PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY

       A.   This Contractor shall be responsible for the care and protection of all work included under
            this Section until the completion and final acceptance of this Contract.

       B.   Protect all equipment and materials from damage from all causes including, but not
            limited to, fire, vandalism and theft. All materials and equipment damaged or stolen shall
            be repaired or replaced with equal material or equipment at no additional cost to the
            Owner.

       C.   Protect all equipment, outlets and openings with temporary plugs, caps and covers.
            Protect work and materials of other trades from damage that might be caused by work or
            workmen under this Section and make good damage thus caused.

       D.   Damaged materials are to be removed from the site; no site storage of damaged
            materials will be allowed.


1.18   SUPERVISION

       A.   Supply the service of a competent Supervisor with a minimum of 5 years experience in
            Plumbing Construction Supervision who shall be in charge of the Plumbing work at the
            site.


1.19   SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

       A.   Life safety and accident prevention shall be a primary consideration. Comply with all of
            the safety requirements of the owner and OSHA throughout the entire construction period
            of the project.

       B.   Furnish, place and maintain proper guards and any other necessary construction required
            to secure safety of life and/or property.


1.20   SCHEDULE

       A.   Construct work in sequence under provisions of Division 1 and as coordinated with the
            Owner’s Representative.



                                           PLUMBING
                                          22 00 00 - 11
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                          DECEMBER 17, 2012

1.21   HOISTING, SCAFFOLDING AND PLANKING

       A.   The work to be done under this Section of the Specifications shall include the furnishing,
            set-up and maintenance of all derricks, hoisting machinery, cranes, helicopters, scaffolds,
            staging and planking as required for the work.


1.22   CUTTING AND PATCHING

       A.   Provide all cutting and patching necessary for the proper installation of work to be
            performed under this Section.

       B.   All work shall be fully coordinated with all phases of construction, in order to minimize the
            requirements for cutting and patching.

       C.   Form all chases or openings for the installation of the work of this Section of the
            specifications, or cut the same in existing work and see that all sleeves or forms are in the
            work and properly set in ample time to prevent delays. Be responsible that all such
            chases, openings, and sleeves are located accurately and are of the proper size and
            shape and consult with the Owner’s Representative and all other trades concerned in
            reference to this work. Confine the cutting to the smallest extent possible consistent with
            the work to be done. In no case shall piers or structural members be cut without the
            approval of the Owner’s Representative.

       D.   Fit around, close up, repair, patch, and point around the work specified herein to match
            the existing adjacent surfaces and to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative.

       E.   Fill and patch all openings or holes left in the existing structures by the removal of existing
            equipment which is part of this Section of the Specifications.

       F.   All of this work shall be carefully done by workmen qualified to do such work and with the
            proper and smallest tools applicable.

       G.   Any cost caused by defective or ill-timed work required by this Section of the
            specifications shall be borne by this Contractor.

       H.   When, in order to accommodate the work required under this Section of the
            specifications, finished materials of other trades must be cut or fitted, furnish the
            necessary drawings and information to the trades whose materials must be cut or fitted.


1.23   SLEEVES, INSERTS AND ANCHOR BOLTS

       A.   Coordinate with other trades the location of and maintaining in proper positions, sleeves,
            inserts and anchor bolts to be supplied and/or set in place under this section of the
            specifications. In the event of incorrectly located preset sleeves, inserts and anchor bolts,
            etc., all required cutting and patching of finished work shall be done under this section of
            the specifications.

       B.   All pipes passing through floors, walls, ceilings or partitions removed as part of this
            project shall be provided with fire stopping to maintain the fire rating of the structure. All
            penetrations and associated fire stopping shall be installed in accordance with the fire
            stopping manufacturer’s listed installation details. Provide sleeves for all penetrations
            where required by the listed detail, for the penetration of all mechanical room floors and
            where specifically required on the drawings.


                                            PLUMBING
                                           22 00 00 - 12
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                           DECEMBER 17, 2012

       C.    Field drilling (core drilling), when required, shall be performed under this section of the
             specifications, after receipt of approval by the Owner’s Representative.
             1.       When coring can not be avoided, provide ¼ inch pilot hole prior to coring. When
                      coring through floor or slab, verify location of core on floor below and protect and
                      piping, ductwork, wiring, furniture, personnel, etc., below the location of the core.


1.24   HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

       A.    Dispose of all hazardous materials in accordance with Federal and State laws. All
             handling shall conform to EPA requirements. A uniform hazardous waste manifest shall
             be prepared for all disposals and returned with all applicable signoffs prior to application
             for final payment. Provide breakout cost for this scope.

       B.    Removed equipment or fluids containing any hazardous materials such as ethylene
             glycol, or oil shall be recycled by a licensed facility approved by the Owner’s
             Representative.

       C.    Where it has been identified that asbestos-containing material exists within the scope
             limits, refer to the Asbestos Abatement specification section for requirements. Where
             insulation is removed, provide new insulation (type and thickness as specified in this
             section). Where scope is not defined, provide unit prices with bid for all pipe and sizes
             involved.


1.25   ACCESSIBILITY

       A.    All work provided under this Section of the Specification shall be installed so that parts
             requiring periodic inspection, maintenance and repair are accessible. Work of this trade
             shall not infringe upon clearances required by equipment of other trades, especially code
             required clearances to electrical gear. Minor deviations from the drawings may be made
             to accomplish this, but changes of substantial magnitude shall not be made prior to
             written approval from the Owner’s Representative.


1.26   ELECTRICAL WORK

       A.    All electrical apparatus and controls furnished, and the installation thereof, as a part of the
             Plumbing work, equipment, and controls shall conform to applicable requirements under
             DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL.


1.27   PROJECT CLOSEOUT

       A.    Certificates Of Approval
             1.       Upon completion of all work, provide certificates of inspections from the following
                      equipment manufacturers stating that the authorized factory representatives have
                      inspected and tested the operation of their respective equipment and found the
                      equipment to be in satisfactory operating condition and installed per the
                      manufacturers installation instructions and requirements.

       B.    Construction Observations By The Engineer
             1.     The engineer is contracted to make one progress site visit during construction,
                    one substantial completion (punch list) site visit for determining substantial
                    completion and one Final site visit to determine if all work is complete.


                                             PLUMBING
                                            22 00 00 - 13
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                          DECEMBER 17, 2012

            2.      The Trade Contractors and the General Contractor are required to inspect their
                    own work and make any corrections to the work to comply with the specifications
                    and the contract documents. It is not the responsibility of the engineer to develop
                    lists of incomplete work items.
            3.      Progress Site Visits
                    a.         The purpose of the progress site visit by the engineer is to observe if the
                               work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents.
                    b.         The engineer will prepare a field report which will note in general the work
                               completed since the last observation visit, work found not to be in
                               accordance with the contract documents and work not corrected since
                               the previous observation visit.

      C.    Substantial Completion
            1.     When the Contractor considers the Work under this Section is substantially
                   complete, the Contractor shall submit written notice, through the General
                   Contractor, with a detailed list of items remaining to be completed or corrected
                   and a schedule of when each remaining work item will be completed. Should the
                   engineer determine the list of remaining work does not constitute substantial
                   completion the Engineer will notify the Architect and/or Owner and he will not
                   make a substantial completion site visit.
            2.     The following items shall be completed prior to the written request for substantial
                   completion site visit:
                   a.      Certification of successful operation of all systems.
                   b.      Training of the owner’s personnel in the operation of the systems.
                   c.      Record Drawings in accordance with the contract specifications.
                   d.      Operation and Maintenance manuals.
                   e.      Testing reports.
                   f.      Balancing reports.
                   g.      Manufacturers certificates of approvals.
                   h.      Emergency contact list for reporting of malfunctioning equipment during
                           the warrantee period.
                   i.      Contractors Project Completion certificate in accordance with the building
                           code requirements.
            3.     Should the Engineer, during the substantial completion visit, observe that the
                   Work is substantially complete, s/he will provide a written listing of the observed
                   deficiencies referred herein as the Punch List. The Punch List will provide for a
                   place for the Contractor and general Contractor to sign off and date each item
                   individually indicating that the observed deficiency item has been corrected.
            4.     Should the Engineer, during the substantial completion site visit, observe that the
                   Work is not substantially complete, s/he will provide, a written list of the major
                   deficiencies and a reason for the work not being considered substantially
                   complete.
            5.     The Contractor shall remedy all deficiencies listed in the punch list within the time
                   frame required by the contract.

      D.    Engineers Construction Completion Certification
            1.     Where required by the applicable code, the Engineers Construction Completion
                   Certification will be issued by RDK Engineers when all life safety and health
                   related issues are complete, all required functional tests are complete and all
                   reports are complete. The following is a minimum listing of the required systems
                   to be tested with reports generated indicating they are complete and ready for
                   use:
                   a.       Water Distribution and Supply Pressure Test
                   b.       Gas Distribution Pressure Test
                   c.       Drainage and Vent System Pressure Test
                   d.       Disinfection Reports


                                            PLUMBING
                                           22 00 00 - 14
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                         DECEMBER 17, 2012

            2.      There shall be NO outstanding items identified on the punch list for scope within
                    any of these categories.

      E.    Final Completion
            1.      The following items shall be submitted prior to the written request for Final
                    completion:
                    a.      Revised Substantial Completion items to be resubmitted in accordance
                            with the review process comments.
                    b.      Warranties commencing the date of Substantial completion
                    c.      Individual Signed and dated Punch List acknowledging completion of all
                            punch list items
            2.      When the Contractor considers all of the punch list work items complete, the
                    Contractor shall submit written notice through the General Contractor that all
                    Punch List items are complete and resolved and the work is ready for final
                    observation site visit. The signature lines for completion of each punch list item
                    shall be signed by the Contractor indicating the work is complete and signed by
                    the General Contractor indicating s/he has inspected the work and found it to be
                    complete. Should the Engineer find the work to be finally complete and all Punch
                    List items are complete the Engineer will make a recommendation to the
                    Architect or Owner. If the Engineer has found the punch list work to be
                    incomplete during final inspection a written listing of the observed deficiencies will
                    be prepared by the Engineer.

      F.    Contractor’s Project Completion Certificate
            1.     Upon completion of work and prior to request for Certificate of Occupancy, each
                   Trade Contractor and the General Contractor shall issue a certificate stating that
                   work has been installed generally consistent with construction documents and all
                   applicable codes. RDK Engineers can furnish a blank Contractor’s certificate form
                   upon request. The certificate shall certify:
                   a.       Execution of all work has been installed in accordance with the approved
                            construction documents.
                   b.       Execution and control of all methods of construction was in a safe and
                            satisfactory manner in accordance with all applicable local, state and
                            federal statutes and regulations.
            2.     The certificate shall include the following information:
                   a.       Project.
                   b.       Permit Number.
                   c.       Location.
                   d.       Construction Documents.
                   e.       Date on Plans and Specifications submitted for approval and issuance of
                            the Building Permit.
                   f.       Addendum(a) and Revision Dates.
            3.     The certificate shall be signed by the Contractor and include the following:
                   a.       Signature.
                   b.       Date.
                   c.       Company.
                   d.       License Number.
                   e.       License Expiration Date.




                                            PLUMBING
                                           22 00 00 - 15
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                             DECEMBER 17, 2012



PART 2 - PRODUCTS



2.1   PIPE, FITTINGS AND JOINTS - GENERAL

      A.    Materials and equipment shall be of the best quality manufactured, new, unused and free
            from all defects. Piping and fittings shall conform to the latest ANSI, ASTM, and NFPA
            and AWWA Standards including latest amendments and shall be in conformance with
            state and local plumbing codes, material standards.

      B.    Each length of pipe, each pipe fitting, trap, materials and/or device used in the respective
            system shall have cast, stamped or indelibly marked on it, the maker's name or mark,
            weight and quality of the product when such marking is required by the approved standard
            that applies.

      C.    Nipples
            1.      Close and shoulder nipples shall be of corresponding materials as specified for
                    the respective piping system and shall be extra heavy.

      D.    Joints
            1.         Joints, in cast iron piping above ground, shall be made using a code approved
                       mechanical compression type coupling consisting of a neoprene collar, stainless
                       steel coupling with stainless steel bolts and nuts all assembled to provide seal, or
                       shall be Hub and Spigot push-on compression type conforming to ASTM C564-
                       70.
            2.         Joints, in cast iron pipe above ground, shall be Hub and Spigot push-on
                       compression type conforming to ASTM C564-70.
            3.         Joints in copper tubing, except as otherwise specified herein shall be made
                       according to manufacturer's specifications using sweat fittings and 95-5
                       tin/antimony solder and non-corrosive flux.
            4.         Steel, copper and brass pipe and fittings with threaded ends shall have IPS
                       threads cut clean and true and in conformance with the ANSI Specifications B2-1
                       for taper threads.
            5.         Joints between steel or copper, and cast iron shall be made with Adapter Fittings
                       screwed or soldered onto the pipe and connected to or inserted into the cast iron
                       pipe hub.


2.2   SANITARY WASTE, INDIRECT WASTE, ROOF DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING

      A.    Service:           Above ground sanitary waste, vent pipe and fittings.
            Pipe Material:     Cast-iron hubless pipe (CISPI301), service weight cast-iron; hub and
                               spigot (ASTM-A-74); or DWV copper tube.

            Fitting Material: Cast-iron, cast brass or wrought copper drainage fittings.

            Pipe Joints:       Corrugated 304 stainless steel coupling with neoprene gasket, (3” wide w
                               / 4 bands for up to 4” pipe, 4” wide w / 6 bands for 6” to 10” pipe), resilient
                               gaskets (ASTM-C-564) or soldered using ASTM B-32, 95-5 tin-antimony

            Miscellaneous: Cast-iron pipe, 8-inches and larger shall have pipe clamps and rods at
                           each fitting.



                                              PLUMBING
                                             22 00 00 - 16
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                           DECEMBER 17, 2012

2.3   DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

      A.    Service:           Domestic hot and cold water, hot water return and reclaim water above
            ground.
            Pipe Material:     Type L hard drawn copper tubing – ASTM B88.

            Fitting Material: Cast brass or wrought copper solder joint fittings.

            Joints:            Solder joints, 95 / 5 tin-antimony solder (ASTM B-32) or brazed.



2.4   GAS PIPING

      A.    Service:           Natural gas and gas vent piping (2” and smaller).
            Pipe Material:     Schedule 40 Black Steel pipe.

            Fitting Material: Malleable iron threaded.

            Joints:            Screwed.

            Miscellaneous: All above ground exterior gas piping or piping located in a corrosive
                           atmosphere shall be protected by a coating of high density polyethylene
                           or a wrapping of an inert material.



2.5   INSULATION

      A.    General: The pipe covering specified herein for piping systems shall be provided in strict
            accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions, the best practice of the trade and
            to the full intent of this specification.
            1.       The sealers, tapes, adhesives and mastics used in conjunction with the
                     installation of the pipe covering specified herein shall possess the maximum
                     possible fire-safe qualities available and shall be of a type approved by Factory
                     Mutual, Factory Insurance Association or National Fire Protection Association.
            2.       Valves, fittings, flanges and accessories shall have the same thickness of pipe
                     covering applied as the adjacent pipe. Pipe covering for these items shall be
                     factory PVC molded type.
            3.       Longitudinal seams and butt joint shall be sealed with a fire retardant, vapor
                     barrier adhesive.
            4.       Insulation at hangers shall be protected with sheet metal saddles.

      B.    Interior Reclaim, Cold Water, Hot Water, and Hot Water Return System Piping
            1.       All interior cold water, reclaim water, hot water and hot water return piping shall
                     be insulated with a preformed fiberglass insulation which meets the property
                     requirements of ASTM C547, “Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe
                     Insulation”. Pipe insulation shall have a white, factory applied, fire retardant,
                     reinforced vapor barrier jacket.
                       Insulation shall be continuous through sleeves and have a thickness of 1-inch.
            2.         Ends of insulation at termination points shall be sealed to the pipe with a pre-
                       molded PVC type fitting. Pipe fittings and valves shall be provided with pre-
                       molded PVC covers with fiberglass inserts.
            3.         Insulation shall be manufactured by Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp., Knalif
                       Fiberglass, Certainteed or equal.


                                             PLUMBING
                                            22 00 00 - 17
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                        DECEMBER 17, 2012

2.6   PIPING, EQUIPMENT AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION

      A.    All piping, equipment and valves installed under this Section of the Specifications shall be
            identified with pipe markers, valve tags, equipment plates and bar codes. Refer to
            Paragraph 3.01 IDENTIFICATION for materials and methods of installation.


2.7   VALVES (DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM)

      A.    General
            Valves in the interior domestic water piping systems (cold water, hot water, and hot water
            return) shall be as manufactured by Apollo, Milwaukee, Nibco or Conbraco.
            Manufacturer’s model numbers used herein are intended as a guide to quality and type of
            valve to be provided.
            1.        Valves shall be provided with Buna-N, TFE or EPDM seats suitable for the
                      service intended.
            2.        The pressure classification for valves specified herein are working steam or
                      water, oil, gas (WOG) pressure ratings.
            3.        Lever handles on all valves shall be color coded in conformance with ANSI
                      Standard A-13.1.

      B.    Ball Valves (2” and smaller) shall have threaded or solder ends with a bronze body, full
            port stainless steel ball and stem, RPTFE seats, a lever handle with a 1 ¼ inch zinc
            plated carbon steel stem extension assembly and be rated for 600 psi WOG. Ball valves
            shall be equal to Apollo Series 77-140-03 / 77-240-03.


2.8   VALVES (NATURAL GAS)

      A.    General – Valves in the gas piping system shall be as manufactured by Apollo,
            Milwaukee, Nibco, Walworth Milliken or Nordstrom.

      B.    For pipe sizes 2-inch and smaller: valves shall be bronze body, UL listed gas service ball
            valve with screwed end T-handle, and rated for 250 psig LP-Gas. Gas valve shall be
            equal to Apollo 80 – 100 series.


2.9   CLEANOUTS

      A.    Bodies of cleanout ferrules in hub and spigot or no-hub piping shall be standard pipe size
            conforming in thickness to that required for pipe and fittings, and shall extend not less
            than 3/4 inch high. Cleanouts in copper waste piping shall be soldered brass cleanout
            fittings with extra heavy brass screw plugs of the same size as the pipe line. Cleanouts
            in threaded waste piping shall be cast iron drainage "T" pattern 90 degree branch fittings
            with extra heavy brass screw plugs of the same size as the pipe.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1   DEMOLITION

      A.    The existing facility will continue to operate during all phases of the demolition work and
            subsequent construction. No interruption of the plumbing systems will be permitted
            without prior approval of the Owner’s Representative.


                                           PLUMBING
                                          22 00 00 - 18
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                       DECEMBER 17, 2012

      B.    Submit proposed methods and sequence of operations for the selective demolition work
            to the Owner’s Representative for review prior to the start of the work.

      C.    Perform all demolition while ensuring minimum interference with adjacent occupied areas.

      D.    Where sections of a system are to be removed and the system serves other areas of the
            building that are outside the scope of the work, perform the following:
            1.       Coordinate the temporary shutdown of the system with the Owner's
                     representative.
            2.       Install supports in the remaining active sections of the system as required by the
                     removal of nearby supports associated with the demolition.
            3.       Isolate the system.
            4.       Cap the remaining system section, leaving the remainder of the system active.

      E.    Provide temporary shoring or bracing during the demolition work to prevent movement,
            settlement, or collapse of the system or adjacent systems due to the work.

      F.    Promptly repair any damage caused to adjacent facilities or areas that are designated to
            remain at no additional cost to the Owner.

      G.    Equipment:
            1.    Coordinate with the Contractor to provide disconnection prior to equipment
                  removal.
            2.    Remove equipment by unfastening at the supports or attachments. Then remove
                  the attachments from the building, leaving no component of the original
                  installation.
            3.    The Owner shall choose to take possession of the equipment or not. If the
                  Owner chooses not to take possession of the equipment, the Contractor shall
                  remove the equipment and dispose of the equipment in accordance with
                  Paragraph H specified below.
            4.    Exercise care with equipment that is to be relocated or turned over to the Owner,
                  examine the equipment before removal in the presence of the Owner's
                  representative to determine its condition.
            5.    Install relocated equipment to ensure no damage.
            6.    Equipment to be turned over to the Owner: Deliver to an on-site location
                  designated by the Owner, and obtain acknowledgment of receipt in good
                  condition.

      H.    All equipment, etc., not turned over to the Owner shall be become the property of the
            General Contractor, and shall be removed from the site and be properly disposed of.


3.2   IDENTIFICATION

      A.    General
            1.      All piping, equipment, control panels, and valves furnished and/or installed under
                    this Section of the Specifications and shall be marked for ease of identification.
            2.      Marking shall be done using self-adhering (screw or rivets for equipment) labels
                    applied to clean, smooth surfaces. All lettering shall have sharply contrasting
                    background for ease of identification. Colors shall be in accordance with ANSI
                    A13.1 Standards. Samples of stickers together with color schedules shall be
                    submitted for approval.




                                           PLUMBING
                                          22 00 00 - 19
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                         DECEMBER 17, 2012

      B.    Pipe Identification
            Provide color-coded pipe identification markers on all piping in the building installed under
            this section.
            1.       All pipe markers shall be as manufactured by W.H. Brady, Westline Products,
                     Seton Nameplate Company or approved equal. Stenciling of the piping will not be
                     permitted. Pipe markers, bands and flow arrows shall be pressure adhesive,
                     snap-on, acrylic or vinyl type.
            2.       Furnish and affix approved adhesive bands identifying the service and direction of
                     flow of each piping system installed under this Section of the Specifications.
            3.       Name of the service, taken from drawing legend, shall be printed in black letters,
                     not less than 1 ¼ inches high for piping, including covering, 3 inches and larger
                     and ¾ inch in height for piping 2-1/2 inches and smaller.
            4.       Arrows and color band background shall conform to State Plumbing Code for all
                     domestic and protected water systems. Legends, arrows and colors shall
                     conform to ANSI Standard A13.1 covering “Identification of Piping Systems” for
                     all other systems.
            5.       Identification shall be provided on all piping that is exposed as well as all in
                     concealed locations such as shafts, and above removable ceilings in which piping
                     may be viewed.
            6.       Each set shall consist of one band on which the name of the service is printed
                     and one band on which is printed a black directional arrow.
            7.       Bands shall be applied where they can be easily read from the finished floor
                     below, with their long dimension parallel to the axis of the pipe.
            8.       Bands shall be applied only after any finish painting is completed.
            9.       The following color coding shall be used with names in black letters on
                     backgrounds indicated:
                                      SCHEDULE OF PIPING IDENTIFICATION
                          Service                         Legend                   Background Color
             Cold Water                          Cold Water                     Green
             Hot Water                           Hot Water                      Yellow
             Hot Water Return                    Hot Water Return               Yellow
             Soil or Waste                       Sanitary Drain                 Green
             Vent                                Vent                           Green
             Gas                                 Natural Gas                    Yellow


      C.    Valve Tags
            1.     All valves on pipes of every description shall have numbering tags. The valve
                   numbers shall correspond with the existing numbering systems numbers
                   indicated for valves and controls on two-printed Valve Lists prepared using
                   electronic database by the HVAC Contractor. These printed lists shall state the
                   numbers and locations of each valve and the fixture or group of fixtures which it
                   controls, and other necessary information, such as requiring the opening or
                   closing of another valve when one valve is to be opened or closed.
            2.     Valve tags shall have neat circular black and white laminated fibre-engraved
                   white showing through tags of at least 1 ½” in diameter, attached with a brass
                   hook to each valve stem. Stamp on these valves tags in letters, as large as
                   practical, the number of the valve and the service such as indicated on the “Valve
                   List”. The numbers on each service shall be consecutive. All valves on tanks
                   and pumps shall be numbered by 3” black and white laminated fibre-engraved
                   white showing through discs with white numbers 2” secured to stem of valves by
                   means of brass hooks or small solid link brass chain.




                                            PLUMBING
                                           22 00 00 - 20
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                         DECEMBER 17, 2012

3.3   TESTING

      A.    General
            1.      All labor, materials, instruments, devices and power required for testing shall be
                    provided by this Contractor. The tests shall be performed in the presence and to
                    the satisfaction of the Architect and such other parties, as may have legal
                    jurisdiction. No piping in any location shall be closed up, furred in, or covered
                    before testing.
            2.      Where portions of piping systems are to be covered or concealed before
                    completion of the project, those portions shall be tested separately in the manner
                    specified herein for the respective entire system.
            3.      Any piping or equipment that has been left unprotected and subject to mechanical
                    or other injury in the opinion of the Architect shall be retested in part or in whole
                    as directed.
            4.      The Architect retains the right to request a recheck or resetting of any pump or
                    instrument by this Contractor during the guarantee period at no additional cost to
                    the Contractor.
            5.      Repair, or if directed by the Architect, replace any defective work with new work
                    without extra charge to the Contract. Repeat tests as directed, until the work is
                    proven to meet the requirements specified herein.
            6.      Restore to its finished condition any work, damaged or disturbed, provided by
                    other Contractors and engage the original Contractor to do the work of restoration
                    to the damaged or disturbed work.
            7.      The fixtures shall be tested for stability of support and satisfactory operation. The
                    piping shall be tested when directed by the Engineer for stability.
            8.      After the fixtures are set and connected, and the piping systems to same have
                    been tested, this Contractor shall turn water on the fixtures, and equipment, fill
                    the traps, etc., and the proper operation of all items shall be demonstrated by him
                    in the presence of and to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer or their
                    designated representatives.
            9.      Caulking of screwed joints or holes in piping will not be acceptable.
            10.     This Contractor shall notify the Architect and any inspectors having jurisdiction, a
                    minimum of 48 hours in advance of making any required tests so that
                    arrangements may be made for their presence to witness his scheduled tests.

      B.    Specific:
            1.      (Waste and Vent) Piping Systems:
                    a.     Before the installation of fixtures, and equipment each system including
                           vents shall be tested in its entirety or in sections. If this entire system is
                           to be tested, all openings shall be plugged to permit the system to be
                           filled with water to the level of the vent stack or roof drain of each system
                           above the roof where practical. Each system shall hold this water for a
                           minimum of 15 minutes prior to an inspection. The system shall be tight
                           at all points.
                    b.     Where a portion of the system is to be tested, the test shall be conducted
                           in the same manner as specified herein for the entire system, except a
                           vertical sack ten feet above the highest horizontal line to be tested may
                           be installed, and filled with water to maintain sufficient pressure. A pump
                           may be used to supply the required pressure. The pressure shall be
                           maintained for a minimum of 15 minutes prior to an inspection. The
                           system shall be tight at all points.
            2.      Reclaim, Cold, Hot, and Hot Water Return Piping Systems:
                    a.     Upon completion of the roughing-in and before setting fixtures and final
                           connection to all equipment, all water piping systems shall be tested to a
                           minimum hydrostatic pressure of 125 PSIG.



                                            PLUMBING
                                           22 00 00 - 21
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                         DECEMBER 17, 2012

                    b.     Each system's test shall be maintained for eight hours without a drop in
                           pressure.
                    c.     After testing, provide complete adjustment of all parts of each water
                           system until design distribution or balancing is obtained throughout.
            3.      Gas Systems
                    a.     Before any system of gas piping is put into service, it shall be carefully
                           tested in the presence of, and with the approval of, the gas inspector to
                           insure that it is gastight. Where any part of the system is to be enclosed
                           or concealed, this test shall precede the work of closing in the piping.
                           The test medium shall be air or inert gas (e.g. nitrogen, carbon dioxide).
                           Oxygen shall never be used.
                    b.     Gas piping systems, not in excess of ½ psig or 14 inches water column,
                           extending from the outlet of the meter set assembly to the closed shutoff
                           valve of each appliance, shall withstand a pressure of at least six inches
                           mercury or three pound gauge for a period of not less than 10 minutes
                           without showing any drop in pressure. Pressure shall be measured with
                           a mercury manometer or slope gauge, or an equivalent device so
                           calibrated as to be read in increments of not greater than 1/10 pound.
                           The source of pressure shall be isolated before the pressure tests are
                           made.
                    c.     After the test of piping for tightness as described herein, gas may be
                           turned on and appliances tested at normal operating pressure by means
                           of a soap bubble test, or other non-corrosive foaming agent test.


3.4   DISINFECTION, CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

      A.    Disinfection
            1.      Each potable water system (cold, and hot, and hot water return) shall be cleaned
                    and disinfected by this Contractor. Cleaning and disinfection shall be performed
                    after all pipes, valves, fixtures and other components of the system are installed,
                    tested and ready for operation.
            2.      All domestic water piping shall be thoroughly flushed with clean potable water,
                    prior to disinfection, to remove dirt and other contaminants. Screens of faucets
                    shall be removed before flushing and re-installed after completion of disinfection.
            3.      Disinfection shall be done using sodium hypochlorite in the following manner:
                    a.        A service cock shall be provided and located at the water service
                              entrance. The disinfecting agent shall be injected into and through the
                              system from this cock only.
                    b.        The disinfecting agent shall be injected by a proportioning pump or
                              device through the service cock slowly and continuously at an even rate.
                              During disinfection, flow of disinfecting agent into main water supply shall
                              not be permitted.
                    c.        All sectional valves shall be opened during disinfection. All outlets shall
                              be fully opened at least twice during injection and the residual checked
                              with orthotolidin solution.
                    d.        When the chlorine residual concentration, calculated on the volume of
                              water the piping will contain, indicates not less than 50 PPM (parts per
                              million) at all outlets, then all valves shall be closed and secured.
                    e.        The residual chlorine shall be retained in the piping systems for a period
                              of not less than 24 hours.
                    f.        After the retention, the residual shall be not less than five parts per
                              million. If less, then the process shall be repeated as described above.
                    g.        If satisfactory, then all fixtures shall be flushed with clean potable water
                              until residual chlorine by orthotolidin tests shall not be greater than the
                              incoming water supply (this may be zero).


                                            PLUMBING
                                           22 00 00 - 22
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                       DECEMBER 17, 2012

            4.      All work and certification of performance shall be performed by approved
                    applicators or qualified personnel with chemical and laboratory experience.
                    Certification of performance shall indicate:
                    a.       Name and location of the job and date when disinfection was performed.
                    b.       Material used for disinfection.
                    c.       Retention period of disinfectant in piping system.
                    d.       PPM chlorine during retention.
                    e.       PPM chlorine after flushing.
                    f.       Statement that disinfection was performed as specified.
                    g.       Signature and address of company/person performing disinfection.
            5.      Upon completion of final flushing (after retention period), this Contractor shall
                    obtain a minimum of one water sample from each hot and cold water line and
                    submit samples to a State approved laboratory. Samples shall be taken from the
                    faucets located at highest floor and furthest from meter or main water supply.
                    The laboratory report shall show the following:
                    a.       Name and address of approved laboratory testing the samples.
                    b.       Name and location of job and date the samples were obtained.
                    c.       The coliform organism count. (An acceptable test shall show absence of
                             coliform organisms.)
            6.      If analysis does not satisfy the above minimum requirements, the disinfection
                    procedure shall be repeated.
            7.      Before acceptance of the systems, this Contractor shall submit to the Architect for
                    his review, three (3) copies of Certification of Performance as specified above.
            8.      Under no circumstances shall this Contractor permit the use of any portion of
                    domestic water system until properly disinfected, flushed and certified.

      B.    Cleaning and Adjusting
            1.     At the completion of the work, all parts of the installation shall be thoroughly
                   cleaned. All equipment, pipe, valves and fittings shall be cleaned of grease, metal
                   cuttings and sludge which may have accumulated by operation of the system for
                   testing.
            2.     Any stoppage or discoloration or other damage to parts of the building, its finish,
                   or furnishings, due to this Contractor's failure to properly clean the piping system
                   shall be repaired by this Contractor at no increase in Contract costs.
            3.     At the completion of the work, all water systems shall be adjusted for quiet
                   operation.
            4.     All automatic control devices shall be adjusted for proper operation.
            5.     All plumbing fixtures and exposed metal work shall be adjusted for proper
                   operation. Floor drain strainers and traps shall be cleaned of all debris.
            6.     All items of equipment shall be thoroughly inspected and any items dented,
                   scratched or otherwise damaged in any manner shall be replaced or repaired and
                   painted to match the original finish. All items so repaired and refinished shall be
                   brought to the attention of the Architect for inspection and approval.


3.5   SPECIAL TOOLS

      A.    Provide any and all special tools, recommended by the manufacturer of items furnished,
            noted as not being commonly available.


3.6   CERTIFICATES OF APPROVAL

      A.    Upon completion of the work, furnish to the Owner through the Architect, in duplicate,
            certificates of inspection and/or approval from state and local inspection authorities
            having jurisdiction indicating the installed systems compliance to their requirements.

                                           PLUMBING
                                          22 00 00 - 23
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                         DECEMBER 17, 2012

3.7   QUIET OPERATION

      A.    All work provided under this Section of the Specifications shall operate under conditions
            of load without sound or vibration, which is abnormally objectionable for such equipment
            in the opinion of the Architect. In case of moving machinery, sound or vibration noticeable
            outside of the room in which it is installed, or annoyingly noticeable inside its own room
            will be considered objectionable shall be corrected in an approved manner by this
            Contractor at no change in Contract amount.


3.8   SYSTEMS

      A.    Sanitary and Storm Drainage Piping (Interior)
            1.      This Contractor shall be responsible for checking each pipe for alignment,
                    centerline elevation and invert grade for underground installations.
            2.      At times when work is not in progress, open ends of pipe and fittings shall be
                    securely closed so that no trench water, earth or other substance will enter the
                    pipe or fittings. Pipe laid through rock excavation shall rest on a six-inch layer of
                    well-compacted sand.
            3.      Branch connections to each drainage system shall be made with "Wye" and long
                    turn "Tee Wye" fittings. Installation of short radius 1/4 bends, common offsets;
                    double hub fittings and saddles will not be approved. Only fittings conforming to
                    the Code shall be installed.
            4.      The changes in direction of each drainage system shall be made with "Wye"
                    branches and 1/8 bends. Provide long sweep bends at bottom of stacks with a
                    vertical cleanout just above the floor at places where a "Wye" and 1/8 bends at
                    bottom of stacks and end cleanouts cannot be installed.
            5.      Every fixture shall be separately trapped and the traps must be vented unless an
                    approved battery or wet vented system is being installed. Floor drains shall be
                    considered as a fixture.
            6.      Vents shall be connected to the discharge of each trap in the sanitary system,
                    thence carried individually to a point above the flood level of the fixture before
                    connecting with any other vent pipes. Pitch the branch vents back to the fixtures.
            7.      Cleanouts shall be provided in drainage piping at changes in directions, at foot of
                    stacks or other required points so that all portions of the lines will be readily
                    accessible for cleaning or rodding out.
            8.      Cleanouts shall be of the same size as the pipe installed in up to four inches in
                    diameter and not less than four inches in diameter for piping larger than four
                    inches in diameter.
            9.      The maximum horizontal distance between cleanouts; in piping four inches in
                    diameter and smaller shall not be more than 50 feet apart; in piping five inches in
                    diameter and larger shall not be more than 100 feet apart.
            10.     Traps on sanitary piping not integral with fixtures and in accessible locations shall
                    be provided with a brass trap screw protected by the water seal, and will be
                    regarded as a cleanout.
            11.     Test tees with brass cleanout plugs shall be provided at the foot of all vertical
                    waste and storm drainage stacks and at each floor. Wherever cleanouts on
                    vertical lines occur concealed behind finished walls, they shall be extended to
                    back of finished wall and a wall plate shall be provided.
            12.     above the top of the fresh air intake may be located as close as ten feet.

      B.    Cold, Hot, and Hot Water Return Piping
            1.      Branch lines from water service or main lines shall be taken off the top or bottom
                    of main, using such crossover fittings as may be required by structural or
                    installation conditions. All water service pipes, fittings, and valves shall be kept a



                                            PLUMBING
                                           22 00 00 - 24
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                         DECEMBER 17, 2012

                    sufficient distance from other work and not less than one inch between coverings
                    on the different services.
            2.      Water piping shall be run parallel and graded evenly to the drainage points.
                    There shall be a minimum 1/2" hose-end drain valve with hole-end vacuum
                    breaker provided for each low point in the piping, so that all parts of each water
                    system can be drawn-off. Piping 2" and larger shall have a 3/4" size drain valve.
            3.      Provide suitable means of thermal expansion for the hot water piping using swing
                    joints, expansion loops and long-turn offsets as required to suit building
                    conditions.
            4.      No piping shall be installed in a manner to permit back siphonage or backflow of
                    any flow of water from the waste non-potable or process system into the domestic
                    water systems or their distribution piping under any conditions. Approved
                    backflow preventers shall be installed where cross-connections are required.
            5.      Where flanges are installed in the water systems, install red rubber gaskets
                    between each pair of flanges.
            6.      Heating and/or bending of copper tubing to eliminate the installation of fittings will
                    not be permitted (exception: flexible risers between fixture stop and
                    kitchen/lavatory faucet).
            7.      Piping systems shall be kept clean during all phases of work. Open ends of
                    incomplete piping shall be protected to prevent the entrance of foreign materials.
            8.      Pipe shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the site and shall be
                    worked into place without springing or forcing.
            9.      Provide copper plated friction clamps on the cold water supplies to each water
                    closet and urinal flushometer. Friction clamp shall be firmly clamped to the pipe
                    and shall be firmly attached to the adjacent wall structure.


3.9    PATCHING, REPLACEMENT AND MODIFICATION OF EXISTING WORK

       A.   After installation of pipe lines, the Contractor shall neatly patch, repair, and replace
            existing work where damaged, removed or altered for pipe line installation. This work
            shall be similar and equal in quality to the work removed or damaged, unless otherwise
            shown or specified. Such work shall include replacement of existing lines at points of
            connections to new lines, patching of masonry work, and wherever any such patching
            work is indicated on drawings or otherwise required.


3.10   GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

       A.   Piping Installation
            1.       Install piping approximately as shown on the drawings and as directed during
                     installation by the General Contractor or the Architect.
            2.       Piping shall be installed as straight and direct as possible forming right angles or
                     parallel lines with building walls, other piping and neatly spaced.
            3.       The horizontal runs of piping, except where concealed in partitions, shall be
                     installed as high as possible.
            4.       Piping or other apparatus shall not be installed in such a manner so as to
                     interfere with the full swing of the doors and access to other equipment.
            5.       The arrangement, positions and connections of pipes, fixtures, drains, valves,
                     and the like, indicated on the drawings shall be followed as closely as possible,
                     but the right is reserved by the General Contractor or the Architect to change
                     locations and elevations to accommodate the work, without additional
                     compensation for such change.
            6.       It shall be possible to drain the water from all sections of each sprinkler cold, and
                     hot water piping system. Pitch piping back to drain valves.



                                            PLUMBING
                                           22 00 00 - 25
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                      DECEMBER 17, 2012

            7.      Screwed piping of brass or chrome plated brass shall be made up with special
                    care to avoid marring or damaging pipe and fitting exterior and interior surfaces.
            8.      Small fittings shall be screwed up close to the shoulders of male threads.
                    Lampwick, cord, wool, or any other similar material shall not be used to make up
                    thread joints.
            9.      Screwed pipe and copper tubing shall be reamed smooth before installation.
            10.     All exposed piping in connection with fixtures and where exposed on finished
                    walls or to view, shall be chrome plated. Where chrome plated piping is installed,
                    cut and thread pipe so that no unplated pipe threads are visible when the work is
                    completed.
            11.     Reducing fittings, unless otherwise approved in special cases, shall be provided
                    in making reduction in size of pipe. Bushings will not be allowed unless
                    specifically approved.
            12.     Remove and replace with new materials, any copper or brass piping (chrome
                    plated or unplated) and valves showing visible tool marks.
            13.     Vertical risers shall be firmly supported by riser clamps, properly installed to
                    relieve all weight from the fittings.
            14.     Any piece of pipe six inches or less in length shall be considered a nipple.
            15.     All water service piping shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work to
                    permit finished covering to be not less than 1 inch from other work.
            16.     The pipe and fittings shall be manufactured in the United States of America and
                    in accordance with the Commercial Standards, American National Standards
                    Institute and American Society of Testing Materials.

      B.    Pipe Covering Installation
            1.     Before pipe covering is applied, all pressure tests shall have been performed and
                   approved.
            2.     Pipe covering shall be applied over clean, dry surfaces.
            3.     Pipe covering shall be continuous and shall be carefully fitted with side and end
                   joints butted firmly and tightly together finished as specified herein.
            4.     Pipe covering and auxiliaries shall be kept dry during storage and application.
            5.     Adhesives, cements and coatings shall not be applied when the ambient
                   temperature is below 40 degrees Fahrenheit.
            6.     Valve bodies shall have covering applied up to the stem.
            7.     It is the intent of this Specification that all vapor barriers be sealed and be
                   continuous throughout. Staples shall not be used on vapor barrier jackets.
            8.     Where pipe-covering ends occur at equipment or fixtures, end caps on the
                   covering shall be provided.
            9.     Adequate operating clearances shall be provided at control mechanisms.
            10.    Pipe covering for flanges shall overlap the adjoining pipe by a minimum of three
                   inches on each side.
            11.    Pipe covering shall be provided on all piping passing through ceilings and through
                   the interior above ground sleeves (wall and floor).
            12.    All voids and or seams in insulation shall be filled with insulating cement and
                   finished as specified herein.
            13.    In the event staples are used, they shall be coated with a vapor barrier mastic
                   after insulation and taped. These staples shall not be visible on finished
                   installation.
            14.    End joints of each section of the installed pipe covering shall be tightly butted.

      C.    Valve Installation
            1.      Location of Valves: There shall be valves where indicated on the drawings and
                    where specified as follows:
                    a.       At building service entrances, all supply risers, branches to groups of
                             fixtures, branches to separate fixtures, equipment, wall hydrants, hose



                                           PLUMBING
                                          22 00 00 - 26
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                  DECEMBER 17, 2012

                        bibbs, connections to other systems and sectionalizing points in each
                        system.
                  b.    Each fixture supply shall have a separate angle stop or straight stop
                        finished like the pipe it services.
                  c.    Each piece of equipment shall have isolation valves for each service
                        connected or at inlet and outlet of equipment with single service.
                  d.    At the low points of each water system including trapped sections,
                        provide a tee with 1/2 inch branch and ball valve with 3/4 inch hose end
                        vacuum breaker and attached chain with cap.
                  e.    Valves shall be located to permit easy operation, replacement or repairs.


                                  END OF SECTION




                                      PLUMBING
                                     22 00 00 - 27
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                                                                  DECEMBER 17, 2012

                                                           TABLE OF CONTENTS


SECTION 23 00 00 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
PART 1 - GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.1      GENERAL PROVISIONS ................................................................................................................. 1
  1.2      SCOPE OF WORK .......................................................................................................................... 1
  1.3      RELATED WORK ............................................................................................................................ 2
  1.4      PRODUCTS FURNISHED, BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION ................................ 2
  1.5      DEFINITIONS .................................................................................................................................. 3
  1.6      CODES, REFERENCES AND PERMITS ........................................................................................ 3
  1.7      GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................................................... 5
  1.8      MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS ................................................................................. 5
  1.9      SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................................................... 6
  1.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA...................................................................................... 9
  1.11 RECORD DRAWINGS ................................................................................................................... 10
  1.12 WARRANTIES ............................................................................................................................... 11
  1.13 COORDINATION ........................................................................................................................... 12
  1.14 COORDINATION DRAWINGS ...................................................................................................... 12
  1.15 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................... 13
  1.16 INSPECTION OF SITE CONDITIONS .......................................................................................... 14
  1.17 SURVEY AND MEASUREMENTS................................................................................................. 14
  1.18 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING ...................................................................................... 14
  1.19 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY ................................................................................ 15
  1.20 SUPERVISION ............................................................................................................................... 15
  1.21 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .............................................................................................................. 15
  1.22 SCHEDULE .................................................................................................................................... 15
  1.23 HOISTING, SCAFFOLDING AND PLANKING .............................................................................. 15
  1.24 CUTTING AND PATCHING ........................................................................................................... 15
  1.25 SLEEVES, INSERTS AND ANCHOR BOLTS ............................................................................... 16
  1.26 SUPPLEMENTARY STEEL, CHANNELS AND SUPPORTS ........................................................ 16
  1.27 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ........................................................................................................... 17
  1.28 ACCESSIBILITY............................................................................................................................. 17
  1.29 SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................................... 17
  1.30 ELECTRICAL WORK ..................................................................................................................... 18
  1.31 PROJECT CLOSEOUT .................................................................................................................. 18
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................................ 20
  2.1      SLEEVES ....................................................................................................................................... 20


                                                                       HVAC
                                                                     23 00 00 - I
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                                                                    DECEMBER 17, 2012

  2.2      FIRESTOPPING ............................................................................................................................ 20
  2.3      VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS ............................................................... 21
  2.4      DUCTWORK .................................................................................................................................. 22
  2.5      DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES ................................................................................... 27
  2.6      FAN POWERED TERMINAL UNITS (SERIES)............................................................................. 27
  2.7      ELECTRIC CABINET HEATERS ................................................................................................... 29
  2.8      INSULATION .................................................................................................................................. 29
  2.9      AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS................................................................................. 32
PART 3 - EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................... 33
  3.1      DEMOLITION ................................................................................................................................. 33
  3.2      GENERAL ...................................................................................................................................... 34
  3.3      DUCT CLEANING .......................................................................................................................... 35
  3.4      IDENTIFICATION........................................................................................................................... 35
  3.5      FIRESTOPPING INSTALLATION .................................................................................................. 37
  3.6      CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................ 38
  3.7      BRANCH CONNECTIONS ............................................................................................................ 38
  3.8      RISERS .......................................................................................................................................... 38
  3.9      SUPPORTS.................................................................................................................................... 38
  3.10 FIELD PAINTING AND COATING ................................................................................................. 39
  3.11 DUCTWORK .................................................................................................................................. 39
  3.12 AIR SYSTEMS BALANCING ......................................................................................................... 39
  3.13 BASES AND SUPPORTS .............................................................................................................. 43
  3.14 WATERPROOFING ....................................................................................................................... 43
  3.15 MISCELLANEOUS IRON AND STEEL .......................................................................................... 43
  3.16 PLACING IN SERVICE .................................................................................................................. 44
  3.17 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING ....................................................................................................... 44
  3.18 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS .................................................................. 44
  3.19 TRAINING ...................................................................................................................................... 44




                                                                        HVAC
                                                                     23 00 00 - II
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                       DECEMBER 17, 2012



SECTION 23 00 00 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1   GENERAL PROVISIONS

      A.    The GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, DIVISION 1, and BIDDING AND CONTRACT
            REQUIREMENTS, and DIVISION 0 are hereby made a part of this Specification Section.

      B.    Examine all Drawings and all Sections of the Specifications and requirements and
            provisions affecting the work of this Section.


1.2   SCOPE OF WORK

      A.    This project includes the partial renovation of approximately 20,000 SF of
            bar/lounge/service space with minimal expansion. Selective demolition of existing
            systems shall be required. This work includes the installation of new fan powered VAV
            boxes, insulated ductwork, diffusers and controls. The existing air handling system shall
            remain active during construction. The affected areas of the existing system shall be
            balanced.

      B.    Refer to the specific requirements for this project included in the “Narrative Report for
            Compliance with the Energy Conservation Section of the Massachusetts State Building
            Code (780CMR) – Approval and Acceptance”, which shall be considered part of these
            specifications. Include all associated testing and certifications necessary for compliance
            and any required remedial actions and retesting due to failure.

      C.    The building is to be commissioned and Contractor shall provide all labor required to fully
            test and demonstrate that all systems operate as designed.

      D.    The work under this Section shall include the furnishing of all materials, labor, equipment
            and supplies and the performance of all operations to provide complete working systems,
            in general, to include the following items:
            1.      Identification
            2.      Sleeves, Firestopping
            3.      Equipment Nameplates
            4.      Factory Tests
            5.      Vibration Isolation
            6.      Ductwork
            7.      Diffusers, Registers and Grilles
            8.      Fan Powered Terminal Units
            9.      Cabinet Unit Heaters (all types)
            10.     Insulation
            11.     Relocation of existing HVAC components that interfere with new construction and
                    removal and disposal of obsolete components.
            12.     Operating and maintenance instructions and manuals
            13.     Coordination drawings
            14.     Shop drawings
            15.     Cleaning, Testing, Adjusting, & Balancing of all Ducted and Piped Systems and
                    Equipment


                                              HVAC
                                           23 00 00 - 1
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                          DECEMBER 17, 2012

            16.     Record (as-built) Drawings
            17.     HVAC Control Systems Additions/Modifications
            18.     Seismic Restraints
            19.     Training of Owners Personnel on Equipment, Systems, and Controls

      E.    The work to be done under this section is generally shown on the Mechanical HVAC
            Drawings.


1.3   RELATED WORK

      A.    Principal classes of Work related to the Work of this Section are listed below, and are
            specified to be performed under the indicated Sections of these Specifications. Refer to
            the indicated Sections for description of the extent and nature of the indicated Work, and
            for coordination with related trades. This listing may not include all related Work items. It
            is the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate the Work of this Section with that of all
            other trades.

      B.    The following work is not included in this section and will be provided under other
            sections, except as specified herein:
            1.      Electrical power wiring for all HVAC equipment and to junction box(es) in
                    mechanical areas. Power wiring from these box(es) to all control equipment
                    (control panels, etc.) and all controls/interlock wiring shall be provided by the
                    controls Contractor. Control wiring shall be from standby power source (if
                    available).
            2.      Starters and variable speed drives that are not integral to equipment, unless
                    specified otherwise.
            3.      Structural supports necessary to distribute loading from equipment to roof or
                    floor.
            4.      Temporary light, power, water, heat, gas and sanitary facilities for use during
                    construction and testing. Refer to Division 1, General Conditions.
            5.      Gypsum drywall enclosures of supply, return and exhaust ductwork on all
                    rooftop/penthouse air handlers, supply and return air shafts, as shown on
                    drawings.
            6.      Painting.


1.4   PRODUCTS FURNISHED, BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION

      A.    Furnish access panels and doors for installation by the General Contractor.
            1.      Furnish access panels for installation in walls, ceiling and floors at locations to
                    permit access for adjustment, removal, replacement and servicing of all
                    concealed equipment, valves and materials installed under this Section of the
                    specifications.
            2.      Access panels will be installed under the Section of the related trades of the
                    finished surfaces in which they are located.
            3.      Access panels shall be located in closets, storage rooms and/or other non-public
                    areas if possible, positioned so that the equipment can be easily reached, and the
                    size shall be sufficient for this purpose (min. 16" x 16"). When access panels are
                    required in corridors, lobby or other habitable areas, they will be located as
                    directed by the Owner’s Representative.
            4.      Access panels shall be prime painted, keyed alike and provided with cylinder lock
                    and two keys for each panel. Units shall be manufactured by Milcor, Inland Steel,
                    Miami Carey or approved equal. Required fire resistance of walls and ceilings
                    shall be maintained.



                                               HVAC
                                            23 00 00 - 2
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                          DECEMBER 17, 2012

      B.    Furnish line voltage fan speed control switches for installation by the Electrical Contractor.


1.5   DEFINITIONS

      A.    As used in this Section, the following terms shall be understood to have the following
            meaning:
            1.     “Contractor,” unless otherwise qualified, shall mean the installer of the work
                   specified under this Section, and shall be responsible for coordination of this work
                   with the work of the ATC Contractor.
            2.     “Furnish” shall mean purchase and deliver to the project site, complete with
                   every necessary appurtenance and product support.
            3.     “Install” shall mean unload at the delivery point at the site and perform all work
                   necessary to establish secure mounting and proper operation at the proper
                   location in the project.
            4.     “Provide” shall mean furnish and install.
            5.     “Work” shall mean all labor, materials, equipment, apparatus, controls,
                   accessories and all other items required for a proper and complete installation.
            6.     “Concealed” shall mean hidden from sight in chases, furred in spaces, shafts,
                   embedded in construction, in a crawl space, and above hung ceilings.
            7.     “Exposed” shall mean not installed underground or concealed as defined above.
            8.     “Furnished by others” shall mean materials or equipment purchased under
                   other sections of the general contract and installed by this section of the
                   specifications by this trade Contractor.
            9.     “Owner’s Representative” shall be the party responsible to make decisions
                   regarding all contractual obligations in reference to the Scope of Work for the
                   Owner.
            10.    “Date of Substantial Completion” shall indicate the date where the work has
                   been formally accepted as evidenced by completed final punch list or where the
                   work has reached the stage that the owner obtains beneficial use and
                   commences utilization of the installed systems for business or occupancy
                   purposes. The GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, DIVISION 1, shall supercede this
                   definition where specifically defined.
            11.    “Piping” shall mean, in addition to pipe or tubing, all fittings, flanges, unions,
                   valves, strainers, drains, hangers and other accessories relative to such piping.
            12.    “ATC” shall mean Automatic Temperature Controls, and shall be interchangeable
                   with “BAS” (Building Automation System).


1.6   CODES, REFERENCES AND PERMITS

      A.    Materials, installation of systems and equipment provided under this section shall be done
            in strict accordance with the latest governing edition of the following standards, codes,
            specifications, requirements, and regulations, and any other Codes and Regulations
            having jurisdiction including but not limited to:
            1.        All Applicable NFPA Standards
            2.        State and Local Building Mechanical, Electrical, and Energy Codes
            3.        American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
            4.        American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM)
            5.        American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
            6.        Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
            7.        Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
            8.        Any other local codes or authorities having jurisdiction.




                                               HVAC
                                            23 00 00 - 3
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                         DECEMBER 17, 2012

      B.    Heating, pumping, process piping and refrigeration systems shall be installed by
            Contractors and personnel appropriately licensed in the State (Installing Contractor).

      C.    All pressure vessels shall conform to ASME and State codes and regulations.

      D.    All equipment shall meet the more efficient requirement:
            1.       As shown on bid documents,
            2.       Minimum efficiencies state in ASHRAE 90.1-2007, or
            3.       Minimum efficiencies stated in the governing Energy Code.

      E.    Unless otherwise specified or indicated, materials, workmanship and equipment
            performance shall conform with the latest governing edition of the following standards,
            codes, specifications, requirements, and regulations, except when more rigid
            requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes but not limited to:
            1.      Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI)
            2.      Air Diffusion Council (ADC)
            3.      Air Movement and Control Association AMCA
            4.      American Boiler Manufacturers Association (ABMA)
            5.      American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
            6.      American Petroleum Institute (API)
            7.      American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning (ASHRAE)
            8.      American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
            9.      American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM)
            10.     American Welding Society, Inc. (AWS)
            11.     Associated Air Balance Council (AABC)
            12.     Certified Ballast Manufacturers (CME)
            13.     Copper Development Association (CDA)
            14.     Cooling Tower Institute (CTI)
            15.     Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (EJMA)
            16.     Factory Mutual System (FM)
            17.     Illuminating Engineering Society (IES)
            18.     Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
            19.     Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA)
            20.     Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve & Fitting Industry (MSS)
            21.     National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA)
            22.     National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
            23.     National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB)
            24.     North American Insulation Manufacturer's Association (NAIMA)
            25.     Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association, Inc.
                    (SMACNA)
            26.     The Hydronics Institute (HI)
            27.     Thermal Insulation Manufacturer’s Association (TIMA)

      F.    Codes, laws and standards provide a basis for the minimum installation criteria
            acceptable. The drawings and specifications illustrate the scope required for this project,
            which may exceed minimum codes, laws and standards.

      G.    The date of the code or standard is that in effect at the Bid date.

      H.    Give all notices, file all plans, obtain all permits and licenses, and obtain all necessary
            approvals from authorities having jurisdiction. Deliver all certificates of inspection to the
            authorities having jurisdiction. No work shall be covered before examination and approval
            by the Owner’s Representative, inspectors, and authorities having jurisdiction. Replace
            imperfect or condemned work to conform to requirements, satisfactory to Owner’s
            Representative, and without extra cost to the Owner. If work is covered before inspection



                                               HVAC
                                            23 00 00 - 4
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                         DECEMBER 17, 2012

            and approval, this Contractor shall pay costs of uncovering and reinstalling the covering,
            whether it meets contract requirements or not.


1.7   GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

      A.    Nameplates
            1.    Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's
                  name, address, type or style, model number, catalog number, and serial number
                  securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent
                  will not be acceptable.

      B.    Maintenance Information
            1.     Systems and equipment which require periodic maintenance to maintain efficient
                   operation shall be furnished with complete necessary maintenance information.
                   Required routine maintenance actions, as specified by the manufacturer, shall be
                   stated clearly and incorporated on a readily accessible label on the equipment.
                   Such label may be limited to identifying, by title or publication number, the
                   operation and maintenance manual for that particular model and type of product.

      C.    Equipment Guards
            1.    Belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting setscrews, keys, and other
                  rotating parts so located that any person may come in close proximity thereto
                  shall be completely enclosed or guarded. High-temperature equipment and
                  piping so located as to endanger personnel or create a fire hazard shall be
                  guarded or covered with insulation of type specified for service.


1.8   MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS

      A.    Where equipment or materials are specified with the name of a manufacturer, such
            specification shall be deemed to be used for the purpose of establishing a standard for
            that particular item. No equipment or material shall be used unless previously approved
            by the Owner’s Representative.

      B.    Substitutions (approved equals) may be offered for review provided the material,
            equipment or process offered for consideration is equal in every respect to that indicated
            or specified. In order for Requests for substitution to be considered, all must be
            submitted for pre-approval of manufacturer within 30 days of award of contract. All
            requests must be accompanied by a list of minimum 5-year-old successful installations of
            similar scope (with owner contact and phone number), complete specifications together
            with drawings or samples to properly appraise the materials, equipment or process. Allow
            30 days for Owner’s Representative’s review.

      C.    If a substitution of materials or equipment in whole or in part is made, this Contractor shall
            bear the cost of any changes necessitated by any other trade as a result of said
            substitution.

      D.    All materials, equipment and accessories provided under this section shall be new and
            unused products of recognized manufacturers as approved.




                                               HVAC
                                            23 00 00 - 5
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                         DECEMBER 17, 2012

1.9   SUBMITTALS

      A.    Conform to the requirements of Division 1, General Conditions, for schedule and form of
            all submittals unless specifically noted otherwise in this section. Coordinate this submittal
            with submittals for all other finishes. Shop drawings and design layouts shall be prepared
            by licensed installing Contractors.

      B.    Definitions:
            1.       Shop Drawings are information prepared by the Contractor to illustrate portions of
                     the work in more detail than indicated in the Contract Documents.
            2.       Acceptable Manufacturers: The mechanical design for each product is based on
                     the single manufacturer listed in the schedule or shown on the drawings. In Part
                     2 of the specifications certain Alternate Manufacturers are listed as being
                     acceptable. In addition, the MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS
                     paragraph potentially allows for substitutions as being acceptable. These are
                     acceptable only if, as a minimum, they:
                     a.      Meet all performance criteria listed in the schedules and outlined in the
                             specifications. For example, to be acceptable, an air handling unit must
                             deliver equal CFM against equal external static pressure (with the
                             allowed pressure drop of dirty filters) using equal or less horsepower as
                             the air handler listed in the schedules.
                     b.      Fit within the available space it was designed for, including space for
                             maintenance and component removal, with no modification to either the
                             space or the product. Clearances to walls, ceilings, and other equipment
                             will be at least equal to those shown on the design drawings. The fact
                             that a manufacturer’s name appears as acceptable shall not be taken to
                             mean the Engineer has determined that the manufacturer’s products will
                             fit within the available space – this determination is solely the
                             responsibility of the Contractor.
                     c.      For rooftop mounted equipment and equipment mounted in areas where
                             structural matters are a concern, the products must have a weight no
                             greater than the product listed in the schedules or specifications.
                     d.      Products must adhere to all architectural considerations including, but not
                             limited to: being of the same color as the product scheduled or specified,
                             fitting within the architectural enclosures and details.

      C.    Submittal Procedures, Format and Requirements
            1.     Review submittal packages for compliance with Contract Documents and then
                   submit to Owner’s Representative for review. Submit enough sets of shop
                   drawings such that, after review, two sets will be kept by the reviewer, with only
                   the remaining sets returned with reviewer's marks and comments.
            2.     Each Shop Drawing shall indicate in title block, and each Product Data package
                   shall indicate on cover sheet, the following information:
                   a.       Title.
                   b.       Equipment number.
                   c.       Name and location of project.
                   d.       Names of Owner, Engineer and Seller.
                   e.       Names of manufacturers, suppliers, vendors, etc.
                   f.       Date of submittal.
                   g.       Whether original submittal or resubmitted.
            3.     Shop drawings showing manufacturer's product data shall contain detailed
                   dimensional drawings (minimum ¼” = 1’ scale) including plans and sections
                   (where physical clearance could be an issue). Provide larger scale details as
                   necessary. Sheet metal drawings shall show elements of Architect’s reflected
                   ceiling plan, exposed ductwork, walls and partitions (highlighting fire walls and
                   smoke partitions), diffusers, registers, grilles, all dampers (fire, smoke, balancing,


                                              HVAC
                                           23 00 00 - 6
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                        DECEMBER 17, 2012

                    backdraft, and control dampers), sleeves and other aspects of construction as
                    necessary for coordination.
            4.      Submit accurate and complete description of materials of construction,
                    manufacturer's published performance characteristics, sizes, weights, capacity
                    ratings (performance data, alone, is not acceptable), electrical requirements,
                    starting characteristics, wiring diagrams, and acoustical performance for
                    complete assemblies. Drawings shall clearly indicate location (terminal block or
                    wire number), voltage and function for all field terminations, and other information
                    necessary to demonstrate compliance with all requirements of Contract
                    Documents.
            5.      Provide shop drawings showing details of piping connections to all equipment. If
                    connection details are not submitted and connections are found to be installed
                    incorrectly, this Contractor shall reinstall them within the original contract price.
                    a.      Alternate pipe joining methods such as grooved and permanent push-to-
                            connect systems shall be shown on drawings and product submittals,
                            and be specifically identified with the applicable manufacturer’s style or
                            series number. Installation shall include any additional hangers required
                            for the alternate system.
            6.      Provide complete data for all auxiliary services and utilities required by submitted
                    equipment. This shall include power, cooling water and compressed air
                    requirements and points of connection.
            7.      Provide a complete description of all controls and instrumentation required
                    including electrical power connection drawing for all components and
                    interconnection wiring to starters, detailed information on starters, control
                    diagrams, termination diagrams, and all control interfaces with a central control
                    system.
            8.      Provide installation and erection information including; lifting requirements, and
                    any special rigging or installation requirements for all equipment.
            9.      The Owner’s Representative shall approve all materials before commitment for
                    materials is made.

      D.    Product Data: Submit complete manufacturer's product description and technical
            information including:
            1.      Identification
            2.      Sleeves, Firestopping
            3.      Electric Motors and Starters
            4.      Factory Tests
            5.      Vibration Isolation
            6.      Complete ductwork, equipment layout, and piping shop drawings, construction
                    details and construction standards
            7.      Diffusers, Registers and Grilles
            8.      Fan Powered Terminal Units
            9.      Cabinet Unit Heaters (all types)
            10.     Factory Painting
            11.     Insulation
            12.     Coordination Drawing
            13.     Operating and maintenance instructions and manuals
            14.     HVAC Control Systems Additions/Modifications
            15.     Seismic Restraints
            16.     Color selection charts and samples for equipment and systems in finished areas
            17.     Testing, Adjusting, & Balancing Qualifications, Plan, and Reports
            18.     Identification, labels and tags, including database for all equipment and devices
            19.     O&M manual table of contents
            20.     O&M manual including completed Facility Support Services data sheets (from
                    Part 4)



                                              HVAC
                                           23 00 00 - 7
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                        DECEMBER 17, 2012

      E.    Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related
            systems, products and accessories in an individual (combined) submittal.
            1.     Access panel shop drawings shall be submitted to the Construction Supervisor
                   for approval.
            2.     Do not submit multiple product information in a single bound manual.
            3.     Three-ring binders shall not be accepted.

      F.    Deviations
            1.      Concerning deviations other than substitutions, proposed deviations from
                    Contract Documents shall be requested individually in writing whether deviations
                    result from field conditions, standard shop practice, or other cause. Submit letter
                    with transmittal of Shop Drawings which flags the deviation to the attention of the
                    Owner’s Representative.
            2.      Without letters flagging the deviation to the Owner’s Representative, it is possible
                    that the Engineer may not notice such deviation or may not realize its
                    ramifications. Therefore, if such letters are not submitted to the Owner’s
                    Representative, the Seller shall hold the Engineers, his consultants and the
                    Owner harmless for any and all adverse consequences resulting from the
                    deviations being implemented. This shall apply regardless of whether the
                    Engineer has reviewed or approved shop drawings containing the deviation, and
                    will be strictly enforced.
            3.      Approval of proposed deviations, if any, will be made at discretion of Engineer.

      G.    Schedule: Incorporate shop drawing review period into construction schedule so that
            Work is not delayed. This Contractor shall assume full responsibility for delays caused by
            not incorporating the following shop drawing review time requirements into his project
            schedule: Allow at least 10 working days, exclusive of transmittal time, for review each
            time shop drawing is submitted or resubmitted with the exception that 20 working days,
            exclusive of transmittal time are required for the following:
            1.      HVAC temperature control submittals
            2.      Coordination Drawings
            3.      TAB Plan
            4.      TAB draft and final balancing reports.
            5.      O&M manuals including completed Facility Support Services data sheets (from
                    Part 4)
            6.      As built drawings
            7.      If more than five shop drawings of a single trade are received in one calendar
                    week.

      H.    Responsibility
            1.    Intent of Submittal review is to check for capacity, rating, and certain construction
                  features. HVAC Contractor shall ensure that work meets requirements of
                  Contract Documents regarding information that pertains to fabrication processes
                  or means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction; and
                  for coordination of work of this and other Sections. Work shall comply with
                  approved submittals to extent that they agree with Contract Documents.
                  Submittal review shall not diminish responsibility under this Contract for
                  dimensional coordination, quantities, installation, wiring, supports and access for
                  service, nor the shop drawing errors or deviations from requirements of Contract
                  Documents. The Engineer's noting of some errors while overlooking others will
                  not excuse the HVAC Contractor from proceeding in error and will not absolve the
                  Contractor from meeting the full design intent of the associated system(s).
                  Contract Documents requirements are not limited, waived nor superseded in any
                  way by review.
            2.    Inform Contractors, manufacturers, suppliers, etc. of scope and limited nature of
                  review process and enforce compliance with contract documents.


                                              HVAC
                                           23 00 00 - 8
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                       DECEMBER 17, 2012

       I.   In the event that the HVAC Contractor fails to provide Shop Drawings for any of the
            products specified herein:
            1.      The HVAC Contractor shall furnish and install all materials and equipment herein
                    specified in complete accordance with these Specifications.
            2.      If the HVAC Contractor furnishes and installs material and/or equipment that is
                    not in complete accordance with these Specifications, he shall be responsible for
                    the removal of this material and/or equipment. He shall also be responsible for
                    the replacement of this material and/or equipment with material and/or equipment
                    that is in complete accordance with these Specifications, at the direction of the
                    Owner’s Representative.
            3.      Removal and replacement of materials and/or equipment that is not in complete
                    compliance with these Specifications shall be done at no extra cost to the Owner.
            4.      Removal and replacement of materials and/or equipment that is not in complete
                    compliance with these Specifications shall not be allowed as a basis for a claim of
                    delay of completion of the Work.

       J.   Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified.

       K.   Submit Material Safety Data Sheets (MSD) on each applicable product with submittal.


1.10   OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

       A.   Commence preparation of the Operating and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals immediately
            upon receipt of “Approved” or “Approved as Noted” shop drawings and submit each
            section within one month. The final submission shall be no later than two months prior to
            the projected date of Substantial Completion of the Project.

       B.   Submit O&M table of contents in the submittal phase. O&M manuals shall be built as
            submittals are accepted and shall include the individual equipment manufacturer’s data
            retrieval sheet, as per Attachment A in Part IV for input into the Owner’s Maintenance
            Management System. Form shall be provided and completed electronically.

       C.   Each O&M document shall include the manufacturer’s web address for equipment -
            specific O&M information for Internet access by the Owner.

       D.   The manual shall consist of (3) sets of manuals and include (3) sets of CDs, which shall
            contain the scanned content of the entire manual. The manual shall highlight the actual
            equipment used and not be a master catalog of all similar products of the manufacturer.
            The manual shall be submitted for review prior to creation of the CDs.

       E.   The Manual shall contain the following:
            1.    Operations Manual
                  a.      Systems description including all relevant information needed for day-to-
                          day operations and management including:
                          1)        Start-up procedures
                          2)        Shut-down procedures.
                          3)        Trouble-shooting checklist (i.e., common alarms with possible
                                    cause & effect, etc.)
                  b.      Wiring diagrams, schematics, logic diagrams and sequence of operations
                          that accurately depict the controls system.
                  c.      Depiction of each interface screen where programmable logic and visual
                          displays are provided. Descriptors shall be provided to define displayed
                          data, alarms, etc.
                  d.      A single sheet (for ease of removal) of all access codes and passwords
                          necessary to access all levels of control and programming.

                                              HVAC
                                           23 00 00 - 9
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                       DECEMBER 17, 2012

            2.     Maintenance Manual
                   a.     Define all maintenance activities required to ensure system operation
                          within manufacturers specified parameters. Maintenance documentation
                          shall include:
                          1)        Data retrieval sheet
                          2)        Special instructions (i.e., lockout/tag-out, etc.)
                          3)        Special tools (i.e., key, allen wrench, etc.)
                          4)        Tasks
                          5)        Frequency
                          6)        Required materials, lubricants, etc.
                   b.     Provide table of all required activities plotted vs. interval with adequate
                          fill-in-space for “activity completion date” and “comments”. Where
                          multiple instrument readings are required, provide data sheet formatted
                          to accommodate activity.
                   c.     Provide as part of each package, lubricating charts indicating equipment
                          tag number, location, equipment service, greasing and lubricating
                          requirements, lubricants, and intervals.
                   d.     The HVAC Contractor shall furnish spare-parts data for each different
                          item of equipment furnished. The data shall include a complete list of:
                          parts and supplies, with current unit prices, lead time, and source of
                          supply; a list of parts and supplies that are either normally furnished at no
                          extra cost with the purchase of the equipment, or specified hereinafter to
                          be furnished as part of the contract; and a list of additional items
                          recommended by the manufacturer to assure efficient operation for a
                          period of 360 days at the particular installation. The foregoing shall not
                          relieve the HVAC Contractor of any responsibilities under the guarantees
                          specified herein.
                   e.     Provide copy of all warranty information with associated date of
                          substantial completion (commencement of warranty) and end date of
                          coverage. Define all components/subsystems specifically included and
                          excluded.

       F.   Provide O&M manuals for each of the following as a minimum:
            1.      Electric Motors and Starters
            2.      Vibration Isolation
            3.      Fan Powered Terminal Units
            4.      Cabinet Unit Heaters (all types)
            5.      HVAC Control Systems Additions/Modifications


1.11   RECORD DRAWINGS

       A.   Refer to DIVISION 1, General Conditions, for record drawings and procedures to be
            provided under this section, unless specifically noted otherwise in this section.

       B.   Record Drawings (red-line drawings) will be updated by this Contractor daily for review
            with the monthly requisition. The record drawing shall be an accurate depiction of the
            systems as completed, including dimensions (vertical/horizontal) of concealed
            components off fixed building elements.

       C.   The HVAC Foreman shall maintain complete and separate set of prints of Contract
            Drawings at job site at all times and shall record work completed and all changes from
            original Contract Drawings clearly and accurately including work installed as a
            modification or addition to the original design.




                                            HVAC
                                         23 00 00 - 10
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                         DECEMBER 17, 2012

       D.   At completion of work the HVAC Contractor shall prepare a complete set of record
            drawings on AutoCAD showing all systems as actually installed. The Architectural
            background AutoCAD files will be made available for the Contractor’s copying, at his
            expense, to serve as backgrounds for the drawings. The HVAC Contractor shall transfer
            changes from field drawings onto AutoCAD drawings and submit copy of files and three
            sets of prints to Owner’s Representative for comments as to compliance with this section.
            CADD layering as established by the A & E design team shall be maintained with any and
            all changes done by the Contractor.

       E.   The Architect and Engineer are not granting to the Contractor any ownership or property
            interest in the CADD Drawings by the delivery of the CADD Disks to the Contractor. The
            Contractor’s rights to use the CADD disks and the CADD Drawings are limited to use for
            the sole purpose of assisting in the Contractor’s performance of its contractual obligations
            under its contract with respect to the Project. The Architect and Engineer are granting no
            further rights. Any reuse or other use by the Contractor will be at the Contractor’s sole risk
            and without liability to the Architect and Engineer. The Contractor hereby waives and
            releases any losses, claims, damages, liabilities of any nature whatsoever, and costs
            (including attorney fees) arising out of, resulting from, or otherwise related to the use of
            the CADD Disks and CADD Drawings by the Contractor. The Contractor, to the maximum
            extent permitted by law, hereby agrees to indemnify, defend and hold the Architect and
            Engineer harmless from all loses, claims, damages, liabilities, and costs (including
            attorney fees) arising out of, resulting from, or otherwise related to the use of the CADD
            Disks and CADD Drawings by the Contractor.

       F.   Record Drawings, shall show “as-built” condition of all plans, details, sections, piping
            diagrams, control changes and corrections to schedules. Schedules shall show actual
            manufacturer model numbers and capacities of final installed equipment.

       G.   The HVAC Contractor shall submit the record set for approval a minimum of three weeks
            prior to seeking the permanent certificate of occupancy.


1.12   WARRANTIES

       A.   Submit manufacturer's standard replacement warranties for material and equipment
            furnished under this Section. Such warranties shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all
            liabilities which the manufacturer and the HVAC Contractor may have by law or by
            provisions of the Contract Documents.

       B.   All materials, equipment and work furnished under this Section shall be guaranteed
            against all defects in materials and workmanship for a minimum period of one year
            commencing with the Date of Substantial Completion. Where individual equipment
            sections specify longer warrantees, provide the longer warrantee. Any failure due to
            defective material, equipment or workmanship which may develop, shall be corrected at
            no expense to the Owner including all damage to areas, materials and other systems
            resulting from such failures.

       C.   Guarantee that all elements of each system meet the specified performance requirements
            as set forth herein or as indicated on the Drawings.

       D.   Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of the failure of any part of the systems during the
            guarantee period, the affected parts shall be replaced. Any equipment requiring
            excessive service shall be considered defective and shall be replaced.




                                              HVAC
                                           23 00 00 - 11
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                          DECEMBER 17, 2012

1.13   COORDINATION

       A.   Refer to DIVISION 1, General Conditions, for record drawings and procedures to be
            provided under this section, unless specifically noted otherwise in this section.

       B.   Materials and apparatus shall be installed as fast as conditions of the building will permit
            and must be installed promptly when and as required.

       C.   Confer with all other trades relative to location of all apparatus and equipment to be
            installed and select locations so as not to conflict with work of other Sections. Any
            conflicts shall be referred immediately to the Owner’s Representative for decision to
            prevent delay in installation of work. All work and materials placed in violation of this
            clause shall be readjusted to the Owner’s Representative's satisfaction at no expense to
            the Owner.

       D.   Where work of this section will be installed in close proximity to work of other sections or
            where there is evidence that the work of this section may interfere with work of other
            sections, assist in working out space conditions to make satisfactory adjustment. Prepare
            and submit for approval 3/8" scale or larger working drawings and sections, clearly
            showing how the work is to be installed in relation to the work of other sections. If the
            work of this section is installed before coordinating with other trades or so as to cause
            interference with work of other trades, make changes necessary to protect conditions
            without extra charge.

       E.   Keep fully informed as to the shape, size and position of all openings required for all
            apparatus, piping, ductwork, etc., and give information in advance to build openings into
            the work. Furnish all sleeves, pockets, supports and incidentals, and coordinate with the
            Owner’s Representative for the proper setting of same.

       F.   All distribution systems which require pitch or slope such as condensate drains and water
            piping shall have the right of way over those which do not.

       G.   Make reasonable modifications in the work as required by structural interferences,
            interference with work of other trades, or for proper execution of the work without extra
            charge.

       H.   Keep fully informed as to the size, shape and location of all openings required for the
            work of this Section and give full information to all Contractors and the Owner’s
            Representative.


1.14   COORDINATION DRAWINGS

       A.   Provide a set of HVAC coordination drawings for use in verifying required code
            clearances (as well as clearances for operation, repair, removal, and testing) of all
            equipment and for use in coordinating installation of equipment with other trades. Where
            practical, the CADD layering as established by the A&E team for the construction
            documents shall be utilized in the preparation of all coordination drawings. Where CADD
            layering deviates from the A&E team’s layering convention, submit the proposed layering
            system for approval. The CADD layering used shall provide, as a minimum, the flexibility
            of illustrating trade specific items similar to the established A&E team layering standard.

       B.   The intent of the coordination drawings is to identify and resolve installation conflicts prior
            to fabrication and installation of any MEP trade.



                                              HVAC
                                           23 00 00 - 12
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                         DECEMBER 17, 2012

       C.   The HVAC Contractor’s floor plans shall be the basis for floor plan coordination. The
            Electrical Contractor’s reflected ceiling plans shall be the basis for reflected ceiling plan
            coordination.

       D.   The CADD Drawings prepared by the Architect and Engineer contain representations of
            certain elements of the Project, and are not necessarily complete, nor are the CADD
            Drawings comparable or identical to final construction drawings. The Architect and
            Engineer make no representations or warranties with respect to the accuracy or
            completeness of the CADD Drawings. The Architect and Engineer do not recommend
            that the Contractor use the CADD Drawings in connection with the preparation of shop
            drawings. Should the Contractor choose to do so, however, the Contractor shall carefully
            review and compare the CADD Drawings with the corresponding final construction
            drawings to verify their accuracy and identify all discrepancies, differences, and
            inconsistencies in design, locations, dimensions, scope, and all other respects between
            the CADD Drawings and the corresponding final construction drawings. The Contractor,
            shall base the preparation and submission of shop drawings, and in general, shall base
            the performance of all its obligations with respect to the Project upon the information
            contained in the final construction drawings and not the CADD drawings. Nothing shall be
            construed as to relieve the Contractor of any of its obligations (such as, by way of
            illustration, the obligation to make field measurements or to coordinate drawings) under
            its contract with respect to the Project.

       E.   HVAC Coordination Drawings shall be prepared as outlined below.
            1.    Prepare HVAC Coordination Drawings showing all HVAC work to be installed as
                  part of Section 23 00 00. The Coordination Drawings shall be created using
                  AutoCAD and shall have a scale of not less than 3/8“ for mechanical/electrical
                  rooms and ¼” for all other areas.
            2.    The HVAC Coordination Drawings shall show all equipment, pipes, sleeves,
                  inserts, ducts, registers, diffusers and supports.          Drawings shall include
                  dimensions and elevation tags for all equipment, devices and material. Under no
                  conditions shall any pipe or conduit pass through any ductwork system
            3.    After incorporating all trades, resolve any areas of conflicts between trades under
                  the direction of the General Contractor/Construction Manager and submit fully
                  coordinated drawings to the Owner’s Representative.
            4.    Do not install any of this work prior to the preparation and Engineer’s review of
                  the final Coordination Drawings. If HVAC work proceeds prior to the final
                  Coordination Drawings, any changes to the HVAC work to correct the
                  interferences and conflicts which result will be made by this Contractor at no
                  additional cost to the Owner.
            5.    Coordination Drawings are for this Contractor's and Owner’s Representative's
                  use during construction and shall not be construed as replacing any shop, "as-
                  built", or Record Drawings required elsewhere in these Contract Documents.
            6.    Owner’s Representative's review of Coordination Drawings shall not relieve this
                  Contractor from his overall responsibility for coordination of all work performed
                  pursuant to the Contract or from any other requirements of the Contract.


1.15   INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

       A.   It is the intention of the Specifications and Drawings to call for complete, finished work,
            tested and ready for continuous operation. Any apparatus, appliance, material or work
            not shown on the Drawings, but mentioned in the Specifications or vice versa, or any
            incidental accessories necessary to make the work complete in all respects and ready for
            operation, even if not particularly specified, shall be provided by the HVAC Contractor or
            his/her Contractors, without additional expense to the Owner.



                                              HVAC
                                           23 00 00 - 13
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                          DECEMBER 17, 2012

       B.    The Drawings are generally diagrammatic. The locations of all items that are not
             definitely fixed by dimensions are approximate only. The exact locations must be
             determined at the site and shall have the approval of the Architect before being installed.
             The HVAC Contractor shall follow Drawings, including shop drawings, in laying out work
             and shall check the Drawings of other trades to verify spaces in which work will be
             installed. Maintain maximum headroom and space conditions. Where space conditions
             appear inadequate, notify the Architect before proceeding with the installation. The HVAC
             Contractor shall, without extra charge, make reasonable modifications in the layout as
             needed to prevent conflict with work of other trades or for proper execution of the work.

       C.    Any requests for information (RFI) for resolving an apparent conflict or unclarity, or a
             request for additional detail, shall include a sketch or equivalent description of Contractors
             proposed solution.

       D.    Sizes of ducts and pipes and routing are shown, but it is not intended to show every offset
             and fitting, nor every structural difficulty that may be encountered. To carry out the intent
             and purpose of the Drawings, all necessary parts to make complete approved working
             systems ready for use, shall be furnished without extra charge.


1.16   INSPECTION OF SITE CONDITIONS

       A.    Prior to submission of bid, visit the site and review the related construction documents to
             determine the conditions under which the Work has to be performed. Send a report, in
             writing, to the Owner’s Representative, noting any conditions which might adversely affect
             the Work of this Section of the Specifications.


1.17   SURVEY AND MEASUREMENTS

       A.    Base all required measurements, horizontal and vertical, from referenced points
             established with the Owner’s Representative and be responsible for correctly laying out
             the Work required under this Section of the Specification.

       B.    In the event of discrepancy between actual measurements and those indicated, notify the
             Owner’s Representative in writing and do not proceed with the related work until
             instructions have been issued.


1.18   DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

       A.    No materials shall be delivered or stored on site until Shop Drawings have been
             approved.

       B.    All manufactured materials shall delivered to the site in original packages or containers
             bearing the manufacturer's labels and product identification.

       C.    Protect materials against dampness.        Store off floors, under cover, and adequately
             protected from damage.

       D.    Inspect all equipment and materials, upon receipt at the job site, for damage and
             conformance to approved shop drawings.




                                               HVAC
                                            23 00 00 - 14
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                         DECEMBER 17, 2012

1.19   PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY

       A.   This Contractor shall be responsible for the care and protection of all work included under
            this Section until the completion and final acceptance of this Contract.

       B.   Protect all equipment and materials from damage from all causes including, but not
            limited to, fire, vandalism and theft. All materials and equipment damaged or stolen shall
            be repaired or replaced with equal material or equipment at no additional cost to the
            Owner.

       C.   Protect all equipment, outlets and openings with temporary plugs, caps and covers.
            Protect work and materials of other trades from damage that might be caused by work or
            workmen under this Section and make good damage thus caused.

       D.   Damaged materials are to be removed from the site; no site storage of damaged
            materials will be allowed.


1.20   SUPERVISION

       A.   Provide a competent Supervisor with a minimum of 5 years of experience in HVAC
            Construction Supervision who shall be in charge of the HVAC work at the site.


1.21   SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

       A.   Life safety and accident prevention shall be a primary consideration. Comply with all of
            the safety requirements of the owner and OSHA throughout the entire construction period
            of the project.

       B.   Furnish, place and maintain proper guards and any other necessary construction required
            to secure safety of life and property.


1.22   SCHEDULE

       A.   Construct work in sequence under provisions of Division 1 and as coordinated with the
            Owner’s Representative.


1.23   HOISTING, SCAFFOLDING AND PLANKING

       A.   The work to be done under this Section of the Specifications shall include the furnishing,
            set-up and maintenance of all derricks, hoisting machinery, cranes, helicopters, scaffolds,
            staging and planking as required for the work.


1.24   CUTTING AND PATCHING

       A.   Provide all cutting and patching necessary for the proper installation of work to be
            performed under this Section.

       B.   All work shall be fully coordinated with all phases of construction, in order to minimize the
            requirements for cutting and patching.



                                              HVAC
                                           23 00 00 - 15
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                          DECEMBER 17, 2012

       C.   Form all chases or openings for the installation of the work of this Section of the
            specifications, or cut the same in existing work and see that all sleeves or forms are in the
            work and properly set in ample time to prevent delays. Be responsible that all such
            chases, openings, and sleeves are located accurately and are of the proper size and
            shape and consult with the Owner’s Representative and all trades concerned in reference
            to this work. Confine the cutting to the smallest extent possible consistent with the work
            to be done. In no case shall piers or structural members be cut without the approval of
            the Owner’s Representative.

       D.   Fit around, close up, repair, patch, and point around the work specified herein to match
            the existing adjacent surfaces and to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative.

       E.   Fill and patch all openings or holes left in the existing structures by the removal of existing
            equipment that is part of this Section of the Specifications.

       F.   All of this work shall be carefully done by workmen qualified to do such work and with the
            proper and smallest tools applicable.

       G.   Any cost caused by defective or ill-timed work required by this Section of the
            specifications shall be borne by the Contractor.

       H.   When, in order to accommodate the work required under this Section of the
            specifications, finished materials of other trades must be cut or fitted, furnish the
            necessary drawings and information to the trades whose materials must be cut or fitted.


1.25   SLEEVES, INSERTS AND ANCHOR BOLTS

       A.   Coordinate with other trades the location of and maintaining in proper positions, sleeves,
            inserts and anchor bolts to be supplied and/or set in place under this section of the
            specifications. In the event of incorrectly located preset sleeves, inserts and anchor bolts,
            etc., all required cutting and patching of finished work shall be done under this section of
            the specifications.

       B.   All penetrations and associated fire stopping shall be installed in accordance with the fire
            stopping manufacturer’s listed installation details. Provide sleeves for all penetrations
            where required by the listed detail, for the penetration of all mechanical room floors and
            where specifically required on the drawings.

       C.   Field drilling (core drilling), when required, shall be performed under this section of the
            specifications, after receipt of approval by the Owner’s Representative.
            1.       When coring can not be avoided, provide ¼ inch pilot hole prior to coring. When
                     coring through floor or slab, verify location of core on floor below and protect and
                     piping, ductwork, wiring, furniture, personnel, etc., below the location of the core.


1.26   SUPPLEMENTARY STEEL, CHANNELS AND SUPPORTS

       A.   Provide all supplementary steel, factory fabricated channels and supports required for
            proper installation, mounting and support of all equipment and systems provided under
            this section of the specification.

       B.   Supplementary steel and factory fabricated channels shall be firmly connected to building
            construction in a manner approved by the Owner’s Representative, as shown on the
            drawings, or hereinafter specified.


                                              HVAC
                                           23 00 00 - 16
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                         DECEMBER 17, 2012

       C.    The type and size of the supporting channels and supplementary steel provided under this
             section of the specifications shall be determined by the Contractor and shall be of
             sufficient strength and size to allow only a minimum deflection in conformance with the
             manufacturer's requirements for loading.

       D.    All supplementary steel and factory fabricated channels shall be installed in a neat and
             workmanlike manner parallel to the walls, floors and ceiling construction. All turns shall
             be made with 90 degree and 45 degree fittings, as required to suit the construction and
             installation conditions.

       E.    All supplementary steel including factory fabricated channels, supports and fittings shall
             be galvanized steel, aluminum, or stainless steel where exposed or subject to rust
             producing atmosphere and shall be manufactured by Unistrut, H-strut, Powerstrut, ERICO
             or approved equal.


1.27   HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

       A.    Dispose of all hazardous materials in accordance with Federal and State laws. All
             handling shall conform to EPA requirements. A uniform hazardous waste manifest shall
             be prepared for all disposals and returned with all applicable signoffs prior to application
             for final payment. Provide breakout cost for this scope.

       B.    Recovered refrigerant shall be recycled by a licensed facility approved by the Owner’s
             Representative.

       C.    Removed equipment or fluids containing any hazardous materials such as ethylene
             glycol, oil, mercury or chromate shall be recycled by a licensed facility approved by the
             Owner’s Representative.

       D.    Where it has been identified that asbestos-containing material exists within the scope
             limits, refer to the Asbestos Abatement specification section for requirements. Where
             insulation is removed, provide new insulation (types and thicknesses as specified in this
             section). Where scope is not defined, provide unit prices with bid for all pipe and duct
             sizes involved.


1.28   ACCESSIBILITY

       A.    All work provided under this Section of the Specification shall be installed so that parts
             requiring periodic inspection, maintenance and repair are readily accessible. Work of this
             trade shall not infringe upon clearances required by equipment of other trades, especially
             code required clearances to electrical gear. Minor deviations from the drawings may be
             made to accomplish this, but changes of substantial magnitude shall not be made prior to
             written approval from the Owner’s Representative.


1.29   SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS

       A.    Submit working plans and calculations reviewed, signed and stamped by a professional
             engineer who is registered in the State where the project is located and has specific
             experience in seismic calculations, certifying that the plans meet all seismic requirements
             established by authorities having jurisdiction over the project, including bracing for any
             hazardous exhaust systems.



                                              HVAC
                                           23 00 00 - 17
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                          DECEMBER 17, 2012

1.30   ELECTRICAL WORK

       A.   All electrical apparatus and controls furnished, and the installation thereof, as a part of the
            HVAC work, equipment, and controls shall conform to applicable requirements under
            DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL.


1.31   PROJECT CLOSEOUT

       A.   Certificates Of Approval
            1.       Upon completion of all work, provide certificates of inspections from the following
                     equipment manufacturers stating that the authorized factory representatives have
                     inspected and tested the operation of their respective equipment and found the
                     equipment to be in satisfactory operating condition and installed per the
                     manufacturers installation instructions and requirements.
                     a.      Automatic Temperature Controls
                     b.      Boilers
                     c.      Fan Boxes with Electric Heat

       B.   Construction Observations By The Engineer
            1.     The engineer is contracted to make one progress site visit during construction,
                   one substantial completion (punch list) site visit for determining substantial
                   completion and one Final site visit to determine if all work is complete.
            2.     The Trade Contractors and the General Contractor are required to inspect their
                   own work and make any corrections to the work to comply with the specifications
                   and the contract documents. It is not the responsibility of the engineer to develop
                   lists of incomplete work items.
            3.     Progress Site Visits
                   a.         The purpose of the progress site visit by the engineer is to observe if the
                              work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents.
                   b.         The engineer will prepare a field report which will note in general the work
                              completed since the last observation visit, work found not to be in
                              accordance with the contract documents and work not corrected since
                              the previous observation visit.

       C.   Substantial Completion
            1.     When the Contractor considers the Work under this Section is substantially
                   complete, the Contractor shall submit written notice, through the General
                   Contractor, with a detailed list of items remaining to be completed or corrected
                   and a schedule of when each remaining work item will be completed. Should the
                   engineer determine the list of remaining work does not constitute substantial
                   completion the engineer will notify the Architect and/or Owner and he will not
                   make a substantial completion site visit.
            2.     The following items shall be completed prior to the written request for substantial
                   completion site visit:
                   a.      Certification of successful operation of all systems.
                   b.      Training of the owner’s personnel in the operation of the systems.
                   c.      Record Drawings in accordance with the contract specifications.
                   d.      Operation and Maintenance manuals.
                   e.      Testing reports.
                   f.      Balancing reports.
                   g.      Manufacturers certificates of approvals.
                   h.      Emergency contact list for reporting of malfunctioning equipment during
                           the warrantee period.
                   i.      Contractors Project Completion certificate in accordance with the building
                           code requirements.

                                              HVAC
                                           23 00 00 - 18
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                         DECEMBER 17, 2012

            3.      Should the Engineer, during the substantial completion visit, observe that the
                    Work is substantially complete, s/he will provide a written listing of the observed
                    deficiencies referred herein as the Punch List. The Punch List will provide for a
                    place for the Contractor and general Contractor to sign off and date each item
                    individually indicating that the observed deficiency item has been corrected.
            4.      Should the Engineer, during the substantial completion site visit, observe that the
                    Work is not substantially complete, s/he will provide, a written list of the major
                    deficiencies and a reason for the work not being considered substantially
                    complete.
            5.      The Contractor shall remedy all deficiencies listed in the punch list within the time
                    frame required by the contract.

      D.    Engineers Construction Completion Certification
            1.     Where required by the applicable code, the Engineers Construction Completion
                   Certification will be issued by RDK Engineers when all life safety and health
                   related issues are complete, all required functional tests are complete and all
                   reports are complete. The following is a minimum listing of the required systems
                   to be tested with reports generated indicating they are complete and ready for
                   use:
                   a.       Air Balancing
                   b.       Duct Pressure/Leakage Tests
            2.     There shall be NO outstanding items identified on the punch list for scope within
                   any of these categories.

      E.    Final Completion
            1.      The following items shall be submitted prior to the written request for Final
                    completion:
                    a.      Revised Substantial Completion items to be resubmitted in accordance
                            with the review process comments.
                    b.      Warranties commencing the date of Substantial completion
                    c.      Individual Signed and dated Punch List acknowledging completion of all
                            punch list items
            2.      When the Contractor considers all of the punch list work items complete, the
                    Contractor shall submit written notice through the General Contractor that all
                    Punch List items are complete and resolved and the work is ready for final
                    observation site visit. The signature lines for completion of each punch list item
                    shall be signed by the Contractor indicating the work is complete and signed by
                    the General Contractor indicating s/he has inspected the work and found it to be
                    complete. Should the Engineer find the work to be finally complete and all Punch
                    List items are complete the Engineer will make a recommendation to the
                    Architect or Owner. If the Engineer has found the punch list work to be
                    incomplete during final inspection a written listing of the observed deficiencies will
                    be prepared by the Engineer.

      F.    Contractor’s Project Completion Certificate
            1.     Upon completion of work and prior to request for Certificate of Occupancy, each
                   Trade Contractor and the General Contractor shall issue a certificate stating that
                   work has been installed generally consistent with construction documents and all
                   applicable codes. RDK Engineers can furnish a blank Contractor’s certificate form
                   upon request. The certificate shall certify:
                   a.       Execution of all work has been installed in accordance with the approved
                            construction documents.
                   b.       Execution and control of all methods of construction was in a safe and
                            satisfactory manner in accordance with all applicable local, state and
                            federal statutes and regulations.



                                              HVAC
                                           23 00 00 - 19
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                          DECEMBER 17, 2012

            2.      The certificate shall include the following information:
                    a.      Project.
                    b.      Permit Number.
                    c.      Location.
                    d.      Construction Documents.
                    e.      Date on Plans and Specifications submitted for approval and issuance of
                            the Building Permit.
                    f.      Addendum(a) and Revision Dates.
            3.      The certificate shall be signed by the Contractor and include the following:
                    a.      Signature.
                    b.      Date.
                    c.      Company.
                    d.      License Number.
                    e.      License Expiration Date.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1   SLEEVES

      A.    Size sleeves to provide a minimum of 1 inch clearance around ductwork, and to allow
            continuous runs of insulation where specified. Ensure that insulated piping and ductwork
            do not touch sleeves.

      B.    Pack clearance spaces with Thermafibre Firestopping. Caulk with fire-resistant, resilient
            waterproof compound, RectorSeal Biostop 500+ or equal. Ensure that fire ratings of
            floors and walls are maintained.

      C.    Duct sleeves shall be minimum 18 gauge galvanized steel. Provide adequate bracing for
            support of sleeves during concrete and masonry work. For fire rated floors and walls,
            build fire dampers into structure to attain fire rated construction, in a manner acceptable
            to the local and state authorities.

      D.    Cover exposed duct sleeves in finished areas with 18 gauge galvanized steel plates in the
            form of duct collars. Fix in position with non-ferrous metal screws.


2.2   FIRESTOPPING

      A.    Provide asbestos-free firestopping material capable of maintaining an effective barrier
            against flame, gases, and temperature. Provide noncombustible firestopping that is
            nontoxic to human beings during installation or during fire conditions. Devices and
            equipment for firestopping service shall be UL FRD listed or FM P7825 approved for use
            with applicable construction, and penetrating items.
            1.      Fire Hazard Classification: Material shall have a flame spread of 25 or less, a
                    smoke developed rating of 50 or less when tested in accordance with UL 723 or
                    UL listed and accepted.
            2.      Firestopping Rating: Firestopping materials shall be UL FRD listed or FM P7825
                    approved for "F" and "T" ratings at least equal to fire-rating of fire wall or floor in
                    which penetrated openings are to be protected, except that "F" and "T" ratings
                    may be 3 hours for firestopping in through-penetrations of 4-hour fire rated wall or
                    floor.




                                              HVAC
                                           23 00 00 - 20
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                       DECEMBER 17, 2012

2.3   VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS

      A.    General
            1.      For each seismic restraint, provide certified calculations to verify adequacy to
                    meet the following design requirements:
            2.      Ability to accommodate relative seismic displacements of supported item
                    between points of support.
            3.      Ability to accommodate the required seismic forces.
            4.      For each respective set of anchor bolts provide calculations to verify adequacy to
                    meet combined seismic-induced sheer and tension forces.
            5.      For each weldment between structure and item subject to seismic force, provide
                    calculations to verify adequacy.
            6.      Restraints shall maintain the restrained item in a captive position without short
                    circuiting the vibration isolation.
            7.      Seismic restraint shall be installed in accordance with the State Building Code.
                    As a minimum provide:
                    a.        Maximum distance between braces in the lateral direction shall be 30 feet
                              for piping 2” and smaller and 40’ for piping 2-1/2” and larger.
                    b.        Maximum distances between braces in the longitudinal direction shall be
                              80 feet.
                    c.        Tops of risers shall be provided with 4-way braces.
                    d.        Flexible couplings shall be provided within 12” of floor and wall non-
                              breakable penetrations and within 24” of all building expansion joints.
                    e.        Hangers closest to the sway bracing shall be installed with an extended
                              rod to the piping to resist upward movement of the piping.
                    f.        Lateral sway bracing shall not be required on piping supported with rods
                              less than 6” long.
            8.      Seismic bracing for lateral and longitudinal bracing may be of the splayed wire
                    (tension type), or pipe and fixed hanger (tension/compression type), and shall be
                    complete with manufacturer’s recommended sizing, locations, and calculations.
                    One system only (tension or compression/tension) shall be installed.
            9.      C clamps for attachment to the building structure must be provided with retaining
                    straps.
            10.     4-Way bracing may be of the splayed wire type or fixed angle brace with U-bolt.
                    a.        All vibration isolators shall be the product of a single approved
                              manufacturer or as manufactured by an individual mechanical equipment
                              manufacturer.
                    b.        Model numbers hereinafter specified are from Mason Industries. Other
                              equivalent units by Consolidated Kinetics, Vibration Mountings and
                              Controls or equal are acceptable.

      B.    Fan Boxes, Exhaust Fans, Supply Fans, Return Fans, Transfer Fans, Unit Heaters, etc.
            1.     Steel spring and 0.3" deflection neoprene element in series. The neoprene
                   element shall be molded with a rod isolation bushing that passes through the
                   hanger box. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50%
                   of the rated deflection.
            2.     Mason Model DNHS, 1" deflection.

      C.    Ductwork
            1.     The first five hanger locations on the discharge side of each AHU and HV unit
                   shall be provided with double deflection neoprene hangers.
            2.     Mason Model HD or WHD.

      D.    Flexible Connectors
            1.       Double sphere EPDM connectors with connection type to match adjacent
                     equipment and water piping up to 175 psig and 210°F shall be equal to Mason


                                             HVAC
                                          23 00 00 - 21
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                      DECEMBER 17, 2012

                    Model SFDEJ. Units shall have construction equal to multilayered Kevlar tire cord
                    fabric reinforcement with peroxide cured EPDM cover, liner and fabric fractioning.
                    Units shall be rated for a minimum of 200 psig at 250°F. For flanged units,
                    provide control rods or cables to restrict maximum travel to the manufacturer’s
                    standard limits. Flexible connectors shall be installed as shown on drawings.


2.4   DUCTWORK

      A.    Reference Standards
            1.     Material, construction and installation shall meet applicable requirements of the
                   current editions (unless otherwise shown) of the following standards and
                   references, unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on the
                   Drawings (such as hazardous exhaust systems):
                                  Standard                               As Applicable to
                    SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction            Sheet Metal Ductwork; Duct Liners;
                    Standards (Metal and Flexible, 2005) Adhesives; Fasteners; Flexible
                                                             Ductwork
                    SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage             Duct Leakage Testing
                    Test Manual
                    NFPA 90A                                 Fire Dampers; Fire Resistance
                                                             Standards for Ducts and Liners


      B.    General
            1.      Provide all required supporting and hanging devices to attach entire HVAC
                    system including ductwork and equipment, and to prevent vibration. Include
                    vertical and horizontal supports as required by codes to meet minimum applicable
                    earthquake resistance standards.
            2.      Ductwork shall be free from vibration at all times.
            3.      No pipe conduit, hanger, Architectural element or structural member shall pass
                    through duct without Engineer’s written approval. Where the pipe or conduit
                    cannot possibly be relocated and when written approval has been obtained,
                    increase duct size to maintain full cross-sectional area at point of interference.
                    Provide streamlined enclosure for pipe or conduit, per SMACNA.
            4.      All offsets and transformations necessary due to structural conditions shall
                    maintain the full cross-sectional area of ductwork shown on Drawings.

      C.    Ductwork Pressure Class, Seal Class, and maximum design velocities shall be as shown
            on the drawings and as specified herein.

      D.    Exhaust Systems:
            1.     Ductwork shall be built of minimum G-90 galvanized steel per the following table:

           DIAMETER OF             MINIMUM DUCT GUAGE                 SEAL       TRAVERSE          MINIMUM
             DUCT OR                                                 CLASS        JOINTS          REINFORCE
           MAXIMUM SIDE                                                                              MENT
            DIMENSION                                                                              SPACING
                                NONABRASIVE           ABRASIVE
                                 MATERIALS            MATERIALS
              0-8 inches            24                   20             A         Min. 1” lap          5’ – 0”
                                                                                     joint
             9-18 inches               22                   18          A         Min. 1” lap          5’ – 0”
                                                                                     joint
             19-30 inches              20                   14          A         Min. 1” lap          5’ – 0”
                                                                                     joint

                                               HVAC
                                            23 00 00 - 22
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                         DECEMBER 17, 2012

            Over 30 inches              18                   14           A         Min. 1” lap         2” – 6”
                                                                                       joint


      E.    Duct Construction
            1.     Unless otherwise specified, use the pressure classifications for the types of
                   ductwork as shown on the drawings.
            2.     Ducts required to be continuously welded and with all penetrations sealed
                   (damper rods, access doors, etc.) shall be liquid-tight and shall be airtight. The
                   leakage test shall yield a zero leak rate. All welding shall use inert gas shielding
                   with filler rod equal to or exceeding the base metal properties.
            3.     Non-welded duct seals and joints shall be as listed by SMACNA or Ductmate for
                   the specified pressure and seal classes.
            4.     Material: Unless otherwise specified or shown on drawings, all ductwork shall be
                   fabricated from G-60 galvanized steel or 316 stainless steel. Galvanized steel
                   shall meet AST A525 and A527 standards and stainless steel shall meet ASTM
                   A240 standards.
            5.     Round ductwork shall be furnished where shown or called for on the drawings,
                   and may be substituted for rectangular, except for shower exhaust, as an option
                   to the Sheet Metal Contractor when approved by the engineer, it can be easily fit
                   in the available space and is round duct and fittings shall be of spiral lockseam
                   construction.
            6.     Elbows and Bends:
                   a.        Wherever possible, all elbows and bends for rectangular ducts shall be
                             full radius (centerline radius of 1.5 times duct width). Elbows for grease
                             exhaust shall have a centerline radius of 2.0 times duct width, unless this
                             physically can’t fit, then full radius may be used. Turning vanes and
                             mitered elbows are not allowed.
                   b.        Where centerline radius must be less than 1.5 times duct width (on
                             supply, return and exhaust ductwork other than grease exhaust) in the
                             plane of bend, elbows shall be minimum 2” inside (not centerline) radius
                             throat with radius heel and full length splitter vanes installed as shown on
                             drawings or per SMACNA. Splitter vanes are not required on bends less
                             than 30°. When centerline radius (r) divided by the duct width (w) is less
                             than 1.5, provide the following number of splitter vanes:
                                       r/w           No. of Vanes for Elbow     No. of Vanes for Elbow
                                                        Angle of 45° - 90°         Angle of 30° - 44°
                                  1.49 – 0.70                   1                           0
                                   0.69 - 0.60                  2                           1
                                 Under – 0.60                   3                           2
                   c.        For round ductwork provide stamped elbows, with centerline radius equal
                             to 1-1/2 times duct diameter, or sealed, gored elbows as follows:
                                               Elbow Angle             No. of Gores
                                                   0 – 36                    2
                                                  37 – 72                    3
                                                  73 – 90                    5
                   d.        Elbows for flat oval ducts shall have centerline radius equal to 1-1/2 times
                             duct diameter in plane of bend, or sealed, gored elbows with gores as
                             specified above for round ducts.
            7.     Transitions: Diverging air flow transitions shall be made with each side pitched
                   out a maximum of 15 degrees, for an included angle of 30 degrees. Transitions
                   for converging air flow shall be made with each side pitched in a maximum of 30
                   degrees, for an included angle of 60 degrees, or shall be as indicated. Factory-
                   fabricated reducing fittings for systems using round duct sections when formed to
                   the shape of the ASME short flow nozzle, need not comply with the maximum
                   angles specified.

                                                HVAC
                                             23 00 00 - 23
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                           DECEMBER 17, 2012

            8.      Metallic Flexible Duct: Metallic flexible type duct shall be two-ply aluminum or
                    single ply stainless steel, self supporting to 8-foot spans. Duct shall be of
                    corrugated/interlocked, folded and knurled type seam construction, bendable
                    without damage through 180 degrees with a throat radius equal to 1/2 duct
                    diameter. Duct shall conform to UL 181 and shall be rated for positive or
                    negative working pressure of 15 inches water gauge at 350 degrees F when duct
                    is aluminum, and 650 degrees F when duct is galvanized steel or stainless steel.
            9.      Insulated Nonmetallic Flexible Duct Runouts: Flexible duct runouts shall be used
                    only where indicated. Runout length shall be as shown on the drawings, but shall
                    in no case exceed 4 to 6 feet. Runouts shall be preinsulated, factory fabricated,
                    and shall comply with NFPA 90A and UL 181. Either field or factory applied vapor
                    barrier shall be provided. Where coil induction or high velocity units are supplied
                    with vertical air inlets, a streamlined and vaned and mitered elbow transition piece
                    shall be provided for connection to the flexible duct or hose. The last elbow to
                    these units, other than the vertical air inlet type, shall be a die-stamped elbow and
                    not a flexible connector. Insulated flexible connectors may be used as runouts.
                    The insulated material and vapor barrier shall conform to the requirements of this
                    specification 23 00 00, (Insulation paragraph). The insulation material surface
                    shall not be exposed to the air stream.
            10.     General Service Duct Connectors: Flexible duct connectors approximately 6
                    inches in width shall be provided where sheet metal connections are made to
                    fans or where ducts of dissimilar metals are connected. For round/oval ducts, the
                    flexible material shall be secured by stainless steel or zinc-coated, iron clinch-type
                    draw bands. For rectangular ducts, the flexible material locked to metal collars
                    shall be installed using normal duct construction methods. The composite
                    connector system shall comply with NFPA 701 2004 (Standard of Methods of Fire
                    Tests for Propagation of Textiles and Film) and be flame retardant.
            11.     High Temperature Service Duct Connections (such as kitchen grease duct):
                    Material shall be approximately 3/32 inch thick, 35 to 40-ounce per square yard
                    weight, plain weave fibrous glass cloth with, nickel/chrome wire reinforcement for
                    service in excess of 1200 degrees F. Connections shall be listed and labeled for
                    the application.

      F.    Ductwork Accessories
            1.     Access Doors shall be rated for the duct pressure class they are installed in. For
                   hazardous exhaust systems, minimum gauge shall be the same as the duct.
                   a.     Frame: same materials as duct with seal
                   b.     Door: hinged, with exterior (and, for insulation ducts, interior) panel.
                   c.     Locks: doors 16" and under, one lock doors over 16", two locks
                   d.     Seals: foam gaskets for ultra-low leakage
                   e.     Insulation (for insulation ducts): ½" foam board with aluminum foil face,
                          0.12K at 75 F.
                   f.     Manufacturer: Ruskin model ADH-2, Inland Steel, Miami Carey or
                          approved equal.
            2.     Sizes:
                               SCHEDULE OF DUCTWORK ACCESS DOOR SIZES
                    Duct width (inches)                         Access door size (inches)
                            <=10                                           10 x 6
                           12 - 16                                         12 x 8
                          Over 16                                         18 x 24
            3.      Provide at all fire dampers, air inlets, motorized dampers, smoke detectors, duct
                    mounted coils, humidifiers, air flow switches, where specified for cleanouts and
                    where shown on the drawings.


                                              HVAC
                                           23 00 00 - 24
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                       DECEMBER 17, 2012

            4.    Manual Volume Dampers
                  a.       Manual volume dampers shall be provided where shown on the Drawings
                           at every branch take off from the main duct, and elsewhere as required
                           by the Balancing Contractor, and shall be single or multiple blade type
                           with sleeve bearings, interlocking blades and frame shall be of the same
                           material as the ductwork. In ducts over 15" deep provide multiple
                           opposed blade type, gang operated dampers with a maximum blade
                           width of 8". Damper blades shall be fabricated of 16 gauge steel with
                           hemmed edges, and a maximum length of 48". Damper operating rod
                           shall be full blade length extended through the duct to externally mounted
                           bearing plates. On insulated ductwork, bearing plates shall be installed
                           flush with insulation finish and fastened to the duct. Operating lever shall
                           be of the indicating type with locking quadrant.
                  b.       For dampers in inaccessible locations, such as above gypsum ceilings
                           provide remote cable actuated dampers.
            5.    Backdraft Dampers
                  a.       Back draft dampers shall be provided where indicated and required, and
                           shall consist of a set of externally adjustable counter weighted louvers
                           that open automatically due to excess pressure and prevent reverse flow.
                           The edges of the blades shall be provided with seals to prevent rattling
                           and minimize air leakage. The damper blades shall be supported on
                           metal frames designed for wall mounting as indicated. The dampers
                           shall be rated for operation up to a minimum of 2,500 fpm and be
                           standard catalog products of Ruskin, Vent Products, American Warming
                           and Ventilating or approved equal.
            6.    Air Deflectors and Branch Connections
                  a.       Air deflectors shall be provided at duct mounted supply outlets, at takeoff
                           or extension collars to supply outlets, at duct branch takeoff connections,
                           and at 90 degree elbows, as well as at locations as indicated on the
                           drawings or otherwise specified. Conical branch connections or 45
                           degree entry connections may be used in lieu of deflectors or extractors
                           for branch connections. All air deflectors, except those installed in 90
                           degree elbows, shall be provided with an approved means of adjustment.
                            Adjustment shall be made from easily accessible means inside the duct
                           or from an adjustment with sturdy lock on the face of the duct. When
                           installed on ducts to be thermally insulated, external adjustments shall be
                           provided with stand-off mounting brackets, integral with the adjustment
                           device, to provide clearance between the duct surface and the
                           adjustment device not less than the thickness of the thermal insulation.
                           Air deflectors shall be factory-fabricated units consisting of curved turning
                           vanes or louver blades designed to provide uniform air distribution and
                           change of direction with minimum turbulence or pressure loss. Air
                           deflectors shall be factory or field assembled. Blade air deflectors, also
                           called blade air extractors, shall be approved factory fabricated units
                           consisting of equalizing grid and adjustable blade and lock. Adjustment
                           shall be easily made from the face of the diffuser or by position
                           adjustment and lock external to the duct. Stand-off brackets shall be
                           provided on insulated ducts and are described herein. Fixed air
                           deflectors, also called turning vanes, shall be provided in 90 degree
                           elbows.
            7.    Volume Extractors
                  a.       Volume extractors Shall be manufactured by the drum louver or supply
                           air register manufacturer of all aluminum construction.              Position
                           adjustment operator shall be key-operated screw with access through
                           face of register. Extractor blades shall be spaced 1" on center.
            8.    Blankoff Plates


                                            HVAC
                                         23 00 00 - 25
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                         DECEMBER 17, 2012

                    a.      Any blankoff plates or conversions required for mounting control dampers
                            or coils shall be the responsibility of the Sheet Metal Contractor.
            9.      Insulated Metal Panels
                    a.      Provide 18 gauge, insulated double wall sandwich construction, 1½" thick
                            where called for on the Drawings and for blanking off unused portions of
                            wall louvers.
            10.     Test Openings
                    a.      Provide instrument test opening enclosures in the ductwork at the
                            discharge of each fan and fan coil, inlet of each fan and fan coil, and
                            where directed by the Balancing Contractor. The enclosures shall be
                            installed before the application of the insulation and shall be of the proper
                            height to extend beyond the insulation. The attachment of the test
                            opening enclosure shall be made airtight.
            11.     Flexible connections shall be 6" wide connections constructed of heavy glass
                    fabric double coated with neoprene. Flexible connections shall meet the
                    requirements of the National Board of Fire Underwriters.
            12.     Duct Clean Out Doors - Provide clean out doors, sixteen feet on center, for all
                    horizontally installed ductwork and at each length of straight duct run less than 16
                    feet. Provide access door constructed of same material as duct work served.
                    Provide two hand operated plastic knobs with threaded brass inserts for opening
                    and tight sealing of the door. Clean out doors shall be as specified for access
                    doors.

      G.    Duct Sleeves, Framed Prepared Openings, Closure Collars
            1.      Duct Sleeves
                    a.      Duct sleeves shall be provided for round ducts 15 inches in diameter or
                            less passing through floors, walls, ceilings, or roof, and installed during
                            construction of the floor, wall, ceiling, or roof. Round ducts larger than 15
                            inches in diameter and square, rectangular, and oval ducts passing
                            through floors, walls, ceilings, or roof shall be installed through framed
                            prepared openings. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper
                            size and location of sleeves and prepared openings. Sleeves and framed
                            openings are also required where grilles, registers, and diffusers are
                            installed at the openings. Framed prepared openings shall be fabricated
                            from 20 gauge galvanized steel, unless otherwise indicated. Where
                            sleeves are installed in bearing walls or partitions, black steel pipe, ASTM
                            A 53, Schedule 20 shall be used. Sleeve shall provide 1 inch clearance
                            between the duct and the sleeve or 1 inch clearance between the
                            insulation and the sleeve for insulated ducts.
            2.      Framed Prepared Openings
                    a.      Openings shall have 1 inch clearance between the duct and the opening
                            or 1 inch clearance between the insulation and the opening for insulated
                            ducts.
            3.      Closure Collars
                    a.      Collars shall be fabricated of galvanized sheet metal not less than 4
                            inches wide, unless otherwise indicated, and shall be installed on
                            exposed ducts on each side of walls or floors where sleeves or prepared
                            openings are provided. Collars shall be installed tight against surfaces.
                            Collars shall fit snugly around the duct or insulation. Sharp edges of the
                            collar around insulated duct shall be ground smooth to preclude tearing
                            or puncturing the insulation covering or vapor barrier. Collars for round
                            ducts 15 inches in diameter or less shall be fabricated from 20 gauge
                            galvanized steel. Collars for round ducts larger than 15 inches and
                            square, and rectangular ducts shall be fabricated from 18 gauge
                            galvanized steel. Collars shall be installed with fasteners on maximum 6
                            inch centers, except that not less than 4 fasteners shall be used.


                                              HVAC
                                           23 00 00 - 26
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                          DECEMBER 17, 2012

      H.    Acoustic Duct Liner
            1.      Provide acoustic duct lining of the type and as specified in the INSULATION
                    SECTION of these specifications.            Duct sizes shown are clear internal
                    dimensions, increase duct sizes to compensate for lining thickness. See
                    insulation table on drawing for scope of acoustic duct lining. Factory fabricated
                    double-wall internally insulated duct with perforated panel may be used in place of
                    lining.
            2.      Ductwork Contractor shall coordinate with insulation Contractor and indicate
                    (label) all locations where sheet metal nosing or other lining erosion protection
                    has bridged the thermal barrier on ductwork supplying cool air (below 60 F) in
                    concealed or unconditioned spaces. Since this bridges the insulation, these
                    locations require exterior insulation to prevent possible condensation.


2.5   DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES

      A.    Units shall be factory-fabricated of steel, corrosion-resistant steel, or aluminum (as
            scheduled) and shall distribute the specified quantity of air evenly over space intended
            without causing noticeable drafts, air movement faster than 50 fpm in occupied zone, or
            dead spots anywhere in the conditioned area. Outlets for diffusion, spread, throw, and
            noise level shall be as required for specified performance. Performance shall be certified
            according to ADC 1062:GRD. Inlets and outlets shall be sound rated and certified
            according to ADC 1062:GRD. Sound power level shall be as indicated (where level is not
            indicated, maximum level shall be NC30). Diffusers and registers shall be provided with
            volume damper with accessible operator, unless otherwise indicated; or if standard with
            the manufacturer, an automatically controlled device will be acceptable. Volume dampers
            shall be opposed blade type for all diffusers and registers, except linear slot diffusers.
            Linear slot diffusers shall be provided with round or elliptical balancing dampers. Where
            the inlet and outlet openings are located less than 7 feet above the floor, they shall be
            protected by a grille or screen according to NFPA 90A. Acceptable manufacturer’s:
            Anemostat, Kreuger, Metalaire, Nailor, Price, Titus, or Tuttle and Bailey.

      B.    Diffusers: Diffuser types shall be as indicated. Ceiling mounted units shall be furnished
            with anti-smudge devices, unless the diffuser unit minimizes ceiling smudging through
            design features. Diffusers shall be provided with air deflectors of the type indicated. Air
            handling troffers or combination light and ceiling diffusers shall conform to the
            requirements of UL-03 for the interchangeable use as cooled or heated air supply
            diffusers or return air units. Ceiling mounted units shall be installed with rims tight against
            ceiling. Sponge rubber gaskets shall be provided between ceiling and surface mounted
            diffusers for air leakage control. Suitable trim shall be provided for flush mounted
            diffusers. Duct collar connecting the duct to diffuser shall be airtight and shall not
            interfere with volume controller. Return or exhaust units shall be similar to supply
            diffusers.

      C.    Registers and Grilles: Units shall be four-way directional-control type, except that return
            and exhaust registers may be fixed horizontal or vertical louver type similar in appearance
            to the supply register face. Registers shall be provided with sponge-rubber gasket
            between flanges and wall or ceiling. Wall supply registers shall be installed at least 6
            inches below the ceiling unless otherwise indicated. Return and exhaust registers shall
            be located 6 inches above the floor unless otherwise indicated. Four-way directional
            control may be achieved by a grille face which can be rotated in 4 positions or by
            adjustment of horizontal and vertical vanes. Grilles shall be as specified for registers,
            without volume control damper.


2.6   FAN POWERED TERMINAL UNITS (SERIES)

                                              HVAC
                                           23 00 00 - 27
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                         DECEMBER 17, 2012

      A.    Units shall be as manufactured by: Krueger, Metal-Aire, Nailor, Price, Titus, Trane, or
            approved equal.

      B.    The entire terminal unit shall be designed and built as a single unit. Unit shall be provided
            with a primary variable air volume damper that controls the primary air flow in response to
            a temperature sensor, and an integral induced air inlet attenuator section. Space
            limitations shall be reviewed by the installer to ensure all units will fit into the available
            space. Controls shall be as shown on drawings and specified in controls specification.

      C.    Unit casing shall be a minimum 20 gauge galvanized steel and fully lined with minimum
            1/2" thick, hospital grade closed cell foam insulation. The insulation shall comply with
            UL-181 for erosion and NFPA-90A for fire resistivity and smoke developed.

      D.    Unit casing shall have bottom access door which shall allow removal of fan and servicing
            of unit without disturbing duct connections.

      E.    Unit casing shall have round duct collar for the primary air connection and a rectangular
            discharge air connection. All control components and wiring, except the remote sensors
            and valves, shall be factory installed and mounted.

      F.    Provide a calibrated air volume sensing device, air valve or damper, actuator, and rewired
            accessories, such as relays, etc. (Application specific controller to be furnished by ATC).
            Units shall control minimum and maximum primary cfm of the unit as called for on the
            drawings with +/- 5% with variations in inlet pressures from ½ inch to 6 inch water gauge.
             Air flow (cfm) shall be factory set. A flow chart shall be attached to each unit.
            Thermostat signal shall reset the flow control device to control primary air cfm to match
            load requirements. Control of the fan powered unit shall be pressure independent.

      G.    Primary air damper leakage at shutoff shall not exceed 2.0% at 3" wg pressure. Damper
            shall be located inside the unit and shall be mechanically connected to the shaft. Provide
            self lubricating bearings for the shaft. Nylon is not acceptable as bearing material.

      H.    Terminal shall be capable of operation as described herein and on the drawings.

      I.    Fan blowers shall be constructed of steel with forward curved blades, dynamically
            balanced wheels and direct drive motor. Motors shall be of energy efficient design with
            integral thermal overload protection, permanently lubricated sleeve type bearings, ECM
            type and shall be designed for use with fan speed controller. Provide anti-backward
            rotation device. Provide torsion flex suspension and install isolation between motor and
            blower assembly.

      J.    Provide a manual speed control system which shall allow continuously adjustable fan
            speed from maximum to minimum. Speed control shall be electronic and shall be
            matched to operate with the motor. Speed control shall incorporate a minimum voltage
            stop to insure motor cannot operate in a stall mode. Three speed switches which are not
            continuously adjustable are not acceptable.

      K.    Units shall incorporate a single point electrical and control connections for the entire unit
            [without mounted disconnect]. Provide any required control voltage transformers. All
            electrical components shall be UL listed and installed in accordance with the National
            Electric Code. All line voltage electrical components shall be mounted in a NEMA 1
            enclosure. The entire assembly shall be UL listed.

      L.    Provide 1” thick MERV-3 throw away filters on the return air inlet assemblies. Provide 1
            set of spare filters for all units. Install spare filters after start-up and balancing.


                                              HVAC
                                           23 00 00 - 28
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                          DECEMBER 17, 2012

      M.    Provide either factory installed return air sound attenuators or the field mounted sound
            diverter per detail HC003.

      N.    Electric Resistance Heaters: Electric resistance heaters shall be of the duct-mounting
            type consisting of a nickel-chromium resistor mounted on refractory material and a steel
            or aluminum frame for attachment to ductwork. Electric duct heater shall meet the
            requirement of Underwriters Laboratories and NFPA 70 and shall be provided with a built-
            in or surface-mounted high-limit thermostat. Electric duct heaters shall be interlocked
            electrically so that heaters cannot be energized unless the fan is running.


2.7   ELECTRIC CABINET HEATERS

      A.    Provide UL 1025 listed electric cabinet unit heater with wattage, voltage, phase, number
            of steps, watts (Btu/hr) as indicated on drawings. Provide control-circuit terminals and
            single source of power supply. Heaters 5 KW and larger shall be 3-phase, with load
            balanced on each of the three phases. Limit leaving air temperature to 140 degrees F
            with entering air of 60 degrees F.

      B.    Enclosure shall be as required by UL 1025.

      C.    Heating Elements: Nickel chromium heating wire element, free from expansion noise and
            60 Hz hum. Embed element in magnesium-oxide insulating refractory. Seal element in
            high-mass steel or corrosion-resisting metallic sheath with fins. Enclose element ends in
            terminal box. Provide not more than six fins per inch. Limit fin surface temperature 550
            degrees F at any point during normal operation.

      D.    Controls: Include limit controls for overheat protection of heaters.

      E.    Wiring: Completely factory-prewired to terminal strips, ready to receive branch circuit and
            control connections for 140 degrees F copper wiring.

      F.    Thermostat: Provide tamper resistant integral thermostat, adjustable without requiring
            removal of heater components. Thermostat operating range shall be approximately 50
            degrees F to a maximum of 75 degrees F with operating differential of 3 degrees F or
            less.

      G.    Disconnect Means: Provide factory-installed safety disconnect switch in the housing or in
            an auxiliary matching control section with "off" position marking on the face plate. Motors
            shall have integral thermal overload protection.


2.8   INSULATION

      A.    Scope: Provide all labor, equipment, materials and accessories, and perform all
            operations required, for the correct installation of insulation on the following systems and
            all other necessary items connected into the systems subject to condensation, loss of
            heat, or personnel protection (above 120 degrees F):
            1.       Piping insulation (other than pre-insulated underground piping), jackets and
                     accessories (including all valves and fittings with easily removable sections for
                     maintenance of strainers, balance valves, and unions).
            2.       Equipment and flue gas breeching insulation, and covering (including easily
                     removable sections for maintenance).
            3.       Ductwork insulation, jackets, and lining (including all fittings).
            4.       Fire wrap insulation where indicated or required to maintain fire separation.


                                              HVAC
                                           23 00 00 - 29
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                         DECEMBER 17, 2012

      B.    Environmental Requirements: Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by
            manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and insulation cements.

      C.    Quality Assurance: Insulation materials must be asbestos free, UL listed, and
            manufactured at facilities certified and registered to conform to ISO 9000 Quality
            Standard. All insulating products and jackets shall carry a 25/50-flame spread/smoke
            developed rating as tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.

      D.    Workmanship: All insulation shall be installed by a licensed applicator and applied in
            accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. All work shall comply with all
            applicable federal, state, and local codes including, but not limited to, OSHA. All work
            shall conform to industry and trade accepted standards for commercial and industrial
            insulations. Verify that piping, heat trace, and ductwork has been tested (including
            applicable pressure/leakage tests) before applying insulation materials. Surfaces to be
            insulated shall be cleaned free of dirt, scale, moisture, oil and grease. No vapor barrier
            leaks or insulation voids will be accepted. Continue insulation vapor barrier through
            penetrations except where prohibited by code. All fire rated walls and penetrations shall
            be sealed with fire stopping. Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
            Neatly finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. For all systems
            requiring a vapor barrier seal all terminations including fittings, wall penetrations, and
            supports with vapor barrier mastic such as Foster 30-35 or equal. In addition, in brine or
            chilled water pipe systems vapor seal pipe terminations every four pipe sections, using
            Foster 30-35 or equal. Bevel and seal ends of insulation at equipment, flanges, and
            unions. Where insulation is used over stainless surfaces, the material shall be chlorine
            free.

      E.    Delivery and Storage of Materials
            1.      Deliver all materials to the job site and protect the insulation against dirt, water,
                    chemical and mechanical damage before, during and after installation. Do not
                    install damaged insulation and remove it from the job site.
            2.      Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives coatings etc. to the site in
                    factory-fabricated containers with the manufacturer’s stamp or label affixed
                    showing fire hazard ratings of the products, name of manufacturer and brand.
            3.      Installed insulation that has not been weatherproofed shall be protected from
                    inclement weather by an approved waterproof sheeting installed by the
                    Contractor. Any water-damaged insulation shall be removed and replaced by the
                    Contractor at no additional cost.

      F.    Manufacturers: Johns Manville (JM), CertainTeed, Owens-Corning, 3M, Armstrong,
            Knauf, or approved equal. Note that the listed manufacturers may not be able to supply
            all the insulation products required for the project. Unless otherwise noted, JM insulation
            products are listed to provide the minimum standards required for each type of insulation.

      G.    Ductwork Insulation – General
            1.     Provide duct and plenum insulation of type(s) indicated in these specifications.
                   Minimum total R-value for each location and duct system shall be as shown on
                   the drawings.
            2.     R-values shown on drawings may be obtained by adding the individual R-values
                   of both the lining (where shown or used) and external duct insulation.

      H.    Ductwork Insulation (External Wrap) - General
            1.     Where duct is internally lined (coordinate locations with Ductwork Contractor),
                   exterior insulation is not required unless called for in the specifications, shown on
                   the plans, or where required to provide the minimum R-value shown on the
                   drawings.



                                              HVAC
                                           23 00 00 - 30
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                      DECEMBER 17, 2012

            2.      Where ducts are insulated or lined, flexible connectors to equipment shall be
                    insulated. Duct flanges and standing seams shall be insulated the same as the
                    duct.
            3.      Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of easily removable
                    insulation. Removable sections shall also be provided (and labeled) at all duct
                    test holes.
            4.      The underside of duct work 24" or greater shall be secured with mechanical
                    fasteners and speed clips spaced approximately 18" on center. The protruding
                    ends of the fasteners should be cut off flush after the speed clips are installed,
                    and then, when required, sealed with UL listed tapes or vapor-retardant adhesive.
            5.      For exterior rectangular ductwork, insulation shall be a minimum of 2 inches thick
                    and shall be covered with a self-adhering double layer (aluminum facing with
                    high-density polyethylene base) waterproofing membrane, such as MFM Flex-
                    Clad 400, Venture Tape Corp. VentureClad 1577CW, or equal. Color shall be as
                    selected by Architect (aluminum, white, gray, or tan). Provide tapered insulation
                    for outdoor ductwork to insure no pooling of water on top of duct. Outdoor round
                    ductwork shall be weatherproofed with the same material, or, alternatively, in the
                    same manner as outdoor piping with a minimum of 2 inch thick insulation.

      I.    Ductwork Insulation (External Wrap): Provide the following insulation types for the listed
            ductwork.
            1.     Insulate concealed ducts and plenums, depending upon the required R-value
                   (see drawings) for the duct and its location, with 0.75 lb/cu ft dense fiber glass
                   insulation equal to JM Microlite or Owens Corning SOFTR Type 75. Insulation
                   shall meet ASTM C 1290 Type III, flexible blanket with a maximum K-factor of
                   0.30 at 75°F mean temperature. Operating service temperature range shall be
                   40°F to 250°F. Vapor barrier jacket shall be FSK aluminum foil reinforced with
                   fiberglass scrim laminated to UL rated kraft paper with maximum permeance of
                   0.02 perms. Jacket shall be secured with UL listed pressure sensitive tape
                   and/or outward clinched expanded staples (with minimum 2 inch lapped vapor
                   barrier) and vapor barrier mastic as needed. K-factors and R-values listed
                   assume 25% compression during installation. The minimum R-value based on
                   thickness, shall be:
                               Thickness                R-value
                               1 ½”                     4.2
                               2”                       5.6
                               3”                       8.3
            2.     Insulate exposed ducts and plenums, depending upon the required R-value (see
                   drawings) for the duct and its location, with 3.0 lb/cu ft dense fiber glass
                   insulation. Insulation shall be equal to JM Type 814 Spin-Glas or Owens Corning
                   Type 703 meeting ASTM C 612, Type 1A & IB; rigid board with a maximum K-
                   factor of 0.23 at 75°F mean temperature. Operating service temperature range
                   shall be 0°F to 450°F. Vapor barrier jacket shall be AP type (kraft paper bonded
                   to aluminum foil, reinforced with fiber glass yarn) with maximum permeance of
                   0.02 perms. Jacket shall be secured with UL listed pressure sensitive tape
                   and/or outward clinched expanded staples (with minimum 2 inch lapped vapor
                   barrier) and vapor barrier mastic as needed. The minimum R-value, based on
                   thickness, shall be:
                               Thickness                R-value
                               1 ½”                     6.5
                               2”                       8.6

      J.    Acoustic Duct Liner – General:
            1.      Liner minimum thickness shall be minimum 1” (unless otherwise noted on
                    drawings) or as required to provide the minimum R-values shown on the
                    drawings. Ductwork dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for


                                             HVAC
                                          23 00 00 - 31
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                         DECEMBER 17, 2012

                      air flow. Increase duct size to allow for insulation thickness. Do not use liner on
                      kitchen, pool, shower, fume exhaust, hospital operating rooms (and similar areas)
                      or other wet, grease ladened, or potentially hazardous exhaust systems.
            2.        Liner shall have rugged coating system installed on the air side of liner and all
                      edges. Coating shall be cleanable by dry cleaning methods without damage.
                      Maximum pressure drop of lined ductwork shall not exceed 5% more than unlined
                      ductwork of the same inside dimensions. Liner shall be roll type or board type as
                      required for duct size and to meet specified requirements.
            3.        Liner shall be rated up to 5,000 ft/min.
            4.        For all medium and high pressure ductwork (all ductwork above 2” pressure
                      class) install a metal nosing at all liner leading edges. A metal nosing shall also
                      be installed at all fan discharges and at any point where lined duct is preceded by
                      unlined duct. Provide exterior insulation over metal nosings (these bridge the
                      insulation and can lead to condensation) on all cooling supply ducts (with below
                      60°F air) in concealed or unconditioned spaces.
            5.        Repair liner surface penetrations with manufacturer’s approved adhesive meeting
                      ASTM C 919.

      K.    Duct Liner: Provide flexible duct liner equal to JM Permacote Linacoustic (rectangular
            duct) or Spiracoustic (round duct) meeting ASTM C 1071 with K-factor shall be 0.25 (1”
            thick) at 75°F mean temperature when tested per ASTM C 518. Liner shall have an air
            surface coated with acrylic coating treated with EPA register anti-microbial agent proven
            to resist microbial growth as determine by ASTM G 21 and G 22. Noise reduction
            coefficient shall be minimum 0.65 for 1” thick liner or higher for thicker liner based on type
            “A” mounting and tested in accordance to ASTM C 423. Install liner with full coverage
            adhesive meeting ASTM C 919 or JM SuperSeal. Secure liner with galvanized steel pins,
            welded or mechanically fastened. Weld pins shall not mar the exterior finish or surface of
            the duct. Liner shall be attached to pin with pressed on washer. Mechanical liner
            fasteners shall be spaced as indicated by SMACNA, NAIMA, or manufacturer. Pin length
            should be such as to limit compression of liner. All exposed edges of the liner must be
            factory or field coated. The minimum R-value, based on thickness, shall be:
                      Thickness                          R-value
                      1”                                 4.0
                      1 ½”                               6.0
                      2                                  8.0


2.9   AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS

      A.    Automatic Temperature Controls shall be as specified herein.

      B.    All bidders must be building automation Contractors in the business of installing direct
            digital control building automation systems for a minimum of 3 years. Bidder must have
            an office within 50 miles of the job site staffed with factory-trained engineers capable of
            trouble shooting and maintaining all systems for the project. All bidders must be
            authorized distributors or branch offices of the manufacturers specified.

      C.    All bidders must have a trained staff of application engineers, who have been certified by
            the manufacturer in the configuration, programming and service of the automation
            system. The Installer shall have successfully completed the Control Systems
            Manufacturer’s classes on the control system he is to install. The Installer shall present
            for review the certification of completed training, including the hours of instruction and
            course outlines upon request. All systems design and programming shall be done by the
            bidder’s staff and not subcontracted to a third party.

      D.    General

                                               HVAC
                                            23 00 00 - 32
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                         DECEMBER 17, 2012

            1.       The general scope of this work will involve the relocation of thermostats,
                     furnishing of new thermostats, furnishing of new Fan Box controllers suitable for
                     use with a fan powered VAV box with electric heat and connection to the existing
                     base building Siemens Building Management System (BMS), and programming
                     of all controllers to communicate with associated zone thermostats and the base
                     building BMS.
            2.       The scope will also include the additional point mapping of the new
                     zones/controllers/thermostats back at the BMS front end, along with any/all
                     required graphics associated with any/all relocated and/or new equipment within
                     the scope of the renovation project.
            3.       This controls Contractor will be under the Mechanical Contractor's overall scope
                     of work and will be responsible for any/all coordination required to furnish any/all
                     controls components for all relocated and new fan boxes, such that controllers
                     are compatible with the Fan Boxes purchased by the mechanical and the Base
                     Building Siemens BMS.
            4.       Relocated electric unit heaters are part of the scope of this project and shall be
                     tested for control and tie-into Base building BMS upon relocation. Tie-in of these
                     ceiling-mounted unit heaters to the BMS shall be in accordance with the level of
                     existing tie-in before relocation.
            5.       This Contractor shall install all controls components for any/all relocated or new
                     equipment within the scope of the project, including all low voltage wiring between
                     components. In addition, the Contractor shall be responsible for a completed and
                     functioning system in the area within the scope of work for the project with all
                     relocated and new equipment tied into and tested within the Base Building
                     Siemens BMS--coordinate with mechanical Contractor, general Contractor, and
                     Base Building controls Contractor as required.
            6.       This Contractor shall warranty his work, both parts and labor, against any/all
                     defects or breakdowns in accordance with his signed agreement as a Contractor
                     and for at least a minimum for 18 months from the time of acknowledged (by the
                     Owner) substantial completion.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1   DEMOLITION

      A.    The existing facility will continue to operate during all phases of the demolition work and
            subsequent construction. No interruption of the systems will be permitted without prior
            approval of the Owner’s Representative.

      B.    Submit proposed methods and sequence of operations for the selective demolition work
            to the Owner’s Representative for review prior to the start of the work.

      C.    Perform all demolition while ensuring minimum interference with adjacent occupied areas.

      D.    Where sections of a system are to be removed and the system serves other areas of the
            building that are outside the scope of the work, perform the following:
            1.       Coordinate the temporary shutdown of the system with the Owner's
                     representative.
            2.       Install supports in the remaining active sections of the system as required by the
                     removal of nearby supports associated with the demolition.
            3.       Isolate the system.
            4.       Cap the remaining system section, leaving the remainder of the system active.




                                              HVAC
                                           23 00 00 - 33
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                      DECEMBER 17, 2012

      E.    Provide temporary shoring or bracing during the demolition work to prevent movement,
            settlement, or collapse of the system or adjacent systems due to the work.

      F.    Promptly repair any damage caused to adjacent facilities or areas that are designated to
            remain at no additional cost to the Owner.

      G.    Equipment:
            1.    Coordinate with the Contractor to provide disconnection prior to equipment
                  removal.
            2.    Remove equipment by unfastening at the supports or attachments. Then remove
                  the attachments from the building, leaving no component of the original
                  installation.
            3.    The Owner shall choose to take possession of the equipment or not. If the
                  Owner chooses not to take possession of the equipment, the Contractor shall
                  remove the equipment and dispose of the equipment in accordance with
                  Paragraph H specified below.
            4.    Exercise care with equipment that is to be relocated or turned over to the Owner,
                  examine the equipment before removal in the presence of the Owner's
                  representative to determine its condition. Make a record of any marks, etc. by a
                  photograph or videotape acknowledged by the Owner's representative.
            5.    Install relocated equipment to ensure no damage.
            6.    Equipment to be turned over to the Owner: Deliver to an on-site location
                  designated by the Owner, and obtain acknowledgment of receipt in good
                  condition.

      H.    All equipment, etc., not turned over to the Owner shall be put into the General
            Contractor's dumpsters; become the property of the General Contractor, and shall be
            removed from the site by the General Contractor. For equipment containing any
            refrigerant, it shall be reclaimed for recycling. Any hazardous materials such as mercury
            from thermometers or thermostats; ethylene glycol; or lead shall be properly disposed of,
            following EPA guidelines.


3.2   GENERAL

      A.    Install all items specified under PART 2 - PRODUCTS, according to the manufacturer's
            requirements and best quality recommendations, shop drawings, the details as shown on
            the Drawings and as specified in this specification section.

      B.    Install all work so that parts requiring inspection, replacements, maintenance and repair
            shall be readily accessible. Minor deviations from the Drawings may be made to
            accomplish this, but any substantial change shall not be made without prior written
            approval from the Owner.

      C.    Equipment bases mounted on concrete slabs and pads, or mounted on stands, gratings,
            platforms, or other, shall not be set in any manner, except on the finished and permanent
            support.

      D.    Support of equipment on studs or other means, and the placing or building of the
            supporting slab, pad, pier, stand, grating, or other "to the equipment", is prohibited.

      E.    All welding done under this section shall be performed by experienced welders in a neat
            and workmanlike manner. All welding done on structural steel under this Section shall be
            performed only by persons who are currently qualified in accordance with ANSI Code
            B31.9 for Pressure Piping and certified by the AWS, ASME or an approved independent


                                            HVAC
                                         23 00 00 - 34
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                          DECEMBER 17, 2012

            testing laboratory, and each such welder shall present certificate attesting his/her
            qualifications to the Architect's representative whenever requested to do so on the job.

      F.    All necessary precautions shall be taken to prevent fire or damage occurring as the result
            of welding operations.

      G.    Care shall be taken when working on the roof. Protect the roof from damage.


3.3   DUCT CLEANING

      A.    All existing supply and return diffusers, grilles, registers, dampers and ductwork shall be
            cleaned internally and externally. Prior to cleaning, all airflows shall be measured and
            recorded by a firm certified for testing and balancing by either Associated Air Balance
            Council (AABC) or National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB). Submit 4 copies of
            a balancing report for existing conditions.
            1.       A member of the National Air Duct Cleaners Association (NADCA) shall perform
                     all cleaning.
            2.       The Contractor shall cut access ports in the existing ducts and install removable
                     plates/clean-out doors after ducts are cleaned. Provide clean-out doors, sixteen
                     feet on center, for all existing horizontally installed ductwork and at each length of
                     straight duct run less than 16 feet. Provide access door constructed of same
                     material as ductwork served. Access doors shall consist of a double wall inside
                     door with high-density insulation. The inside door shall have a neoprene gasket
                     permanently bonded to it. Provide conical springs over the bolts between the
                     inner and outer door to facilitate opening. The outer door shall be constructed of
                     one gauge heavier material than that of the duct itself. Provide two hand-
                     operated knobs with threaded brass inserts for opening and tight sealing of the
                     door. Clean-out doors shall be a minimum of 10” x 6” for ducts less than 10”
                     wide; 12” x 8” for ducts less than 16” wide; and 18” x 14” for all ducts greater than
                     16” wide.
            3.       Remove, clean and reinstall clean registers, vents, grilles and diffusers. The
                     Contractor shall wash, dry, and use hepa-filter vacuums to completely clean all
                     existing ducts, dampers, diffusers, grilles and registers.
            4.       The Contractor shall include removal, storage, and reinstallation of ceiling tiles.
                     The Contractor shall replace any tiles damaged during the work.
            5.       After cleaning, all airflows shall be balanced (by the same balancing Contractor)
                     to the existing readings that were taken before the cleaning began (+/- 5%) or
                     where shown the new air flows listed on the drawings. Submit 4 copies of a final
                     balancing report to the Owner.


3.4   IDENTIFICATION

      A.    General
            1.      All ductwork, equipment and panels furnished and/or installed under this Section
                    of the Specifications shall be marked for ease of identification.
            2.      Code 39 shall be the bar code format unless designated differently by the
                    Owner’s facility group. The Contractor shall create the required bar codes and
                    assign numbers based upon input from the owner’s facility group. The
                    Contractors shall create a database of all equipment, panels and valves for
                    owner’s review and approval.
            3.      Equipment, panel, and valve labels shall be 4” by 2½” and designed to withstand
                    temperatures of -22°F to +392°F. Labels are designed to be resistant to water,
                    acid/solvent, dirt and oil repellant. Labels shall be high tensile Graphiplast®
                    tearing strength as well as scratch resistant and affixed to equipment by cable

                                              HVAC
                                           23 00 00 - 35
                        GILLETTE STADIUM CLUB RENOVATION
RDK ENGINEERS 20120132.00                                                        DECEMBER 17, 2012

                    ties or adhesive clear pouch. Location of label shall be at unit control panel, next
                    to factory nameplate, lower right-hand corner of panel, and/or tie wrapped to
                    localize disconnect at unit. Installation instructions shall be provided with the
                    labels to assure durability (i.e., clean surface prior to adhering adhesive label,
                    leave cable ties loose on outside of equipment to allow freedom of movement due
                    to the elements, etc.) and with adhesive tags not secured when temperatures are
                    below 45°F ambient temperature. Outside equipment shall have two bar code
                    labels. One on the exterior and one inside the unit in a safe location.
            4.      Samples of stickers together with color schedules shall be submitted during the
                    submittal phase of this project.
            5.      Marking shall be done using self-adhering (screw or rivets for equipment) labels
                    applied to clean, smooth surfaces. All lettering shall have sharply contrasting
                    background for ease of identification. Colors shall be in accordance with ANSI
                    A13.1 Standards. Samples of stickers together with color schedules shall be
                    submitted for approval.

      B.    Ductwork
            1.     Ductwork marking shall be prominently mounted on all ductwork. Marking spacing
                   shall be every 20 feet, at all changes in direction and on both sides of wall
                   penetrations. For ductwork in sh